The books in the CLR are arranged by topic using Library of Congress classification system. Here are a few call number ranges to explore:
HV 1551 - 3024 People with disabilities Including blind, deaf, people with physical and mental disabilities.
For Subject searches using the Worldcat Discover, try:
To do Keyword searches, you can either use add terms or use phrases.
Searching for Signed Language Interpretation?
Test out Signed Language and Interpretation or Signed Language Interpretation as searches and see what you can find.
The Bachelor in Sign Language Interpretation (BSLI) is a 3-year program designed to equip students with the necessary linguistic skills and cultural knowledge to become professional sign language interpreters. Through its comprehensive curriculum in Filipino Sign Language (FSL) development, linguistics, history, interpreting theories and techniques, as well as mentoring opportunities, field assignments in various interpreting areas, and research, BSLI prepares its graduates to become not only language facilitators but also cultural ambassadors between Deaf and hearing communities.
This subject guide gathers in one place carefully evaluated and selected resources on Sign Language Interpretation available and accessible at the CLR and its subscribed databases. Books (both print and electronic) are categorized per course; while journals, magazines, online databases are recommended for the entire Sign Language Interpretation program. [Source]
QUICK LINKS
Contemporary Deaf Community Issues
Do you keep yourself abreast with what is going on around you, especially the community you will be working with? You should! In CONDFIS, you will be exposed to past and present issues confronting the Filipino Deaf community. Issues on education, employment, sign language learning and interpreting (interpreter’s rights vis-a-vis deaf rights / interpreter training), access to information, support services (including disability inclusive disaster risk reduction), national and international legislation, human rights, and access to the judicial and healthcare systems… the list goes on and on. It might seem overwhelming, but with you as an additional ally, even a drop of contribution can create a wave of positive change.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
Deaf gain : raising the stakes for human diversity by
Deaf people are usually regarded by the hearing world as having a lack, as missing a sense. Yet a definition of deaf people based on hearing loss obscures a wealth of ways in which societies have benefited from the significant contributions of deaf people. In this bold intervention into ongoing debates about disability and what it means to be human, experts from a variety of disciplines--neuroscience, linguistics, bioethics, history, cultural studies, education, public policy, art, and architecture--advance the concept of Deaf Gain and challenge assumptions about what is normal. Through their in-depth articulation of Deaf Gain, the editors and authors of this pathbreaking volume approach deafness as a distinct way of being in the world, one which opens up perceptions, perspectives, and insights that are less common to the majority of hearing persons. For example, deaf individuals tend to have unique capabilities in spatial and facial recognition, peripheral processing, and the detection of images. And users of sign language, which neuroscientists have shown to be biologically equivalent to speech, contribute toward a robust range of creative expression and understanding. By framing deafness in terms of its intellectual, creative, and cultural benefits, Deaf Gain recognizes physical and cognitive difference as a vital aspect of human diversity. Contributors: David Armstrong; Benjamin Bahan, Gallaudet U; Hansel Bauman, Gallaudet U; John D. Bonvillian, U of Virginia; Alison Bryan; Teresa Blankmeyer Burke, Gallaudet U; Cindee Calton; Debra Cole; Matthew Dye, U of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign; Steve Emery; Ofelia García, CUNY; Peter C. Hauser, Rochester Institute of Technology; Geo Kartheiser; Caroline Kobek Pezzarossi; Christopher Krentz, U of Virginia; Annelies Kusters; Irene W. Leigh, Gallaudet U; Elizabeth M. Lockwood, U of Arizona; Summer Loeffler; Mara Lúcia Massuti, Instituto Federal de Santa Catarina, Brazil; Donna A. Morere, Gallaudet U; Kati Morton; Ronice Müller de Quadros, U Federal de Santa Catarina, Brazil; Donna Jo Napoli, Swarthmore College; Jennifer Nelson, Gallaudet U; Laura-Ann Petitto, Gallaudet U; Suvi Pylvänen, Kymenlaakso U of Applied Sciences; Antti Raike, Aalto U; Päivi Rainò, U of Applied Sciences Humak; Katherine D. Rogers; Clara Sherley-Appel; Kristin Snoddon, U of Alberta; Karin Strobel, U Federal de Santa Catarina, Brazil; Hilary Sutherland; Rachel Sutton-Spence, U of Bristol, England; James Tabery, U of Utah; Jennifer Grinder Witteborg; Mark Zaurov.
Deaf Interpreters at Work by
Now, for the first time, a collection featuring 17 widely respected scholars depicts the everyday practices of deaf interpreters in their respective nations. Deaf Interpreters at Work: International Insights presents the history of Deaf translators and interpreters and details the development of testing and accreditation to raise their professional profiles. Other chapters delineate the cognitive processes of Deaf interpreting; Deaf-Deaf interpreter teams; Deaf and hearing team preparation; the use of Tactile American Sign Language by those interpreting for the Deaf-Blind community; and conference interpreting and interpreting teams. Along with volume coeditors Robert Adam, Christopher Stone, and Steven D. Collins, contributors include Markus Aro, Karen Bontempo, Juan Carlos Druetta, Senan Dunne, Eileen Forestal, Della Goswell, Juli af Klintberg, Patricia Levitzke-Gray, Jemina Napier, Brenda Nicodemus, Debra Russell, Stephanie Sforza, Marty Taylor, and Linda Warby. The scope of their research spans the world, including many unique facets of interpreting by deaf people in Argentina, Australia, Canada, England, Finland, Ireland, Sweden, and the United States, establishing this work as the standard in this burgeoning discipline.
Deaf world : a historical reader and primary sourcebook by
To many who hear, the deaf world is as foreign as a country never visited. Deaf World thus concerns itself less with the perspectives of the hearing and more with what Deaf people themselves think and do. Editor Lois Bragg asserts that English is for many signing people a second, infrequently used language and that Deaf culture is the socially transmitted pattern of behavior, values, beliefs, and expression of those who use American Sign Language. She has assembled an astonishing array of historical sources, political writings, and personal memoirs, from classic 19th-century manifestos to contemporary policy papers, on everything from eugenics to speech and lipreading, the right to work and marry, and the never-ending controversy over separation vs. social integration. At the heart of many of the selections lies the belief that Deaf Americans have long constituted an internal colony of sorts in the United States. While not attempting to speak for Deaf people en masse, this ambitious platform anthology places the Deaf on center stage, offering them an opportunity to represent the world--theirs as well as the hearing world--from a Deaf perspective. For Deaf readers, the book will be welcomed as a gift, both a companion to be savored and, as often, an opponent to be engaged and debated. And for the hearing, it serves as an unprecedented guide to a world and a culture so often overlooked. Comprising a judicious mix of published pieces and original essays solicited specifically for this volume, Deaf World marks a major contribution.
Discourse in Sign Languages by
In this volume, editor Cynthia B. Roy presents a stellar cast of cognitive linguists, sociolinguists, and discourse analysts to discover and demonstrate how sign language users make sense of what is going on within their social and cultural contexts in face-to-face interactions. In the first chapter, Paul Dudis presents an innovative perspective on depiction in discourse. Mary Thumann follows with her observations on constructed dialogue and constructed action. Jack Hoza delineates the discourse and politeness functions of hey and well in ASL as examples of discourse markers in the third chapter. Laurie Swabey investigates reference in ASL discourse in the fourth chapter. In Chapter 5, Christopher Stone offers insights on register related to genre in British Sign Language discourse, and Daniel Roush addresses in Chapter 6 the "conduit" metaphor in English and ASL. Jeffrey Davis completes this collection by mapping out the nature of discourse in Plains Indian Sign Language, a previously unstudied language. The major thread that ties together the work of these varying linguists is their common focus on the forms and functions of sign languages used by people in actual situations. They each provide new keys to answering how thoughts expressed in one setting with one term or one utterance may mean something totally different when expressed in a different setting with different participants and different purposes.
Filipino sign language : a compilation of signs from regions of the Philippines. by 
International sign : linguistic, usage, and status issues by
International Sign (IS) is widely used among deaf people and interpreters at international events, but what exactly is it, what are its linguistic features, where does its lexicon come from, and how is it used at interpreted events? This groundbreaking collection is the first volume to provide answers to these questions. Editors Rachel Rosenstock and Jemina Napier have assembled an international group of renowned linguists and interpreters to examine various aspects of International Sign. Their contributions are divided into three parts: International Sign as a Linguistic System; International Sign in Action--Interpreting, Translation, and Teaching; and International Sign Policy and Language Planning. The chapters cover a range of topics, including the morphosyntactic and discursive structures of interpreted IS, the interplay between conventional linguistic elements and nonconventional gestural elements in IS discourse, how deaf signers who use different signed languages establish communication, Deaf/hearing IS interpreting teams and how they sign depicting verbs, how best to teach foundation-level IS skills, strategies used by IS interpreters when interpreting from IS into English, and explorations of the best ways to prepare interpreters for international events. The work of the editors and contributors in this volume makes International Sign the most comprehensive, research-based analysis of a young but growing field in linguistics and interpretation.
An Introduction to Filipino Sign Language by 
Issues in Deaf Education by
The way in which education is provided for deaf children is changing, as are the demands made on teachers, both in special settings and in mainstream schools. This book offers a comprehensive account of recent research and current issues in educational policy, psychology, linguistics and audiology, as they relate to the education of the deaf and includes detailed information about further reading. It should be of interest to student teachers and teachers of the deaf, teachers in mainstream schools, academics working in the area of deafness and disability, audiologists and cochlear implant teams, parents of deaf children, and members of the deaf community.
Issues unresolved : new perspectives on language and deaf education by
Of the more than 400 studies presented at the 18th International Congress on Education of the Deaf, the 20 most incisive papers were selected, rewritten, and edited to construct the trenchant volume Issues Unresolved: New Perspectives on Language and Deaf Education. The resulting book provocatively challenges the invested reader in four critical areas of deaf education worldwide. Part 1, Communication: Signed and Spoken Languages, addresses matters that range from considering critical periods for language acquisition, researched by Susan D. Fischer, to assessing the impact of immigration policies on the ethnic composition of Australia's deaf community, intriguing work by Jan Branson and Don Miller. Part 2, Communication: Accessibility to Speech, continues the debate with works on the perception of speech by deaf and hard of hearing children, contributed by Arthur Boothroyd, and automatic speech recognition and its applications, delineated by Harry Levitt. Educational issues are brought to the forefront in Part 3 in such engrossing studies as Lea Lurie and Alex Kozulin's discourse on the application of an instrumental-enrichment cognitive intervention program with deaf immigrant children from Ethiopia. Stephen Powers offers another perspective in this section with his retrospective evaluation of a distance education training course for teachers of the deaf. Part 4, Psychological and Social Adjustment reviews progress in this area, with Anne de Klerk's exposition on the Rotterdam Deaf Awareness Program, and Corinne J. Lewkowitz and Lynn S. Liben's research on the development of deaf and hearing children's sex-role attitudes and self-endorsements. These and the many other contributions by renowned international scholars in the field make Issues Unresolved a compelling new standard for all involved in deaf education.
Many Ways to Be Deaf by
Twenty-four international scholars contribute articles on linguistic and cultural diversity in deaf communities worldwide, including Japan, Viet Nam, Nigeria, Ireland, Brazil, and the United States. The wide- ranging topics include the evolution of British fingerspelling beginning in the 17th centur
Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies, Language, and Education by
In Plato's cratylus, which dates to 360 B.C., Socrates alludes to the use of signs by deaf people. In his Natural History, completed in 79 A.D., Pliny the Elder alludes to Quintus Pedius, the deaf son of a Roman consul, who had to seek permission from Caesar Augustus to pursue his training asan artist. During the Renaissance, scores of deaf people achieved fame throughout Europe, and by the middle of the 17th century the talents and communication systems of deaf people were being studied by a variety of noted scientists and philosophers. However, the role of deaf people in society hasalways been hotly debated: could they be educated? Should they be educated? If so, how? How does Deaf culture exist within larger communities? What do advances in the technology and the genetics of hearing loss portend for Deaf communities?In this landmark volume, a wide range of international experts present a comprehensive and accessible overview of the diverse field of deaf studies, language, and education. Pairing practical information with detailed analyses of what works, why, and for whom, and banishing the paternalism onceintrinsic to the field, the handbook consists of specially commissioned essays on topics such as language and language development, hearing and speech perception, education, literacy, cognition, and the complex cultural, social, and psychological issues associated with individuals who are deaf orhard of hearing. Through careful planning, collaboration, and editing, the various topics are interwoven in a manner that allows the reader to understand the current status of research in the field and recognize the opportunities and challenges that lie ahead, providing the most comprehensivereference resource on deaf issues.Written to be accessible to students and practitioners as well as researchers, The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies, Language, and Education is a uniquely ambitious work that will alter both theoretical and applied landscapes. It surveys a field that has grown dramatically over the past 40 years,since sign languages were first recognized by scientists to be true languages. From work on the linguistics of sign language and parent-child interactions to analyses of school placement and the mapping of brain function in deaf individuals, research across a wide range of disciplines has greatlyexpanded not just our knowledge of deafness and the deaf, but of the very origins of language, social interaction, and thinking. Bringing together historical information, research, and strategies for teaching and service provision, Marc Marschark and Patricia Elizabeth Spencer have given us what iscertain to become the benchmark reference in the field.
The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies in Language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. The contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholarsand practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of effortsto identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself;and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and DeafEducation, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
Psychological Development of Deaf Children by
This book is the first comprehensive examination of the psychological development of deaf children. Because the majority of young deaf children (especially those with non-signing parents) are reared in language-impoverished environments, their social and cognitive development may differ markedly from hearing children. The author here details those potential differences, giving special attention to how the psychological development of deaf children is affected by their interpersonal communication with parents, peers, and teachers. This careful and balanced consideration of existing evidence and research provides a new psychological perspective on deaf children and deafness while debunking a number of popular notions about the hearing impaired. In light of recent findings concerning manual communication, parent-child interactions, and intellectual and academic assessments of hearing-impaired children, the author has forged an integrated understanding of social, language, and cognitive development as they are affected by childhood deafness. Empirical evaluations of deaf children's intellectual and academic abilities are stressed throughout. The Psychological Development of Deaf Children will be of great interest to students, teachers, and researchers studying deafness and how it relates to speech and hearing; developmental, social, and cognitive psychology; social work; and medicine.
Service learning in interpreter education : strategies for extending student involvement in the deaf community by
Institutions of higher learning around the nation have embraced the concept of student civic engagement as part of their curricula, a movement that has spurred administrators in various fields to initiate programs as part of their disciplines. In response, sign language interpreting educators are attempting to devise service-learning programs aimed at Deaf communities. Except for a smattering of journal articles, however, they have had no primary guide for fashioning these programs. Sherry Shaw remedies this in her new book Service Learning in Interpreter Education: Strategies for Extending Student Involvement in the Deaf Community. Shaw begins by outlining how to extend student involvement beyond the field experience of an internship or practicum and suggests how to overcome student resistance to a course that seems atypical. She introduces the educational strategy behind service-learning, explaining it as a tool for re-centering the Deaf community in interpreter education. She then provides the framework for a service-learning course syllabus, including establishing Deaf community partnerships and how to conduct student assessments. Service Learning in Interpreter Education concludes with first-person accounts from students and community members who recount their personal and professional experiences with service learning. With this thorough guide, interpreter education programs can develop stand-alone courses or modules within existing coursework.
Contemporary Deaf Community Issues
Do you keep yourself abreast with what is going on around you, especially the community you will be working with? You should! In CONDFIS, you will be exposed to past and present issues confronting the Filipino Deaf community. Issues on education, employment, sign language learning and interpreting (interpreter’s rights vis-a-vis deaf rights / interpreter training), access to information, support services (including disability inclusive disaster risk reduction), national and international legislation, human rights, and access to the judicial and healthcare systems… the list goes on and on. It might seem overwhelming, but with you as an additional ally, even a drop of contribution can create a wave of positive change.
Deaf epistemologies, identity, and learning : a comparative perspective by
Goedele A.M. De Clerck presents cross-cultural comparative research that examines and documents where deaf flourishing occurs and how it can be advanced. She spotlights collective and dynamic resources of knowledge and learning; the coexistence of lived differences; social, linguistic, cultural, and psychological capital; and human potential and creativity. Deaf Epistemologies, Identity, and Learning argues for an inclusive approach to the intrinsic human diversity in society, education, and scholarship, and shows how emotions of hope, frustration, and humiliation contribute to the construction of identity and community. De Clerck also considers global to local dynamics in deaf identity, deaf culture, deaf education, and deaf empowerment. She presents empirical research through case studies of the emancipation processes for deaf people in Flanders (a region of Belgium), the United States (specifically, at Gallaudet University in Washington, DC), and the West African nation of Cameroon. These three settings illuminate different phases of emancipation in different contexts, and the research findings are integrated into a broader literature review and subjected to theoretical reflection. De Clerck's anthropology of deaf flourishing draws from her critical application of the empowerment paradigm in settings of daily life, research, leadership, and community work, as she explores identity and well-being through an interdisciplinary lens. This work is centered around practices of signed storytelling and posits learning as the primary access and pathway to culture, identity, values, and change. Change driven by the learning process is considered an awakening--and through this awakening, the deaf community can gain hope, empowerment, and full citizenship. In this way, deaf people are allowed to shape their histories, and the result is the elevation of all aspects of deaf lives around the world.
Deaf in the USSR : marginality, community, and Soviet identity, 1917-1991 by
In Deaf in the USSR, Claire L. Shaw asks what it meant to be deaf in a culture that was founded on a radically utopian, socialist view of human perfectibility. Shaw reveals how fundamental contradictions inherent in the Soviet revolutionary project were negotiated--both individually and collectively-- by a vibrant and independent community of deaf people who engaged in complex ways with Soviet ideology. Deaf in the USSR engages with a wide range of sources from both deaf and hearing perspectives--archival sources, films and literature, personal memoirs, and journalism--to build a multilayered history of deafness. This book will appeal to scholars of Soviet history and disability studies as well as those in the international deaf community who are interested in their collective heritage. Deaf in the USSR will also enjoy a broad readership among those who are interested in deafness and disability as a key to more inclusive understandings of being human and of language, society, politics, and power.
Early intervention for deaf and hard-of-hearing infants, toddlers and their families : interdisciplinary perspectives by
A "must-have" for every professional studying or working with the families of deaf and hard-of-hearing infants and toddlers, Dr. Marilyn Sass-Lehrer provides readers with the evidence-based knowledge needed to implement interdisciplinary and collaborative early interventional programming for professionals and students.Featuring a collaborative team of expert contributors across a variety of backgrounds and disciplines - including educators, audiologists, speech-language pathologists, and health care providers - Early Intervention for Deaf and Hard-of-Hearing Infants, Toddlers, and Their Families presents students and specialists with the fundamental knowledge they need to effectively design and deliver care to this population.
English as a Foreign Language for Deaf and Hard-of-Hearing Persons : Challenges and Strategies by
Deaf and hard-of-hearing students form a specific group of foreign language learners. They need to use foreign languages just like their hearing peers if they want to enjoy the same benefits of globalization and technical advancements of today, yet they cannot take part in the same foreign language education. As sign language users, lip-readers or persons relying on hearing aids or cochlear implants in their everyday communication, they need special support in learning a foreign language. This book has been written by teachers and researchers involved in teaching English as a foreign language.
Information Structure in Sign Languages by
This book presents a first comprehensive overview of existing research on information structure in sign languages. Furthermore, it is combined with novel in-depth studies of Russian Sign Language and Sign Language of the Netherlands. The book discusses how topic, focus, and contrast are marked in the visual modality and what implications this has for theoretical and typological study of information structure. Such issues as syntactic and prosodic markers of information structure and their interactions, relations between different notions of information structure, and grammaticalization of markers of information structure are highlighted. Empirical studies of the two sign languages also showcase different methodologies that are used in such research and discuss their advantages and disadvantages. The book contains a general introduction to the field of information structure and thus can be used by linguists new to the field.
International sign : linguistic, usage, and status issues by
International Sign (IS) is widely used among deaf people and interpreters at international events, but what exactly is it, what are its linguistic features, where does its lexicon come from, and how is it used at interpreted events? This groundbreaking collection is the first volume to provide answers to these questions. Editors Rachel Rosenstock and Jemina Napier have assembled an international group of renowned linguists and interpreters to examine various aspects of International Sign. Their contributions are divided into three parts: International Sign as a Linguistic System; International Sign in Action--Interpreting, Translation, and Teaching; and International Sign Policy and Language Planning. The chapters cover a range of topics, including the morphosyntactic and discursive structures of interpreted IS, the interplay between conventional linguistic elements and nonconventional gestural elements in IS discourse, how deaf signers who use different signed languages establish communication, Deaf/hearing IS interpreting teams and how they sign depicting verbs, how best to teach foundation-level IS skills, strategies used by IS interpreters when interpreting from IS into English, and explorations of the best ways to prepare interpreters for international events. The work of the editors and contributors in this volume makes International Sign the most comprehensive, research-based analysis of a young but growing field in linguistics and interpretation.
The legal recognition of sign languages : advocacy and outcomes around the world by
This book presents the first comprehensive overview of national laws recognising sign languages, their impacts and the advocacy campaigns which led to their creation. Each chapter is grounded in a collaborative writing approach between deaf and hearing scholars and activists involved in legislative campaigns.
The Oxford handbook of deaf studies in language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the 21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. Contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholars and practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of efforts to identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself; and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and Deaf Education, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
The Sage deaf studies encyclopedia by
The time has come for a new in-depth encyclopedic collection of entries defining the current state of Deaf Studies at an international level using critical and intersectional lenses encompassing the field. The emergence of Deaf Studies programs at colleges and universities and the broadened knowledge of social sciences (including but not limited to Deaf History, Deaf Culture, Signed Languages, Deaf Bilingual Education, Deaf Art, and more) have served to expand the activities of research, teaching, analysis, and curriculum development. The field has experienced a major shift due to increasing awareness of Deaf Studies research since the mid-1960s. The field has been further influenced by the Deaf community’s movement, resistance, activism and politics worldwide, as well as the impact of technological advances, such as in communications, with cell phones, computers, and other devices. This new Encyclopedia shifts focus away from the medical model that has view deaf individuals as needing to be remedied in order to correct so-called hearing and speaking deficiencies for the sole purpose of assimilation into mainstream society. The members of deaf communities are part of a distinct cultural and linguistic group with a unique, vibrant community, and way of being. As precedence, The SAGE Deaf Studies Encyclopedia carves out a new and critical perspective that breathes meaning into organic deaf experiences through a new critical theory lens. Such a focus is novel in that it comes from deaf and hearing allies of the communities where historically, institutions of medicine and disability ride roughshod over authentic experiences.
Sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities : envisioning the future for deaf students by
Increased interaction between sign language communities and the mainstream societies in which they function is creating the potential for greater equality of opportunity for people who are deaf and hard of hearing. In this volume, renowned scholars and policy makers from around the world present innovative and groundbreaking perspectives on the relationships among sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities. The contributors to this volume offer creative and open-minded explorations of the construct of sustainability that are informed by their work with deaf individuals, deaf communities, families of deaf children, and other stakeholders. Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities describes sustainability in relation to: · identity, resilience, and well-being · participatory citizenship · historical perspectives on sign language use in educational contexts · sign language learning and teaching · human rights and inclusive education · literate thought and literacy · the sign language factor and the development of sign language communities in sub-Saharan Africa · sign language legislation These changing communities' understanding of what is required to become sustainable--in areas such as full participation and citizenship in society, economic well-being, access to quality education, and cultural and linguistic identity--is also taking new forms. This work contributes to the paradigm shifts regarding deaf emancipation and deaf education taking place around the world.
Sign Language An International Handbook by
Sign language linguists show here that all questions relevant to the linguistic investigation of spoken languages can be asked about sign languages. Conversely, questions that sign language linguists consider - even if spoken language researchers have not asked them yet - should also be asked of spoken languages. The HSK handbook Sign Language aims to provide a concise and comprehensive overview of the state of the art in sign language linguistics. It includes 44 chapters, written by leading researchers in the field, that address issues in language typology, sign language grammar, psycholinguistics, neurolinguistics, sociolinguistics, and language documentation and transcription. Crucially, all topics are presented in a way that makes them accessible to linguists who are not familiar with sign language linguistics.
Understanding international sign : a sociolinguistic study by
In Understanding International Sign, Lori A. Whynot examines International Sign (IS) to determine the extent to which signers from different countries comprehend it. She focuses exclusively on expository lecture IS used in conference settings and presents the first empirical research on its effectiveness for communicating rich information to diverse audience members. International Sign is regarded as a lingua franca that is employed by deaf people to communicate with other deaf people who do not share the same conventionalized local sign language. Contrary to widely-held belief, sign languages are not composed of a unified system of universal gestures--rather, they are distinctly different, and most are mutually unintelligible from one another. The phenomenon of IS has emerged through increased global interaction during recent decades, driven by a rise in the number of international conferences and events and by new technologies that allow for enhanced global communication. IS is gaining acceptance for providing communicative access to conference audience members who do not have knowledge of the designated conference languages, and it is being recruited for use due to the prohibitive expense of providing interpreting services in numerous different sign languages. However, it is not known how well audience members understand IS, and it may actually limit equal access to the interpreted information. Whynot compares IS to native sign languages and analyzes the distribution of linguistic elements in the IS lexicon and their combined effect on comprehension. Her findings indicate that audiences with diverse sign languages understand much less of IS presentations than has been previously assumed. Whynot's research has crucial implications for expository IS usage, training, and interpreting, and it sheds light on the strengths and weaknesses inherent in cross-linguistic, signed contact settings.
As a sign language interpreter, one of the pinnacle of our career is to be able to interpret at the United Nations. Of course, it will take more than just your interpreting skills to be a qualified interpreter for the UN, but CONFTRP will give you the necessary tools in order to start pursing that path. With mock conferences as practice opportunities mentored by experienced interpreters in this field, you will get to feel what it is like to stand inside that box or on that platform for the whole world to see.
The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies - an Introduction to Its Theories by
The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies is the first introductory course book that explores the theoretical foundations used in sign language interpreting studies. Authors Roy, Brunson, and Stone examine the disciplines whose theoretical frameworks and methodologies have influenced the academic study of interpreting. With this text, explanations for how interpreted events occur, how interpreted products are created, and how the interpreting process is studied can be framed within a variety of theoretical perspectives, forming a foundation for the emerging transdiscipline of Interpreting Studies. ​​ As sign language interpreting has emerged and evolved in the last 20 years as an academic field of study, the scope of learning has broadened to include fields beyond the language and culture of deaf people. This text surveys six disciplines that have informed the study of sign language interpreting: history, translation, linguistics, sociology, social psychology, and cognitive psychology, along with their major ideas, principal scholars, and ways of viewing human interaction. Each chapter includes clear learning goals, definitions, discussion questions, and images to aid understanding. The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies is required reading for upper-level undergraduate or first-year graduate students in interpreting, Deaf studies, and sign language programs.
Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters by
Picking up where Innovative Practices in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters left off, this new collection presents the best new interpreter teaching techniques proven in action by the eminent contributors assembled here. In the first chapter, Dennis Cokely discusses revising curricula in the new century based upon experiences at Northeastern University. Jeffrey E. Davis delineates how to teach observation techniques to interpreters, while Elizabeth Winston and Christine Monikowski suggest how discourse mapping can be considered the Global Positioning System of translation. In other chapters, Laurie Swabey proposes ways to handle the challenge of referring expressions for interpreting students, and Melanie Metzger describes how to learn and recognize what interpreters do in interaction. Jemina Napier contributes information on training interpreting students to identify omission potential. Robert G. Lee explains how to make the interpreting process come alive in the classroom. Mieke Van Herreweghe discusses turn-taking and turn-yielding in meetings with Deaf and hearing participants in her contribution. Anna-Lena Nilsson defines "false friends," or how contextually incorrect use of facial expressions with certain signs in Swedish Sign Language can be detrimental influences on interpreters. The final chapter by Kyra Pollitt and Claire Haddon recommends retraining interpreters in the art of telephone interpreting, completing Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters as the new authoritative volume in this vital communication profession.
Consecutive interpreting from ASL : teacher's guide by 
Conversations with Interpreter Educators by
Sign language interpreter education is a relatively young field that is moving toward more theory-based and research-oriented approaches. The concept of sharing research, which is strongly encouraged in this academic community, inspired Christine Monikowski to develop a volume that collects and distills the best teaching practices of leading academics in the interpreting field. In Conversations with Interpreter Educators, Monikowski assembles a group of 17 professors in the field of sign language interpretation. Through individual interviews conducted via Skype, Monikowski engages them in informal conversations about their teaching experiences and the professional publications that have influenced their teaching philosophies. She guides each conversation by asking these experts to share a scholarly publication that they assign to their students. They discuss the merits of the text and its role in the classroom, which serves to highlight the varying goals each professor sets for students. The complexity of the interpreting task, self-reflection, critical thinking, linguistics, backchannel feedback, and cultural understanding are a sampling of topics explored in these exchanges. Engaging and accessible, Monikowski's conversations offer evidence-based practices that will inform and inspire her fellow educators.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
Deaf studies today! : beyond talk : conference proceeding by
Beyond Talk: Deaf Studies Today! 2012 Conference Proceedings contains original submissions by presenters at the conference held on the campus of Utah Valley University. This volume is the fifth in the series of proceedings from the Deaf Studies Today! conference. It features papers by the following authors: Patti Durr Christine B Brown Andrew Byrne, Ph.D. Merrilee Gietz Heather Clark Hannah M. Dostal, Ph.D. and Lisa M. Bowers Brian Malzkuhn Joseph Hill, Ph.D. Lewis Kummer, Ed.D. and Cynthia Plue, Ed.D. J. Freeman King, Ed.D. Rebecca Furland Nigel Howard and Liz Scully David H. Smith, Ph.D. and Bryan Berrett, Ed.D Sheryl B. Cooper, Ph.D. and Jody H. Cripps, Ph.D. Tabitha Jacques Mark Zaurov Carol Sanderson-MacNicholl Noppawan Chainarong, Vee Yee Chong, and Jennifer Witteborg
Innovative Practices for Teaching Sign Language Interpreters by
Researchers now understand interpreting as an active process between two languages and cultures, with social interaction, sociolinguistics, and discourse analysis as more appropriate theoretical frameworks. Roy's penetrating new book acts upon these new insights by presenting six dynamic teaching practices to help interpreters achieve the highest level of skill. Elizabeth Winston and Christine Monikowski begin by explaining discourse mapping to enable students to develop a mental picture of a message's meaning and the relationships of context, form, and content. Kyra Pollitt discusses critical discourse analysis, to reveal some of the cultural influences that shape a speaker's language use. Melanie Metzger describes preparing role-plays so that students learn to effectively switch back and forth between languages, manage features such as overlap, and make relevant contributions to interaction, such as indicating the source of an utterance. Jeffrey Davis illustrates the translation skills that form the basis,for teaching consecutive and simultaneous interpreting to help students understand the intended meaning of the source message, and also the manner in which listeners understand it. Rico Peterson demonstrates the use of recall protocols, which can be used to teach metacognitive skills and to assess the student's sign language comprehension. Finally, Janice Humphrey details the use of graduation portfolios, a valuable assessment tool used by the faculty to determine a student's level of competency. These imaginative techniques in Innovative Practices promise gains in sign language interpreting that will benefit teachers, students, and clients alike.
In our hands : educating healthcare interpreters by
Deaf Americans have identified healthcare as the most difficult setting in which to obtain a qualified interpreter. Yet, relatively little attention has been given to developing evidence-based resources and a standardized body of knowledge to educate healthcare interpreters. In Our Hands: Educating Healthcare Interpreters addresses these concerns by delineating the best practices for preparing interpreters to facilitate full access for deaf people in healthcare settings. The first section of this volume begins with developing domains and competencies toward a teaching methodology for medical and mental health interpreters. The next chapter describes a discourse approach that relies on analyzing actual transcripts and recordings to train healthcare interpreters. Other chapters feature a model mental health interpreter training program in Alabama; using a Demand-Control Schema for experiential learning; the risk of vicarious trauma to interpreters; online educational opportunities; and interpreting for deaf health care professionals. The second section offers four perspectives on education, including healthcare literacy of the clients; the education of Deaf interpreters; the development of standards for spoken-language healthcare interpreters; and the perspectives of healthcare interpreter educators in Europe. The range and depth of In Our Hands takes significant strides in presenting educational opportunities that can enhance the critical services provided by healthcare interpreters to deaf clients.
International Sign by
International Sign (IS) is widely used among deaf people and interpreters at international events, but what exactly is it, what are its linguistic features, where does its lexicon come from, and how is it used at interpreted events? This groundbreaking collection is the first volume to provide answers to these questions. Editors Rachel Rosenstock and Jemina Napier have assembled an international group of renowned linguists and interpreters to examine various aspects of International Sign. Their contributions are divided into three parts: International Sign as a Linguistic System; International Sign in Action--Interpreting, Translation, and Teaching; and International Sign Policy and Language Planning. The chapters cover a range of topics, including the morphosyntactic and discursive structures of interpreted IS, the interplay between conventional linguistic elements and nonconventional gestural elements in IS discourse, how deaf signers who use different signed languages establish communication, Deaf/hearing IS interpreting teams and how they sign depicting verbs, how best to teach foundation-level IS skills, strategies used by IS interpreters when interpreting from IS into English, and explorations of the best ways to prepare interpreters for international events. The work of the editors and contributors in this volume makes International Sign the most comprehensive, research-based analysis of a young but growing field in linguistics and interpretation.
Interpretation skills : English to American sign language by 
The Next Generation of Research in Interpreter Education - Pursuing Evidence-Based Practices by
This collection contributes to an emerging body of research in sign language interpreter education, a field in which research on teaching practices has been rare. The Next Generation of Research in Interpreter Education investigates learning experiences and teaching practices that provide the evidence necessary to inform and advance instructional approaches. The five studies included in this volume examine role-play activities in the classroom, the experiences of Deaf students in interpreting programs, reducing anxiety in the interpreting process, mentoring, and self-assessment. The contributors are a nascent group of educators who represent a growing mastery of contemporary standards in interpreter education. Their chapters share a common theme: the experiences and learning environments of students as they progress toward entry into the interpreting profession.
Note-Taking for Consecutive Interpreting by
Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting: A Short Course is the essential step-by-step guide to the skill of note-taking. The system, made up of a range of tried and tested techniques, is simple to learn, consistent and efficient. Each chapter presents a technique, with examples, tasks and exercises. This second edition has been extensively revised throughout, including: an updated chapter on speech analysis new chapters on comparisons and links revised example speeches and notes a summary of other authors' note-taking guidelines for comparison and reference (Part III). The author uses English throughout - explaining how and where to locate material for other languages - thus providing a sound base for all those working in the areas of conference interpreting and consecutive interpreting in any language combination. This user-friendly guide is a particularly valuable resource for student interpreters, professionals looking to refresh their skills, and interpreter trainers looking for innovative ways of approaching note-taking.
Reading between the signs : intercultural communication for sign language interpreters by
Provides a new perspective on American Deaf culture, a unique culture that is not widely understood. With collaboration of three distinguished Deaf consultants, Mindess explores the implications of cultural differences at the intersection of the Deaf and hearing worlds. Used in interpreter training programs worldwide.
Signed Language Interpreting in the 21st Century by
This text provides interpreting students with a broad knowledge base that encompasses the latest research, addresses current trends and perspectives of the Deaf community, and promotes critical thinking and open dialogue about the working conditions, ethics, boundaries, and competencies needed by a highly qualified interpreter in various settings. This volume expands the resources available to aspiring interpreters, including Deaf interpreters, and incorporates the voices of renowned experts on topics relevant to today's practitioners. Each chapter provides students with objectives, keywords, and discussion questions. The chapters convey clear information about topics that include credentialing, disposition and aptitude for becoming an interpreter, interpreting for people who are DeafBlind, and working within specialty settings, such as legal and healthcare. A key resource for interpreter certification test preparation, this text follows the interpreter's ethical, practical, and professional development through a career of lifelong learning and service.
Sign Language Interpreting by
Sign Language Interpreting: Exploring Its Art and Science is a comprehensive exploration of the practice and research relating to sign language interpreting. A pleasant conversational style of writing is used to present the problems, the issues, and the options in this field as they are known today. The reader is taken on a journey from the early days of interpreting, to the professionalization of interpreters, to an examination of past and present models of interpreting. The business and ethical aspects of interpreting are discussed while focusing on current practice.
Sign Language Interpreting and Interpreter Education by
More the 1.46 million people in the United States have hearing losses in sufficient severity to be considered deaf; another 21 million people have other hearing impairments. For many deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals, sign language and voice interpreting is essential to their participationin educational programs and their access to public and private services. However, there is less than half the number of interpreters needed to meet the demand, interpreting quality is often variable, and there is a considerable lack of knowledge of factors that contribute to successfulinterpreting. Perhaps it is not surprising, then, that a study by the National Association of the Deaf (NAD) found that 70% of the deaf individuals are dissatisfied with interpreting quality. Because recent legislation in the United States and elsewhere has mandated access to educational,employment, and other contexts for deaf individuals and others with hearing disabilities, there is an increasing need for quality sign language interpreting. It is in education, however, that the need is most pressing, particularly because more than 75% of deaf students now attend regular schools(rather than schools for the deaf), where teachers and classmates are unable to sign for themselves. In the more than 100 interpreter training programs in the U.S. alone, there are a variety of educational models, but little empirical information on how to evaluate them or determine theirappropriateness in different interpreting and interpreter education-covering what we know, what we do not know, and what we should know. Several volumes have covered interpreting and interpreter education, there are even some published dissertations that have included a single research study, and afew books have attempted to offer methods for professional interpreters or interpreter educators with nods to existing research. This is the first volume that synthesizes existing work and provides a coherent picture of the field as a whole, including evaluation of the extent to which currentpractices are supported by validating research. It will be the first comprehensive source, suitable as both a reference book and a textbook for interpreter training programs and a variety of courses on bilingual education, psycholinguistics and translation, and cross-linguistic studies.
Sign Language Interpreting in the Workplace by
The last forty years have seen a dramatic change in the nature of work, with deaf people increasingly moving into white collar or office-based professions. The rise of deaf professionals has led to employment opportunities for signed language interpreters across a variety of workplace settings, creating a unique set of challenges that require specialized strategies. Aspects such as social interaction between employees, the unwritten patterns and rules of workplace behavior, hierarchical structures, and the changing dynamics of deaf employee/interpreter relationships place constraints upon the interpreter's role and interpreting performance. Jules Dickinson's examination of interpreted workplace interactions is based on the only detailed, empirical study of this setting to date. Using practitioner responses and transcripts of real-life interpreted workplace interactions, Dickinson's findings demonstrate the complexity of the interpreter's role and responsibilities. The book concentrates on the ways in which signed language interpreters affect the interaction between deaf and hearing employees in team meetings by focusing on humor, small talk, and the collaborative floor. Signed Language Interpreting in the Workplace demonstrates that deaf employees require highly skilled professionals to enable them to integrate into the workplace on a level equal with their hearing peers. It also provides actionable insights for interpreters in workplace settings that will be a valuable resource for interpreting students, practitioners, interpreter trainers, and researchers.
So you want to be an interpreter? : an introduction to sign language interpreting by
For beginners to advanced interpreters, this book provides a comprehensive overview of the work of sign language interpreters. It is geared toward individuals seeking information about this field of work, students studying to become interpreters and individuals who want to better understand the role and work of sign language interpreters. Introductory chapters include an overview of communication and message construction, the influence of culture on communication, the challenge of working in multicultural communities including the deaf community, deaf-hearing cultural differences and the power inherent in the role of an interpreter. Further topics include an introduction to terminology specific to the field of sign language interpretation, philosophical approaches to the work of sign language interpreters, the mental process of interpreting between two languages, as well as the h history and professionalization of both spoken language and sign language interpreters. Other chapters detail the specific linguistic challenges of mediating communication between American Sign language (ASL) and English, ethical guidelines for professional practioners, an overview of various settings where interpreters work, and a review of basic business practices. Supplemental resources can be found in a guided study on a 5-CD set (So You Want To Be An Interpreter: Study Guide - ISBN: 0-9640-367-9-7. To order, contact distributor 1-800-767-4461 or www.signenhancers.com.
As a sign language interpreter, one of the pinnacle of our career is to be able to interpret at the United Nations. Of course, it will take more than just your interpreting skills to be a qualified interpreter for the UN, but CONFTRP will give you the necessary tools in order to start pursing that path. With mock conferences as practice opportunities mentored by experienced interpreters in this field, you will get to feel what it is like to stand inside that box or on that platform for the whole world to see.
International sign : linguistic, usage, and status issues by
International Sign (IS) is widely used among deaf people and interpreters at international events, but what exactly is it, what are its linguistic features, where does its lexicon come from, and how is it used at interpreted events? This groundbreaking collection is the first volume to provide answers to these questions. Editors Rachel Rosenstock and Jemina Napier have assembled an international group of renowned linguists and interpreters to examine various aspects of International Sign. Their contributions are divided into three parts: International Sign as a Linguistic System; International Sign in Action--Interpreting, Translation, and Teaching; and International Sign Policy and Language Planning. The chapters cover a range of topics, including the morphosyntactic and discursive structures of interpreted IS, the interplay between conventional linguistic elements and nonconventional gestural elements in IS discourse, how deaf signers who use different signed languages establish communication, Deaf/hearing IS interpreting teams and how they sign depicting verbs, how best to teach foundation-level IS skills, strategies used by IS interpreters when interpreting from IS into English, and explorations of the best ways to prepare interpreters for international events. The work of the editors and contributors in this volume makes International Sign the most comprehensive, research-based analysis of a young but growing field in linguistics and interpretation.
Interpreting in multilingual, multicultural contexts by
The Seventh Volume in the Studies in Interpretation Series Nineteen international authorities contribute their research and findings to Interpreting in Multilingual, Multicultural Contexts, probing the complex nature of interpreted interaction involving Deaf and hearing people of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds. They also analyze the contextualized interpreting practices and considerations that transpire from this diversity. In three parts, this trenchant collection shows how Deaf and hearing people use language in fluctuating ways to connect with each other. The chapters in Part 1 -- Expanding Frontiers: ASL-English-Spanish Interpreting in the United States -- consider sign language interpreting at the border between Baja California and the state; trilingual video relay service (VRS) interpreting; and constructing a valid, reliable trilingual interpreting testing instrument. Part 2 -- Mediating Indigenous Voices -- explores how to construct roles in a Maori Deaf trilingual context; considerations for interpreting signed languages of American Indian Communities; and interpreting for indigenous Deaf clients in far north Queensland, Australia. In the final section, Part 3 -- Globalizing: Interpreting in International Contexts -- protocols for interpreting in multilingual international conferences are analyzed. The last chapter describes the arduousness of sign language interpreting in multilingual, international settings. It acts as a fitting conclusion to this examination of the challenges to the sociolinguistic repertoire of interpreters mediating across multiplex combinations of culture and language.
Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research by
This volume brings together the best research presented at the first International Symposium on Signed Language Interpreting and Translation Research. Editors Brenda Nicodemus and Keith Cagle have gathered an international group of contributors who are recognized leaders in signed language interpreter education and research. The ten papers in Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research cover a range of topics, including the need for Deaf perspectives in interpretation research, discourse strategies and techniques that are unique to video relay call settings, the benefits of using sociology as a lens for examining sign language interpreting work, translating university entrance exams from written Portuguese into Libras (Brazilian Sign Language), the linguistic choices interpreters make when interpreting ASL figurative language into English, the nature of designated interpreting, and grammatical ambiguity in trilingual VRS interpreting. The research findings and insights contained here will be invaluable to scholars, students, and practitioners.
Sign Language An International Handbook by
Sign language linguists show here that all questions relevant to the linguistic investigation of spoken languages can be asked about sign languages. Conversely, questions that sign language linguists consider - even if spoken language researchers have not asked them yet - should also be asked of spoken languages. The HSK handbook Sign Language aims to provide a concise and comprehensive overview of the state of the art in sign language linguistics. It includes 44 chapters, written by leading researchers in the field, that address issues in language typology, sign language grammar, psycholinguistics, neurolinguistics, sociolinguistics, and language documentation and transcription. Crucially, all topics are presented in a way that makes them accessible to linguists who are not familiar with sign language linguistics.
The Sign Language Interpreting Studies Reader by
In Sign Language Interpreting (SLI) there is a great need for a volume devoted to classic and seminal articles and essays dedicated to this specific domain of language interpreting. Students, educators, and practitioners will benefit from having access to a collection of historical and influential articles that contributed to the progress of the global SLI profession. In SLI there is a long history of outstanding research and scholarship, much of which is now out of print, or was published in obscure journals, or featured in publications that are no longer in print. These readings are significant to the progression of SLI as an academic discipline and a profession. As the years have gone by, many of these readings have been lost to students, educators, and practitioners because they are difficult to locate or unavailable, or because this audience simply does not know they exist. This volume brings together the seminal texts in our field that document the philosophical, evidence-based and analytical progression of SLI work.
Understanding international sign : a sociolinguistic study by
In Understanding International Sign, Lori A. Whynot examines International Sign (IS) to determine the extent to which signers from different countries comprehend it. She focuses exclusively on expository lecture IS used in conference settings and presents the first empirical research on its effectiveness for communicating rich information to diverse audience members. International Sign is regarded as a lingua franca that is employed by deaf people to communicate with other deaf people who do not share the same conventionalized local sign language. Contrary to widely-held belief, sign languages are not composed of a unified system of universal gestures--rather, they are distinctly different, and most are mutually unintelligible from one another. The phenomenon of IS has emerged through increased global interaction during recent decades, driven by a rise in the number of international conferences and events and by new technologies that allow for enhanced global communication. IS is gaining acceptance for providing communicative access to conference audience members who do not have knowledge of the designated conference languages, and it is being recruited for use due to the prohibitive expense of providing interpreting services in numerous different sign languages. However, it is not known how well audience members understand IS, and it may actually limit equal access to the interpreted information. Whynot compares IS to native sign languages and analyzes the distribution of linguistic elements in the IS lexicon and their combined effect on comprehension. Her findings indicate that audiences with diverse sign languages understand much less of IS presentations than has been previously assumed. Whynot's research has crucial implications for expository IS usage, training, and interpreting, and it sheds light on the strengths and weaknesses inherent in cross-linguistic, signed contact settings.
Video Relay Service Interpreters : Intricacies of Sign Language Access. by
"Signed language interpreting is about access," states author Jeremy L. Brunson at the outset of his new book, and no manifestation of access for deaf people can be considered more complex than video relay services (VRS). In Video Relay Service Interpreters: Intricacies of Sign Language Access, Brunson delineates exactly how complicated the service can be, first by analyzing sign language interpreting as a profession and its relation to both hearing and deaf clients. He describes how sign language interpreters function in Deaf communities and how regulatory processes imposed by VRS providers can constrain communication access based on each individual's needs. Brunson proceeds by acclimating readers to the environment of VRS and how the layout of the typical physical plant alters the practice of interpreting. The focus then falls upon intended VRS users, providing insights into their expectations. Interpreters shared their experiences with Brunson in 21 formal interviews and discussions. Many remarked on the differences between face-to-face interpreting and VRS training, which often runs counter to the concept of relating informally with deaf clients as a way to expand access. This thoughtful, sociological study outlines texts that originate between users and interpreters and how they can be used to develop VRS access. Video Relay Service Interpreters concludes with the implications of VRS interpreting for sign language interpreting in general and suggests where scholarship will lead in the future.
CONTERP focuses on the development of consecutive interpreting skills in various settings. As a student in this course, you will learn and practice when to use this technique and how to go through the process by effectively analyzing, processing and storing information, all the while being able to efficiently manage the transition between the source and target languages.
Consecutive interpreting from ASL : teacher's guide by Consecutive interpreting from English : teacher's guide by
Designed to help interpreters-in-training refine their skills in interpreting from spoken English to American Sign Language in live situations. Provides study questions and worksheets.
Deaf Interpreters at Work by
Now, for the first time, a collection featuring 17 widely respected scholars depicts the everyday practices of deaf interpreters in their respective nations. Deaf Interpreters at Work: International Insights presents the history of Deaf translators and interpreters and details the development of testing and accreditation to raise their professional profiles. Other chapters delineate the cognitive processes of Deaf interpreting; Deaf-Deaf interpreter teams; Deaf and hearing team preparation; the use of Tactile American Sign Language by those interpreting for the Deaf-Blind community; and conference interpreting and interpreting teams. Along with volume coeditors Robert Adam, Christopher Stone, and Steven D. Collins, contributors include Markus Aro, Karen Bontempo, Juan Carlos Druetta, Senan Dunne, Eileen Forestal, Della Goswell, Juli af Klintberg, Patricia Levitzke-Gray, Jemina Napier, Brenda Nicodemus, Debra Russell, Stephanie Sforza, Marty Taylor, and Linda Warby. The scope of their research spans the world, including many unique facets of interpreting by deaf people in Argentina, Australia, Canada, England, Finland, Ireland, Sweden, and the United States, establishing this work as the standard in this burgeoning discipline.
Deaf Professionals and Designated Interpreters by
Deaf Professionals and Designated Interpreters: A New Paradigm defines a new model that depends upon strong partnerships between the growing number of deaf experts and their interpreters. Editors Peter C. Hauser, Karen L. Finch, and Angela B. Hauser have called upon more than a score of widely respected researchers to discuss the new dynamics of interpreting for deaf professionals. Divided into two parts, this volume first delineates Designated Interpreting, in which interpreters team with deaf professionals to advance a shared point of view. Chapters in this section include the linguistics of the partnership (Look-Pause-Nod); the varying attitudes and behavior of deaf professionals and their interpreters; interaction in the work-related social setting to ensure equal participation; interpreting as affected by conversational style and gender factors; academic and educational interpreting for deaf academics; and adjusting company policies with professional interpreter guidelines. Part II, Deaf Professional and Designated Interpreter Partnerships, offers relevant examples of interpreting for deaf professionals in real estate, contemporary art, medicine, business administration, education, mental health, film-making, and information technology. These anecdotal chapters demonstrate the critical complexity of the relationships between professionals and interpreters, a revolutionary transformation that will be appreciated by interpreter preparation programs, instructors, interpreters, and their clients alike.
Interpreting in legal contexts : consecutive and simultaneous interpretation by
"This study emphasizes that interpreters must know how and when to use simultaneous and consecutive interpreting in the courtroom in order to fully include Deaf people in the judicial process. Interviews with lawyers, judges, expert witnesses and Deaf people themselves give an insight into the needs and misconceptions of all parties involved in the legal process. It points out how interpreter education programs and professional associations must evaluate their programs to insure that interpreters are receiving the appropriate training in the use of consecutive and simultaneous interpreting necessary for legal environments"--Amazon.
The Interpreting Studies Reader by
The Interpreting Studies Reader is the definitive guide to the growing area of interpreting studies. Spanning the multiple and diverse approaches to interpreting, it draws together the key articles in the field and puts them in their thematic and social contexts. This is a comprehensive overview of interpreting studies and the new directions the subject is taking in the twenty-first century. Features include: *an introductory essay reviewing the evolution of interpreting studies *organization into seven thematic sections, each with an editors' introduction *a comprehensive bibliography and suggestions for further reading. The Interpreting Studies Reader is an invaluable introduction and reference for students, researchers and practitioners.
Note-Taking for Consecutive Interpreting by
Note-taking for Consecutive Interpreting: A Short Course is the essential step-by-step guide to the skill of note-taking. The system, made up of a range of tried and tested techniques, is simple to learn, consistent and efficient. Each chapter presents a technique, with examples, tasks and exercises. This second edition has been extensively revised throughout, including: an updated chapter on speech analysis new chapters on comparisons and links revised example speeches and notes a summary of other authors' note-taking guidelines for comparison and reference (Part III). The author uses English throughout - explaining how and where to locate material for other languages - thus providing a sound base for all those working in the areas of conference interpreting and consecutive interpreting in any language combination. This user-friendly guide is a particularly valuable resource for student interpreters, professionals looking to refresh their skills, and interpreter trainers looking for innovative ways of approaching note-taking.
Simultaneous interpreting from English : teacher's guide by
"Carefully constructed exercises use videotaped English source materials with corresponding printed English transcripts to bring sharp focus to different components of the interpreting process"--Back cover.
CONTERP focuses on the development of consecutive interpreting skills in various settings. As a student in this course, you will learn and practice when to use this technique and how to go through the process by effectively analyzing, processing and storing information, all the while being able to efficiently manage the transition between the source and target languages.
Conference Interpreting by
Conference Interpreting: A Student's Practice Book brings together a comprehensive compilation of tried and tested practical exercises which hone the sub-skills that make up successful conference interpreting Unique in its exclusively practical focus, Conference Interpreting: A Student's Practice Book, serves as a reference for students and teachers seeking to solve specific interpreting-related difficulties. By breaking down the necessary skills and linking these to the most relevant and effective exercises students can target their areas of weakness and work more efficiently towards greater interpreting competence. Split into four parts, this Practice Book includes a detailed introduction offering general principles for effective practice drawn from the author's own extensive experience as an interpreter and interpreter-trainer. The second 'language' section covers language enhancement at this very high level, an area that standard language courses and textbooks are unable to deal with. The last two sections cover the key sub-skills needed to effectively handle the two components of conference interpreting; simultaneous and consecutive interpreting. Conference Interpreting: A Student's Practice Book is non language-specific and as such is an essential resource for all interpreting students regardless of their language combination.
Handbook of Translation Studies by
As a meaningful manifestation of how institutionalized the discipline has become, the new Handbook of Translation Studies is most welcome. It joins the other signs of maturation such as Summer Schools, the development of academic curricula, historical surveys, journals, book series, textbooks, terminologies, bibliographies and encyclopedias. The HTS aims at disseminating knowledge about translation and interpreting and providing easy access to a large range of topics, traditions, and methods to a relatively broad audience: not only students who often adamantly prefer such user-friendliness, researchers and lecturers in Translation Studies, Translation & Interpreting professionals; but also scholars and experts from other disciplines (among which linguistics, sociology, history, psychology). In addition the HTS addresses any of those with a professional or personal interest in the problems of translation, interpreting, localization, editing, etc., such as communication specialists, journalists, literary critics, editors, public servants, business managers, (intercultural) organization specialists, media specialists, marketing professionals. The usability, accessibility and flexibility of the HTS depend on the commitment of people who agree that Translation Studies does matter. All users are therefore invited to share their feedback. Any questions, remarks and suggestions for improvement can be sent to the editorial team at hts@kuleuven.be. Next to the book edition (in printed and electronic, PDF, format), HTS is also available as an online resource, connected with the Translation Studies Bibliography. For access to the Handbook of Translation Studies Online, please visit http://www.benjamins.com/online/hts/ .
The Impact of Pronominal Form on Interpretation by
The interplay between the interpretation of pronouns (e.g. bound/referential) and their form (e.g. null/overt) is still ill-understood. This volume has a cross-linguistic orientation with in-depth investigations of more than 10 different languages. It unites researchers from the linguistic subfields of syntax, semantics, and psycholinguistics, thus furthering dialogue with the goal of shedding new light on the form/interpretation connection.
International perspectives on sign language interpreter education by
The Fourth Volume in the Interpreter Education Series From the moment the World Association of Sign Language Interpreters (WASLI) was established in 2005, an overwhelming wave of requests from around the world arrived seeking information and resources for educating and training interpreters. This new collection provides those answers with an international overview on interpreter training from experts in Austria, Australia, Brazil, Canada, Fiji, Finland, Ireland, Japan, Kenya, Kosovo, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Scotland, Sweden, and the United States. Whether from income-rich or income-poor countries, the 31 contributors presented here provide insights on how sign language interpreter training has developed in each nation, and also how trainers have dealt with the difficulties that they encountered. Many of the contributors relate the movement away from ad hoc short courses sponsored by Deaf communities. They mark the transition from the early struggles of trainers against the stigmatization of sign languages to full-time degree programs in institutions of higher education funded by their governments. Others investigate how culture, religion, politics, and legislation affect the nurturing of professional sign language interpreters, and they address the challenges of extending training opportunities nationally through the use of new technology. Together, these diverse perspectives offer a deeper understanding and comparison of interpreter training issues that could benefit the programs in every nation.
Interpreting in multilingual, multicultural contexts by
The Seventh Volume in the Studies in Interpretation Series Nineteen international authorities contribute their research and findings to Interpreting in Multilingual, Multicultural Contexts, probing the complex nature of interpreted interaction involving Deaf and hearing people of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds. They also analyze the contextualized interpreting practices and considerations that transpire from this diversity. In three parts, this trenchant collection shows how Deaf and hearing people use language in fluctuating ways to connect with each other. The chapters in Part 1 -- Expanding Frontiers: ASL-English-Spanish Interpreting in the United States -- consider sign language interpreting at the border between Baja California and the state; trilingual video relay service (VRS) interpreting; and constructing a valid, reliable trilingual interpreting testing instrument. Part 2 -- Mediating Indigenous Voices -- explores how to construct roles in a Maori Deaf trilingual context; considerations for interpreting signed languages of American Indian Communities; and interpreting for indigenous Deaf clients in far north Queensland, Australia. In the final section, Part 3 -- Globalizing: Interpreting in International Contexts -- protocols for interpreting in multilingual international conferences are analyzed. The last chapter describes the arduousness of sign language interpreting in multilingual, international settings. It acts as a fitting conclusion to this examination of the challenges to the sociolinguistic repertoire of interpreters mediating across multiplex combinations of culture and language.
Interpreting in the 21st Century by
This book contains a selection of papers presented at the First Forlì Conference on Interpreting Studies, held on 9-11 November 2000, which saw the participation of leading researchers in the field. The volume offers a comprehensive overview of the current situation and future prospects in interpretation studies, and in the interpreting profession at the beginning of a new century. Topics addressed include not only theoretical and methodological issues, but also applications to training and quality. The range of subjects covered is thus broad and comprehensive. Particular attention is given to the changing profile of the profession, as different modes of interpreting "outside the booth" -- i.e. all forms of "dialogue interpreting", as well as interpreting for the media -- give rise to new and stimulating research work. The variety of papers in this volume bears witness to the wealth of different perspectives in interpreting studies today. It covers topics of interest to scholars of translation and interpretation studies, professional interpreters, and to anyone interested in language mediation in its theoretical and applied aspects.
Knowledge Systems and Translation by
It is generally agreed that knowledge plays an important role in translation and interpreting and that it should therefore be of central concern to translation and interpreting studies. However, there is no general agreement about what is actually meant by the term 'knowledge' in this context, nor about in exactly what ways it is relevant. Also, present-day translation and interpreting studies offer only a limited amount of research specifically dedicated to knowledge systematization and other knowledge-related issues. This book is one of the first to systematically and exclusively address the question of knowledge in translation and interpreting. It is a collection of papers by leading scholars both from the field of translation and interpreting and from adjacent fields where knowledge also plays an important role, such as linguistics and computer science. The experts present a wide variety of conceptions of knowledge and a number of different approaches to the study of knowledge in translation and interpreting: some of them draw on concepts such as scenes and frames, mental spaces and semantic networks, some discuss knowledge systems from an ontological point of view, and some present more general concepts of knowledge in translation and interpreting. Along the same lines, some of the contributors deal mainly with theoretical and conceptual aspects, others focus on methodological issues, and again others report on empirical studies. What brings them together, however, is their common focus on the interface between knowledge and translation/interpreting, and their main achievement is that, by joining forces, they manage to present to their readers a state-of-the-art report which offers both a clearer delimitation of the concept of knowledge and a better understanding of its role in translation and interpreting.
Reading between the signs : intercultural communication for sign language interpreters by
Provides a new perspective on American Deaf culture, a unique culture that is not widely understood. With collaboration of three distinguished Deaf consultants, Mindess explores the implications of cultural differences at the intersection of the Deaf and hearing worlds. Used in interpreter training programs worldwide.
The Sign Language Interpreting Studies Reader by
In Sign Language Interpreting (SLI) there is a great need for a volume devoted to classic and seminal articles and essays dedicated to this specific domain of language interpreting. Students, educators, and practitioners will benefit from having access to a collection of historical and influential articles that contributed to the progress of the global SLI profession. In SLI there is a long history of outstanding research and scholarship, much of which is now out of print, or was published in obscure journals, or featured in publications that are no longer in print. These readings are significant to the progression of SLI as an academic discipline and a profession. As the years have gone by, many of these readings have been lost to students, educators, and practitioners because they are difficult to locate or unavailable, or because this audience simply does not know they exist. This volume brings together the seminal texts in our field that document the philosophical, evidence-based and analytical progression of SLI work.
Topics in Signed Language Interpreting by
Interpreters who work with signed languages and those who work strictly with spoken languages share many of the same issues regarding their training, skill sets, and fundamentals of practice. Yet interpreting into and from signed languages presents unique challenges for the interpreter, who works with language that must be seen rather than heard. The contributions in this volume focus on topics of interest to both students of signed language interpreting and practitioners working in community, conference, and education settings. Signed languages dealt with include American Sign Language, Langue des Signes Québécoise and Irish Sign Language, although interpreters internationally will find the discussion in each chapter relevant to their own language context. Topics concern theoretical and practical components of the interpreter's work, including interpreters' approaches to language and meaning, their role on the job and in the communities within which they work, dealing with language variation and consumer preferences, and Deaf interpreters as professionals in the field.
As an interpreting student, you will get to work with a diverse Deaf clientele, for which you should make accommodations to ensure effective interpretation. One community that has been under-served in the Philippines and in other countries is the Deaf Blind community. The World Association of Sign Language Interpreters recommends that training on Deaf Blind Interpreting should be included in interpreting education program, and you are privileged to have that opportunity to learn strategies and techniques on how to best serve them, from Deaf Blind people themselves and the interpreters who work with them.
The American Sign Language Phrase Book by
Open up a whole new world of communication through ASL You can easily learn ASL with help from The American Sign Language Phrase Book. With more than 500 phrases, this is the reference guide to everyday expressions in American Sign Language, providing a quick way for you to converse with deaf people. Clearly illustrated with hundreds of line drawings, this book focuses on areas such as health, family, school, sports, travel, religion, time, money, food and drink, and small talk. This edition's new chapter on technology boasts 50 phrases to help you communicate about the Internet, computing, video relay, and more. There is even a chapter that gives you phrases for communicating about signing: asking people to sign slower, indicating your fingerspelling ability, and requesting help with your fledgling skills. From asking simple questions (“How are you?”) to more complex phrases (“There's no sign for that, you have to fingerspell it.”), The American Sign Language Phrase Book gives you the power to communicate easily and comfortably in ASL.
Bilingualism and Identity in Deaf Communities by
Akin to the questions of perception and identity, a second theme pervasive in this collection, is the impact of bilingualism in deaf communities. Peter C. Hauser offers a study of an American child proficient in both American Sign Language (ASL) and Cued English while Annica Detthow analyzes "transliteration" between Spoken Swedish and Swedish Sign Language. Like its predecessors, this sixth volume of the Sociolinguistics series distinguishes itself by the depth and diversity of its research, making it a welcome addition to any scholar's library.
Deaf Interpreters at Work by
Now, for the first time, a collection featuring 17 widely respected scholars depicts the everyday practices of deaf interpreters in their respective nations. Deaf Interpreters at Work: International Insights presents the history of Deaf translators and interpreters and details the development of testing and accreditation to raise their professional profiles. Other chapters delineate the cognitive processes of Deaf interpreting; Deaf-Deaf interpreter teams; Deaf and hearing team preparation; the use of Tactile American Sign Language by those interpreting for the Deaf-Blind community; and conference interpreting and interpreting teams. Along with volume coeditors Robert Adam, Christopher Stone, and Steven D. Collins, contributors include Markus Aro, Karen Bontempo, Juan Carlos Druetta, Senan Dunne, Eileen Forestal, Della Goswell, Juli af Klintberg, Patricia Levitzke-Gray, Jemina Napier, Brenda Nicodemus, Debra Russell, Stephanie Sforza, Marty Taylor, and Linda Warby. The scope of their research spans the world, including many unique facets of interpreting by deaf people in Argentina, Australia, Canada, England, Finland, Ireland, Sweden, and the United States, establishing this work as the standard in this burgeoning discipline.
The Disability Studies Reader by
The Fourth Edition of the Disability Studies Readerbreaks new ground by emphasizing the global, transgender, homonational, and posthuman conceptions of disability. Including physical disabilities, but exploring issues around pain, mental disability, and invisible disabilities, this edition explores more varieties of bodily and mental experience. New histories of the legal, social, and cultural give a broader picture of disability than ever before. Now available for the first time in eBook format 978-0-203-07788-7.
The Disability Studies Reader by
The fifth edition of The Disability Studies Reader addresses the post-identity theoretical landscape by emphasizing questions of interdependency and independence, the human-animal relationship, and issues around the construction or materiality of gender, the body, and sexuality. Selections explore the underlying biases of medical and scientific experiments and explode the binary of the sound and the diseased mind. The collection addresses physical disabilities, but as always investigates issues around pain, mental disability, and invisible disabilities as well. Featuring a new generation of scholars who are dealing with the most current issues, the fifth edition continues the Reader's tradition of remaining timely, urgent, and critical.
Games for people with sensory impairments : strategies for including individuals of all ages by
"This practical new reference provides teachers and recreation specialists with 70 ready-to-use games that people with sensory impairments - both visual and hearing - can play. Games for People With Sensory Impairments makes it easy to select and modify games and activities for players of all ages and ability levels." "Fifteen of the country's best practitioners have submitted their most successful group activities for this how-to guide. Using photos from actual physical education classes, the authors show how to evaluate and adapt these games and activities to any group. The book is designed for people who work with students or adults who are visually impaired, deaf, deaf-blind, or visually impaired with other disabilities. But the activities are also appropriate for people without disabilities. Plus a handy "Game Finder" helps you speedily locate and select appropriate games." "Written by two authorities in the field of adapted physical education, Games for People With Sensory Impairments shows you how to apply proven techniques to help people of all ages reach their full potential for fun and fitness."--BOOK JACKET.Title Summary field provided by Blackwell North America, Inc. All Rights Reserved
The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies in Language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. The contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholarsand practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of effortsto identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself;and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and DeafEducation, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
Signed Language Interpreting in the 21st Century by
This text provides interpreting students with a broad knowledge base that encompasses the latest research, addresses current trends and perspectives of the Deaf community, and promotes critical thinking and open dialogue about the working conditions, ethics, boundaries, and competencies needed by a highly qualified interpreter in various settings. This volume expands the resources available to aspiring interpreters, including Deaf interpreters, and incorporates the voices of renowned experts on topics relevant to today's practitioners. Each chapter provides students with objectives, keywords, and discussion questions. The chapters convey clear information about topics that include credentialing, disposition and aptitude for becoming an interpreter, interpreting for people who are DeafBlind, and working within specialty settings, such as legal and healthcare. A key resource for interpreter certification test preparation, this text follows the interpreter's ethical, practical, and professional development through a career of lifelong learning and service.
Supporting Children with Sensory Impairment by
This book provides a quick and easy reference guide to different types of sensory impairment, including causes, symptoms and the implications on teaching and learning. With most children and young people with hearing or visual impairments attending mainstream schools, this book explains the most effective and practical strategies for use in mainstream classrooms. Fully up to date with the 2014 SEND Code of Practice, this accessible resource is split into two sections: Supporting Children with a Hearing Impairment and Supporting Children with a Visual Impairment. The wide-ranging chapters include: Educational access for pupils with hearing loss Teaching phonics Teaching deaf pupils with English as a second language Identifying children with visual impairment Classroom management Adapting resources This practical text provides strategies to use in schools to ensure that children with sensory impairments are fully supported. Featuring useful checklist and photocopiable resouces, it contains a wealth of valuable advice and tried-and-tested strategies for teachers and support staff working in early years settings, schools, academies and colleges.
As an interpreting student, you will get to work with a diverse Deaf clientele, for which you should make accommodations to ensure effective interpretation. One community that has been under-served in the Philippines and in other countries is the Deaf Blind community. The World Association of Sign Language Interpreters recommends that training on Deaf Blind Interpreting should be included in interpreting education program, and you are privileged to have that opportunity to learn strategies and techniques on how to best serve them, from Deaf Blind people themselves and the interpreters who work with them.
Assistive Technology by
Succinct, yet comprehensive, Assistive Technology is designed to help educators better understand assistive technology and how it can support students with disabilities from early childhood through the transition into adulthood. This practical book is organized around the purpose of technology and the support it can provide rather than a student's disability categorization. Grounded in research and filled with engaging case studies and activities, author Emily C. Bouck offers an unbiased depiction of the advantages and limitations of technology. Readers are exposed to a full range of assistive technology including up-to-date coverage of low- and high-technology, as well as free and for-purchase options that can be used to support students with disabilities.
Bilingualism and Identity in Deaf Communities by
Akin to the questions of perception and identity, a second theme pervasive in this collection, is the impact of bilingualism in deaf communities. Peter C. Hauser offers a study of an American child proficient in both American Sign Language (ASL) and Cued English while Annica Detthow analyzes "transliteration" between Spoken Swedish and Swedish Sign Language. Like its predecessors, this sixth volume of the Sociolinguistics series distinguishes itself by the depth and diversity of its research, making it a welcome addition to any scholar's library.
Common Core State Standards and the Speech-Language Pathologist by
Common Core State Standards and the Speech-Language Pathologist: Standards-Based Intervention for Special Populations is a tool for the analysis of the Common Core State Standards (CCSS) and the development of interventions to meet student-specific needs. The CCSS is an education initiative in the United States that details what K-12 students should understand in English language arts and mathematics by the end of each grade. The initiative seeks to establish consistent education standards across the United States and ensure that graduating students are prepared to enter college or the workforce. As of 2015, forty-three states had adopted the CCSS. With the implementation of the CCSS, it is critical that speech-language pathologists collaborate with educators to enable the success of students with communication disorders as well as English language learners. This text offers a practical approach for application of the CCSS with a parallel analysis of children's strengths and needs to create a template for intervention. It addresses strategies to facilitate the success of students in accessing and achieving the expectations of the general curriculum, with a focus on students with communication disorders, hearing loss, vision loss, deaf-blindness, specific learning disabilities, autism, multiple disabilities, and English language learners. Key features include: Background and implications of the CCSS Chapters written by experts in the field Tools for analysis of the language expectations of the CCSS and a framework for aligning intervention (both direct and classroom-based) with the CCSS for students at elementary and secondary levels Collaboration strategies to facilitate success in the classroom Multiple case studies Common Core State Standards and the Speech-Language Pathologist is a must-have resource for any speech-language pathologist working with children, as well as their education and administration partners.
Communication interventions for individuals with severe disabilities : exploring research challenges and opportunities by
"This interdisciplinary book critically examines the research on the effectiveness of communication interventions for individuals with severe disabilities. This volume provides the reader with a synthesis of the complex issues related to communication intervention and severe disabilities"-- Provided by publisher
Complete Directory for People with Disabilities by
Provides information on resources, products, and services for people with disabilities.
Disability and academic exclusion : voicing the student body by
Disability and Academic Exclusion interrogates obstacles the disabled have encountered in education, from a historical perspective that begins with the denial of literacy to minorities in the colonial era to the later centuries’ subsequent intolerance of writing, orality, and literacy mastered by former slaves, women, and the disabled. The text then questions where we stand today in regards to the university-wide rhetoric on promoting diversity and accomodating disability in the classroom. Brief studies on the devaluation of authenticity and literacy in the works of Sojourner Truth, Phillis Wheatley, and Helen Keller serve to demonstrate how earlier cultural viewpoints undermined the teachability of women, the disabled, and people of color, and to question if these viewpoints have been redressed or whether they are maintained in the academy’s discursive relationship to educating the disabled. The guiding questions ask if colleges today recognize the exclusionary practices inherent in the category of disability, whether the delineation of disability in the classroom parallels earlier isolating minority categories across intersectional subjectivities and, accepting disability as a category that is necessary in order to protect civil rights, whether disability can be incorporated more inclusively in what E.R. Weatherup has termed a constellation of student learners. The text concludes that the academy must confront the persistent historical situating of disability as one of deficiency in order to bring disability into the classroom, and at the same time it must engage with a humanistic and humanizing vocabulary, allowing for more voices to be heard from the embodied, subjective experiences of the disabled student body.
Group Work with Persons with Disabilities by
This one-of-a-kind manual provides direction for leading groups of people with disabilities or groups that have members with disabilities. Viewing disability as a single aspect of a multifaceted person, Drs. Bauman and Shaw share their insight and expertise and emphasize practical skill building and training for facilitating task, psychoeducational, counseling, family, and psychotherapy groups across various settings. Topics examined in Part I include common themes in groups that focus on disability; various group formats, including groups using technological platforms; issues of diversity that exist simultaneously with ability; group composition; ethical concerns; and training considerations and logistical accommodations. Part II focuses on group counseling with clients experiencing sensory, psychiatric, cognitive, and physical disabilities as well as chronic medical conditions. A list of resources, support information, and group exercises completes the book. *Requests for digital versions from ACA can be found on www.wiley.com. *To purchase print copies, please visit the ACA website *Reproduction requests for material from books published by ACA should be directed to permissions@counseling.org
Helen Keller (Rookie Biographies) (Library Edition) by
Meet Helen Keller, an inspiration to people around the world!Fact-filled Rookie Read-About Biographies introduce the youngest readers to influential women and men, both past and present. Colorful photos and age appropriate text encourage children to read on their own-as they learn about people like Serena Williams, Neil Armstrong, Rosa Parks, Anne Frank and many more. When she was just a baby, Helen Keller contracted an illness that left her deaf and blind. With the help of her teacher, Anne Sullivan, Keller went on to become an author, an international spokesperson for people with disabilities, and
The imprisoned guest : Samuel Howe and Laura Bridgman, the original deaf-blind girl by
The resurrected story of a deaf-blind girl and the man who brought her out of silence. In 1837, Samuel Gridley Howe, director of Boston's Perkins Institution for the Blind, heard about a bright, deaf-blind seven-year-old, the daughter of New Hampshire farmers. At once he resolved to rescue her from the "darkness and silence of the tomb." And indeed, thanks to Howe and an extraordinary group of female teachers, Laura Bridgman learned to finger spell, to read raised letters, and to write legibly and even eloquently. Philosophers, poets, educators, theologians, and early psychologists hailed Laura as a moral inspiration and a living laboratory for the most controversial ideas of the day. She quickly became a major tourist attraction, and many influential writers and reformers visited her or wrote about her. But as the Civil War loomed and her girlish appeal faded, the public began to lose interest. By the time Laura died in 1889, she had been wholly eclipsed by the prettier, more ingratiating Helen Keller. The Imprisoned Guest retrieves Laura Bridgman's forgotten life, placing it in the context of nineteenth-century American social, intellectual, and cultural history. Her troubling, tumultuous relationship with Howe, who rode Laura's achievements to his own fame but could not cope with the intense, demanding adult she became, sheds light on the contradictory attitudes of a "progressive" era in which we can find some precursors of our own.
The Oxford handbook of deaf studies in language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the 21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. Contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholars and practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of efforts to identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself; and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and Deaf Education, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
The Oxford handbook of music and disability studies by
The essays in this volume share a theoretical and methodological connection to Disability Studies, especially its central idea that disability is a social and cultural construction. Disability is shown to be a core feature of the musical identity of music makers (especially composers and performers), something that affects their lives and works and their public reception. Music represents disability in various ways and affirms the notion that disability is a performance, something you do rather than something you are. These essays make the case that disability is not something at the periphery of culture and music, but something central to our art and to our humanity. They also address an important lacuna within a Disability Studies that has mostly overlooked music as a medium through which disability can be constructed.
The right to be helped : deviance, entitlement, and the Soviet moral order by
"Doesn't an educated person—simple and working, sick and with a sick child—doesn't she have the right to enjoy at least the crumbs at the table of the revolutionary feast?" Disabled single mother Maria Zolotova-Sologub raised this question in a petition dated July 1929 demanding medical assistance and a monthly subsidy for herself and her daughter. While the welfare of able-bodied and industrially productive people in the first socialist country in the world was protected by a state-funded insurance system, the social rights of labor-incapacitated and unemployed individuals such as Zolotova-Sologub were difficult to define and legitimize. The Right to Be Helped illuminates the ways in which marginalized members of Soviet society understood their social rights and articulated their moral expectations regarding the socialist state between 1917 and 1950. Maria Galmarini-Kabala shows how definitions of state assistance and who was entitled to it provided a platform for policymakers and professionals to engage in heated debates about disability, gender, suffering, and productive and reproductive labor. She explores how authorities and experts reacted to requests for support, arguing that responses were sometimes characterized by an enlightened nature and other times by coercive discipline, but most frequently by a combination of the two. By focusing on the experiences of behaviorally problematic children, unemployed single mothers, and blind and deaf adults in several major urban centers, this important study shows that the dialogue over the right to be helped was central to defining the moral order of Soviet socialism. It will appeal to scholars and students of Russian history, as well as those interested in comparative disabilities and welfare studies.
A World Without Words by
During the Rubella Syndrome epidemic of the 1960s, many children were born deaf, blind, and mentally disabled. David Goode has devoted his life and career to understanding such people's world, a world without words, but not, the author confirms, one without communication. This book is the result of his studies of two children with congenital deaf-blindness and mental retardation. Goode spent countless hours observing, teaching, and playing with Christina, who had been institutionalized since age six, and Bianca, who remained in the care of her parents. He also observed the girls' parents, school, and medical environments, exploring the unique communication practices--sometimes so subtle they are imperceptible to outsiders--that family and health care workers create to facilitate innumerable every day situations. A World Without Words presents moving and convincing evidence that human beings both with and without formal language can understand and communicate with each other in many ways. Through various experiments in such unconventional forms of communication as playing guitar, mimicking, and body movements like jumping, swinging, and rocking, Goode established an understanding of these children on their own terms. He discovered a spectrum of non-formal language through which these children create their own set of symbols within their own reality, and accommodate and maximize the sensory resources they do have. Ultimately, he suggests, it is impractical to attempt to interpret these children's behaviors using ideas about normal behavior of the hearing and seeing world.
Welcome to Disability Studies! In this course, you will gain knowledge of the different influences based on the society’s view of how persons with disabilities construct their own identities and meanings. Guided by class discussions, film showing, article readings, and class output, you can deepen your understanding about different kinds of disability, perspectives on disability, as well as laws and legislation that will promote their inclusion in the greater society.
Approaching Disability by
Disability Studies is an area of study which examines social, political, cultural, and economic factors that define 'disability' and establish personal and collective responses to difference. This insightful new text will introduce readers to the discipline of Disability Studies and enable them to engage in the lively debates within the field. By offering an accessible yet rigorous approach to Disability Studies, the authors provide a critical analysis of key current issues and consider ways in which the subject can be studied through national and international perspectives, policies, culture and history. Key debates include: The relationship between activism and the academy Ways to study cultural and media representations of disability The importance of disability history and how societies can change National and international perspectives on children, childhood and education Political perspectives on disability and identity The place of the body in disability theory This text offers real-world examples of topics that are important to debates and offers a much needed truly international scope on the questions at hand. It is an essential read for any individual studying, practising or with an interest in Disability Studies.
Branding and Designing Disability by
Over the past fifty years, design and branding have become omnipotent in the market and have made their way to other domains as well. Given their potential to divide humans into categories and label their worth and value, design and branding can wield immense but currently unharnessed powers of social change. Groups designed as devalued can be undesigned, redesigned and rebranded to seamlessly and equivalently participate in community, work and civic life. This innovative book argues that disability as a concept and category is created, reified, and segregated through current design and branding that begs for creative change. Transcending models of disability that locate it either as an embodied medical condition or as a socially constructed entity, this book challenges the very existence and usefulness of the category itself. Proposing and illustrating creative and responsible design, DePoy and Gilson include thinking and action strategies that are useful and potent for "undesigning", redesigning, and rebranding to meet the full range of human needs and to enhance full participation in local through global communities. Divided into two parts, the first section presents a critical examination of disability as a designed and branded phenomenon, exploring what exactly is being designed and branded and how. The second part investigates the redesign of disability and provides principles for redesign and rebranding illustrated with examples from high-tech to place-based sustainable strategies. The book provides a unique and contemporary framework for thinking about disability as well as providing relevant design and branding guidance to designers and engineers interested in embodiment issues.
Disability, Gender and the Trajectories of Power by
This book argues for the rights of women with disabilities, who live on the periphery of society, and seeks to eradicate the exclusion and stigma that are part of their lives. It brings together the perspectives of academicians and activists in trying to understand the various social issues faced by women with disabilities and argues for a society where they are not denied respect, equality, and justice. Filling the gap in the existing feminist research, this book seeks to influence the way in which society treats women with disabilities and will be of interest to scholars and researchers in the field of women's rights, disability rights, and rehabilitation.
Disability and Digital Television Cultures by
Disability and Digital Television Cultures offers an important addition to scholarly studies at the intersection of disability and media, examining disability in the context of digital television access, representation and reception. Television, as a central medium of communication, has marginalized people with disability through both representation on screen and the lack of accessibility to this medium. With accessibility options becoming available as television is switched to digital transmissions, audience research into television representations must include a corresponding consideration of access. This book provides a comprehensive and critical study of the way people with disability access and watch digital TV. International case studies and media reports are complimented by findings of a user-focused study into accessibility and representation captured during the Australian digital television switchover in 2013-2014. This book will provide a reliable, independent guide to fundamental shifts in media access while also offering insight from the disability community. It will be essential reading for researchers working on disability and media, as well as television, communications and culture; upper-level undergraduate and postgraduate students in cultural studies;¿ along with general readers with an interest in disability and digital culture. ¿
Disability and Social Media by
Social media is popularly seen as an important media for people with disability in terms of communication, exchange and activism. These sites potentially increase both employment and leisure opportunities for one of the most traditionally isolated groups in society. However, the offline inaccessible environment has, to a certain degree, been replicated online and particularly in social networking sites. Social media is becoming an increasingly important part of our lives yet the impact on people with disabilities has gone largely unscrutinised. Similarly, while social media and disability are often both observed through a focus on the Western, developed and English-speaking world, different global perspectives are often overlooked. This collection explores the opportunities and challenges social media represents for the social inclusion of people with disabilities from a variety of different global perspectives that include Africa, Arabia and Asia along with European, American and Australasian perspectives and experiences.
Disability As Diversity in Higher Education by
Addressing disability not as a form of student impairment--as it is typically perceived at the postsecondary level--but rather as an important dimension of student diversity and identity, this book explores how disability can be more effectively incorporated into college environments. Chapters propose new perspectives, empirical research, and case studies to provide the necessary foundation for understanding the role of disability within campus climate and integrating students with disabilities into academic and social settings. Contextualizing disability through the lens of intersectionality, Disability as Diversity in Higher Education illustrates how higher education institutions can use policies and practices to enhance inclusion and student success.
Disability in Local and Global Worlds by
The lives of many disabled people in Europe and North America have improved over the past two decades through innovative technologies and the efforts of the disability rights movement. These changes have been spreading to other societies around the globe--albeit unevenly. In this collection of essays, leading scholars explore global changes in disability awareness, technology, and policy from the viewpoint of disabled people and their families in a wide range of local contexts. The authors report on ethnographic research in Brazil, Uganda, Botswana, Somalia, Britain, Israel, China, Egypt, India, and Japan. They address the definition of disability, the new eugenics, human rights in local contexts, domestic and state citizenship of disabled people, and issues of identity and belonging.
Disability Rights and Wrongs by
Over the last thirty years, the field of disability studies has emerged from the political activism of disabled people. In this challenging review of the field, leading disability academic and activist Tom Shakespeare argues that the social model theory has reached a dead end. Drawing on a critical realist perspective, Shakespeare promotes a pluralist, engaged and nuanced approach to disability. Key topics discussed include: dichotomies - the dangerous polarizations of medical model versus social model, impairment versus disability and disabled people versus non-disabled people identity - the drawbacks of the disability movement's emphasis on identity politics bioethics in disability - choices at the beginning and end of life and in the field of genetic and stem cell therapies care and social relationships - questions of intimacy and friendship. This stimulating and accessible book challenges orthodoxies in British disability studies, promoting a new conceptualization of disability and fresh research agenda. It is an invaluable resource for researchers and students in disability studies and sociology, as well as professionals, policy makers and activists.
Disability Studies by
Passionate, engaging and challenging, this second edition of the ground-breaking Disability Studies: An Interdisciplinary Introduction is a contemporary introduction to this diverse and complex field. Taking an interdisciplinary and critical approach, the book: examines a diverse range of theories and perspectives and engages with current debates in the field explores key areas of analysis, with chapters devoted to the individual, society, community and education applies a global perspective encompassing examples from the UK, Australia, Scandinavia, the US, and Canada. Encouraging and stimulating readers using thought-provoking questions, exercises and activities, Disability Studies is a rich and rewarding read for students and researchers engaging with disability across the social sciences.
Disability Studies by
This textbook brings together a wide range of expert voices from the field of disability studies and the disabled people′s movement to tackle the essential topics relevant to this area of study. From the outset disability is discussed from a social model perspective, demonstrating how future practice and discourse could break down barriers and lead to more equal relationships for disabled people in everyday life. An interdisciplinary and broad-ranging text, the book includes 50 chapters on topics relevant across health and social care. Reflective questions and suggestions for further reading throughout will help readers gain a critical appreciation of the subject and expand their knowledge. This will be valuable reading for students and professionals across disability studies, health, nursing, social work, social care, social policy and sociology.
Disability Studies and the Inclusive Classroom by
This book¿s mission is to integrate knowledge and practice from the fields of disability studies and special education . Parts I & II focus on the broad, foundational topics that comprise disability studies (culture, language, and history) and Parts III & IV move into practical topics (curriculum, co-teaching, collaboration, classroom organization, disability-specific teaching strategies, etc.) associated with inclusive education. This organization conforms to the belief that least restrictive environments (the goal of inclusive education) necessarily emerges from least restrictive attitudes (the goal of disability studies). Discussions throughout the book attempt to illustrate the intersection of theory and practice.
The Disability Studies Reader by
The fifth edition of The Disability Studies Reader addresses the post-identity theoretical landscape by emphasizing questions of interdependency and independence, the human-animal relationship, and issues around the construction or materiality of gender, the body, and sexuality. Selections explore the underlying biases of medical and scientific experiments and explode the binary of the sound and the diseased mind. The collection addresses physical disabilities, but as always investigates issues around pain, mental disability, and invisible disabilities as well. Featuring a new generation of scholars who are dealing with the most current issues, the fifth edition continues the Reader's tradition of remaining timely, urgent, and critical.
The Disability Studies Reader by
The Fourth Edition of the Disability Studies Readerbreaks new ground by emphasizing the global, transgender, homonational, and posthuman conceptions of disability. Including physical disabilities, but exploring issues around pain, mental disability, and invisible disabilities, this edition explores more varieties of bodily and mental experience. New histories of the legal, social, and cultural give a broader picture of disability than ever before. Now available for the first time in eBook format 978-0-203-07788-7.
Disability Studies Today by
Over recent years there has been an unprecedented upsurge ofinterest in the general area of disability and disability studiesamongst academics and researchers throughout the world. This hasgenerated an increasingly expansive literature, from a variety ofperspectives, including cultural studies, development studies,geography, history, philosophy, social policy, social psychologyand sociology. Perhaps inevitably, given this heightened interest,a number of important challenges and debates have emerged whichraise many significant questions for all those interested in thisnewly emergent and increasingly important field. DisabilityStudies Today provides an invaluable introduction to and anoverview of these concerns and controversies. Although the field is increasingly interdisciplinary in nature,the emphasis is primarily a sociological one since sociologycontinues to play a central role in the development of disabilitystudies. Whilst the focus is primarily on theoretical innovationand advancement, the arguments presented in this book haveimportant political and policy implications for both disabled andnon-disabled people. Moreover, since disability studies, likeethnic, women's and gay and lesbian studies, has developedfrom a position of engagement and activism rather than one ofdetachment, the articles in this volume maintain this tradition.The book contains contributions from established figures, as wellas newcomers to the field. Topics covered include: the history ofthe development of disability studies in Britain and America, keyideas, issues and thinkers, the role of the body, divisions andhierarchies, history, power and identity, work, politics and thedisabled peoples' movement, globalization, human rights,research and the role of the academy. This book will prove invaluable to scholars, researchers,students and policy makers and, indeed, all those involved in thisincreasingly important area of social enquiry.
The Global Politics of Impairment and Disability by
Disability is of central concern to the developing world but has largely been under-represented in global development debates, discourses and negotiations. Similarly, disability studies has overlooked both the theorists and the social experience of the global South, and there has been a one-way transfer of ideas and knowledge from the North to the South in this field. This volume seeks to redress the processes of scholarly colonialism by drawing together a diverse set of understandings, theorizing and experiences. The chapters situate disability within the Southern context and support the work of Southern disabled scholars and activists seeking to decolonize Southern experiences, knowledges and absences in the field while simultaneously attempting to make an intervention into able-bodied (mainstream) development discourses, practices and politics. This book was originally published as a special issue of Third World Quarterly.
Handbook of Disability Studies by
This path-breaking international handbook of disability studies signals the emergence of a vital new area of scholarship, social policy and activism. Drawing on the insights of disability scholars around the world and the creative advice of an international editorial board, the book engages the reader in the critical issues and debates framing disability studies and places them in an historical and cultural context. Five years in the making, this one volume summarizes the ongoing discourse ranging across continents and traditional academic disciplines. To provide insight and perspective, the volume is divided into three sections: The shaping of disability studies as a field; experiencing disability; and, disability in context. Each section, written by world class figures, consists of original chapters designed to map the field and explore the key conceptual, theoretical, methodological, practice and policy issues that constitute the field. Each chapter provides a critical review of an area, positions and literature and an agenda for future research and practice. The handbook answers the need expressed by the disability community for a thought provoking, interdisciplinary, international examination of the vibrant field of disability studies. The book will be of interest to disabled people, scholars, policy makers and activists alike. The book aims to define the existing field, stimulate future debate, encourage respectful discourse between different interest groups and move the field a step forward.
Intellectual Disability by
Intellectual Disability: Ethics, Dehumanization, and a New Moral Community presents an interdisciplinary exploration of the roots and evolution of the dehumanization of people with intellectual disabilities. Examines the roots of disability ethics from a psychological, philosophical, and educational perspective Presents a coherent, sustained moral perspective in examining the historical dehumanization of people with diminished cognitive abilities Includes a series of narratives and case descriptions to illustrate arguments Reveals the importance of an interdisciplinary understanding of the social construction of intellectual disability
Keywords for Disability Studies by
Introduces key terms, concepts, debates, and histories for Disability Studies Keywords for Disability Studies aims to broaden and define the conceptual framework of disability studies for readers and practitioners in the field and beyond. The volume engages some of the most pressing debates of our time, such as prenatal testing, euthanasia, accessibility in public transportation and the workplace, post-traumatic stress, and questions about the beginning and end of life. Each of the 60 essays in Keywords for Disability Studies focuses on a distinct critical concept, including "ethics," "medicalization," "performance," "reproduction," "identity," and "stigma," among others. Although the essays recognize that "disability" is often used as an umbrella term, the contributors to the volume avoid treating individual disabilities as keywords, and instead interrogate concepts that encompass different components of the social and bodily experience of disability. The essays approach disability as an embodied condition, a mutable historical phenomenon, and a social, political, and cultural identity. An invaluable resource for students and scholars alike, Keywords for Disability Studies brings the debates that have often remained internal to disability studies into a wider field of critical discourse, providing opportunities for fresh theoretical considerations of the field's core presuppositions through a variety of disciplinary perspectives. Visit keywords.nyupress.org for online essays, teaching resources, and more.
Language and Reading Disabilities by
Reports the growing evidence that language processes can underlie or contribute to reading disabilities in addition to the phonological processes that are more widely cited. Describes recent development in the early identification, assessment, and remediation of language-based reading disability. S
Learning Disabilities by
This edition presents guidelines for using Response to Intervention (RTI) as an eligibility tool as well as differentiated instruction for the general education class. Detailed coverage of the most up-to-date classroom practices, the latest research, and critical issues are also presented. Using the author's more than 27 years of experience in working with children and adolescents who have learning disabilities, the Sixth Edition of Learning Disabilities presents the latest research and information on LD in each developmental area. It focuses on identification and eligibility issues, incorporating the newly released rules and regulations on RTI, IDEA 2004, and the No Child Left Behind legislation. The text also stresses both the characteristics of students with learning disabilities as well as classroom-tested instructional strategies. With up-to-date content, this practical guide also offers insight into practical educational concerns from a teacher's perspective, as well as the relevant scholarship.
Moving Beyond Boundaries in Disability Studies by
What challenges are posed by changing transnational trends, agendas and movements that affect disabled people's lives, and what can disabled people, their representative organisations and their governments do to advance the agenda for self-determination and inclusion? This book draws together the writing of academics and activists to depict the experience and perspective of disabled people in relation to a range of contemporary social changes, with a focus firmly on ways in which disabled people and their allies can act to counter disabling policies and practices. Throughout the book there is an emphasis on disabled people's own voices and activism as the critical driver of theoretical critique and practical change. Chapters address a wide range of cultural, institutional and personal arenas to explore and contest the boundaries that disabled people seek to move beyond, from cross-border labour movements in Korea to experience of day services in England, from continuing and long-lasting realities of wars in Lebanon, Cambodia and Somalia to the beauty of harmony in Navajo traditions for understanding disability, from collective activism to individual participation in the Olympics. This book is recommended reading for students, researchers and activists interested in Disability Studies and is directly relevant to policy makers and practitioners in a position to reshape rights, spaces and innovations in response to the priorities disabled people feel and articulate are important for their lives. It was originally published as a special issue of Disability & Society.
Rethinking Disability by
Now in its second edition, Rethinking Disability introduces new and experienced teachers to ethical framings of disability and strategies for effectively teaching and including students with disabilities in the general education classroom. Grounded in a disability studies framework, this text¿s unique narrative style encourages readers to examine their beliefs about disability and the influence of historical and cultural meanings of disability upon their work as teachers. The second edition offers clear and applicable suggestions for creating dynamic and inclusive classroom cultures, getting to know students, selecting appropriate instructional and assessment strategies, co-teaching, and promoting an inclusive school culture. This second edition is fully revised and updated to include a brief history of disability through the ages, the relevance of current educational policies to inclusion, technology in the inclusive classroom, intersectionality and its influence upon inclusive practices, working with families, and issues of transition from school to the post-school world. Each chapter now also includes a featured "voice from the field" written by persons with disabilities, parents, and teachers.
Welcome to Disability Studies! In this course, you will gain knowledge of the different influences based on the society’s view of how persons with disabilities construct their own identities and meanings. Guided by class discussions, film showing, article readings, and class output, you can deepen your understanding about different kinds of disability, perspectives on disability, as well as laws and legislation that will promote their inclusion in the greater society.
Culture - theory - disability : encounters between disability studies and cultural studies by
Which theoretical and methodological approaches of contemporary cultural criticism resonate within the field of disability studies? What can cultural studies gain by incorporating disability more fully into its toolbox for critical analysis? Culture - Theory - Disability features contributions by leading international cultural disability studies scholars which are complemented with a diverse range of responses from across the humanities spectrum. This essential volume encourages the problematization of disability in connection with critical theories of literary and cultural representation, aesthetics, politics, science and technology, sociology, and philosophy. It includes essays by Lennard J. Davis, Rosemarie Garland-Thomson, Dan Goodley, Robert McRuer and Margrit Shildrick.
Deaf and disability studies : interdisciplinary perspectives by
This collection presents 14 essays by renowned scholars on Deaf people, Deafhood, Deaf histories, and Deaf identity, but from different points of view on the Deaf/Disability compass. Editors Susan Burch and Alison Kafer have divided these works around three themes. The first, Identities and Locations, explores Deaf identity in different contexts. Topics range from a history of activism shaped by the ableism of Deaf elites in the United States from 1880-1920, to a discussion of the roles that economics, location, race, and culture play in the experiences of a Deaf woman from northern Nigeria now living in Washington, D.C. Alliances and Activism showcases activism organized across differences. Studies include a feminist analysis of how deaf and hearing women working together share responsibility, and an examination of how intra-cultural variations in New York City and Quebec affect deaf-focus HIV/AIDS programs. The third theme, Boundaries and Overlaps, explicitly addresses the relationships between Deaf Studies and Disability Studies. Interviews with scholars from both disciplines help define these relationships. Another contributor calls for hearing/not-deaf people with disabilities to support their Deaf peers in gaining langue access to the United Nations. Deaf and Disability Studies: Interdisciplinary Perspectives reveals that different questions often lead to contrary conclusions among their authors, who still recognize that they all have a stake in this partnership.
Disability, health and human development by
This open access book introduces the human development model to define disability and map its links with health and wellbeing, based on Sen's capability approach. The author uses panel survey data with internationally comparable questions on disability for Ethiopia, Malawi, Tanzania and Uganda. It presents evidence on the prevalence of disability and its strong and consistent association with multidimensional poverty, mortality, economic insecurity and deprivations in education, morbidity and employment. It shows that disability needs to be considered from multiple angles including aging, gender, health and poverty. Ultimately, this study makes a call for inclusion and prevention interventions as solutions to the deprivations associated with impairments and health conditions.
Disability, Human Rights, and Information Technology by
Disability, Human Rights, and Information Technology addresses the global issue of equal access to information and communications technology for persons with disabilities.
Disability and Discourse Analysis by
Although efforts have been made to integrate disability into the discourse analysis and conversation analysis canon, the link between the two fields needs to be strengthened. This ground-breaking volume contributes to this link by thoroughly applying the analytical vocabulary of discourse analysis to issues that are central to the field of disability studies. It strengthens disability studies by supplying case studies of representations and constructions of disability and disabled people in discourse, theorizes the role played by language in the social construction of disability, and makes disability a more salient topic for discourse analysts.
Disability and social media : global perspectives by
Social media is popularly seen as an important media for people with disability in terms of communication, exchange and activism. These sites potentially increase both employment and leisure opportunities for one of the most traditionally isolated groups in society. However, the offline inaccessible environment has, to a certain degree, been replicated online and particularly in social networking sites. Social media is becoming an increasingly important part of our lives yet the impact on people with disabilities has gone largely unscrutinised. Similarly, while social media and disability are often both observed through a focus on the Western, developed and English-speaking world, different global perspectives are often overlooked. This collection explores the opportunities and challenges social media represents for the social inclusion of people with disabilities from a variety of different global perspectives that include Africa, Arabia and Asia along with European, American and Australasian perspectives and experiences.
Disability Human Rights and the Limits of Humanitarianism by
Contemporary human rights discourses problematically co-opt disabled bodies as 'evidence' of harms done under capitalism, war, and other forms of conflict, while humanitarian non-governmental organizations often use disabled bodies to generate resources for their humanitarian projects. It is the connection between civil rights and human rights, and the concomitant relationship between national and global, which foregrounds this book's contention that disability studies productively challenge such human rights paradigms, which troublingly eschew disability rights in favor of exclusionary humanitarianism.
Disability media studies by
Introduces key ideas and offers a sense of the new frontiers and questions in the emerging field of disability media studies. Disability Media Studies articulates the formation of a new field of study, based in the rich traditions of media, cultural, and disability studies. Necessarily interdisciplinary and diverse, this collection weaves together work from scholars from a variety of disciplinary homes, into a broader conversation about exploring media artifacts in relation to disability. The book provides a comprehensive overview for anyone interested in the study of disability and media today. Case studies include familiar contemporary examples such as Iron Man 3, Lady Gaga, and Oscar Pistorius as well as historical media, independent disability media, reality television, and media technologies. The contributors consider disability representation, the role of media in forming cultural assumptions about ability, the construction of disability via media technologies, and how disabled audiences respond to particular media artifacts. The volume concludes with afterwords from two different perspectives on the field one by disability scholar Rachel Adams, the other by media scholars Mara Mills and Jonathan Sterne that reflect upon the collection, the ongoing conversations, and the future of disability media studies. -- Amazon.com.
Disability Studies by
The chapters contributing to this edited volume are presented to assist readers with a critical examination of contemporary practice and offer a concerted response to improving inclusive education. The chapters address a range of important topics related to the field of critical disability studies in education and include sections dedicated to Schools, Higher Education, Family and Community and Theorising.
Disability Studies : a Student's Guide by
This textbook brings together a wide range of expert voices from the field of disability studies and the disabled people's movement to tackle the essential topics relevant to this area of study. From the outset disability is discussed from a social model perspective, demonstrating how future practice and discourse could break down barriers and lead to more equal relationships for disabled people in everyday life.
An interdisciplinary and broad-ranging text, the book includes 50 chapters on topics relevant across health and social care. Reflective questions and suggestions for further reading throughout will help readers gain a critical appreciation of the subject and expand their knowledge.
This will be valuable reading for students and professionals across disability studies, health, nursing, social work, social care, social policy and sociology.
Disability Studies and the Environmental Humanities by
Although scholars in the environmental humanities have been exploring the dichotomy between "wild" and "built" environments for several years, few have focused on the field of disability studies, a discipline that enlists the contingency between environments and bodies as a foundation of its scholarship. On the other hand, scholars in disability studies have demonstrated the ways in which the built environment privileges some bodies and minds over others, yet they have rarely examined the ways in which toxic environments engender chronic illness and disability or how environmental illnesses disrupt dominant paradigms for scrutinizing "disability." Designed as a reader for undergraduate and graduate courses, Disability Studies and the Environmental Humanities employs interdisciplinary perspectives to examine such issues as slow violence, imperialism, race, toxicity, eco-sickness, the body in environmental justice, ableism, and other topics. With a historical scope spanning the seventeenth century to the present, this collection not only presents the foundational documents informing this intersection of fields but also showcases the most current work, making it an indispensable reference.
The Disability Studies Reader by
The Fourth Edition of the Disability Studies Reader breaks new ground by emphasizing the global, transgender, homonational, and posthuman conceptions of disability. Including physical disabilities, but exploring issues around pain, mental disability, and invisible disabilities, this edition explores more varieties of bodily and mental experience. New histories of the legal, social, and cultural give a broader picture of disability than ever before. Now available for the first time in eBook format 978-0-203-07788-7.
Feminist Disability Studies by
Disability, like questions of race, gender, and class, is one of the most provocative topics among theorists and philosophers today. This volume, situated at the intersection of feminist theory and disability studies, addresses questions about the nature of embodiment, the meaning of disability, the impact of public policy on those who have been labeled disabled, and how we define the norms of mental and physical ability. The essays here bridge the gap between theory and activism by illuminating structures of power and showing how historical and cultural perceptions of the human body have been informed by and contributed to the oppression of women and disabled people.
Human Rights and Disability Advocacy by
The United Nations adoption of the Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities (CRPD) constituted a paradigm shift in attitudes and approaches to disability rights, marking the first time in law-making history that persons with disabilities participated as civil society representatives and contributed to the drafting of an international treaty. On the way, they brought a new kind of diplomacy forward: empowering nongovernmental stakeholders, including persons with disabilities, within human rights discourse. This landmark treaty provides an opportunity to consider what it means to involve members of a global civil society in UN-level negotiations. Human Rights and Disability Advocacy brings together perspectives from individual representatives of the Disabled People's Organizations (DPOs), nongovernmental organizations (NGOs), indigenous peoples' organizations, states, and national institutions that played leading roles in the Convention's drafting process. The contributors provide vivid and personal accounts of the paths to victory, including stumbling blocks--not all of which were overcome--and offer a unique look into the politics of civil society organizations both from within and in its interaction with governments. Each essay describes the nonnegotiable key issues for which they advocated; the extent of success in reaching their goals; and insights into the limitations they faced. Through the plurality of voices and insider perspectives, Human Rights and Disability Advocacy presents fresh perspectives on the shift toward a new diplomacy and explores the implication of this model for human rights advocacy more generally. Contributors: Andrew Byrnes, Heidi Forrest, Phillip French, Lex Grandia, Huhana Hickey, Markku Jokinen, Liisa Kauppinen, Mi Yeon Kim, Gerison Lansdown, Connie Laurin-Bowie, Tirza Leibowitz, Don MacKay, Anna MacQuarrie, Ronald C. McCallum AO, Tara J. Melish, Pamela Molina Toledo, Maya Sabatello, Marianne Schulze, Belinda Shaw.
Inclusion, Disability and Culture by
This book examines some theoretical and empirical aspects about complexities of inclusion, disability and culture. It challenges the globalized technical and reductionist approach of inclusion and argues that concepts of disability and inclusion are culturally constructed. Disability and inclusion are concepts which do not define a global agenda, in the sense that one size fits all.
Keywords for disability studies by
Keywords for Disability Studies aims to broaden and define the conceptual framework of disability studies for readers and practitioners in the field and beyond. The volume engages some of the most pressing debates of our time, such as prenatal testing, euthanasia, accessibility in public transportation and the workplace, post-traumatic stress, and questions about the beginning and end of life. Each of the 60 essays in Keywords for Disability Studies focuses on a distinct critical concept, including "ethics," "medicalization," "performance," "reproduction," "identity," and "stigma," among other.
Righting Educational Wrongs : Disability Studies in Law and Education by
Righting Educational Wrongs brings together the work of scholars from the fields of disability studies in education and law to examine contemporary struggles around in-clusion and access to education. Specifically, contributors examine policies and practices as they contribute to or undermine educational access for individuals with disabilities. Kanter and Ferri expand our understanding about the potential of legal studies to inform work around disability studies in education and vice versa. Contributors explore the intersections between disability studies, law, and education, forging a theoretical framework for thinking about educational access. Several essays take a critical look at some of the histories of exclusion in education and the ways that these exclusions have been upheld by a variety of educational policies and practices. Other essays reflect on how students with disabilities and their families experience the Individuals with Disabilities in Education Act. By bridging various disciplines, Righting Educational Wrongs offers new insights to allow us to better understand the multiple perspectives and voices within the field of disability studies.
Routledge Handbook of Disability Studies by
This fully revised and expanded second edition of the Routledge Handbook of Disability Studies takes a multidisciplinary approach to disability and provides an authoritative and up-to-date overview of the main issues in the field around the world today. Adopting an international perspective and arranged thematically, it surveys the state of the discipline, examining emerging and cutting-edge areas as well as core areas of contention. Divided in five parts, this comprehensive handbook covers: Different models and approaches to disability. How key impairment groups have engaged with disability studies and the writings within the discipline. Policy and legislation responses to disability studies and to disability activism. Disability studies and its interaction with other disciplines, such as history, philosophy, sport, and science and technology studies. Disability studies and different life experiences, examining how disability and disability studies intersects with ethnicity, sexuality, gender, childhood and ageing. Containing 15 revised chapters and 12 new chapters from an international selection of leading scholars, this authoritative handbook is an invaluable reference for all academics, researchers, and more advanced students in disability studies and associated disciplines such as sociology, health studies and social work. Chapter 6 of this book is freely available as a downloadable Open Access PDF under a Creative Commons Attribution-Non Commercial-No Derivatives 4.0 license at https://tandfbis.s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/rt-files/docs/Open+Access+Chapters/9781138365308_oachapter6.pdf.
Studying Disability by
Presenting a fully integrative text covering disability from a variety of disciplines, this innovative book first reviews existing theories, then sets forth a new viewpoint that incorporates elements from disability studies, sociology, human services, rehabilitation counseling, and public health. Authors Elizabeth DePoy and Stephen French Gilson explore the history of disability with a focus on both Western and non-Western cultures, examine the historical conceptions of disability and how they have affected the lives and civil rights of the disabled, and explore a wide range of both classic and new and emerging theories. The book concludes with a section on application of theory to practice and policy in the professional and public realm and the recommendation of a socially just community for the full range of disabled individuals.
Disability Studies 2 will provide you with further exposure to policy making, and identify the relationship between policy outcomes and various political stakeholders. In this course, you will have a better understanding of human rights, and create advocacy development plans and strategies. As future allies for Deaf leader-advocates, this course will hopefully inspire you to collaborate with and advocate to various stakeholders (lawmakers, educational administrators, etc.) for the rights of the Filipino Deaf people, emphasizing on accessibility and sign language rights.
Disability and Digital Television Cultures by
Disability and Digital Television Cultures offers an important addition to scholarly studies at the intersection of disability and media, examining disability in the context of digital television access, representation and reception. Television, as a central medium of communication, has marginalized people with disability through both representation on screen and the lack of accessibility to this medium. With accessibility options becoming available as television is switched to digital transmissions, audience research into television representations must include a corresponding consideration of access. This book provides a comprehensive and critical study of the way people with disability access and watch digital TV. International case studies and media reports are complimented by findings of a user-focused study into accessibility and representation captured during the Australian digital television switchover in 2013-2014. This book will provide a reliable, independent guide to fundamental shifts in media access while also offering insight from the disability community. It will be essential reading for researchers working on disability and media, as well as television, communications and culture; upper-level undergraduate and postgraduate students in cultural studies;¿ along with general readers with an interest in disability and digital culture. ¿
Disability and Social Media by
Social media is popularly seen as an important media for people with disability in terms of communication, exchange and activism. These sites potentially increase both employment and leisure opportunities for one of the most traditionally isolated groups in society. However, the offline inaccessible environment has, to a certain degree, been replicated online and particularly in social networking sites. Social media is becoming an increasingly important part of our lives yet the impact on people with disabilities has gone largely unscrutinised. Similarly, while social media and disability are often both observed through a focus on the Western, developed and English-speaking world, different global perspectives are often overlooked. This collection explores the opportunities and challenges social media represents for the social inclusion of people with disabilities from a variety of different global perspectives that include Africa, Arabia and Asia along with European, American and Australasian perspectives and experiences.
Disability As Diversity in Higher Education by
Addressing disability not as a form of student impairment--as it is typically perceived at the postsecondary level--but rather as an important dimension of student diversity and identity, this book explores how disability can be more effectively incorporated into college environments. Chapters propose new perspectives, empirical research, and case studies to provide the necessary foundation for understanding the role of disability within campus climate and integrating students with disabilities into academic and social settings. Contextualizing disability through the lens of intersectionality, Disability as Diversity in Higher Education illustrates how higher education institutions can use policies and practices to enhance inclusion and student success.
Disability in Local and Global Worlds by
The lives of many disabled people in Europe and North America have improved over the past two decades through innovative technologies and the efforts of the disability rights movement. These changes have been spreading to other societies around the globe--albeit unevenly. In this collection of essays, leading scholars explore global changes in disability awareness, technology, and policy from the viewpoint of disabled people and their families in a wide range of local contexts. The authors report on ethnographic research in Brazil, Uganda, Botswana, Somalia, Britain, Israel, China, Egypt, India, and Japan. They address the definition of disability, the new eugenics, human rights in local contexts, domestic and state citizenship of disabled people, and issues of identity and belonging.
Disability Studies by
Passionate, engaging and challenging, this second edition of the ground-breaking Disability Studies: An Interdisciplinary Introduction is a contemporary introduction to this diverse and complex field. Taking an interdisciplinary and critical approach, the book: examines a diverse range of theories and perspectives and engages with current debates in the field explores key areas of analysis, with chapters devoted to the individual, society, community and education applies a global perspective encompassing examples from the UK, Australia, Scandinavia, the US, and Canada. Encouraging and stimulating readers using thought-provoking questions, exercises and activities, Disability Studies is a rich and rewarding read for students and researchers engaging with disability across the social sciences.
Disability Studies by
This textbook brings together a wide range of expert voices from the field of disability studies and the disabled people′s movement to tackle the essential topics relevant to this area of study. From the outset disability is discussed from a social model perspective, demonstrating how future practice and discourse could break down barriers and lead to more equal relationships for disabled people in everyday life. An interdisciplinary and broad-ranging text, the book includes 50 chapters on topics relevant across health and social care. Reflective questions and suggestions for further reading throughout will help readers gain a critical appreciation of the subject and expand their knowledge. This will be valuable reading for students and professionals across disability studies, health, nursing, social work, social care, social policy and sociology.
Disability Studies and the Inclusive Classroom by
This book¿s mission is to integrate knowledge and practice from the fields of disability studies and special education . Parts I & II focus on the broad, foundational topics that comprise disability studies (culture, language, and history) and Parts III & IV move into practical topics (curriculum, co-teaching, collaboration, classroom organization, disability-specific teaching strategies, etc.) associated with inclusive education. This organization conforms to the belief that least restrictive environments (the goal of inclusive education) necessarily emerges from least restrictive attitudes (the goal of disability studies). Discussions throughout the book attempt to illustrate the intersection of theory and practice.
The Disability Studies Reader by
The fifth edition of The Disability Studies Reader addresses the post-identity theoretical landscape by emphasizing questions of interdependency and independence, the human-animal relationship, and issues around the construction or materiality of gender, the body, and sexuality. Selections explore the underlying biases of medical and scientific experiments and explode the binary of the sound and the diseased mind. The collection addresses physical disabilities, but as always investigates issues around pain, mental disability, and invisible disabilities as well. Featuring a new generation of scholars who are dealing with the most current issues, the fifth edition continues the Reader's tradition of remaining timely, urgent, and critical.
Disability Studies Today by
Over recent years there has been an unprecedented upsurge ofinterest in the general area of disability and disability studiesamongst academics and researchers throughout the world. This hasgenerated an increasingly expansive literature, from a variety ofperspectives, including cultural studies, development studies,geography, history, philosophy, social policy, social psychologyand sociology. Perhaps inevitably, given this heightened interest,a number of important challenges and debates have emerged whichraise many significant questions for all those interested in thisnewly emergent and increasingly important field. DisabilityStudies Today provides an invaluable introduction to and anoverview of these concerns and controversies. Although the field is increasingly interdisciplinary in nature,the emphasis is primarily a sociological one since sociologycontinues to play a central role in the development of disabilitystudies. Whilst the focus is primarily on theoretical innovationand advancement, the arguments presented in this book haveimportant political and policy implications for both disabled andnon-disabled people. Moreover, since disability studies, likeethnic, women's and gay and lesbian studies, has developedfrom a position of engagement and activism rather than one ofdetachment, the articles in this volume maintain this tradition.The book contains contributions from established figures, as wellas newcomers to the field. Topics covered include: the history ofthe development of disability studies in Britain and America, keyideas, issues and thinkers, the role of the body, divisions andhierarchies, history, power and identity, work, politics and thedisabled peoples' movement, globalization, human rights,research and the role of the academy. This book will prove invaluable to scholars, researchers,students and policy makers and, indeed, all those involved in thisincreasingly important area of social enquiry.
eQuality by
Never before have the civil rights of people with disabilities aligned so well with developments in information and communication technology. The center of the technology revolution is the Internet, which fosters unprecedented opportunities for engagement in democratic society. The Americans with Disabilities Act likewise is helping to ensure equal participation in society by people with disabilities. Globally, the Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities further affirms that persons with disabilities are entitled to the full and equal enjoyment of fundamental personal freedoms. This book is about the lived struggle for disability rights, with a focus on Web equality for people with cognitive disabilities, such as intellectual disabilities, autism, and print-related disabilities. The principles derived from the right to the Web - freedom of speech and individual dignity - are bound to lead toward full and meaningful involvement in society for persons with cognitive and other disabilities.
Ethics, Law, and Policy by
This volume in The SAGE Reference Series on Disability explores ethical, legal, and policy issues of people with disabilities, and is one of eight volumes in the cross-disciplinary and issues-based series, which examines topics central to the lives of individuals with disabilities and their families. With a balance of history, theory, research, and application, specialists set out the findings and implications of research and practice for others whose current or future work involves the care and/or study of those with disabilities, as well as for the disabled themselves. The presentation style (concise and engaging) emphasizes accessibility. Taken individually, each volume sets out the fundamentals of the topic it addresses, accompanied by compiled data and statistics, recommended further readings, a guide to organizations and associations, and other annotated resources, thus providing the ideal introductory platform and gateway for further study. Taken together, the series represents both a survey of major disability issues and a guide to new directions and trends and contemporary resources in the field as a whole.
Family Policy and Disability by
This book explores the status and scope of family policies related to households of children with disabilities, providing an in-depth, evidence-based review of legal, programmatic issues. It includes a discussion of the gaps between family needs and contemporary family policies in the United States and European countries, as demonstrated in these households' surveys. In addition, the volume offers a comparative analysis of cash benefits, tax credits and deductions, and in-kind provisions between the United States and select European countries (UK, France, and Sweden). Most importantly, this book identifies and continues the discussion regarding the critical role of family-centered policies, as expressed in the United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities (UNCRPD), as well as the future of family policy toward families of children with disabilities at a time of economic crisis.
The Global Politics of Impairment and Disability by
Disability is of central concern to the developing world but has largely been under-represented in global development debates, discourses and negotiations. Similarly, disability studies has overlooked both the theorists and the social experience of the global South, and there has been a one-way transfer of ideas and knowledge from the North to the South in this field. This volume seeks to redress the processes of scholarly colonialism by drawing together a diverse set of understandings, theorizing and experiences. The chapters situate disability within the Southern context and support the work of Southern disabled scholars and activists seeking to decolonize Southern experiences, knowledges and absences in the field while simultaneously attempting to make an intervention into able-bodied (mainstream) development discourses, practices and politics. This book was originally published as a special issue of Third World Quarterly.
Handbook of Disability Studies by
This path-breaking international handbook of disability studies signals the emergence of a vital new area of scholarship, social policy and activism. Drawing on the insights of disability scholars around the world and the creative advice of an international editorial board, the book engages the reader in the critical issues and debates framing disability studies and places them in an historical and cultural context. Five years in the making, this one volume summarizes the ongoing discourse ranging across continents and traditional academic disciplines. To provide insight and perspective, the volume is divided into three sections: The shaping of disability studies as a field; experiencing disability; and, disability in context. Each section, written by world class figures, consists of original chapters designed to map the field and explore the key conceptual, theoretical, methodological, practice and policy issues that constitute the field. Each chapter provides a critical review of an area, positions and literature and an agenda for future research and practice. The handbook answers the need expressed by the disability community for a thought provoking, interdisciplinary, international examination of the vibrant field of disability studies. The book will be of interest to disabled people, scholars, policy makers and activists alike. The book aims to define the existing field, stimulate future debate, encourage respectful discourse between different interest groups and move the field a step forward.
Intellectual Disability by
Intellectual Disability: Ethics, Dehumanization, and a New Moral Community presents an interdisciplinary exploration of the roots and evolution of the dehumanization of people with intellectual disabilities. Examines the roots of disability ethics from a psychological, philosophical, and educational perspective Presents a coherent, sustained moral perspective in examining the historical dehumanization of people with diminished cognitive abilities Includes a series of narratives and case descriptions to illustrate arguments Reveals the importance of an interdisciplinary understanding of the social construction of intellectual disability
Keywords for Disability Studies by
Introduces key terms, concepts, debates, and histories for Disability Studies Keywords for Disability Studies aims to broaden and define the conceptual framework of disability studies for readers and practitioners in the field and beyond. The volume engages some of the most pressing debates of our time, such as prenatal testing, euthanasia, accessibility in public transportation and the workplace, post-traumatic stress, and questions about the beginning and end of life. Each of the 60 essays in Keywords for Disability Studies focuses on a distinct critical concept, including "ethics," "medicalization," "performance," "reproduction," "identity," and "stigma," among others. Although the essays recognize that "disability" is often used as an umbrella term, the contributors to the volume avoid treating individual disabilities as keywords, and instead interrogate concepts that encompass different components of the social and bodily experience of disability. The essays approach disability as an embodied condition, a mutable historical phenomenon, and a social, political, and cultural identity. An invaluable resource for students and scholars alike, Keywords for Disability Studies brings the debates that have often remained internal to disability studies into a wider field of critical discourse, providing opportunities for fresh theoretical considerations of the field's core presuppositions through a variety of disciplinary perspectives. Visit keywords.nyupress.org for online essays, teaching resources, and more.
Learning Disabilities by
This edition presents guidelines for using Response to Intervention (RTI) as an eligibility tool as well as differentiated instruction for the general education class. Detailed coverage of the most up-to-date classroom practices, the latest research, and critical issues are also presented. Using the author's more than 27 years of experience in working with children and adolescents who have learning disabilities, the Sixth Edition of Learning Disabilities presents the latest research and information on LD in each developmental area. It focuses on identification and eligibility issues, incorporating the newly released rules and regulations on RTI, IDEA 2004, and the No Child Left Behind legislation. The text also stresses both the characteristics of students with learning disabilities as well as classroom-tested instructional strategies. With up-to-date content, this practical guide also offers insight into practical educational concerns from a teacher's perspective, as well as the relevant scholarship.
Moving Beyond Boundaries in Disability Studies by
What challenges are posed by changing transnational trends, agendas and movements that affect disabled people's lives, and what can disabled people, their representative organisations and their governments do to advance the agenda for self-determination and inclusion? This book draws together the writing of academics and activists to depict the experience and perspective of disabled people in relation to a range of contemporary social changes, with a focus firmly on ways in which disabled people and their allies can act to counter disabling policies and practices. Throughout the book there is an emphasis on disabled people's own voices and activism as the critical driver of theoretical critique and practical change. Chapters address a wide range of cultural, institutional and personal arenas to explore and contest the boundaries that disabled people seek to move beyond, from cross-border labour movements in Korea to experience of day services in England, from continuing and long-lasting realities of wars in Lebanon, Cambodia and Somalia to the beauty of harmony in Navajo traditions for understanding disability, from collective activism to individual participation in the Olympics. This book is recommended reading for students, researchers and activists interested in Disability Studies and is directly relevant to policy makers and practitioners in a position to reshape rights, spaces and innovations in response to the priorities disabled people feel and articulate are important for their lives. It was originally published as a special issue of Disability & Society.
Rethinking Disability by
Now in its second edition, Rethinking Disability introduces new and experienced teachers to ethical framings of disability and strategies for effectively teaching and including students with disabilities in the general education classroom. Grounded in a disability studies framework, this text¿s unique narrative style encourages readers to examine their beliefs about disability and the influence of historical and cultural meanings of disability upon their work as teachers. The second edition offers clear and applicable suggestions for creating dynamic and inclusive classroom cultures, getting to know students, selecting appropriate instructional and assessment strategies, co-teaching, and promoting an inclusive school culture. This second edition is fully revised and updated to include a brief history of disability through the ages, the relevance of current educational policies to inclusion, technology in the inclusive classroom, intersectionality and its influence upon inclusive practices, working with families, and issues of transition from school to the post-school world. Each chapter now also includes a featured "voice from the field" written by persons with disabilities, parents, and teachers.
Disability Studies 2 will provide you with further exposure to policy making, and identify the relationship between policy outcomes and various political stakeholders. In this course, you will have a better understanding of human rights, and create advocacy development plans and strategies. As future allies for Deaf leader-advocates, this course will hopefully inspire you to collaborate with and advocate to various stakeholders (lawmakers, educational administrators, etc.) for the rights of the Filipino Deaf people, emphasizing on accessibility and sign language rights.
Culture - theory - disability : encounters between disability studies and cultural studies by
Which theoretical and methodological approaches of contemporary cultural criticism resonate within the field of disability studies? What can cultural studies gain by incorporating disability more fully into its toolbox for critical analysis? Culture - Theory - Disability features contributions by leading international cultural disability studies scholars which are complemented with a diverse range of responses from across the humanities spectrum. This essential volume encourages the problematization of disability in connection with critical theories of literary and cultural representation, aesthetics, politics, science and technology, sociology, and philosophy. It includes essays by Lennard J. Davis, Rosemarie Garland-Thomson, Dan Goodley, Robert McRuer and Margrit Shildrick.
Deaf and disability studies : interdisciplinary perspectives by
This collection presents 14 essays by renowned scholars on Deaf people, Deafhood, Deaf histories, and Deaf identity, but from different points of view on the Deaf/Disability compass. Editors Susan Burch and Alison Kafer have divided these works around three themes. The first, Identities and Locations, explores Deaf identity in different contexts. Topics range from a history of activism shaped by the ableism of Deaf elites in the United States from 1880-1920, to a discussion of the roles that economics, location, race, and culture play in the experiences of a Deaf woman from northern Nigeria now living in Washington, D.C. Alliances and Activism showcases activism organized across differences. Studies include a feminist analysis of how deaf and hearing women working together share responsibility, and an examination of how intra-cultural variations in New York City and Quebec affect deaf-focus HIV/AIDS programs. The third theme, Boundaries and Overlaps, explicitly addresses the relationships between Deaf Studies and Disability Studies. Interviews with scholars from both disciplines help define these relationships. Another contributor calls for hearing/not-deaf people with disabilities to support their Deaf peers in gaining langue access to the United Nations. Deaf and Disability Studies: Interdisciplinary Perspectives reveals that different questions often lead to contrary conclusions among their authors, who still recognize that they all have a stake in this partnership.
Disability, health and human development by
This open access book introduces the human development model to define disability and map its links with health and wellbeing, based on Sen's capability approach. The author uses panel survey data with internationally comparable questions on disability for Ethiopia, Malawi, Tanzania and Uganda. It presents evidence on the prevalence of disability and its strong and consistent association with multidimensional poverty, mortality, economic insecurity and deprivations in education, morbidity and employment. It shows that disability needs to be considered from multiple angles including aging, gender, health and poverty. Ultimately, this study makes a call for inclusion and prevention interventions as solutions to the deprivations associated with impairments and health conditions.
Disability, Human Rights, and Information Technology by
Disability, Human Rights, and Information Technology addresses the global issue of equal access to information and communications technology for persons with disabilities.
Disability and Discourse Analysis by
Although efforts have been made to integrate disability into the discourse analysis and conversation analysis canon, the link between the two fields needs to be strengthened. This ground-breaking volume contributes to this link by thoroughly applying the analytical vocabulary of discourse analysis to issues that are central to the field of disability studies. It strengthens disability studies by supplying case studies of representations and constructions of disability and disabled people in discourse, theorizes the role played by language in the social construction of disability, and makes disability a more salient topic for discourse analysts.
Disability and social media : global perspectives by
Social media is popularly seen as an important media for people with disability in terms of communication, exchange and activism. These sites potentially increase both employment and leisure opportunities for one of the most traditionally isolated groups in society. However, the offline inaccessible environment has, to a certain degree, been replicated online and particularly in social networking sites. Social media is becoming an increasingly important part of our lives yet the impact on people with disabilities has gone largely unscrutinised. Similarly, while social media and disability are often both observed through a focus on the Western, developed and English-speaking world, different global perspectives are often overlooked. This collection explores the opportunities and challenges social media represents for the social inclusion of people with disabilities from a variety of different global perspectives that include Africa, Arabia and Asia along with European, American and Australasian perspectives and experiences.
Disability Human Rights and the Limits of Humanitarianism by
Contemporary human rights discourses problematically co-opt disabled bodies as 'evidence' of harms done under capitalism, war, and other forms of conflict, while humanitarian non-governmental organizations often use disabled bodies to generate resources for their humanitarian projects. It is the connection between civil rights and human rights, and the concomitant relationship between national and global, which foregrounds this book's contention that disability studies productively challenge such human rights paradigms, which troublingly eschew disability rights in favor of exclusionary humanitarianism.
Disability media studies by
Introduces key ideas and offers a sense of the new frontiers and questions in the emerging field of disability media studies. Disability Media Studies articulates the formation of a new field of study, based in the rich traditions of media, cultural, and disability studies. Necessarily interdisciplinary and diverse, this collection weaves together work from scholars from a variety of disciplinary homes, into a broader conversation about exploring media artifacts in relation to disability. The book provides a comprehensive overview for anyone interested in the study of disability and media today. Case studies include familiar contemporary examples such as Iron Man 3, Lady Gaga, and Oscar Pistorius as well as historical media, independent disability media, reality television, and media technologies. The contributors consider disability representation, the role of media in forming cultural assumptions about ability, the construction of disability via media technologies, and how disabled audiences respond to particular media artifacts. The volume concludes with afterwords from two different perspectives on the field one by disability scholar Rachel Adams, the other by media scholars Mara Mills and Jonathan Sterne that reflect upon the collection, the ongoing conversations, and the future of disability media studies. -- Amazon.com.
Disability Studies by
The chapters contributing to this edited volume are presented to assist readers with a critical examination of contemporary practice and offer a concerted response to improving inclusive education. The chapters address a range of important topics related to the field of critical disability studies in education and include sections dedicated to Schools, Higher Education, Family and Community and Theorising.
Disability Studies : a Student's Guide by
This textbook brings together a wide range of expert voices from the field of disability studies and the disabled people's movement to tackle the essential topics relevant to this area of study. From the outset disability is discussed from a social model perspective, demonstrating how future practice and discourse could break down barriers and lead to more equal relationships for disabled people in everyday life.
An interdisciplinary and broad-ranging text, the book includes 50 chapters on topics relevant across health and social care. Reflective questions and suggestions for further reading throughout will help readers gain a critical appreciation of the subject and expand their knowledge.
This will be valuable reading for students and professionals across disability studies, health, nursing, social work, social care, social policy and sociology.
Disability Studies and the Environmental Humanities by
Although scholars in the environmental humanities have been exploring the dichotomy between "wild" and "built" environments for several years, few have focused on the field of disability studies, a discipline that enlists the contingency between environments and bodies as a foundation of its scholarship. On the other hand, scholars in disability studies have demonstrated the ways in which the built environment privileges some bodies and minds over others, yet they have rarely examined the ways in which toxic environments engender chronic illness and disability or how environmental illnesses disrupt dominant paradigms for scrutinizing "disability." Designed as a reader for undergraduate and graduate courses, Disability Studies and the Environmental Humanities employs interdisciplinary perspectives to examine such issues as slow violence, imperialism, race, toxicity, eco-sickness, the body in environmental justice, ableism, and other topics. With a historical scope spanning the seventeenth century to the present, this collection not only presents the foundational documents informing this intersection of fields but also showcases the most current work, making it an indispensable reference.
The Disability Studies Reader by
The Fourth Edition of the Disability Studies Reader breaks new ground by emphasizing the global, transgender, homonational, and posthuman conceptions of disability. Including physical disabilities, but exploring issues around pain, mental disability, and invisible disabilities, this edition explores more varieties of bodily and mental experience. New histories of the legal, social, and cultural give a broader picture of disability than ever before. Now available for the first time in eBook format 978-0-203-07788-7.
Ethics, Law, and Policy by
This volume in The SAGE Reference Series on Disability explores ethical, legal, and policy issues of people with disabilities, and is one of eight volumes in the cross-disciplinary and issues-based series, which examines topics central to the lives of individuals with disabilities and their families. With a balance of history, theory, research, and application, specialists set out the findings and implications of research and practice for others whose current or future work involves the care and/or study of those with disabilities, as well as for the disabled themselves. The presentation style (concise and engaging) emphasizes accessibility. Taken individually, each volume sets out the fundamentals of the topic it addresses, accompanied by compiled data and statistics, recommended further readings, a guide to organizations and associations, and other annotated resources, thus providing the ideal introductory platform and gateway for further study. Taken together, the series represents both a survey of major disability issues and a guide to new directions and trends and contemporary resources in the field as a whole.
Human Rights and Disability Advocacy by
The United Nations adoption of the Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities (CRPD) constituted a paradigm shift in attitudes and approaches to disability rights, marking the first time in law-making history that persons with disabilities participated as civil society representatives and contributed to the drafting of an international treaty. On the way, they brought a new kind of diplomacy forward: empowering nongovernmental stakeholders, including persons with disabilities, within human rights discourse. This landmark treaty provides an opportunity to consider what it means to involve members of a global civil society in UN-level negotiations. Human Rights and Disability Advocacy brings together perspectives from individual representatives of the Disabled People's Organizations (DPOs), nongovernmental organizations (NGOs), indigenous peoples' organizations, states, and national institutions that played leading roles in the Convention's drafting process. The contributors provide vivid and personal accounts of the paths to victory, including stumbling blocks--not all of which were overcome--and offer a unique look into the politics of civil society organizations both from within and in its interaction with governments. Each essay describes the nonnegotiable key issues for which they advocated; the extent of success in reaching their goals; and insights into the limitations they faced. Through the plurality of voices and insider perspectives, Human Rights and Disability Advocacy presents fresh perspectives on the shift toward a new diplomacy and explores the implication of this model for human rights advocacy more generally. Contributors: Andrew Byrnes, Heidi Forrest, Phillip French, Lex Grandia, Huhana Hickey, Markku Jokinen, Liisa Kauppinen, Mi Yeon Kim, Gerison Lansdown, Connie Laurin-Bowie, Tirza Leibowitz, Don MacKay, Anna MacQuarrie, Ronald C. McCallum AO, Tara J. Melish, Pamela Molina Toledo, Maya Sabatello, Marianne Schulze, Belinda Shaw.
Inclusion, Disability and Culture by
This book examines some theoretical and empirical aspects about complexities of inclusion, disability and culture. It challenges the globalized technical and reductionist approach of inclusion and argues that concepts of disability and inclusion are culturally constructed. Disability and inclusion are concepts which do not define a global agenda, in the sense that one size fits all.
Keywords for disability studies by
Keywords for Disability Studies aims to broaden and define the conceptual framework of disability studies for readers and practitioners in the field and beyond. The volume engages some of the most pressing debates of our time, such as prenatal testing, euthanasia, accessibility in public transportation and the workplace, post-traumatic stress, and questions about the beginning and end of life. Each of the 60 essays in Keywords for Disability Studies focuses on a distinct critical concept, including "ethics," "medicalization," "performance," "reproduction," "identity," and "stigma," among other.
Righting Educational Wrongs : Disability Studies in Law and Education by
Righting Educational Wrongs brings together the work of scholars from the fields of disability studies in education and law to examine contemporary struggles around in-clusion and access to education. Specifically, contributors examine policies and practices as they contribute to or undermine educational access for individuals with disabilities. Kanter and Ferri expand our understanding about the potential of legal studies to inform work around disability studies in education and vice versa. Contributors explore the intersections between disability studies, law, and education, forging a theoretical framework for thinking about educational access. Several essays take a critical look at some of the histories of exclusion in education and the ways that these exclusions have been upheld by a variety of educational policies and practices. Other essays reflect on how students with disabilities and their families experience the Individuals with Disabilities in Education Act. By bridging various disciplines, Righting Educational Wrongs offers new insights to allow us to better understand the multiple perspectives and voices within the field of disability studies.
Routledge Handbook of Disability Studies by
This fully revised and expanded second edition of the Routledge Handbook of Disability Studies takes a multidisciplinary approach to disability and provides an authoritative and up-to-date overview of the main issues in the field around the world today. Adopting an international perspective and arranged thematically, it surveys the state of the discipline, examining emerging and cutting-edge areas as well as core areas of contention. Divided in five parts, this comprehensive handbook covers: Different models and approaches to disability. How key impairment groups have engaged with disability studies and the writings within the discipline. Policy and legislation responses to disability studies and to disability activism. Disability studies and its interaction with other disciplines, such as history, philosophy, sport, and science and technology studies. Disability studies and different life experiences, examining how disability and disability studies intersects with ethnicity, sexuality, gender, childhood and ageing. Containing 15 revised chapters and 12 new chapters from an international selection of leading scholars, this authoritative handbook is an invaluable reference for all academics, researchers, and more advanced students in disability studies and associated disciplines such as sociology, health studies and social work. Chapter 6 of this book is freely available as a downloadable Open Access PDF under a Creative Commons Attribution-Non Commercial-No Derivatives 4.0 license at https://tandfbis.s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/rt-files/docs/Open+Access+Chapters/9781138365308_oachapter6.pdf.
Studying Disability by
Presenting a fully integrative text covering disability from a variety of disciplines, this innovative book first reviews existing theories, then sets forth a new viewpoint that incorporates elements from disability studies, sociology, human services, rehabilitation counseling, and public health. Authors Elizabeth DePoy and Stephen French Gilson explore the history of disability with a focus on both Western and non-Western cultures, examine the historical conceptions of disability and how they have affected the lives and civil rights of the disabled, and explore a wide range of both classic and new and emerging theories. The book concludes with a section on application of theory to practice and policy in the professional and public realm and the recommendation of a socially just community for the full range of disabled individuals.
“A good teacher can inspire hope, ignite the imagination, and instill a love of learning.” - Brad Henry
But what if the teacher does not know how to communicate directly with the Deaf students? That is where educational interpreters play an important role. In this course, you will get to learn strategies how to interpret for Deaf students at all levels, from kindergarten all the way to university. You will be given an opportunity to observe and/or shadow interpret for various classes, so you better start brushing up on your various subjects! At the end of the course, you will realize not only is the teacher the source of hope for the Deaf students, but the interpreter has a significant role as well.
Best Practices in Educational Interpreting by
Noting that the services provided by interpreters for the deaf and hard-of-hearing in educational settings are often inferior to those offered in other domains, such as medical or judicial settings, Seal (communication sciences and disorders, James Madison U.) cautions that education interpreting.
Best Practices in Educational Interpreting by
Designed for all who work with the heterogeneous population of students with hearing loss, Best Practices in Educational Interpreting, Second Edition, and offers state-of-the-art-and-science information for interpreters in primary through higher education settings. Issues and methods are presented from a practical orientation, with representative cases that illustrate the topics. Best Practices in Educational Interpreting, Second Edition, offers state-of-the-art-and-science information for interpreters in primary through higher education settings. KEY TOPICS: This text is a comprehensive, developmentally organized overview of the process of interpreting in educational settings. Readers learn about the changing needs of the hearing impaired as they move from primary school through college. MARKET: Designed for all who work with the heterogeneous population of students with hearing loss.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
Deaf Professionals and Designated Interpreters by
Deaf Professionals and Designated Interpreters: A New Paradigm defines a new model that depends upon strong partnerships between the growing number of deaf experts and their interpreters. Editors Peter C. Hauser, Karen L. Finch, and Angela B. Hauser have called upon more than a score of widely respected researchers to discuss the new dynamics of interpreting for deaf professionals. Divided into two parts, this volume first delineates Designated Interpreting, in which interpreters team with deaf professionals to advance a shared point of view. Chapters in this section include the linguistics of the partnership (Look-Pause-Nod); the varying attitudes and behavior of deaf professionals and their interpreters; interaction in the work-related social setting to ensure equal participation; interpreting as affected by conversational style and gender factors; academic and educational interpreting for deaf academics; and adjusting company policies with professional interpreter guidelines. Part II, Deaf Professional and Designated Interpreter Partnerships, offers relevant examples of interpreting for deaf professionals in real estate, contemporary art, medicine, business administration, education, mental health, film-making, and information technology. These anecdotal chapters demonstrate the critical complexity of the relationships between professionals and interpreters, a revolutionary transformation that will be appreciated by interpreter preparation programs, instructors, interpreters, and their clients alike.
Educational Interpreting by
"This incisive book explores the current state of educational interpreting - its strengths and weaknesses - and how it affects deaf students. The contributors, all renowned experts in their field, include former educational interpreters, teachers of deaf students, interpreter trainers, and deaf recipients of interpreted educations."--Jacket.
Educational interpreting : a practical approach by 
Interpreting Educational Research by
For courses in Research Methods in Education. Interpreting Educational Research: An Introduction for Consumers of Research, fourth edition, is designed for introductory, post-baccalaureate research courses in which elementary and early childhood education teachers, reading/literacy specialists, special education teachers, content area teachers at the middle and secondary school levels, administrators and curriculum specialists are prepared as consumers rather than as producers of educational research. It provides preservice and in-service teachers with basic knowledge and skills for reading, interpreting, and evaluating both quantitative and qualitative educational research, so that they can make program, curriculum, and instructional decisions based upon those research results. This text guides learners in activities based on current integrated language arts principles and practices for reading and writing content area discourse. It also guides readers to independence in the use of techniques for reading, interpreting, evaluating, and writing about education research.
Sign Language and the Deaf Community by 
Sign Language Interpreting by
Examines past and present models of sign language interpretation, and presents two new models that address both the cognitive factors involved in the process of interpreting and the interaction of participants and environmental factors. Offers a realistic view of interpreting from the perspective of
Sign Language Interpreting by
Sign Language Interpreting: Exploring Its Art and Science is a comprehensive exploration of the practice and research relating to sign language interpreting. A pleasant conversational style of writing is used to present the problems, the issues, and the options in this field as they are known today. The reader is taken on a journey from the early days of interpreting, to the professionalization of interpreters, to an examination of past and present models of interpreting. The business and ethical aspects of interpreting are discussed while focusing on current practice.
Sign Language Interpreting and Interpreter Education by
More the 1.46 million people in the United States have hearing losses in sufficient severity to be considered deaf; another 21 million people have other hearing impairments. For many deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals, sign language and voice interpreting is essential to their participationin educational programs and their access to public and private services. However, there is less than half the number of interpreters needed to meet the demand, interpreting quality is often variable, and there is a considerable lack of knowledge of factors that contribute to successfulinterpreting. Perhaps it is not surprising, then, that a study by the National Association of the Deaf (NAD) found that 70% of the deaf individuals are dissatisfied with interpreting quality. Because recent legislation in the United States and elsewhere has mandated access to educational,employment, and other contexts for deaf individuals and others with hearing disabilities, there is an increasing need for quality sign language interpreting. It is in education, however, that the need is most pressing, particularly because more than 75% of deaf students now attend regular schools(rather than schools for the deaf), where teachers and classmates are unable to sign for themselves. In the more than 100 interpreter training programs in the U.S. alone, there are a variety of educational models, but little empirical information on how to evaluate them or determine theirappropriateness in different interpreting and interpreter education-covering what we know, what we do not know, and what we should know. Several volumes have covered interpreting and interpreter education, there are even some published dissertations that have included a single research study, and afew books have attempted to offer methods for professional interpreters or interpreter educators with nods to existing research. This is the first volume that synthesizes existing work and provides a coherent picture of the field as a whole, including evaluation of the extent to which currentpractices are supported by validating research. It will be the first comprehensive source, suitable as both a reference book and a textbook for interpreter training programs and a variety of courses on bilingual education, psycholinguistics and translation, and cross-linguistic studies.
Understanding and Interpreting Educational Research by
This user-friendly text takes a learn-by-doing approach to exploring research design issues in education and psychology, offering evenhanded coverage of quantitative, qualitative, mixed-methods, and single-case designs. Readers learn the basics of different methods and steps for critically examining any study's design, data, and conclusions, using sample peer-reviewed journal articles as practice opportunities. The text is unique in featuring full chapters on survey methods, evaluation, reliability and validity, action research, and research syntheses. Pedagogical Features *An exemplar journal article at the end of each methods chapter, together with questions and activities for critiquing it (including, where applicable, checklist forms to identify threats to internal and external validity), plus lists of additional research examples. *Research example boxes showing how studies are designed to address particular research questions. *In every chapter: numbered chapter objectives, bulleted summaries, subheadings written as questions, a running glossary, and end-of-chapter discussion questions. * Electronic Instructor's Resource Manual with Test Bank, provided separately--includes chapter outlines; answers to exercises, discussion questions, and illustrative example questions; and PowerPoints.
“A good teacher can inspire hope, ignite the imagination, and instill a love of learning.” - Brad Henry
But what if the teacher does not know how to communicate directly with the Deaf students? That is where educational interpreters play an important role. In this course, you will get to learn strategies how to interpret for Deaf students at all levels, from kindergarten all the way to university. You will be given an opportunity to observe and/or shadow interpret for various classes, so you better start brushing up on your various subjects! At the end of the course, you will realize not only is the teacher the source of hope for the Deaf students, but the interpreter has a significant role as well.
Best Practices in Educational Interpreting by
Designed for all who work with the heterogeneous population of students with hearing loss, Best Practices in Educational Interpreting, Second Edition, and offers state-of-the-art-and-science information for interpreters in primary through higher education settings. Issues and methods are presented from a practical orientation, with representative cases that illustrate the topics. Best Practices in Educational Interpreting, Second Edition, offers state-of-the-art-and-science information for interpreters in primary through higher education settings. KEY TOPICS: This text is a comprehensive, developmentally organized overview of the process of interpreting in educational settings. Readers learn about the changing needs of the hearing impaired as they move from primary school through college. MARKET: Designed for all who work with the heterogeneous population of students with hearing loss.
Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research by
This volume brings together the best research presented at the first International Symposium on Signed Language Interpreting and Translation Research. Editors Brenda Nicodemus and Keith Cagle have gathered an international group of contributors who are recognized leaders in signed language interpreter education and research. The ten papers in Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research cover a range of topics, including the need for Deaf perspectives in interpretation research, discourse strategies and techniques that are unique to video relay call settings, the benefits of using sociology as a lens for examining sign language interpreting work, translating university entrance exams from written Portuguese into Libras (Brazilian Sign Language), the linguistic choices interpreters make when interpreting ASL figurative language into English, the nature of designated interpreting, and grammatical ambiguity in trilingual VRS interpreting. The research findings and insights contained here will be invaluable to scholars, students, and practitioners.
Sign Language Interpreting and Interpreter Education by
More the 1.46 million people in the United States have hearing losses in sufficient severity to be considered deaf; another 21 million people have other hearing impairments. For many deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals, sign language and voice interpreting is essential to their participation in educational programs and their access to public and private services. However, there is less than half the number of interpreters needed to meet the demand, interpreting quality is often variable, and there is a considerable lack of knowledge of factors that contribute to successful interpreting. Perhaps it is not surprising, then, that a study by the National Association of the Deaf (NAD) found that 70% of the deaf individuals are dissatisfied with interpreting quality. Because recent legislation in the United States and elsewhere has mandated access to educational, employment, and other contexts for deaf individuals and others with hearing disabilities, there is an increasing need for quality sign language interpreting. It is in education, however, that the need is most pressing, particularly because more than 75% of deaf students now attend regular schools (rather than schools for the deaf), where teachers and classmates are unable to sign for themselves. In the more than 100 interpreter training programs in the U.S. alone, there are a variety of educational models, but little empirical information on how to evaluate them or determine their appropriateness in different interpreting and interpreter education-covering what we know, what we do not know, and what we should know. Several volumes have covered interpreting and interpreter education, there are even some published dissertations that have included a single research study, and a few books have attempted to offer methods for professional interpreters or interpreter educators with nods to existing research. This is the first volume that synthesizes existing work and provides a coherent picture of the field as a whole, including evaluation of the extent to which current practices are supported by validating research. It will be the first comprehensive source, suitable as both a reference book and a textbook for interpreter training programs and a variety of courses on bilingual education, psycholinguistics and translation, and cross-linguistic studies.
Understanding Language and Literacy Development by
Understanding Language and Literacy Development: Diverse Learners in the Classroom offers effective supporting strategies to address the cultural and linguistic diversity of students in contemporary classrooms. Discusses learners with different linguistic abilities--infancy, early childhood, middle childhood, and adolescence--by suggesting effective ways to reach them based on their strengths and needs Emphasizes language and literacy supporting strategies in a variety of everyday classroom settings Includes activities and questions to motivate readers to think and develop their own perspectives on language and literacy development Considers a variety of different language acquisition experiences, including monolingual, multilingual, and language impairment Discusses different types of literacies, including digital and hypertext Connects language and literacy development to identity and motivation to contextualize learning styles for pre-service teachers Supported by a companion website that includes additional resources such as PowerPoint presentations by chapter and a summary of relevant information from the Common Core K-12 English Language Arts Standards
Filipino Deaf Culture and History
According to Tage Erlander, Sweden’s former Prime Minister, “Today’s problem cannot be solved without a sound understanding of the past.” In this light, FIDECHI will provide you with an overview of significant milestones and important figures that paved the progress of the Filipino Deaf community, allowing you to have a better understanding of its past and present history, and how it has shaped the interpreting profession. Through this course, you will have a deeper understanding of the community we will be working with by appreciating and embracing their culture and history.
Deaf culture A to Z by
An alphabetic look at Deaf culture.
Deaf gain : raising the stakes for human diversity by
Deaf people are usually regarded by the hearing world as having a lack, as missing a sense. Yet a definition of deaf people based on hearing loss obscures a wealth of ways in which societies have benefited from the significant contributions of deaf people. In this bold intervention into ongoing debates about disability and what it means to be human, experts from a variety of disciplines--neuroscience, linguistics, bioethics, history, cultural studies, education, public policy, art, and architecture--advance the concept of Deaf Gain and challenge assumptions about what is normal. Through their in-depth articulation of Deaf Gain, the editors and authors of this pathbreaking volume approach deafness as a distinct way of being in the world, one which opens up perceptions, perspectives, and insights that are less common to the majority of hearing persons. For example, deaf individuals tend to have unique capabilities in spatial and facial recognition, peripheral processing, and the detection of images. And users of sign language, which neuroscientists have shown to be biologically equivalent to speech, contribute toward a robust range of creative expression and understanding. By framing deafness in terms of its intellectual, creative, and cultural benefits, Deaf Gain recognizes physical and cognitive difference as a vital aspect of human diversity. Contributors: David Armstrong; Benjamin Bahan, Gallaudet U; Hansel Bauman, Gallaudet U; John D. Bonvillian, U of Virginia; Alison Bryan; Teresa Blankmeyer Burke, Gallaudet U; Cindee Calton; Debra Cole; Matthew Dye, U of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign; Steve Emery; Ofelia García, CUNY; Peter C. Hauser, Rochester Institute of Technology; Geo Kartheiser; Caroline Kobek Pezzarossi; Christopher Krentz, U of Virginia; Annelies Kusters; Irene W. Leigh, Gallaudet U; Elizabeth M. Lockwood, U of Arizona; Summer Loeffler; Mara Lúcia Massuti, Instituto Federal de Santa Catarina, Brazil; Donna A. Morere, Gallaudet U; Kati Morton; Ronice Müller de Quadros, U Federal de Santa Catarina, Brazil; Donna Jo Napoli, Swarthmore College; Jennifer Nelson, Gallaudet U; Laura-Ann Petitto, Gallaudet U; Suvi Pylvänen, Kymenlaakso U of Applied Sciences; Antti Raike, Aalto U; Päivi Rainò, U of Applied Sciences Humak; Katherine D. Rogers; Clara Sherley-Appel; Kristin Snoddon, U of Alberta; Karin Strobel, U Federal de Santa Catarina, Brazil; Hilary Sutherland; Rachel Sutton-Spence, U of Bristol, England; James Tabery, U of Utah; Jennifer Grinder Witteborg; Mark Zaurov.
Deaf studies today! : beyond talk by
Beyond Talk: Deaf Studies Today! 2012 Conference Proceedings contains original submissions by presenters at the conference held on the campus of Utah Valley University. This volume is the fifth in the series of proceedings from the Deaf Studies Today! conference. It features papers by the following authors: Patti Durr Christine B Brown Andrew Byrne, Ph.D. Merrilee Gietz Heather Clark Hannah M. Dostal, Ph.D. and Lisa M. Bowers Brian Malzkuhn Joseph Hill, Ph.D. Lewis Kummer, Ed.D. and Cynthia Plue, Ed.D. J. Freeman King, Ed.D. Rebecca Furland Nigel Howard and Liz Scully David H. Smith, Ph.D. and Bryan Berrett, Ed.D Sheryl B. Cooper, Ph.D. and Jody H. Cripps, Ph.D. Tabitha Jacques Mark Zaurov Carol Sanderson-MacNicholl Noppawan Chainarong, Vee Yee Chong, and Jennifer Witteborg
Early literacy behaviors of Filipino deaf children by Filipino sign language : a compilation of signs from regions of the Philippines. by For hearing people only : answers to some of the most commonly asked questions about the deaf community, its culture, and the "deaf reality" by
Provides answers to commonly asked questions about deaf people, their culture, and their language.
An Introduction to Filipino Sign Language by 
The Life Story of Mother Delight Rice and Her Children by
Delight Rice, the hearing daughter of deaf parents, was a pioneering teacher of deaf-blind pupils at the Wisconsin and Ohio Schools for the Deaf during the early 1900s. In 1907 the U.S. government sent her to establish a deaf education system in the Philippines, which was occupied by American military forces during the Spanish-American War. Initially unable to find any deaf children in Manila and surrounding provinces, she and American constabularies ventured into the interior mountains, heavily populated by wild, hostile headhunting tribes, in search of deaf children. They rode U.S. Army wagons and on burros for more than 1,000 miles on their successful mission. This book chronicles Delight Rice's life and legendary contributions to deaf education in the United States and the Philippines.
Many Ways to Be Deaf by
Twenty-four international scholars contribute articles on linguistic and cultural diversity in deaf communities worldwide, including Japan, Viet Nam, Nigeria, Ireland, Brazil, and the United States. The wide- ranging topics include the evolution of British fingerspelling beginning in the 17th centur
The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies, Language, and Education by
The field of deaf studies, language, and education has grown dramatically over the past forty years. From work on the linguistics of sign language and parent-child interactions to analyses of school placement and the the mapping of brain function in deaf individuals, research across a range ofdisciplines has greatly expanded not just our knowledge of deafness and the deaf, but also the very origins of language, social interaction, and thinking.In this updated edition of the landmark original volume, a range of international experts present a comprehensive overview of the field of deaf studies, language, and education. Written for students, practitioners, and researchers, The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies, Language, and Education, Volume1, is a uniquely ambitious work that has altered both the theoretical and applied landscapes.Pairing practical information with detailed analyses of what works, why, and for whom - all while banishing the paternalism that once dogged the field - this first of two volumes features specially-commissioned, updated essays on topics including: language and language development, hearing andspeech perception, education, literacy, cognition, and the complex cultural, social, and psychological issues associated with deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. The range of these topics shows the current state of research and identifies the opportunites and challenges that lie ahead.Combining historical background, research, and strategies for teaching and service provision, the two-volume Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies, Language, and Education stands as the benchmark reference work in the field of deaf studies.
The SAGE Deaf Studies Encyclopedia by
The time has come for a new in-depth encyclopedic collection of entries defining the current state of Deaf Studies at an international level using critical and intersectional lenses encompassing the field. The emergence of Deaf Studies programs at colleges and universities and the broadened knowledge of social sciences (including but not limited to Deaf History, Deaf Culture, Signed Languages, Deaf Bilingual Education, Deaf Art, and more) have served to expand the activities of research, teaching, analysis, and curriculum development. The field has experienced a major shift due to increasing awareness of Deaf Studies research since the mid-1960s. The field has been further influenced by the Deaf community's movement, resistance, activism and politics worldwide, as well as the impact of technological advances, such as in communications, with cell phones, computers, and other devices. This new Encyclopedia shifts focus away from the medical model that has view deaf individuals as needing to be remedied in order to correct so-called hearing and speaking deficiencies for the sole purpose of assimilation into mainstream society. The members of deaf communities are part of a distinct cultural and linguistic group with a unique, vibrant community, and way of being. As precedence, The SAGE Deaf Studies Encyclopedia carves out a new and critical perspective that breathes meaning into organic deaf experiences through a new critical theory lens. Such a focus is novel in that it comes from deaf and hearing allies of the communities where historically, institutions of medicine and disability ride roughshod over authentic experiences.
Signs and voices : deaf culture, identity, language, and arts by
Cochlear implants, mainstreaming, genetic engineering, and other ethical dilemmas confronting deaf people mandated a new, wide-ranging examination of these issues, fulfilled by Signs and Voices: Deaf Culture, Identity, Language, and Arts. This collection, carefully chosen from the 2004 Signs and Voices Conference, the Presidential Forum on American Sign Language at the Modern Language Association Convention, and other sources, addresses all of the factors now changing the cultural landscape for deaf people. To ensure quality and breadth of knowledge, editors Kristin A. Lingren, Doreen DeLuca, and Donna Jo Napoli selected the work of renowned scholars and performers Shannon Allen, H-Dirksen L. Bauman, Adrian Blue, Brenda Jo Brueggemann, Teresa Blankmeyer Burke, Peter Cook, David P. Corina, Michael Davidson, Kristen Harmon, Tom Humphries, Sotaro Kita, Heather Knapp, Robert G. Lee, Irene W. Leigh, Kenny Lerner, Carole Neidle, Peter Novak, AslI Özyürek, David M. Perlmutter, Anne Senghas, and Ronnie Wilbur. Signs and Voices is divided into three sections--Culture and Identity, Language and Literacy, and American Sign Language in the Arts--each of which focuses on a particular set of theoretical and practical concerns. Also, the included DVD presents many of the performances from the Arts section. Taken together, these essays and DVD point to new directions in a broad range of fields, including cognitive science, deaf studies, disability studies, education, linguistics, literary criticism, philosophy, and psychology. This extraordinary showcase of innovative and rigorous cross-disciplinary study will prove invaluable to everyone interested in the current state of the Deaf community.
Understanding Deaf Culture by
This book presents a 'Traveller's Guide' to Deaf Culture, starting from the premise that Deaf cultures have an important contribution to make to other academic disciplines, and human lives in general. Within and outside Deaf communities, there is a need for an account of the new concept of Deaf culture, which enables readers to assess its place alongside work on other minority cultures and multilingual discourses. The book aims to assess the concepts of culture, on their own terms and in their many guises and to apply these to Deaf communities. The author illustrates the pitfalls which have been created for those communities by the medical concept of 'deafness' and contrasts this with his new concept of "Deafhood", a process by which every Deaf child, family and adult implicitly explains their existence in the world to themselves and each other.
Filipino Deaf Culture and History
According to Tage Erlander, Sweden’s former Prime Minister, “Today’s problem cannot be solved without a sound understanding of the past.” In this light, FIDECHI will provide you with an overview of significant milestones and important figures that paved the progress of the Filipino Deaf community, allowing you to have a better understanding of its past and present history, and how it has shaped the interpreting profession. Through this course, you will have a deeper understanding of the community we will be working with by appreciating and embracing their culture and history.
The deaf history reader by
The Deaf History Reader presents nine masterful chapters that bring together a remarkably vivid depiction of the varied Deaf experience in America. This collection features the finest scholarship from a noteworthy group of historians, including Reginald Boyd, Barry A. Crouch, Mary French, Brian H. Greenwald, Harlan Lane, Harry G. Lang, Kent R. Olney, Richard Pillard, Jill Hendricks Porco, Michael Reis, and volume editor John Vickrey Van Cleve. The incisive articles collected here include an exploration of the genesis of the Deaf community and early evidence of the use of sign language; a comparison of a failed, oralist school for deaf students in Virginia to the success of the American School for the Deaf in Hartford, Connecticut; the development of Deaf consciousness among people who carried a dominant gene for deafness; a biographical sketch of Mary Ann Walworth Booth, an accomplished deaf woman who lived on the Western frontier; an account of Deaf agency in the Indiana Institution and the Evansville Day School; the early antecedents of mainstreaming deaf children despite the objections of their parents; a profile of Alexander Graham Bell that contrasts his support of eugenics to his defense of Deaf rights; the conflicting actions of supervisors of the Pennsylvania Society for the Advancement of the Deaf; and finally, the critical role played by deaf people in the Chicago Mission for the Deaf's success in maintaining the Deaf community for more than five decades. The remarkably rich range of topics treated in The Deaf History Reader assure its future status as a standard resource for all Deaf scholars and students.
For hearing people only : answers to some of the most commonly asked questions about the deaf community, its culture, and the "deaf reality" by
Provides answers to commonly asked questions about deaf people, their culture, and their language.
Learning to Be Deaf by
The Contributions to the Sociology of Language series features publications dealing with sociolinguistic theory, methods, findings and applications. It addresses the study of language in society in its broadest sense, as a truly international and interdisciplinary field in which various approaches - theoretical and empirical - supplement and complement each other. The series invites the attention of scholars interested in language in society from a broad range of disciplines - anthropology, education, history, linguistics, political science, and sociology. To discuss your book idea or submit a proposal, please contact Natalie Fecher.
The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies, Language, and Education by
The field of deaf studies, language, and education has grown dramatically over the past forty years. From work on the linguistics of sign language and parent-child interactions to analyses of school placement and the the mapping of brain function in deaf individuals, research across a range ofdisciplines has greatly expanded not just our knowledge of deafness and the deaf, but also the very origins of language, social interaction, and thinking.In this updated edition of the landmark original volume, a range of international experts present a comprehensive overview of the field of deaf studies, language, and education. Written for students, practitioners, and researchers, The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies, Language, and Education, Volume1, is a uniquely ambitious work that has altered both the theoretical and applied landscapes.Pairing practical information with detailed analyses of what works, why, and for whom - all while banishing the paternalism that once dogged the field - this first of two volumes features specially-commissioned, updated essays on topics including: language and language development, hearing andspeech perception, education, literacy, cognition, and the complex cultural, social, and psychological issues associated with deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. The range of these topics shows the current state of research and identifies the opportunites and challenges that lie ahead.Combining historical background, research, and strategies for teaching and service provision, the two-volume Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies, Language, and Education stands as the benchmark reference work in the field of deaf studies.
The SAGE Deaf Studies Encyclopedia by
The time has come for a new in-depth encyclopedic collection of entries defining the current state of Deaf Studies at an international level using critical and intersectional lenses encompassing the field. The emergence of Deaf Studies programs at colleges and universities and the broadened knowledge of social sciences (including but not limited to Deaf History, Deaf Culture, Signed Languages, Deaf Bilingual Education, Deaf Art, and more) have served to expand the activities of research, teaching, analysis, and curriculum development. The field has experienced a major shift due to increasing awareness of Deaf Studies research since the mid-1960s. The field has been further influenced by the Deaf community's movement, resistance, activism and politics worldwide, as well as the impact of technological advances, such as in communications, with cell phones, computers, and other devices. This new Encyclopedia shifts focus away from the medical model that has view deaf individuals as needing to be remedied in order to correct so-called hearing and speaking deficiencies for the sole purpose of assimilation into mainstream society. The members of deaf communities are part of a distinct cultural and linguistic group with a unique, vibrant community, and way of being. As precedence, The SAGE Deaf Studies Encyclopedia carves out a new and critical perspective that breathes meaning into organic deaf experiences through a new critical theory lens. Such a focus is novel in that it comes from deaf and hearing allies of the communities where historically, institutions of medicine and disability ride roughshod over authentic experiences.
Understanding Deaf Culture by
This book presents a 'Traveller's Guide' to Deaf Culture, starting from the premise that Deaf cultures have an important contribution to make to other academic disciplines, and human lives in general. Within and outside Deaf communities, there is a need for an account of the new concept of Deaf culture, which enables readers to assess its place alongside work on other minority cultures and multilingual discourses. The book aims to assess the concepts of culture, on their own terms and in their many guises and to apply these to Deaf communities. The author illustrates the pitfalls which have been created for those communities by the medical concept of 'deafness' and contrasts this with his new concept of "Deafhood", a process by which every Deaf child, family and adult implicitly explains their existence in the world to themselves and each other.
When the mind hears : a history of the deaf by
"When the Mind Hears, the first comprehensive history of the deaf, is also a powerful and compassionate study of the anatomy of prejudice and the motives and means of oppression. It is a narrative, told largely from the vantage point of Laurent Clerc, the deaf Frenchman who was an intellectual leader of the deaf community in France and then in America. Ultimately, the story of the deaf is a tragic one, as educators throughout history have sought to abolish sign language from the education of the deaf. The debate, involving such issues as minority rights, integration (or "mainstreaming"), and bilingual education, rages anew today. Scrupulously documented but never dispassionate, When the Mind Hears vividly conveys the anger and frustration of all those who, deprived of their language, are deprived of their rightful heritage."--Provided by publisher.
Words Made Flesh : Nineteenth-Century Deaf Education and the Growth of Deaf Culture. by
During the early nineteenth century, schools for the deaf appeared in the United States for the first time. These schools were committed to the use of the sign language to educate deaf students. Manual education made the growth of the deaf community possible, for it gathered deaf people together in sizable numbers for the first time in American history. It also fueled the emergence of Deaf culture, as the schools became agents of cultural transformations. a. Just as the Deaf community began to be recognized as a minority culture, in the 1850s, a powerful movement arose to undo it, namely oral education. Advocates of oral education, deeply influenced by the writings of public school pioneer Horace Mann, argued that deaf students should stop signing and should start speaking in the hope that the Deaf community would be abandoned, and its language and culture would vanish. In this revisionist history, Words Made Flesh explores the educational battles of the nineteenth century from both hearing and deaf points of view. It places the growth of the Deaf community at the heart of the story of deaf education and explains how the unexpected emergence of Deafness provoked the pedagogical battles that dominated the field of deaf education in the nineteenth century, and still reverberate today. a
This course is designed for students who have no knowledge or some basic knowledge of Filipino Sign Language (FSL). It is an introductory course on FSL, a visual-gestural language used by Deaf people in the Philippines. In FSL-101, you will develop a beginner’s understanding on how to communicate in signs by building on your visual-gestural communication skills, learning basic vocabulary useful in conveying simple statements, and reading signs accurately and with ease. It will also provide you a basic understanding of the uniqueness of FSL as compared to other country sign languages and signed systems. FSL-101 will be taught by a Deaf teacher and you will be given ample time to interact with a Deaf buddy.
101 activities for teaching ASL by 
American Sign Language by
Learning a new language is easier than you think! This informative book teaches you the basics of American Sign Language. It's the third most used language in the United States--and yet it's "spoken" without even opening your mouth! It's estimated that as many as two million Americans speak American Sign Language, a method of communication that's both fun and useful, even if you or your friends and family are not hearing impaired. American Sign Language uses simple-to-follow photographs to teach you the alphabet, numbers, and simple words and phrases. Divided into categories such as Animals and People and Pronouns, the book and accompanying flashcards show you how to use your hands to communicate. Once you've learned the alphabet, you'll build on that knowledge to learn the words for "friend" and "family." And when you how the words for "chicken" and "cat" evoke a chicken opening and closing its beak and a cat stroking its whiskers, you'll truly understand how intuitive and enjoyable learning American Sign Language can be. Learning a new language is always a rewarding endeavor--and with American Sign Language, it's easier than ever!
American Sign Language by
This signing dictionary contains more than 5,000 words and 8,000 diagrams.
American Sign Language, Units 10-18 by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. The three Student Texts are designed to help students acquire conversational ability in ASL and an awareness and appreciation of deaf people. Each text contains nine instructional units that present major grammatical features of ASL through dialogues, introduce students to the intricate features of ASL structure, and discuss individual grammatical features, with sample drills to reinforce mastery of each one.
American sign language : a student text, units 1-9 by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. The three Student Texts are designed to help students acquire conversational ability in ASL and an awareness and appreciation of deaf people. Each text contains nine instructional units that present major grammatical features of ASL through dialogues, introduce students to the intricate features of ASL structure, and discuss individual grammatical features, with sample drills to reinforce mastery of each one.
American sign language : a teacher's resource text on curriculum, methods, and evaluation by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. This practical textbook details the framework for understanding and using second-language teaching techniques for ASL. Using this interactive approach to teaching language, instructors can create situations to help students learn how to converse in ASL. Conducting dialogues and drills in the classroom is explained fully; activities and exercises to supplement dialogues and drills in student textbooks are provided.
American sign language : a teacher's resource text on grammar and culture by 
American Sign Language Demystified with DVD by
Get your message across using your hands and your body language Want to communicate with the Deaf community but are mystified how to start? With American Sign Language Demystified you'll learn this unique visual language, and a whole new world of communication will be opened to you. At your own pace, you will learn basic grammar structures, discover the nuances of body positioning, master how to convey time, and build a useful vocabulary of signs and phrases. To help you on your way, the accompanying 100-minute DVD features in-depth demonstrations of how to make signs and create phrases and sentences as executed in American Sign Language. This fast and easy guide offers: A DVD that contains all the signs and phrases in the book as well as hundreds of additional vocabulary signs Quizzes at the end of each chapter to monitor your progress Etiquette you need to know when using ASL A helpful history of ASL Simple enough for a beginner but challenging enough for a more advanced student, American Sign Language Demystified will help you communicate in ASL confidently and comfortably.
The American Sign Language Phrase Book by
Open up a whole new world of communication through ASL You can easily learn ASL with help from The American Sign Language Phrase Book. With more than 500 phrases, this is the reference guide to everyday expressions in American Sign Language, providing a quick way for you to converse with deaf people. Clearly illustrated with hundreds of line drawings, this book focuses on areas such as health, family, school, sports, travel, religion, time, money, food and drink, and small talk. This edition's new chapter on technology boasts 50 phrases to help you communicate about the Internet, computing, video relay, and more. There is even a chapter that gives you phrases for communicating about signing: asking people to sign slower, indicating your fingerspelling ability, and requesting help with your fledgling skills. From asking simple questions (“How are you?”) to more complex phrases (“There's no sign for that, you have to fingerspell it.”), The American Sign Language Phrase Book gives you the power to communicate easily and comfortably in ASL.
American Sign Language the Easy Way by
Current estimates have more than one million people using American Sign Language (ASL) in the United States, including approximately 450,000 deaf people. As growing numbers of deaf students are integrated into standard schools, the need for ASL interpreters continues to increase. Today, many public education systems offer an ASL course as a language elective in their curriculum, and this book--which can be used to teach both interpreters and the deaf--is an ideal text for such courses. Following a general introduction to American Sign Language and Deaf Culture, the author explains the use of "facial grammar" as a preliminary step to learning and understanding manual signing. Two succeeding chapters present the first eleven key grammatical rules of ASL. The 36 lessons that follow are divided into four groups that put these rules into practice and introduce additional rules. All lessons conclude with a practice session that reviews the lesson's material and progressively develops the student's proficiency in communicating in ASL. Following each of the four groups of nine lessons is a brief chapter dealing with Deaf Culture. The book's many line drawings illustrate approximately 720 ASL signs and their multiple meanings. The author has focused the text to make learning American Sign Language as easy as it is useful, both for instructors and students.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
E-Z American Sign Language by
This heavily illustrated, self-teaching guide to ASL--American Sign Language--is useful both for the deaf and for those men and women who teach or work among deaf people. E-Z American Sign Language presents ASL's 10 key grammatical rules and emphasizes the use of "facial grammar" as an important supplement to manual signing. Most of the book's content takes the form of a presentation of more than 800 captioned line drawings that illustrate signs for their equivalent words and then show how to combine signs in order to communicate detailed statements. Barron's E-Z Series books are updated, and re-formatted editions of Barron's older and perennially popular Easy Way books. Titles in the new E-Z Series feature extensive two-color treatment, a fresh, modern typeface, and more graphic material than ever. All are self-teaching manuals that cover a wide variety of practical and academic subjects, written on levels that range from senior high school to college-101 standards.
The Everything Sign Language Book by
Explains basic communication using American Sign Language, including proper handshapes, body language, signing etiquette, and communicating with the hearing impaired.
Filipino sign language : a compilation of signs from regions of the Philippines. by Interpretation skills : English to American sign language by An Introduction to Filipino Sign Language by 
Learning American sign language : levels I & II, beginning & intermediate by
Learning American Sign Language: Levels I & II--Beginning & Intermediate, Second Edition, is a major revision of the first edition and is designed to help learners successfully interact with deaf American Sign Language (ASL) users. KEY TOPICS: Lessons are structured around language needed for common life situations, and examples are presented in the form of dialogues coupled with grammar and vocabulary instruction. Information is also included about the culture of Deaf people in the United States. MARKET: Anyone interested in learning or teaching ASL.
Random House Webster's American Sign Language Dictionary by
The Random House Webster’s Unabridged American Sign Language Dictionary is a treasury of over 5,600 signs for the novice and experienced user alike. It includes complete descriptions of each sign, plus full-torso illustrations. There is also a subject index for easy reference as well as alternate signs for the same meaning.
This course is designed for students who have no knowledge or some basic knowledge of Filipino Sign Language (FSL). It is an introductory course on FSL, a visual-gestural language used by Deaf people in the Philippines. In FSL-101, you will develop a beginner’s understanding on how to communicate in signs by building on your visual-gestural communication skills, learning basic vocabulary useful in conveying simple statements, and reading signs accurately and with ease. It will also provide you a basic understanding of the uniqueness of FSL as compared to other country sign languages and signed systems. FSL-101 will be taught by a Deaf teacher and you will be given ample time to interact with a Deaf buddy.
American Sign Language and Early Literacy by
The usual definition of the term "literacy" generally corresponds with mastering the reading and writing of a spoken language. This narrow scope often engenders unsubstantiated claims that print literacy alone leads to, among other so-called higher-order thinking skills, logical and rational thinking and the abstract use of language. Thus, the importance of literacy for deaf children in American Sign Language (ASL) is marginalized, asserts author Kristin Snoddon in her new book American Sign Language and Early Literacy: A Model Parent-Child Program. As a contrast, Snoddon describes conducting an ethnographic, action study of the ASL Parent-Child Mother Goose program, provided by a Deaf service agency in Ontario, Canada to teach ASL literacy to deaf children. According to current scholarship, literacy is achieved through primary discourse shared with parents and other intimates, which establishes a child's initial sense of identity, culture, and vernacular language. Secondary discourse derives from outside agents and interaction, such as expanding an individual's literacy to other languages. Snoddon writes that the focus of the ASL Parent-Child Mother Goose program is on teaching ASL through rhymes and stories and some facets of the culture of Deaf ASL users. This focus enabled hearing parents to impart first-language acquisition and socialization to their deaf children in a more natural primary discourse as if the parents were Deaf themselves. At the same time, hearing parents experience secondary discourses through their exposure to ASL and Deaf culture. Snoddon also comments on current infant hearing screening and early intervention and the gaps in these services. She discusses gatekeeper individuals and institutions that restrict access to ASL for young Deaf children and their families. Finally, she reports on public resources for supporting ASL literacy and the implications of her findings regarding the benefits of early ASL literacy programming for Deaf children and their families.
Form, Meaning, and Focus in American Sign Language by
The meaning of any linguistic expression resides not only in the words, but also in the ways that those words are conveyed. In her new study, Miako N. P. Rankin highlights the crucial interrelatedness of form and meaning at all levels in order to consider specific types of American Sign Language (ASL) expression. In particular, Form, Meaning, and Focus in American Sign Language considers how ASL expresses non-agent focus, similar to the meaning of passive voice in English. Rankin's analyses of the form-meaning correspondences of ASL expressions of non-agent focus reveals an underlying pattern that can be traced across sentence and verb types. This pattern produces meanings with various levels of focus on the agent. Rankin has determined in her meticulous study that the pattern of form-meaning characteristic of non-agent focus in ASL is used prolifically in day-to-day language. The recognition of the frequency of this pattern holds implications regarding the acquisition of ASL, the development of curricula for teaching ASL, and the analysis of ASL discourse in effective interpretation.
Learning to Be Deaf by
The Contributions to the Sociology of Language series features publications dealing with sociolinguistic theory, methods, findings and applications. It addresses the study of language in society in its broadest sense, as a truly international and interdisciplinary field in which various approaches - theoretical and empirical - supplement and complement each other. The series invites the attention of scholars interested in language in society from a broad range of disciplines - anthropology, education, history, linguistics, political science, and sociology. To discuss your book idea or submit a proposal, please contact Natalie Fecher.
The Oxford handbook of deaf studies in language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the 21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. Contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholars and practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of efforts to identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself; and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and Deaf Education, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research by
This volume brings together the best research presented at the first International Symposium on Signed Language Interpreting and Translation Research. Editors Brenda Nicodemus and Keith Cagle have gathered an international group of contributors who are recognized leaders in signed language interpreter education and research. The ten papers in Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research cover a range of topics, including the need for Deaf perspectives in interpretation research, discourse strategies and techniques that are unique to video relay call settings, the benefits of using sociology as a lens for examining sign language interpreting work, translating university entrance exams from written Portuguese into Libras (Brazilian Sign Language), the linguistic choices interpreters make when interpreting ASL figurative language into English, the nature of designated interpreting, and grammatical ambiguity in trilingual VRS interpreting. The research findings and insights contained here will be invaluable to scholars, students, and practitioners.
Sign Language by
Sign language linguists show here that all questions relevant to the linguistic investigation of spoken languages can be asked about sign languages. Conversely, questions that sign language linguists consider - even if spoken language researchers have not asked them yet - should also be asked of spoken languages. The HSK handbook Sign Language aims to provide a concise and comprehensive overview of the state of the art in sign language linguistics. It includes 44 chapters, written by leading researchers in the field, that address issues in language typology, sign language grammar, psycholinguistics, neurolinguistics, sociolinguistics, and language documentation and transcription. Crucially, all topics are presented in a way that makes them accessible to linguists who are not familiar with sign language linguistics.
Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities : Envisioning the Future for Deaf Students by
Increased interaction between sign language communities and the mainstream societies in which they function is creating the potential for greater equality of opportunity for people who are deaf and hard of hearing. In this volume, renowned scholars and policy makers from around the world present innovative and groundbreaking perspectives on the relationships among sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities. The contributors to this volume offer creative and open-minded explorations of the construct of sustainability that are informed by their work with deaf individuals, deaf communities, families of deaf children, and other stakeholders. Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities describes sustainability in relation to: · identity, resilience, and well-being · participatory citizenship · historical perspectives on sign language use in educational contexts · sign language learning and teaching · human rights and inclusive education · literate thought and literacy · the sign language factor and the development of sign language communities in sub-Saharan Africa · sign language legislation These changing communities' understanding of what is required to become sustainable--in areas such as full participation and citizenship in society, economic well-being, access to quality education, and cultural and linguistic identity--is also taking new forms. This work contributes to the paradigm shifts regarding deaf emancipation and deaf education taking place around the world.
The Sign Language Interpreting Studies Reader by
In Sign Language Interpreting (SLI) there is a great need for a volume devoted to classic and seminal articles and essays dedicated to this specific domain of language interpreting. Students, educators, and practitioners will benefit from having access to a collection of historical and influential articles that contributed to the progress of the global SLI profession. In SLI there is a long history of outstanding research and scholarship, much of which is now out of print, or was published in obscure journals, or featured in publications that are no longer in print. These readings are significant to the progression of SLI as an academic discipline and a profession. As the years have gone by, many of these readings have been lost to students, educators, and practitioners because they are difficult to locate or unavailable, or because this audience simply does not know they exist. This volume brings together the seminal texts in our field that document the philosophical, evidence-based and analytical progression of SLI work.
Sign Languages of the World by
Sign Languages of the World is a one-of-a-kind handbook covering38 of the world's deaf sign languages and auxiliary sign languages. Each sign language has a dedicated chapter, written by experts for the volume. The book includes contributions from both deaf and hearing scholars.
Sign Multilingualism by
This volume has arisen from a three-part, five-year study on language contact among multilingual sign language users, which has three strands: cross-signing, sign-switching, and sign-speaking. These phenomena are only sparsely documented so far, and thus the volume is highly innovative and presents data and analyses not previously available.
Signs and structures : formal approaches to sign language syntax by
As sign language linguistics has become an important and prodigious field of research in the last few decades, it comes as no surprise that the repertoire of methodological approaches to the study of the communication of the Deaf has also expanded considerably. While earlier work on sign languages was often focused on providing arguments for them being full-fledged linguistic systems, current debates do no longer center on whether visual-spatial grammars are worth being researched, but on how this type of research should be conducted. This book contains a selection of papers that could be thought of as a good representative sample of current trends in formal approaches to the study of sign language syntax. It illustrates how generative research on the communication of the Deaf may contribute to our understanding of the syntax of natural languages in general and indicates to what extent it is possible to integrate advances in the analysis of visual-spatial grammar with current spoken language research. Originally published in Sign Language & Linguistics 16:2 (2013).
Signs and wonders by
Current academic discourse frequently understates the role of religion in the development of the American Deaf community. In her new study, Tracy Ann Morse effects a sharp course correction by delineating the frequent use over time of religious rhetoric by members of the Deaf community to preserve and support sign language. In Chapter One, Morse analyzes Thomas Hopkins Gallaudet’s use of religious references in his 1817 maiden address at the first American school for deaf students. She examines his and other speeches as examples of the intersection of education for deaf Americans and Protestant missionary efforts to convert them. In the second chapter, she presents the different religious perspectives of the two deaf education camps: Manualists argued that sign language was a gift from God, while Oralists viewed hand gestures as animal-like, indicative of lower evolutionary development. Chapter Three explores the religious rhetoric in churches, sanctuaries where sign language flourished and deaf members formed relationships. In the fourth chapter, Morse shows how Deaf activist George Veditz signed using religious themes in his political films. She also comments on the impact of the bilingual staging of Big River: The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, which began to change the hearing world’s opinion about the Deaf community. Morse concludes with speculation on the shifting terrain for deaf people due to technological innovations that might supplant religious rhetoric as a tool to support the Deaf community.
Let us learn more signs! Continue to expand your vocabulary, and improve your signing and receptive skills through FSL -102. By immersing yourself with the Benildean Deaf community and other Deaf organizations/communities outside of the College, you will have a better idea how to form phrases and sentences in Filipino Sign Language, and convey your thoughts in a more natural way. At the end of the course, you would have improved your conversation skills in FSL, and be able to make more Deaf acquaintances along the way.
101 activities for teaching ASL by American Sign Language by
Learning a new language is easier than you think! This informative book teaches you the basics of American Sign Language. It's the third most used language in the United States--and yet it's "spoken" without even opening your mouth! It's estimated that as many as two million Americans speak American Sign Language, a method of communication that's both fun and useful, even if you or your friends and family are not hearing impaired. American Sign Language uses simple-to-follow photographs to teach you the alphabet, numbers, and simple words and phrases. Divided into categories such as Animals and People and Pronouns, the book and accompanying flashcards show you how to use your hands to communicate. Once you've learned the alphabet, you'll build on that knowledge to learn the words for "friend" and "family." And when you how the words for "chicken" and "cat" evoke a chicken opening and closing its beak and a cat stroking its whiskers, you'll truly understand how intuitive and enjoyable learning American Sign Language can be. Learning a new language is always a rewarding endeavor--and with American Sign Language, it's easier than ever!
American Sign Language by
This signing dictionary contains more than 5,000 words and 8,000 diagrams.
American Sign Language, Units 10-18 by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. The three Student Texts are designed to help students acquire conversational ability in ASL and an awareness and appreciation of deaf people. Each text contains nine instructional units that present major grammatical features of ASL through dialogues, introduce students to the intricate features of ASL structure, and discuss individual grammatical features, with sample drills to reinforce mastery of each one.
American sign language : a student text, units 1-9 by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. The three Student Texts are designed to help students acquire conversational ability in ASL and an awareness and appreciation of deaf people. Each text contains nine instructional units that present major grammatical features of ASL through dialogues, introduce students to the intricate features of ASL structure, and discuss individual grammatical features, with sample drills to reinforce mastery of each one.
American sign language : a teacher's resource text on curriculum, methods, and evaluation by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. This practical textbook details the framework for understanding and using second-language teaching techniques for ASL. Using this interactive approach to teaching language, instructors can create situations to help students learn how to converse in ASL. Conducting dialogues and drills in the classroom is explained fully; activities and exercises to supplement dialogues and drills in student textbooks are provided.
American sign language : a teacher's resource text on grammar and culture by American Sign Language Demystified with DVD by
Get your message across using your hands and your body language Want to communicate with the Deaf community but are mystified how to start? With American Sign Language Demystified you'll learn this unique visual language, and a whole new world of communication will be opened to you. At your own pace, you will learn basic grammar structures, discover the nuances of body positioning, master how to convey time, and build a useful vocabulary of signs and phrases. To help you on your way, the accompanying 100-minute DVD features in-depth demonstrations of how to make signs and create phrases and sentences as executed in American Sign Language. This fast and easy guide offers: A DVD that contains all the signs and phrases in the book as well as hundreds of additional vocabulary signs Quizzes at the end of each chapter to monitor your progress Etiquette you need to know when using ASL A helpful history of ASL Simple enough for a beginner but challenging enough for a more advanced student, American Sign Language Demystified will help you communicate in ASL confidently and comfortably.
The American Sign Language Phrase Book by
Open up a whole new world of communication through ASL You can easily learn ASL with help from The American Sign Language Phrase Book. With more than 500 phrases, this is the reference guide to everyday expressions in American Sign Language, providing a quick way for you to converse with deaf people. Clearly illustrated with hundreds of line drawings, this book focuses on areas such as health, family, school, sports, travel, religion, time, money, food and drink, and small talk. This edition's new chapter on technology boasts 50 phrases to help you communicate about the Internet, computing, video relay, and more. There is even a chapter that gives you phrases for communicating about signing: asking people to sign slower, indicating your fingerspelling ability, and requesting help with your fledgling skills. From asking simple questions (“How are you?”) to more complex phrases (“There's no sign for that, you have to fingerspell it.”), The American Sign Language Phrase Book gives you the power to communicate easily and comfortably in ASL.
American Sign Language the Easy Way by
Current estimates have more than one million people using American Sign Language (ASL) in the United States, including approximately 450,000 deaf people. As growing numbers of deaf students are integrated into standard schools, the need for ASL interpreters continues to increase. Today, many public education systems offer an ASL course as a language elective in their curriculum, and this book--which can be used to teach both interpreters and the deaf--is an ideal text for such courses. Following a general introduction to American Sign Language and Deaf Culture, the author explains the use of "facial grammar" as a preliminary step to learning and understanding manual signing. Two succeeding chapters present the first eleven key grammatical rules of ASL. The 36 lessons that follow are divided into four groups that put these rules into practice and introduce additional rules. All lessons conclude with a practice session that reviews the lesson's material and progressively develops the student's proficiency in communicating in ASL. Following each of the four groups of nine lessons is a brief chapter dealing with Deaf Culture. The book's many line drawings illustrate approximately 720 ASL signs and their multiple meanings. The author has focused the text to make learning American Sign Language as easy as it is useful, both for instructors and students.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
E-Z American Sign Language by
This heavily illustrated, self-teaching guide to ASL--American Sign Language--is useful both for the deaf and for those men and women who teach or work among deaf people. E-Z American Sign Language presents ASL's 10 key grammatical rules and emphasizes the use of "facial grammar" as an important supplement to manual signing. Most of the book's content takes the form of a presentation of more than 800 captioned line drawings that illustrate signs for their equivalent words and then show how to combine signs in order to communicate detailed statements. Barron's E-Z Series books are updated, and re-formatted editions of Barron's older and perennially popular Easy Way books. Titles in the new E-Z Series feature extensive two-color treatment, a fresh, modern typeface, and more graphic material than ever. All are self-teaching manuals that cover a wide variety of practical and academic subjects, written on levels that range from senior high school to college-101 standards.
The Everything Sign Language Book by
Explains basic communication using American Sign Language, including proper handshapes, body language, signing etiquette, and communicating with the hearing impaired.
Filipino sign language : a compilation of signs from regions of the Philippines. by Interpretation skills : English to American sign language by An Introduction to Filipino Sign Language by Learning American sign language : levels I & II, beginning & intermediate by
Learning American Sign Language: Levels I & II--Beginning & Intermediate, Second Edition, is a major revision of the first edition and is designed to help learners successfully interact with deaf American Sign Language (ASL) users. KEY TOPICS: Lessons are structured around language needed for common life situations, and examples are presented in the form of dialogues coupled with grammar and vocabulary instruction. Information is also included about the culture of Deaf people in the United States. MARKET: Anyone interested in learning or teaching ASL.
Random House Webster's American Sign Language Dictionary by
The Random House Webster’s Unabridged American Sign Language Dictionary is a treasury of over 5,600 signs for the novice and experienced user alike. It includes complete descriptions of each sign, plus full-torso illustrations. There is also a subject index for easy reference as well as alternate signs for the same meaning.
Let us learn more signs! Continue to expand your vocabulary, and improve your signing and receptive skills through FSL -102. By immersing yourself with the Benildean Deaf community and other Deaf organizations/communities outside of the College, you will have a better idea how to form phrases and sentences in Filipino Sign Language, and convey your thoughts in a more natural way. At the end of the course, you would have improved your conversation skills in FSL, and be able to make more Deaf acquaintances along the way.
American Sign Language and Early Literacy by
The usual definition of the term "literacy" generally corresponds with mastering the reading and writing of a spoken language. This narrow scope often engenders unsubstantiated claims that print literacy alone leads to, among other so-called higher-order thinking skills, logical and rational thinking and the abstract use of language. Thus, the importance of literacy for deaf children in American Sign Language (ASL) is marginalized, asserts author Kristin Snoddon in her new book American Sign Language and Early Literacy: A Model Parent-Child Program. As a contrast, Snoddon describes conducting an ethnographic, action study of the ASL Parent-Child Mother Goose program, provided by a Deaf service agency in Ontario, Canada to teach ASL literacy to deaf children. According to current scholarship, literacy is achieved through primary discourse shared with parents and other intimates, which establishes a child's initial sense of identity, culture, and vernacular language. Secondary discourse derives from outside agents and interaction, such as expanding an individual's literacy to other languages. Snoddon writes that the focus of the ASL Parent-Child Mother Goose program is on teaching ASL through rhymes and stories and some facets of the culture of Deaf ASL users. This focus enabled hearing parents to impart first-language acquisition and socialization to their deaf children in a more natural primary discourse as if the parents were Deaf themselves. At the same time, hearing parents experience secondary discourses through their exposure to ASL and Deaf culture. Snoddon also comments on current infant hearing screening and early intervention and the gaps in these services. She discusses gatekeeper individuals and institutions that restrict access to ASL for young Deaf children and their families. Finally, she reports on public resources for supporting ASL literacy and the implications of her findings regarding the benefits of early ASL literacy programming for Deaf children and their families.
Form, Meaning, and Focus in American Sign Language by
The meaning of any linguistic expression resides not only in the words, but also in the ways that those words are conveyed. In her new study, Miako N. P. Rankin highlights the crucial interrelatedness of form and meaning at all levels in order to consider specific types of American Sign Language (ASL) expression. In particular, Form, Meaning, and Focus in American Sign Language considers how ASL expresses non-agent focus, similar to the meaning of passive voice in English. Rankin's analyses of the form-meaning correspondences of ASL expressions of non-agent focus reveals an underlying pattern that can be traced across sentence and verb types. This pattern produces meanings with various levels of focus on the agent. Rankin has determined in her meticulous study that the pattern of form-meaning characteristic of non-agent focus in ASL is used prolifically in day-to-day language. The recognition of the frequency of this pattern holds implications regarding the acquisition of ASL, the development of curricula for teaching ASL, and the analysis of ASL discourse in effective interpretation.
Learning to Be Deaf by
The Contributions to the Sociology of Language series features publications dealing with sociolinguistic theory, methods, findings and applications. It addresses the study of language in society in its broadest sense, as a truly international and interdisciplinary field in which various approaches - theoretical and empirical - supplement and complement each other. The series invites the attention of scholars interested in language in society from a broad range of disciplines - anthropology, education, history, linguistics, political science, and sociology. To discuss your book idea or submit a proposal, please contact Natalie Fecher.
The Oxford handbook of deaf studies in language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the 21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. Contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholars and practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of efforts to identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself; and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and Deaf Education, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research by
This volume brings together the best research presented at the first International Symposium on Signed Language Interpreting and Translation Research. Editors Brenda Nicodemus and Keith Cagle have gathered an international group of contributors who are recognized leaders in signed language interpreter education and research. The ten papers in Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research cover a range of topics, including the need for Deaf perspectives in interpretation research, discourse strategies and techniques that are unique to video relay call settings, the benefits of using sociology as a lens for examining sign language interpreting work, translating university entrance exams from written Portuguese into Libras (Brazilian Sign Language), the linguistic choices interpreters make when interpreting ASL figurative language into English, the nature of designated interpreting, and grammatical ambiguity in trilingual VRS interpreting. The research findings and insights contained here will be invaluable to scholars, students, and practitioners.
Sign Language by
Sign language linguists show here that all questions relevant to the linguistic investigation of spoken languages can be asked about sign languages. Conversely, questions that sign language linguists consider - even if spoken language researchers have not asked them yet - should also be asked of spoken languages. The HSK handbook Sign Language aims to provide a concise and comprehensive overview of the state of the art in sign language linguistics. It includes 44 chapters, written by leading researchers in the field, that address issues in language typology, sign language grammar, psycholinguistics, neurolinguistics, sociolinguistics, and language documentation and transcription. Crucially, all topics are presented in a way that makes them accessible to linguists who are not familiar with sign language linguistics.
Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities : Envisioning the Future for Deaf Students by
Increased interaction between sign language communities and the mainstream societies in which they function is creating the potential for greater equality of opportunity for people who are deaf and hard of hearing. In this volume, renowned scholars and policy makers from around the world present innovative and groundbreaking perspectives on the relationships among sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities. The contributors to this volume offer creative and open-minded explorations of the construct of sustainability that are informed by their work with deaf individuals, deaf communities, families of deaf children, and other stakeholders. Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities describes sustainability in relation to: · identity, resilience, and well-being · participatory citizenship · historical perspectives on sign language use in educational contexts · sign language learning and teaching · human rights and inclusive education · literate thought and literacy · the sign language factor and the development of sign language communities in sub-Saharan Africa · sign language legislation These changing communities' understanding of what is required to become sustainable--in areas such as full participation and citizenship in society, economic well-being, access to quality education, and cultural and linguistic identity--is also taking new forms. This work contributes to the paradigm shifts regarding deaf emancipation and deaf education taking place around the world.
The Sign Language Interpreting Studies Reader by
In Sign Language Interpreting (SLI) there is a great need for a volume devoted to classic and seminal articles and essays dedicated to this specific domain of language interpreting. Students, educators, and practitioners will benefit from having access to a collection of historical and influential articles that contributed to the progress of the global SLI profession. In SLI there is a long history of outstanding research and scholarship, much of which is now out of print, or was published in obscure journals, or featured in publications that are no longer in print. These readings are significant to the progression of SLI as an academic discipline and a profession. As the years have gone by, many of these readings have been lost to students, educators, and practitioners because they are difficult to locate or unavailable, or because this audience simply does not know they exist. This volume brings together the seminal texts in our field that document the philosophical, evidence-based and analytical progression of SLI work.
Sign Languages of the World by
Sign Languages of the World is a one-of-a-kind handbook covering38 of the world's deaf sign languages and auxiliary sign languages. Each sign language has a dedicated chapter, written by experts for the volume. The book includes contributions from both deaf and hearing scholars.
Sign Multilingualism by
This volume has arisen from a three-part, five-year study on language contact among multilingual sign language users, which has three strands: cross-signing, sign-switching, and sign-speaking. These phenomena are only sparsely documented so far, and thus the volume is highly innovative and presents data and analyses not previously available.
Signs and structures : formal approaches to sign language syntax by
As sign language linguistics has become an important and prodigious field of research in the last few decades, it comes as no surprise that the repertoire of methodological approaches to the study of the communication of the Deaf has also expanded considerably. While earlier work on sign languages was often focused on providing arguments for them being full-fledged linguistic systems, current debates do no longer center on whether visual-spatial grammars are worth being researched, but on how this type of research should be conducted. This book contains a selection of papers that could be thought of as a good representative sample of current trends in formal approaches to the study of sign language syntax. It illustrates how generative research on the communication of the Deaf may contribute to our understanding of the syntax of natural languages in general and indicates to what extent it is possible to integrate advances in the analysis of visual-spatial grammar with current spoken language research. Originally published in Sign Language & Linguistics 16:2 (2013).
Signs and wonders by
Current academic discourse frequently understates the role of religion in the development of the American Deaf community. In her new study, Tracy Ann Morse effects a sharp course correction by delineating the frequent use over time of religious rhetoric by members of the Deaf community to preserve and support sign language. In Chapter One, Morse analyzes Thomas Hopkins Gallaudet’s use of religious references in his 1817 maiden address at the first American school for deaf students. She examines his and other speeches as examples of the intersection of education for deaf Americans and Protestant missionary efforts to convert them. In the second chapter, she presents the different religious perspectives of the two deaf education camps: Manualists argued that sign language was a gift from God, while Oralists viewed hand gestures as animal-like, indicative of lower evolutionary development. Chapter Three explores the religious rhetoric in churches, sanctuaries where sign language flourished and deaf members formed relationships. In the fourth chapter, Morse shows how Deaf activist George Veditz signed using religious themes in his political films. She also comments on the impact of the bilingual staging of Big River: The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, which began to change the hearing world’s opinion about the Deaf community. Morse concludes with speculation on the shifting terrain for deaf people due to technological innovations that might supplant religious rhetoric as a tool to support the Deaf community.
You are now in Intermediate Filipino Sign Language! Enhance your vocabulary as you learn further the unique features of FSL: its idioms, the use of classifiers, and community jargons. By this time, you will have developed better receptive and expressive skills which will allow you to convey your thoughts through a more natural signing of FSL.
101 activities for teaching ASL by American Sign Language by
Learning a new language is easier than you think! This informative book teaches you the basics of American Sign Language. It's the third most used language in the United States--and yet it's "spoken" without even opening your mouth! It's estimated that as many as two million Americans speak American Sign Language, a method of communication that's both fun and useful, even if you or your friends and family are not hearing impaired. American Sign Language uses simple-to-follow photographs to teach you the alphabet, numbers, and simple words and phrases. Divided into categories such as Animals and People and Pronouns, the book and accompanying flashcards show you how to use your hands to communicate. Once you've learned the alphabet, you'll build on that knowledge to learn the words for "friend" and "family." And when you how the words for "chicken" and "cat" evoke a chicken opening and closing its beak and a cat stroking its whiskers, you'll truly understand how intuitive and enjoyable learning American Sign Language can be. Learning a new language is always a rewarding endeavor--and with American Sign Language, it's easier than ever!
American Sign Language by
This signing dictionary contains more than 5,000 words and 8,000 diagrams.
American Sign Language, Units 10-18 by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. The three Student Texts are designed to help students acquire conversational ability in ASL and an awareness and appreciation of deaf people. Each text contains nine instructional units that present major grammatical features of ASL through dialogues, introduce students to the intricate features of ASL structure, and discuss individual grammatical features, with sample drills to reinforce mastery of each one.
American sign language : a student text, units 1-9 by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. The three Student Texts are designed to help students acquire conversational ability in ASL and an awareness and appreciation of deaf people. Each text contains nine instructional units that present major grammatical features of ASL through dialogues, introduce students to the intricate features of ASL structure, and discuss individual grammatical features, with sample drills to reinforce mastery of each one.
American sign language : a teacher's resource text on curriculum, methods, and evaluation by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. This practical textbook details the framework for understanding and using second-language teaching techniques for ASL. Using this interactive approach to teaching language, instructors can create situations to help students learn how to converse in ASL. Conducting dialogues and drills in the classroom is explained fully; activities and exercises to supplement dialogues and drills in student textbooks are provided.
American sign language : a teacher's resource text on grammar and culture by American Sign Language Demystified with DVD by
Get your message across using your hands and your body language Want to communicate with the Deaf community but are mystified how to start? With American Sign Language Demystified you'll learn this unique visual language, and a whole new world of communication will be opened to you. At your own pace, you will learn basic grammar structures, discover the nuances of body positioning, master how to convey time, and build a useful vocabulary of signs and phrases. To help you on your way, the accompanying 100-minute DVD features in-depth demonstrations of how to make signs and create phrases and sentences as executed in American Sign Language. This fast and easy guide offers: A DVD that contains all the signs and phrases in the book as well as hundreds of additional vocabulary signs Quizzes at the end of each chapter to monitor your progress Etiquette you need to know when using ASL A helpful history of ASL Simple enough for a beginner but challenging enough for a more advanced student, American Sign Language Demystified will help you communicate in ASL confidently and comfortably.
The American Sign Language Phrase Book by
Open up a whole new world of communication through ASL You can easily learn ASL with help from The American Sign Language Phrase Book. With more than 500 phrases, this is the reference guide to everyday expressions in American Sign Language, providing a quick way for you to converse with deaf people. Clearly illustrated with hundreds of line drawings, this book focuses on areas such as health, family, school, sports, travel, religion, time, money, food and drink, and small talk. This edition's new chapter on technology boasts 50 phrases to help you communicate about the Internet, computing, video relay, and more. There is even a chapter that gives you phrases for communicating about signing: asking people to sign slower, indicating your fingerspelling ability, and requesting help with your fledgling skills. From asking simple questions (“How are you?”) to more complex phrases (“There's no sign for that, you have to fingerspell it.”), The American Sign Language Phrase Book gives you the power to communicate easily and comfortably in ASL.
American Sign Language the Easy Way by
Current estimates have more than one million people using American Sign Language (ASL) in the United States, including approximately 450,000 deaf people. As growing numbers of deaf students are integrated into standard schools, the need for ASL interpreters continues to increase. Today, many public education systems offer an ASL course as a language elective in their curriculum, and this book--which can be used to teach both interpreters and the deaf--is an ideal text for such courses. Following a general introduction to American Sign Language and Deaf Culture, the author explains the use of "facial grammar" as a preliminary step to learning and understanding manual signing. Two succeeding chapters present the first eleven key grammatical rules of ASL. The 36 lessons that follow are divided into four groups that put these rules into practice and introduce additional rules. All lessons conclude with a practice session that reviews the lesson's material and progressively develops the student's proficiency in communicating in ASL. Following each of the four groups of nine lessons is a brief chapter dealing with Deaf Culture. The book's many line drawings illustrate approximately 720 ASL signs and their multiple meanings. The author has focused the text to make learning American Sign Language as easy as it is useful, both for instructors and students.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
E-Z American Sign Language by
This heavily illustrated, self-teaching guide to ASL--American Sign Language--is useful both for the deaf and for those men and women who teach or work among deaf people. E-Z American Sign Language presents ASL's 10 key grammatical rules and emphasizes the use of "facial grammar" as an important supplement to manual signing. Most of the book's content takes the form of a presentation of more than 800 captioned line drawings that illustrate signs for their equivalent words and then show how to combine signs in order to communicate detailed statements. Barron's E-Z Series books are updated, and re-formatted editions of Barron's older and perennially popular Easy Way books. Titles in the new E-Z Series feature extensive two-color treatment, a fresh, modern typeface, and more graphic material than ever. All are self-teaching manuals that cover a wide variety of practical and academic subjects, written on levels that range from senior high school to college-101 standards.
The Everything Sign Language Book by
Explains basic communication using American Sign Language, including proper handshapes, body language, signing etiquette, and communicating with the hearing impaired.
Filipino sign language : a compilation of signs from regions of the Philippines. by Interpretation skills : English to American sign language by An Introduction to Filipino Sign Language by Learning American sign language : levels I & II, beginning & intermediate by
Learning American Sign Language: Levels I & II--Beginning & Intermediate, Second Edition, is a major revision of the first edition and is designed to help learners successfully interact with deaf American Sign Language (ASL) users. KEY TOPICS: Lessons are structured around language needed for common life situations, and examples are presented in the form of dialogues coupled with grammar and vocabulary instruction. Information is also included about the culture of Deaf people in the United States. MARKET: Anyone interested in learning or teaching ASL.
Random House Webster's American Sign Language Dictionary by
The Random House Webster’s Unabridged American Sign Language Dictionary is a treasury of over 5,600 signs for the novice and experienced user alike. It includes complete descriptions of each sign, plus full-torso illustrations. There is also a subject index for easy reference as well as alternate signs for the same meaning.
You are now in Intermediate Filipino Sign Language! Enhance your vocabulary as you learn further the unique features of FSL: its idioms, the use of classifiers, and community jargons. By this time, you will have developed better receptive and expressive skills which will allow you to convey your thoughts through a more natural signing of FSL.
American Sign Language and Early Literacy by
The usual definition of the term "literacy" generally corresponds with mastering the reading and writing of a spoken language. This narrow scope often engenders unsubstantiated claims that print literacy alone leads to, among other so-called higher-order thinking skills, logical and rational thinking and the abstract use of language. Thus, the importance of literacy for deaf children in American Sign Language (ASL) is marginalized, asserts author Kristin Snoddon in her new book American Sign Language and Early Literacy: A Model Parent-Child Program. As a contrast, Snoddon describes conducting an ethnographic, action study of the ASL Parent-Child Mother Goose program, provided by a Deaf service agency in Ontario, Canada to teach ASL literacy to deaf children. According to current scholarship, literacy is achieved through primary discourse shared with parents and other intimates, which establishes a child's initial sense of identity, culture, and vernacular language. Secondary discourse derives from outside agents and interaction, such as expanding an individual's literacy to other languages. Snoddon writes that the focus of the ASL Parent-Child Mother Goose program is on teaching ASL through rhymes and stories and some facets of the culture of Deaf ASL users. This focus enabled hearing parents to impart first-language acquisition and socialization to their deaf children in a more natural primary discourse as if the parents were Deaf themselves. At the same time, hearing parents experience secondary discourses through their exposure to ASL and Deaf culture. Snoddon also comments on current infant hearing screening and early intervention and the gaps in these services. She discusses gatekeeper individuals and institutions that restrict access to ASL for young Deaf children and their families. Finally, she reports on public resources for supporting ASL literacy and the implications of her findings regarding the benefits of early ASL literacy programming for Deaf children and their families.
Form, Meaning, and Focus in American Sign Language by
The meaning of any linguistic expression resides not only in the words, but also in the ways that those words are conveyed. In her new study, Miako N. P. Rankin highlights the crucial interrelatedness of form and meaning at all levels in order to consider specific types of American Sign Language (ASL) expression. In particular, Form, Meaning, and Focus in American Sign Language considers how ASL expresses non-agent focus, similar to the meaning of passive voice in English. Rankin's analyses of the form-meaning correspondences of ASL expressions of non-agent focus reveals an underlying pattern that can be traced across sentence and verb types. This pattern produces meanings with various levels of focus on the agent. Rankin has determined in her meticulous study that the pattern of form-meaning characteristic of non-agent focus in ASL is used prolifically in day-to-day language. The recognition of the frequency of this pattern holds implications regarding the acquisition of ASL, the development of curricula for teaching ASL, and the analysis of ASL discourse in effective interpretation.
Learning to Be Deaf by
The Contributions to the Sociology of Language series features publications dealing with sociolinguistic theory, methods, findings and applications. It addresses the study of language in society in its broadest sense, as a truly international and interdisciplinary field in which various approaches - theoretical and empirical - supplement and complement each other. The series invites the attention of scholars interested in language in society from a broad range of disciplines - anthropology, education, history, linguistics, political science, and sociology. To discuss your book idea or submit a proposal, please contact Natalie Fecher.
The Oxford handbook of deaf studies in language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the 21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. Contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholars and practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of efforts to identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself; and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and Deaf Education, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research by
This volume brings together the best research presented at the first International Symposium on Signed Language Interpreting and Translation Research. Editors Brenda Nicodemus and Keith Cagle have gathered an international group of contributors who are recognized leaders in signed language interpreter education and research. The ten papers in Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research cover a range of topics, including the need for Deaf perspectives in interpretation research, discourse strategies and techniques that are unique to video relay call settings, the benefits of using sociology as a lens for examining sign language interpreting work, translating university entrance exams from written Portuguese into Libras (Brazilian Sign Language), the linguistic choices interpreters make when interpreting ASL figurative language into English, the nature of designated interpreting, and grammatical ambiguity in trilingual VRS interpreting. The research findings and insights contained here will be invaluable to scholars, students, and practitioners.
Sign Language by
Sign language linguists show here that all questions relevant to the linguistic investigation of spoken languages can be asked about sign languages. Conversely, questions that sign language linguists consider - even if spoken language researchers have not asked them yet - should also be asked of spoken languages. The HSK handbook Sign Language aims to provide a concise and comprehensive overview of the state of the art in sign language linguistics. It includes 44 chapters, written by leading researchers in the field, that address issues in language typology, sign language grammar, psycholinguistics, neurolinguistics, sociolinguistics, and language documentation and transcription. Crucially, all topics are presented in a way that makes them accessible to linguists who are not familiar with sign language linguistics.
Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities : Envisioning the Future for Deaf Students by
Increased interaction between sign language communities and the mainstream societies in which they function is creating the potential for greater equality of opportunity for people who are deaf and hard of hearing. In this volume, renowned scholars and policy makers from around the world present innovative and groundbreaking perspectives on the relationships among sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities. The contributors to this volume offer creative and open-minded explorations of the construct of sustainability that are informed by their work with deaf individuals, deaf communities, families of deaf children, and other stakeholders. Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities describes sustainability in relation to: · identity, resilience, and well-being · participatory citizenship · historical perspectives on sign language use in educational contexts · sign language learning and teaching · human rights and inclusive education · literate thought and literacy · the sign language factor and the development of sign language communities in sub-Saharan Africa · sign language legislation These changing communities' understanding of what is required to become sustainable--in areas such as full participation and citizenship in society, economic well-being, access to quality education, and cultural and linguistic identity--is also taking new forms. This work contributes to the paradigm shifts regarding deaf emancipation and deaf education taking place around the world.
The Sign Language Interpreting Studies Reader by
In Sign Language Interpreting (SLI) there is a great need for a volume devoted to classic and seminal articles and essays dedicated to this specific domain of language interpreting. Students, educators, and practitioners will benefit from having access to a collection of historical and influential articles that contributed to the progress of the global SLI profession. In SLI there is a long history of outstanding research and scholarship, much of which is now out of print, or was published in obscure journals, or featured in publications that are no longer in print. These readings are significant to the progression of SLI as an academic discipline and a profession. As the years have gone by, many of these readings have been lost to students, educators, and practitioners because they are difficult to locate or unavailable, or because this audience simply does not know they exist. This volume brings together the seminal texts in our field that document the philosophical, evidence-based and analytical progression of SLI work.
Sign Languages of the World by
Sign Languages of the World is a one-of-a-kind handbook covering38 of the world's deaf sign languages and auxiliary sign languages. Each sign language has a dedicated chapter, written by experts for the volume. The book includes contributions from both deaf and hearing scholars.
Sign Multilingualism by
This volume has arisen from a three-part, five-year study on language contact among multilingual sign language users, which has three strands: cross-signing, sign-switching, and sign-speaking. These phenomena are only sparsely documented so far, and thus the volume is highly innovative and presents data and analyses not previously available.
Signs and structures : formal approaches to sign language syntax by
As sign language linguistics has become an important and prodigious field of research in the last few decades, it comes as no surprise that the repertoire of methodological approaches to the study of the communication of the Deaf has also expanded considerably. While earlier work on sign languages was often focused on providing arguments for them being full-fledged linguistic systems, current debates do no longer center on whether visual-spatial grammars are worth being researched, but on how this type of research should be conducted. This book contains a selection of papers that could be thought of as a good representative sample of current trends in formal approaches to the study of sign language syntax. It illustrates how generative research on the communication of the Deaf may contribute to our understanding of the syntax of natural languages in general and indicates to what extent it is possible to integrate advances in the analysis of visual-spatial grammar with current spoken language research. Originally published in Sign Language & Linguistics 16:2 (2013).
Signs and wonders by
Current academic discourse frequently understates the role of religion in the development of the American Deaf community. In her new study, Tracy Ann Morse effects a sharp course correction by delineating the frequent use over time of religious rhetoric by members of the Deaf community to preserve and support sign language. In Chapter One, Morse analyzes Thomas Hopkins Gallaudet’s use of religious references in his 1817 maiden address at the first American school for deaf students. She examines his and other speeches as examples of the intersection of education for deaf Americans and Protestant missionary efforts to convert them. In the second chapter, she presents the different religious perspectives of the two deaf education camps: Manualists argued that sign language was a gift from God, while Oralists viewed hand gestures as animal-like, indicative of lower evolutionary development. Chapter Three explores the religious rhetoric in churches, sanctuaries where sign language flourished and deaf members formed relationships. In the fourth chapter, Morse shows how Deaf activist George Veditz signed using religious themes in his political films. She also comments on the impact of the bilingual staging of Big River: The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, which began to change the hearing world’s opinion about the Deaf community. Morse concludes with speculation on the shifting terrain for deaf people due to technological innovations that might supplant religious rhetoric as a tool to support the Deaf community.
Welcome to FSL-104, a course designed to help you delve into specialized conversations by teaching you more advanced FSL. With your receptive and expressive skills having greatly improved during your first year of study in this program, you are now ready to enhance your vocabulary by learning signs related to religion and education. You will also get more exposure in these signs by observing its actual usage in religious settings and educational activities on campus.
101 activities for teaching ASL by American Sign Language by
Learning a new language is easier than you think! This informative book teaches you the basics of American Sign Language. It's the third most used language in the United States--and yet it's "spoken" without even opening your mouth! It's estimated that as many as two million Americans speak American Sign Language, a method of communication that's both fun and useful, even if you or your friends and family are not hearing impaired. American Sign Language uses simple-to-follow photographs to teach you the alphabet, numbers, and simple words and phrases. Divided into categories such as Animals and People and Pronouns, the book and accompanying flashcards show you how to use your hands to communicate. Once you've learned the alphabet, you'll build on that knowledge to learn the words for "friend" and "family." And when you how the words for "chicken" and "cat" evoke a chicken opening and closing its beak and a cat stroking its whiskers, you'll truly understand how intuitive and enjoyable learning American Sign Language can be. Learning a new language is always a rewarding endeavor--and with American Sign Language, it's easier than ever!
American Sign Language by
This signing dictionary contains more than 5,000 words and 8,000 diagrams.
American Sign Language, Units 10-18 by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. The three Student Texts are designed to help students acquire conversational ability in ASL and an awareness and appreciation of deaf people. Each text contains nine instructional units that present major grammatical features of ASL through dialogues, introduce students to the intricate features of ASL structure, and discuss individual grammatical features, with sample drills to reinforce mastery of each one.
American sign language : a student text, units 1-9 by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. The three Student Texts are designed to help students acquire conversational ability in ASL and an awareness and appreciation of deaf people. Each text contains nine instructional units that present major grammatical features of ASL through dialogues, introduce students to the intricate features of ASL structure, and discuss individual grammatical features, with sample drills to reinforce mastery of each one.
American sign language : a teacher's resource text on curriculum, methods, and evaluation by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. This practical textbook details the framework for understanding and using second-language teaching techniques for ASL. Using this interactive approach to teaching language, instructors can create situations to help students learn how to converse in ASL. Conducting dialogues and drills in the classroom is explained fully; activities and exercises to supplement dialogues and drills in student textbooks are provided.
American sign language : a teacher's resource text on grammar and culture by American Sign Language Demystified with DVD by
Get your message across using your hands and your body language Want to communicate with the Deaf community but are mystified how to start? With American Sign Language Demystified you'll learn this unique visual language, and a whole new world of communication will be opened to you. At your own pace, you will learn basic grammar structures, discover the nuances of body positioning, master how to convey time, and build a useful vocabulary of signs and phrases. To help you on your way, the accompanying 100-minute DVD features in-depth demonstrations of how to make signs and create phrases and sentences as executed in American Sign Language. This fast and easy guide offers: A DVD that contains all the signs and phrases in the book as well as hundreds of additional vocabulary signs Quizzes at the end of each chapter to monitor your progress Etiquette you need to know when using ASL A helpful history of ASL Simple enough for a beginner but challenging enough for a more advanced student, American Sign Language Demystified will help you communicate in ASL confidently and comfortably.
The American Sign Language Phrase Book by
Open up a whole new world of communication through ASL You can easily learn ASL with help from The American Sign Language Phrase Book. With more than 500 phrases, this is the reference guide to everyday expressions in American Sign Language, providing a quick way for you to converse with deaf people. Clearly illustrated with hundreds of line drawings, this book focuses on areas such as health, family, school, sports, travel, religion, time, money, food and drink, and small talk. This edition's new chapter on technology boasts 50 phrases to help you communicate about the Internet, computing, video relay, and more. There is even a chapter that gives you phrases for communicating about signing: asking people to sign slower, indicating your fingerspelling ability, and requesting help with your fledgling skills. From asking simple questions (“How are you?”) to more complex phrases (“There's no sign for that, you have to fingerspell it.”), The American Sign Language Phrase Book gives you the power to communicate easily and comfortably in ASL.
The American Sign Language Puzzle Book by
An essential accompaniment to the bestselling The American Sign Language Phrase Book, The American Sign Language Puzzle Book is an entertaining way for anyone learning to sign to test and build his or her knowledge. Featuring topics such as Everyday Expressions, Health, Clothing, Numbers, Time, and Money, The American Sign Language Puzzle Book incorporates an engaging variety of puzzle types, including scramble puzzles, word searches, matching puzzles, and crosswords, which are all complemented by exceptionally clear and helpful illustrations.
American Sign Language the Easy Way by
Current estimates have more than one million people using American Sign Language (ASL) in the United States, including approximately 450,000 deaf people. As growing numbers of deaf students are integrated into standard schools, the need for ASL interpreters continues to increase. Today, many public education systems offer an ASL course as a language elective in their curriculum, and this book--which can be used to teach both interpreters and the deaf--is an ideal text for such courses. Following a general introduction to American Sign Language and Deaf Culture, the author explains the use of "facial grammar" as a preliminary step to learning and understanding manual signing. Two succeeding chapters present the first eleven key grammatical rules of ASL. The 36 lessons that follow are divided into four groups that put these rules into practice and introduce additional rules. All lessons conclude with a practice session that reviews the lesson's material and progressively develops the student's proficiency in communicating in ASL. Following each of the four groups of nine lessons is a brief chapter dealing with Deaf Culture. The book's many line drawings illustrate approximately 720 ASL signs and their multiple meanings. The author has focused the text to make learning American Sign Language as easy as it is useful, both for instructors and students.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
E-Z American Sign Language by
This heavily illustrated, self-teaching guide to ASL--American Sign Language--is useful both for the deaf and for those men and women who teach or work among deaf people. E-Z American Sign Language presents ASL's 10 key grammatical rules and emphasizes the use of "facial grammar" as an important supplement to manual signing. Most of the book's content takes the form of a presentation of more than 800 captioned line drawings that illustrate signs for their equivalent words and then show how to combine signs in order to communicate detailed statements. Barron's E-Z Series books are updated, and re-formatted editions of Barron's older and perennially popular Easy Way books. Titles in the new E-Z Series feature extensive two-color treatment, a fresh, modern typeface, and more graphic material than ever. All are self-teaching manuals that cover a wide variety of practical and academic subjects, written on levels that range from senior high school to college-101 standards.
The Everything Sign Language Book by
Explains basic communication using American Sign Language, including proper handshapes, body language, signing etiquette, and communicating with the hearing impaired.
Filipino sign language : a compilation of signs from regions of the Philippines. by Interpretation skills : English to American sign language by An Introduction to Filipino Sign Language by Learning American sign language : levels I & II, beginning & intermediate by
Learning American Sign Language: Levels I & II--Beginning & Intermediate, Second Edition, is a major revision of the first edition and is designed to help learners successfully interact with deaf American Sign Language (ASL) users. KEY TOPICS: Lessons are structured around language needed for common life situations, and examples are presented in the form of dialogues coupled with grammar and vocabulary instruction. Information is also included about the culture of Deaf people in the United States. MARKET: Anyone interested in learning or teaching ASL.
Random House Webster's American Sign Language Dictionary by
The Random House Webster’s Unabridged American Sign Language Dictionary is a treasury of over 5,600 signs for the novice and experienced user alike. It includes complete descriptions of each sign, plus full-torso illustrations. There is also a subject index for easy reference as well as alternate signs for the same meaning.
Religious Signing by
Since the fourth century, when Spanish monks first started signing to communicate during their vows of silence, sign language has been used in religious communities of all faiths. Present-day American Sign Language (ASL) carries on that tradition. Like any living language, it continues to grow and change to meet the communication needs of an ever more diverse religious population. This comprehensive guide, newly revised, updated, and expanded, gives you all the vocabulary you need to communicate effectively in any religious setting. From Alleluia to Zizith, more than 750 signs and their specific meanings Large, clear, upper-torso illustrations that show the corresponding movements of hands, body, and face Easy-to-follow instructions to help you master the art of expressing signs A complete index for quick access to any sign With an essential section of religious “name signs,” the addition of signs for the Muslim faith, and an expanded selection of favorite verses, prayers, and blessings, this book is an indispensable resource for signers of all denominations. Written with expertise by an educator and author associated with the field of deafness for more than thirty years, it makes communicating by ASL in a religious setting simple and easy, no matter your level of experience.
Welcome to FSL-104, a course designed to help you delve into specialized conversations by teaching you more advanced FSL. With your receptive and expressive skills having greatly improved during your first year of study in this program, you are now ready to enhance your vocabulary by learning signs related to religion and education. You will also get more exposure in these signs by observing its actual usage in religious settings and educational activities on campus.
American Sign Language and Early Literacy by
The usual definition of the term "literacy" generally corresponds with mastering the reading and writing of a spoken language. This narrow scope often engenders unsubstantiated claims that print literacy alone leads to, among other so-called higher-order thinking skills, logical and rational thinking and the abstract use of language. Thus, the importance of literacy for deaf children in American Sign Language (ASL) is marginalized, asserts author Kristin Snoddon in her new book American Sign Language and Early Literacy: A Model Parent-Child Program. As a contrast, Snoddon describes conducting an ethnographic, action study of the ASL Parent-Child Mother Goose program, provided by a Deaf service agency in Ontario, Canada to teach ASL literacy to deaf children. According to current scholarship, literacy is achieved through primary discourse shared with parents and other intimates, which establishes a child's initial sense of identity, culture, and vernacular language. Secondary discourse derives from outside agents and interaction, such as expanding an individual's literacy to other languages. Snoddon writes that the focus of the ASL Parent-Child Mother Goose program is on teaching ASL through rhymes and stories and some facets of the culture of Deaf ASL users. This focus enabled hearing parents to impart first-language acquisition and socialization to their deaf children in a more natural primary discourse as if the parents were Deaf themselves. At the same time, hearing parents experience secondary discourses through their exposure to ASL and Deaf culture. Snoddon also comments on current infant hearing screening and early intervention and the gaps in these services. She discusses gatekeeper individuals and institutions that restrict access to ASL for young Deaf children and their families. Finally, she reports on public resources for supporting ASL literacy and the implications of her findings regarding the benefits of early ASL literacy programming for Deaf children and their families.
Deaf Liberation Theology by
Following years of theology of deafness based on the premise that Deaf people are simply people who cannot hear, this book breaks new ground. Presenting a new approach to Deaf people, theology and the Church, this book enables Deaf people who see themselves as members of a minority group to formulate their own theology rooted in their own history and culture. Deconstructing the theology and practice of the Church, Hannah Lewis shows how the Church unconsciously oppresses Deaf people through its view of them as people who cannot hear. Lewis reclaims Deaf perspectives on Church history, examines how an essentially visual Deaf culture can relate to the written text of the Bible and asks 'Can Jesus sign?' This book pulls together all these strands to consider how worship can be truly liberating, truly a place for Deaf people to celebrate who they are before God.
Form, Meaning, and Focus in American Sign Language by
The meaning of any linguistic expression resides not only in the words, but also in the ways that those words are conveyed. In her new study, Miako N. P. Rankin highlights the crucial interrelatedness of form and meaning at all levels in order to consider specific types of American Sign Language (ASL) expression. In particular, Form, Meaning, and Focus in American Sign Language considers how ASL expresses non-agent focus, similar to the meaning of passive voice in English. Rankin's analyses of the form-meaning correspondences of ASL expressions of non-agent focus reveals an underlying pattern that can be traced across sentence and verb types. This pattern produces meanings with various levels of focus on the agent. Rankin has determined in her meticulous study that the pattern of form-meaning characteristic of non-agent focus in ASL is used prolifically in day-to-day language. The recognition of the frequency of this pattern holds implications regarding the acquisition of ASL, the development of curricula for teaching ASL, and the analysis of ASL discourse in effective interpretation.
In Our Own Hands by
This collection of new research examines the development of deaf people's autonomy and citizenship discourses as they sought access to full citizenship rights in local and national settings. Covering the period of 1780-1970, the essays in this collection explore deaf peoples' claims to autonomy in their personal, religious, social, and organizational lives and make the case that deaf Americans sought to engage, claim, and protect deaf autonomy and citizenship in the face of rising nativism and eugenic currents of the late nineteenth and early twentieth century. These essays reveal how deaf people used their agency to engage in vigorous debates about issues that constantly tested the values of deaf people as Americans. The debates overlapped with social trends and spilled out into particular physical and social spaces such as clubs and churches, as well as within families. These previously unexplored areas in Deaf history intersect with important subthemes in American history, such as Southern history, religious history, and Western history. The contributors demonstrate that as deaf people pushed for their rights as citizens, they met with resistance from hearing people, and the results of their efforts were decidedly mixed. These works reinforce the Deaf community's longstanding desire to be part of the nation. In Our Own Hands contributes to an increased understanding of the struggle for citizenship and expands our current understanding of race, gender, religion, and other trends in Deaf history.
Learning to Be Deaf by
The Contributions to the Sociology of Language series features publications dealing with sociolinguistic theory, methods, findings and applications. It addresses the study of language in society in its broadest sense, as a truly international and interdisciplinary field in which various approaches - theoretical and empirical - supplement and complement each other. The series invites the attention of scholars interested in language in society from a broad range of disciplines - anthropology, education, history, linguistics, political science, and sociology. To discuss your book idea or submit a proposal, please contact Natalie Fecher.
The Oxford handbook of deaf studies in language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the 21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. Contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholars and practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of efforts to identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself; and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and Deaf Education, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research by
This volume brings together the best research presented at the first International Symposium on Signed Language Interpreting and Translation Research. Editors Brenda Nicodemus and Keith Cagle have gathered an international group of contributors who are recognized leaders in signed language interpreter education and research. The ten papers in Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research cover a range of topics, including the need for Deaf perspectives in interpretation research, discourse strategies and techniques that are unique to video relay call settings, the benefits of using sociology as a lens for examining sign language interpreting work, translating university entrance exams from written Portuguese into Libras (Brazilian Sign Language), the linguistic choices interpreters make when interpreting ASL figurative language into English, the nature of designated interpreting, and grammatical ambiguity in trilingual VRS interpreting. The research findings and insights contained here will be invaluable to scholars, students, and practitioners.
Sign Language by
Sign language linguists show here that all questions relevant to the linguistic investigation of spoken languages can be asked about sign languages. Conversely, questions that sign language linguists consider - even if spoken language researchers have not asked them yet - should also be asked of spoken languages. The HSK handbook Sign Language aims to provide a concise and comprehensive overview of the state of the art in sign language linguistics. It includes 44 chapters, written by leading researchers in the field, that address issues in language typology, sign language grammar, psycholinguistics, neurolinguistics, sociolinguistics, and language documentation and transcription. Crucially, all topics are presented in a way that makes them accessible to linguists who are not familiar with sign language linguistics.
Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities : Envisioning the Future for Deaf Students by
Increased interaction between sign language communities and the mainstream societies in which they function is creating the potential for greater equality of opportunity for people who are deaf and hard of hearing. In this volume, renowned scholars and policy makers from around the world present innovative and groundbreaking perspectives on the relationships among sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities. The contributors to this volume offer creative and open-minded explorations of the construct of sustainability that are informed by their work with deaf individuals, deaf communities, families of deaf children, and other stakeholders. Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities describes sustainability in relation to: · identity, resilience, and well-being · participatory citizenship · historical perspectives on sign language use in educational contexts · sign language learning and teaching · human rights and inclusive education · literate thought and literacy · the sign language factor and the development of sign language communities in sub-Saharan Africa · sign language legislation These changing communities' understanding of what is required to become sustainable--in areas such as full participation and citizenship in society, economic well-being, access to quality education, and cultural and linguistic identity--is also taking new forms. This work contributes to the paradigm shifts regarding deaf emancipation and deaf education taking place around the world.
The Sign Language Interpreting Studies Reader by
In Sign Language Interpreting (SLI) there is a great need for a volume devoted to classic and seminal articles and essays dedicated to this specific domain of language interpreting. Students, educators, and practitioners will benefit from having access to a collection of historical and influential articles that contributed to the progress of the global SLI profession. In SLI there is a long history of outstanding research and scholarship, much of which is now out of print, or was published in obscure journals, or featured in publications that are no longer in print. These readings are significant to the progression of SLI as an academic discipline and a profession. As the years have gone by, many of these readings have been lost to students, educators, and practitioners because they are difficult to locate or unavailable, or because this audience simply does not know they exist. This volume brings together the seminal texts in our field that document the philosophical, evidence-based and analytical progression of SLI work.
Sign Languages of the World by
Sign Languages of the World is a one-of-a-kind handbook covering38 of the world's deaf sign languages and auxiliary sign languages. Each sign language has a dedicated chapter, written by experts for the volume. The book includes contributions from both deaf and hearing scholars.
Sign Multilingualism by
This volume has arisen from a three-part, five-year study on language contact among multilingual sign language users, which has three strands: cross-signing, sign-switching, and sign-speaking. These phenomena are only sparsely documented so far, and thus the volume is highly innovative and presents data and analyses not previously available.
Signs and structures : formal approaches to sign language syntax by
As sign language linguistics has become an important and prodigious field of research in the last few decades, it comes as no surprise that the repertoire of methodological approaches to the study of the communication of the Deaf has also expanded considerably. While earlier work on sign languages was often focused on providing arguments for them being full-fledged linguistic systems, current debates do no longer center on whether visual-spatial grammars are worth being researched, but on how this type of research should be conducted. This book contains a selection of papers that could be thought of as a good representative sample of current trends in formal approaches to the study of sign language syntax. It illustrates how generative research on the communication of the Deaf may contribute to our understanding of the syntax of natural languages in general and indicates to what extent it is possible to integrate advances in the analysis of visual-spatial grammar with current spoken language research. Originally published in Sign Language & Linguistics 16:2 (2013).
Signs and wonders by
Current academic discourse frequently understates the role of religion in the development of the American Deaf community. In her new study, Tracy Ann Morse effects a sharp course correction by delineating the frequent use over time of religious rhetoric by members of the Deaf community to preserve and support sign language. In Chapter One, Morse analyzes Thomas Hopkins Gallaudet’s use of religious references in his 1817 maiden address at the first American school for deaf students. She examines his and other speeches as examples of the intersection of education for deaf Americans and Protestant missionary efforts to convert them. In the second chapter, she presents the different religious perspectives of the two deaf education camps: Manualists argued that sign language was a gift from God, while Oralists viewed hand gestures as animal-like, indicative of lower evolutionary development. Chapter Three explores the religious rhetoric in churches, sanctuaries where sign language flourished and deaf members formed relationships. In the fourth chapter, Morse shows how Deaf activist George Veditz signed using religious themes in his political films. She also comments on the impact of the bilingual staging of Big River: The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, which began to change the hearing world’s opinion about the Deaf community. Morse concludes with speculation on the shifting terrain for deaf people due to technological innovations that might supplant religious rhetoric as a tool to support the Deaf community.
As an advanced Filipino Sign Language student in this program, you should already have exponentially increased your personal sign bank onto more specialized subject matters. In FSL-105, you are to include in your repertoire signs that are related to science and technology, with focus on healthcare and mental health. Be ready to tap the inner Einstein in you!
101 activities for teaching ASL by American Sign Language by
This signing dictionary contains more than 5,000 words and 8,000 diagrams.
American Sign Language by
Learning a new language is easier than you think! This informative book teaches you the basics of American Sign Language. It's the third most used language in the United States--and yet it's "spoken" without even opening your mouth! It's estimated that as many as two million Americans speak American Sign Language, a method of communication that's both fun and useful, even if you or your friends and family are not hearing impaired. American Sign Language uses simple-to-follow photographs to teach you the alphabet, numbers, and simple words and phrases. Divided into categories such as Animals and People and Pronouns, the book and accompanying flashcards show you how to use your hands to communicate. Once you've learned the alphabet, you'll build on that knowledge to learn the words for "friend" and "family." And when you how the words for "chicken" and "cat" evoke a chicken opening and closing its beak and a cat stroking its whiskers, you'll truly understand how intuitive and enjoyable learning American Sign Language can be. Learning a new language is always a rewarding endeavor--and with American Sign Language, it's easier than ever!
American Sign Language, Units 10-18 by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. The three Student Texts are designed to help students acquire conversational ability in ASL and an awareness and appreciation of deaf people. Each text contains nine instructional units that present major grammatical features of ASL through dialogues, introduce students to the intricate features of ASL structure, and discuss individual grammatical features, with sample drills to reinforce mastery of each one.
American sign language : a student text, units 1-9 by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. The three Student Texts are designed to help students acquire conversational ability in ASL and an awareness and appreciation of deaf people. Each text contains nine instructional units that present major grammatical features of ASL through dialogues, introduce students to the intricate features of ASL structure, and discuss individual grammatical features, with sample drills to reinforce mastery of each one.
American sign language : a teacher's resource text on curriculum, methods, and evaluation by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. This practical textbook details the framework for understanding and using second-language teaching techniques for ASL. Using this interactive approach to teaching language, instructors can create situations to help students learn how to converse in ASL. Conducting dialogues and drills in the classroom is explained fully; activities and exercises to supplement dialogues and drills in student textbooks are provided.
American sign language : a teacher's resource text on grammar and culture by American Sign Language Demystified with DVD by
Get your message across using your hands and your body language Want to communicate with the Deaf community but are mystified how to start? With American Sign Language Demystified you'll learn this unique visual language, and a whole new world of communication will be opened to you. At your own pace, you will learn basic grammar structures, discover the nuances of body positioning, master how to convey time, and build a useful vocabulary of signs and phrases. To help you on your way, the accompanying 100-minute DVD features in-depth demonstrations of how to make signs and create phrases and sentences as executed in American Sign Language. This fast and easy guide offers: A DVD that contains all the signs and phrases in the book as well as hundreds of additional vocabulary signs Quizzes at the end of each chapter to monitor your progress Etiquette you need to know when using ASL A helpful history of ASL Simple enough for a beginner but challenging enough for a more advanced student, American Sign Language Demystified will help you communicate in ASL confidently and comfortably.
The American Sign Language Phrase Book by
Open up a whole new world of communication through ASL You can easily learn ASL with help from The American Sign Language Phrase Book. With more than 500 phrases, this is the reference guide to everyday expressions in American Sign Language, providing a quick way for you to converse with deaf people. Clearly illustrated with hundreds of line drawings, this book focuses on areas such as health, family, school, sports, travel, religion, time, money, food and drink, and small talk. This edition's new chapter on technology boasts 50 phrases to help you communicate about the Internet, computing, video relay, and more. There is even a chapter that gives you phrases for communicating about signing: asking people to sign slower, indicating your fingerspelling ability, and requesting help with your fledgling skills. From asking simple questions (“How are you?”) to more complex phrases (“There's no sign for that, you have to fingerspell it.”), The American Sign Language Phrase Book gives you the power to communicate easily and comfortably in ASL.
American Sign Language the Easy Way by
Current estimates have more than one million people using American Sign Language (ASL) in the United States, including approximately 450,000 deaf people. As growing numbers of deaf students are integrated into standard schools, the need for ASL interpreters continues to increase. Today, many public education systems offer an ASL course as a language elective in their curriculum, and this book--which can be used to teach both interpreters and the deaf--is an ideal text for such courses. Following a general introduction to American Sign Language and Deaf Culture, the author explains the use of "facial grammar" as a preliminary step to learning and understanding manual signing. Two succeeding chapters present the first eleven key grammatical rules of ASL. The 36 lessons that follow are divided into four groups that put these rules into practice and introduce additional rules. All lessons conclude with a practice session that reviews the lesson's material and progressively develops the student's proficiency in communicating in ASL. Following each of the four groups of nine lessons is a brief chapter dealing with Deaf Culture. The book's many line drawings illustrate approximately 720 ASL signs and their multiple meanings. The author has focused the text to make learning American Sign Language as easy as it is useful, both for instructors and students.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
E-Z American Sign Language by
This heavily illustrated, self-teaching guide to ASL--American Sign Language--is useful both for the deaf and for those men and women who teach or work among deaf people. E-Z American Sign Language presents ASL's 10 key grammatical rules and emphasizes the use of "facial grammar" as an important supplement to manual signing. Most of the book's content takes the form of a presentation of more than 800 captioned line drawings that illustrate signs for their equivalent words and then show how to combine signs in order to communicate detailed statements. Barron's E-Z Series books are updated, and re-formatted editions of Barron's older and perennially popular Easy Way books. Titles in the new E-Z Series feature extensive two-color treatment, a fresh, modern typeface, and more graphic material than ever. All are self-teaching manuals that cover a wide variety of practical and academic subjects, written on levels that range from senior high school to college-101 standards.
The Everything Sign Language Book by
Explains basic communication using American Sign Language, including proper handshapes, body language, signing etiquette, and communicating with the hearing impaired.
Filipino sign language : a compilation of signs from regions of the Philippines. by Interpretation skills : English to American sign language by An Introduction to Filipino Sign Language by Learning American sign language : levels I & II, beginning & intermediate by
Learning American Sign Language: Levels I & II--Beginning & Intermediate, Second Edition, is a major revision of the first edition and is designed to help learners successfully interact with deaf American Sign Language (ASL) users. KEY TOPICS: Lessons are structured around language needed for common life situations, and examples are presented in the form of dialogues coupled with grammar and vocabulary instruction. Information is also included about the culture of Deaf people in the United States. MARKET: Anyone interested in learning or teaching ASL.
Random House Webster's American Sign Language Dictionary by
The Random House Webster’s Unabridged American Sign Language Dictionary is a treasury of over 5,600 signs for the novice and experienced user alike. It includes complete descriptions of each sign, plus full-torso illustrations. There is also a subject index for easy reference as well as alternate signs for the same meaning.
As an advanced Filipino Sign Language student in this program, you should already have exponentially increased your personal sign bank onto more specialized subject matters. In FSL-105, you are to include in your repertoire signs that are related to science and technology, with focus on healthcare and mental health. Be ready to tap the inner Einstein in you!
American Sign Language and Early Literacy by
The usual definition of the term "literacy" generally corresponds with mastering the reading and writing of a spoken language. This narrow scope often engenders unsubstantiated claims that print literacy alone leads to, among other so-called higher-order thinking skills, logical and rational thinking and the abstract use of language. Thus, the importance of literacy for deaf children in American Sign Language (ASL) is marginalized, asserts author Kristin Snoddon in her new book American Sign Language and Early Literacy: A Model Parent-Child Program. As a contrast, Snoddon describes conducting an ethnographic, action study of the ASL Parent-Child Mother Goose program, provided by a Deaf service agency in Ontario, Canada to teach ASL literacy to deaf children. According to current scholarship, literacy is achieved through primary discourse shared with parents and other intimates, which establishes a child's initial sense of identity, culture, and vernacular language. Secondary discourse derives from outside agents and interaction, such as expanding an individual's literacy to other languages. Snoddon writes that the focus of the ASL Parent-Child Mother Goose program is on teaching ASL through rhymes and stories and some facets of the culture of Deaf ASL users. This focus enabled hearing parents to impart first-language acquisition and socialization to their deaf children in a more natural primary discourse as if the parents were Deaf themselves. At the same time, hearing parents experience secondary discourses through their exposure to ASL and Deaf culture. Snoddon also comments on current infant hearing screening and early intervention and the gaps in these services. She discusses gatekeeper individuals and institutions that restrict access to ASL for young Deaf children and their families. Finally, she reports on public resources for supporting ASL literacy and the implications of her findings regarding the benefits of early ASL literacy programming for Deaf children and their families.
Form, Meaning, and Focus in American Sign Language by
The meaning of any linguistic expression resides not only in the words, but also in the ways that those words are conveyed. In her new study, Miako N. P. Rankin highlights the crucial interrelatedness of form and meaning at all levels in order to consider specific types of American Sign Language (ASL) expression. In particular, Form, Meaning, and Focus in American Sign Language considers how ASL expresses non-agent focus, similar to the meaning of passive voice in English. Rankin's analyses of the form-meaning correspondences of ASL expressions of non-agent focus reveals an underlying pattern that can be traced across sentence and verb types. This pattern produces meanings with various levels of focus on the agent. Rankin has determined in her meticulous study that the pattern of form-meaning characteristic of non-agent focus in ASL is used prolifically in day-to-day language. The recognition of the frequency of this pattern holds implications regarding the acquisition of ASL, the development of curricula for teaching ASL, and the analysis of ASL discourse in effective interpretation.
Learning to Be Deaf by
The Contributions to the Sociology of Language series features publications dealing with sociolinguistic theory, methods, findings and applications. It addresses the study of language in society in its broadest sense, as a truly international and interdisciplinary field in which various approaches - theoretical and empirical - supplement and complement each other. The series invites the attention of scholars interested in language in society from a broad range of disciplines - anthropology, education, history, linguistics, political science, and sociology. To discuss your book idea or submit a proposal, please contact Natalie Fecher.
The Oxford handbook of deaf studies in language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the 21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. Contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholars and practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of efforts to identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself; and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and Deaf Education, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research by
This volume brings together the best research presented at the first International Symposium on Signed Language Interpreting and Translation Research. Editors Brenda Nicodemus and Keith Cagle have gathered an international group of contributors who are recognized leaders in signed language interpreter education and research. The ten papers in Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research cover a range of topics, including the need for Deaf perspectives in interpretation research, discourse strategies and techniques that are unique to video relay call settings, the benefits of using sociology as a lens for examining sign language interpreting work, translating university entrance exams from written Portuguese into Libras (Brazilian Sign Language), the linguistic choices interpreters make when interpreting ASL figurative language into English, the nature of designated interpreting, and grammatical ambiguity in trilingual VRS interpreting. The research findings and insights contained here will be invaluable to scholars, students, and practitioners.
Sign Language by
Sign language linguists show here that all questions relevant to the linguistic investigation of spoken languages can be asked about sign languages. Conversely, questions that sign language linguists consider - even if spoken language researchers have not asked them yet - should also be asked of spoken languages. The HSK handbook Sign Language aims to provide a concise and comprehensive overview of the state of the art in sign language linguistics. It includes 44 chapters, written by leading researchers in the field, that address issues in language typology, sign language grammar, psycholinguistics, neurolinguistics, sociolinguistics, and language documentation and transcription. Crucially, all topics are presented in a way that makes them accessible to linguists who are not familiar with sign language linguistics.
Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities : Envisioning the Future for Deaf Students by
Increased interaction between sign language communities and the mainstream societies in which they function is creating the potential for greater equality of opportunity for people who are deaf and hard of hearing. In this volume, renowned scholars and policy makers from around the world present innovative and groundbreaking perspectives on the relationships among sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities. The contributors to this volume offer creative and open-minded explorations of the construct of sustainability that are informed by their work with deaf individuals, deaf communities, families of deaf children, and other stakeholders. Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities describes sustainability in relation to: · identity, resilience, and well-being · participatory citizenship · historical perspectives on sign language use in educational contexts · sign language learning and teaching · human rights and inclusive education · literate thought and literacy · the sign language factor and the development of sign language communities in sub-Saharan Africa · sign language legislation These changing communities' understanding of what is required to become sustainable--in areas such as full participation and citizenship in society, economic well-being, access to quality education, and cultural and linguistic identity--is also taking new forms. This work contributes to the paradigm shifts regarding deaf emancipation and deaf education taking place around the world.
The Sign Language Interpreting Studies Reader by
In Sign Language Interpreting (SLI) there is a great need for a volume devoted to classic and seminal articles and essays dedicated to this specific domain of language interpreting. Students, educators, and practitioners will benefit from having access to a collection of historical and influential articles that contributed to the progress of the global SLI profession. In SLI there is a long history of outstanding research and scholarship, much of which is now out of print, or was published in obscure journals, or featured in publications that are no longer in print. These readings are significant to the progression of SLI as an academic discipline and a profession. As the years have gone by, many of these readings have been lost to students, educators, and practitioners because they are difficult to locate or unavailable, or because this audience simply does not know they exist. This volume brings together the seminal texts in our field that document the philosophical, evidence-based and analytical progression of SLI work.
Sign Languages of the World by
Sign Languages of the World is a one-of-a-kind handbook covering38 of the world's deaf sign languages and auxiliary sign languages. Each sign language has a dedicated chapter, written by experts for the volume. The book includes contributions from both deaf and hearing scholars.
Sign Multilingualism by
This volume has arisen from a three-part, five-year study on language contact among multilingual sign language users, which has three strands: cross-signing, sign-switching, and sign-speaking. These phenomena are only sparsely documented so far, and thus the volume is highly innovative and presents data and analyses not previously available.
Signs and structures : formal approaches to sign language syntax by
As sign language linguistics has become an important and prodigious field of research in the last few decades, it comes as no surprise that the repertoire of methodological approaches to the study of the communication of the Deaf has also expanded considerably. While earlier work on sign languages was often focused on providing arguments for them being full-fledged linguistic systems, current debates do no longer center on whether visual-spatial grammars are worth being researched, but on how this type of research should be conducted. This book contains a selection of papers that could be thought of as a good representative sample of current trends in formal approaches to the study of sign language syntax. It illustrates how generative research on the communication of the Deaf may contribute to our understanding of the syntax of natural languages in general and indicates to what extent it is possible to integrate advances in the analysis of visual-spatial grammar with current spoken language research. Originally published in Sign Language & Linguistics 16:2 (2013).
Signs and wonders by
Current academic discourse frequently understates the role of religion in the development of the American Deaf community. In her new study, Tracy Ann Morse effects a sharp course correction by delineating the frequent use over time of religious rhetoric by members of the Deaf community to preserve and support sign language. In Chapter One, Morse analyzes Thomas Hopkins Gallaudet’s use of religious references in his 1817 maiden address at the first American school for deaf students. She examines his and other speeches as examples of the intersection of education for deaf Americans and Protestant missionary efforts to convert them. In the second chapter, she presents the different religious perspectives of the two deaf education camps: Manualists argued that sign language was a gift from God, while Oralists viewed hand gestures as animal-like, indicative of lower evolutionary development. Chapter Three explores the religious rhetoric in churches, sanctuaries where sign language flourished and deaf members formed relationships. In the fourth chapter, Morse shows how Deaf activist George Veditz signed using religious themes in his political films. She also comments on the impact of the bilingual staging of Big River: The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, which began to change the hearing world’s opinion about the Deaf community. Morse concludes with speculation on the shifting terrain for deaf people due to technological innovations that might supplant religious rhetoric as a tool to support the Deaf community.
Having reached the final course in your Filipino Sign Language development, you should be able to carry a conversation confidently on any topic using FSL at this point. In FSL-106, you will be exposed to technical signs related to legislation and those that are commonly used in human rights discussions, such as the CRPD and SDG. You will also get a glimpse on International Signs, which is the mode of communication in most international settings.
101 activities for teaching ASL by American Sign Language by
Learning a new language is easier than you think! This informative book teaches you the basics of American Sign Language. It's the third most used language in the United States--and yet it's "spoken" without even opening your mouth! It's estimated that as many as two million Americans speak American Sign Language, a method of communication that's both fun and useful, even if you or your friends and family are not hearing impaired. American Sign Language uses simple-to-follow photographs to teach you the alphabet, numbers, and simple words and phrases. Divided into categories such as Animals and People and Pronouns, the book and accompanying flashcards show you how to use your hands to communicate. Once you've learned the alphabet, you'll build on that knowledge to learn the words for "friend" and "family." And when you how the words for "chicken" and "cat" evoke a chicken opening and closing its beak and a cat stroking its whiskers, you'll truly understand how intuitive and enjoyable learning American Sign Language can be. Learning a new language is always a rewarding endeavor--and with American Sign Language, it's easier than ever!
American Sign Language by
This signing dictionary contains more than 5,000 words and 8,000 diagrams.
American Sign Language, Units 10-18 by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. The three Student Texts are designed to help students acquire conversational ability in ASL and an awareness and appreciation of deaf people. Each text contains nine instructional units that present major grammatical features of ASL through dialogues, introduce students to the intricate features of ASL structure, and discuss individual grammatical features, with sample drills to reinforce mastery of each one.
American sign language : a student text, units 1-9 by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. The three Student Texts are designed to help students acquire conversational ability in ASL and an awareness and appreciation of deaf people. Each text contains nine instructional units that present major grammatical features of ASL through dialogues, introduce students to the intricate features of ASL structure, and discuss individual grammatical features, with sample drills to reinforce mastery of each one.
American sign language : a teacher's resource text on curriculum, methods, and evaluation by
Best known as the Green Books, the American Sign Language books provide teachers and students of American Sign Language (ASL) with the complete means for learning about the culture, community, and the native language of Deaf people. A group of 15 ASL teachers and linguists reviewed all five books to ensure that they were accurate and easy to comprehend. This practical textbook details the framework for understanding and using second-language teaching techniques for ASL. Using this interactive approach to teaching language, instructors can create situations to help students learn how to converse in ASL. Conducting dialogues and drills in the classroom is explained fully; activities and exercises to supplement dialogues and drills in student textbooks are provided.
American sign language : a teacher's resource text on grammar and culture by American Sign Language Demystified with DVD by
Get your message across using your hands and your body language Want to communicate with the Deaf community but are mystified how to start? With American Sign Language Demystified you'll learn this unique visual language, and a whole new world of communication will be opened to you. At your own pace, you will learn basic grammar structures, discover the nuances of body positioning, master how to convey time, and build a useful vocabulary of signs and phrases. To help you on your way, the accompanying 100-minute DVD features in-depth demonstrations of how to make signs and create phrases and sentences as executed in American Sign Language. This fast and easy guide offers: A DVD that contains all the signs and phrases in the book as well as hundreds of additional vocabulary signs Quizzes at the end of each chapter to monitor your progress Etiquette you need to know when using ASL A helpful history of ASL Simple enough for a beginner but challenging enough for a more advanced student, American Sign Language Demystified will help you communicate in ASL confidently and comfortably.
The American Sign Language Phrase Book by
Open up a whole new world of communication through ASL You can easily learn ASL with help from The American Sign Language Phrase Book. With more than 500 phrases, this is the reference guide to everyday expressions in American Sign Language, providing a quick way for you to converse with deaf people. Clearly illustrated with hundreds of line drawings, this book focuses on areas such as health, family, school, sports, travel, religion, time, money, food and drink, and small talk. This edition's new chapter on technology boasts 50 phrases to help you communicate about the Internet, computing, video relay, and more. There is even a chapter that gives you phrases for communicating about signing: asking people to sign slower, indicating your fingerspelling ability, and requesting help with your fledgling skills. From asking simple questions (“How are you?”) to more complex phrases (“There's no sign for that, you have to fingerspell it.”), The American Sign Language Phrase Book gives you the power to communicate easily and comfortably in ASL.
American Sign Language the Easy Way by
Current estimates have more than one million people using American Sign Language (ASL) in the United States, including approximately 450,000 deaf people. As growing numbers of deaf students are integrated into standard schools, the need for ASL interpreters continues to increase. Today, many public education systems offer an ASL course as a language elective in their curriculum, and this book--which can be used to teach both interpreters and the deaf--is an ideal text for such courses. Following a general introduction to American Sign Language and Deaf Culture, the author explains the use of "facial grammar" as a preliminary step to learning and understanding manual signing. Two succeeding chapters present the first eleven key grammatical rules of ASL. The 36 lessons that follow are divided into four groups that put these rules into practice and introduce additional rules. All lessons conclude with a practice session that reviews the lesson's material and progressively develops the student's proficiency in communicating in ASL. Following each of the four groups of nine lessons is a brief chapter dealing with Deaf Culture. The book's many line drawings illustrate approximately 720 ASL signs and their multiple meanings. The author has focused the text to make learning American Sign Language as easy as it is useful, both for instructors and students.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
Deaf Interpreters at Work by
Now, for the first time, a collection featuring 17 widely respected scholars depicts the everyday practices of deaf interpreters in their respective nations. Deaf Interpreters at Work: International Insights presents the history of Deaf translators and interpreters and details the development of testing and accreditation to raise their professional profiles. Other chapters delineate the cognitive processes of Deaf interpreting; Deaf-Deaf interpreter teams; Deaf and hearing team preparation; the use of Tactile American Sign Language by those interpreting for the Deaf-Blind community; and conference interpreting and interpreting teams. Along with volume coeditors Robert Adam, Christopher Stone, and Steven D. Collins, contributors include Markus Aro, Karen Bontempo, Juan Carlos Druetta, Senan Dunne, Eileen Forestal, Della Goswell, Juli af Klintberg, Patricia Levitzke-Gray, Jemina Napier, Brenda Nicodemus, Debra Russell, Stephanie Sforza, Marty Taylor, and Linda Warby. The scope of their research spans the world, including many unique facets of interpreting by deaf people in Argentina, Australia, Canada, England, Finland, Ireland, Sweden, and the United States, establishing this work as the standard in this burgeoning discipline.
E-Z American Sign Language by
This heavily illustrated, self-teaching guide to ASL--American Sign Language--is useful both for the deaf and for those men and women who teach or work among deaf people. E-Z American Sign Language presents ASL's 10 key grammatical rules and emphasizes the use of "facial grammar" as an important supplement to manual signing. Most of the book's content takes the form of a presentation of more than 800 captioned line drawings that illustrate signs for their equivalent words and then show how to combine signs in order to communicate detailed statements. Barron's E-Z Series books are updated, and re-formatted editions of Barron's older and perennially popular Easy Way books. Titles in the new E-Z Series feature extensive two-color treatment, a fresh, modern typeface, and more graphic material than ever. All are self-teaching manuals that cover a wide variety of practical and academic subjects, written on levels that range from senior high school to college-101 standards.
The Everything Sign Language Book by
Explains basic communication using American Sign Language, including proper handshapes, body language, signing etiquette, and communicating with the hearing impaired.
Filipino sign language : a compilation of signs from regions of the Philippines. by International Sign by
International Sign (IS) is widely used among deaf people and interpreters at international events, but what exactly is it, what are its linguistic features, where does its lexicon come from, and how is it used at interpreted events? This groundbreaking collection is the first volume to provide answers to these questions. Editors Rachel Rosenstock and Jemina Napier have assembled an international group of renowned linguists and interpreters to examine various aspects of International Sign. Their contributions are divided into three parts: International Sign as a Linguistic System; International Sign in Action--Interpreting, Translation, and Teaching; and International Sign Policy and Language Planning. The chapters cover a range of topics, including the morphosyntactic and discursive structures of interpreted IS, the interplay between conventional linguistic elements and nonconventional gestural elements in IS discourse, how deaf signers who use different signed languages establish communication, Deaf/hearing IS interpreting teams and how they sign depicting verbs, how best to teach foundation-level IS skills, strategies used by IS interpreters when interpreting from IS into English, and explorations of the best ways to prepare interpreters for international events. The work of the editors and contributors in this volume makes International Sign the most comprehensive, research-based analysis of a young but growing field in linguistics and interpretation.
Interpretation skills : English to American sign language by An Introduction to Filipino Sign Language by Learning American sign language : levels I & II, beginning & intermediate by
Learning American Sign Language: Levels I & II--Beginning & Intermediate, Second Edition, is a major revision of the first edition and is designed to help learners successfully interact with deaf American Sign Language (ASL) users. KEY TOPICS: Lessons are structured around language needed for common life situations, and examples are presented in the form of dialogues coupled with grammar and vocabulary instruction. Information is also included about the culture of Deaf people in the United States. MARKET: Anyone interested in learning or teaching ASL.
Random House Webster's American Sign Language Dictionary by
The Random House Webster’s Unabridged American Sign Language Dictionary is a treasury of over 5,600 signs for the novice and experienced user alike. It includes complete descriptions of each sign, plus full-torso illustrations. There is also a subject index for easy reference as well as alternate signs for the same meaning.
Signed Language Interpreting in the 21st Century by
This text provides interpreting students with a broad knowledge base that encompasses the latest research, addresses current trends and perspectives of the Deaf community, and promotes critical thinking and open dialogue about the working conditions, ethics, boundaries, and competencies needed by a highly qualified interpreter in various settings. This volume expands the resources available to aspiring interpreters, including Deaf interpreters, and incorporates the voices of renowned experts on topics relevant to today's practitioners. Each chapter provides students with objectives, keywords, and discussion questions. The chapters convey clear information about topics that include credentialing, disposition and aptitude for becoming an interpreter, interpreting for people who are DeafBlind, and working within specialty settings, such as legal and healthcare. A key resource for interpreter certification test preparation, this text follows the interpreter's ethical, practical, and professional development through a career of lifelong learning and service.
Having reached the final course in your Filipino Sign Language development, you should be able to carry a conversation confidently on any topic using FSL at this point. In FSL-106, you will be exposed to technical signs related to legislation and those that are commonly used in human rights discussions, such as the CRPD and SDG. You will also get a glimpse on International Signs, which is the mode of communication in most international settings.
American Sign Language and Early Literacy by
The usual definition of the term "literacy" generally corresponds with mastering the reading and writing of a spoken language. This narrow scope often engenders unsubstantiated claims that print literacy alone leads to, among other so-called higher-order thinking skills, logical and rational thinking and the abstract use of language. Thus, the importance of literacy for deaf children in American Sign Language (ASL) is marginalized, asserts author Kristin Snoddon in her new book American Sign Language and Early Literacy: A Model Parent-Child Program. As a contrast, Snoddon describes conducting an ethnographic, action study of the ASL Parent-Child Mother Goose program, provided by a Deaf service agency in Ontario, Canada to teach ASL literacy to deaf children. According to current scholarship, literacy is achieved through primary discourse shared with parents and other intimates, which establishes a child's initial sense of identity, culture, and vernacular language. Secondary discourse derives from outside agents and interaction, such as expanding an individual's literacy to other languages. Snoddon writes that the focus of the ASL Parent-Child Mother Goose program is on teaching ASL through rhymes and stories and some facets of the culture of Deaf ASL users. This focus enabled hearing parents to impart first-language acquisition and socialization to their deaf children in a more natural primary discourse as if the parents were Deaf themselves. At the same time, hearing parents experience secondary discourses through their exposure to ASL and Deaf culture. Snoddon also comments on current infant hearing screening and early intervention and the gaps in these services. She discusses gatekeeper individuals and institutions that restrict access to ASL for young Deaf children and their families. Finally, she reports on public resources for supporting ASL literacy and the implications of her findings regarding the benefits of early ASL literacy programming for Deaf children and their families.
Form, Meaning, and Focus in American Sign Language by
The meaning of any linguistic expression resides not only in the words, but also in the ways that those words are conveyed. In her new study, Miako N. P. Rankin highlights the crucial interrelatedness of form and meaning at all levels in order to consider specific types of American Sign Language (ASL) expression. In particular, Form, Meaning, and Focus in American Sign Language considers how ASL expresses non-agent focus, similar to the meaning of passive voice in English. Rankin's analyses of the form-meaning correspondences of ASL expressions of non-agent focus reveals an underlying pattern that can be traced across sentence and verb types. This pattern produces meanings with various levels of focus on the agent. Rankin has determined in her meticulous study that the pattern of form-meaning characteristic of non-agent focus in ASL is used prolifically in day-to-day language. The recognition of the frequency of this pattern holds implications regarding the acquisition of ASL, the development of curricula for teaching ASL, and the analysis of ASL discourse in effective interpretation.
International Sign by
International Sign (IS) is widely used among deaf people and interpreters at international events, but what exactly is it, what are its linguistic features, where does its lexicon come from, and how is it used at interpreted events? This groundbreaking collection is the first volume to provide answers to these questions. Editors Rachel Rosenstock and Jemina Napier have assembled an international group of renowned linguists and interpreters to examine various aspects of International Sign. Their contributions are divided into three parts: International Sign as a Linguistic System; International Sign in Action--Interpreting, Translation, and Teaching; and International Sign Policy and Language Planning. The chapters cover a range of topics, including the morphosyntactic and discursive structures of interpreted IS, the interplay between conventional linguistic elements and nonconventional gestural elements in IS discourse, how deaf signers who use different signed languages establish communication, Deaf/hearing IS interpreting teams and how they sign depicting verbs, how best to teach foundation-level IS skills, strategies used by IS interpreters when interpreting from IS into English, and explorations of the best ways to prepare interpreters for international events. The work of the editors and contributors in this volume makes International Sign the most comprehensive, research-based analysis of a young but growing field in linguistics and interpretation.
Learning to Be Deaf by
The Contributions to the Sociology of Language series features publications dealing with sociolinguistic theory, methods, findings and applications. It addresses the study of language in society in its broadest sense, as a truly international and interdisciplinary field in which various approaches - theoretical and empirical - supplement and complement each other. The series invites the attention of scholars interested in language in society from a broad range of disciplines - anthropology, education, history, linguistics, political science, and sociology. To discuss your book idea or submit a proposal, please contact Natalie Fecher.
The Oxford handbook of deaf studies in language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the 21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. Contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholars and practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of efforts to identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself; and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and Deaf Education, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research by
This volume brings together the best research presented at the first International Symposium on Signed Language Interpreting and Translation Research. Editors Brenda Nicodemus and Keith Cagle have gathered an international group of contributors who are recognized leaders in signed language interpreter education and research. The ten papers in Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research cover a range of topics, including the need for Deaf perspectives in interpretation research, discourse strategies and techniques that are unique to video relay call settings, the benefits of using sociology as a lens for examining sign language interpreting work, translating university entrance exams from written Portuguese into Libras (Brazilian Sign Language), the linguistic choices interpreters make when interpreting ASL figurative language into English, the nature of designated interpreting, and grammatical ambiguity in trilingual VRS interpreting. The research findings and insights contained here will be invaluable to scholars, students, and practitioners.
Sign Language by
Sign language linguists show here that all questions relevant to the linguistic investigation of spoken languages can be asked about sign languages. Conversely, questions that sign language linguists consider - even if spoken language researchers have not asked them yet - should also be asked of spoken languages. The HSK handbook Sign Language aims to provide a concise and comprehensive overview of the state of the art in sign language linguistics. It includes 44 chapters, written by leading researchers in the field, that address issues in language typology, sign language grammar, psycholinguistics, neurolinguistics, sociolinguistics, and language documentation and transcription. Crucially, all topics are presented in a way that makes them accessible to linguists who are not familiar with sign language linguistics.
Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities : Envisioning the Future for Deaf Students by
Increased interaction between sign language communities and the mainstream societies in which they function is creating the potential for greater equality of opportunity for people who are deaf and hard of hearing. In this volume, renowned scholars and policy makers from around the world present innovative and groundbreaking perspectives on the relationships among sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities. The contributors to this volume offer creative and open-minded explorations of the construct of sustainability that are informed by their work with deaf individuals, deaf communities, families of deaf children, and other stakeholders. Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities describes sustainability in relation to: · identity, resilience, and well-being · participatory citizenship · historical perspectives on sign language use in educational contexts · sign language learning and teaching · human rights and inclusive education · literate thought and literacy · the sign language factor and the development of sign language communities in sub-Saharan Africa · sign language legislation These changing communities' understanding of what is required to become sustainable--in areas such as full participation and citizenship in society, economic well-being, access to quality education, and cultural and linguistic identity--is also taking new forms. This work contributes to the paradigm shifts regarding deaf emancipation and deaf education taking place around the world.
The Sign Language Interpreting Studies Reader by
In Sign Language Interpreting (SLI) there is a great need for a volume devoted to classic and seminal articles and essays dedicated to this specific domain of language interpreting. Students, educators, and practitioners will benefit from having access to a collection of historical and influential articles that contributed to the progress of the global SLI profession. In SLI there is a long history of outstanding research and scholarship, much of which is now out of print, or was published in obscure journals, or featured in publications that are no longer in print. These readings are significant to the progression of SLI as an academic discipline and a profession. As the years have gone by, many of these readings have been lost to students, educators, and practitioners because they are difficult to locate or unavailable, or because this audience simply does not know they exist. This volume brings together the seminal texts in our field that document the philosophical, evidence-based and analytical progression of SLI work.
Sign Languages of the World by
Sign Languages of the World is a one-of-a-kind handbook covering38 of the world's deaf sign languages and auxiliary sign languages. Each sign language has a dedicated chapter, written by experts for the volume. The book includes contributions from both deaf and hearing scholars.
Sign Multilingualism by
This volume has arisen from a three-part, five-year study on language contact among multilingual sign language users, which has three strands: cross-signing, sign-switching, and sign-speaking. These phenomena are only sparsely documented so far, and thus the volume is highly innovative and presents data and analyses not previously available.
Signs and structures : formal approaches to sign language syntax by
As sign language linguistics has become an important and prodigious field of research in the last few decades, it comes as no surprise that the repertoire of methodological approaches to the study of the communication of the Deaf has also expanded considerably. While earlier work on sign languages was often focused on providing arguments for them being full-fledged linguistic systems, current debates do no longer center on whether visual-spatial grammars are worth being researched, but on how this type of research should be conducted. This book contains a selection of papers that could be thought of as a good representative sample of current trends in formal approaches to the study of sign language syntax. It illustrates how generative research on the communication of the Deaf may contribute to our understanding of the syntax of natural languages in general and indicates to what extent it is possible to integrate advances in the analysis of visual-spatial grammar with current spoken language research. Originally published in Sign Language & Linguistics 16:2 (2013).
Signs and wonders by
Current academic discourse frequently understates the role of religion in the development of the American Deaf community. In her new study, Tracy Ann Morse effects a sharp course correction by delineating the frequent use over time of religious rhetoric by members of the Deaf community to preserve and support sign language. In Chapter One, Morse analyzes Thomas Hopkins Gallaudet’s use of religious references in his 1817 maiden address at the first American school for deaf students. She examines his and other speeches as examples of the intersection of education for deaf Americans and Protestant missionary efforts to convert them. In the second chapter, she presents the different religious perspectives of the two deaf education camps: Manualists argued that sign language was a gift from God, while Oralists viewed hand gestures as animal-like, indicative of lower evolutionary development. Chapter Three explores the religious rhetoric in churches, sanctuaries where sign language flourished and deaf members formed relationships. In the fourth chapter, Morse shows how Deaf activist George Veditz signed using religious themes in his political films. She also comments on the impact of the bilingual staging of Big River: The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, which began to change the hearing world’s opinion about the Deaf community. Morse concludes with speculation on the shifting terrain for deaf people due to technological innovations that might supplant religious rhetoric as a tool to support the Deaf community.
The doctor tells the Deaf person “You have rhinopharyngitis.” What is the first thing you do? When it comes to providing health care, accurate information is critical. In Healthcare Interpreting, you will be introduced to basic concepts of human anatomy and physiology, and learn the logistical processes of preparing and doing medical interpreting. By providing you with effective strategies, you will be able to manage the communication dynamics of the doctor and the patient. Through lectures, classroom activities and case analysis, you will gain an overall understanding of a healthcare interpreter’s daily practice and get to practice it yourself.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
In our hands : educating healthcare interpreters by
Deaf Americans have identified healthcare as the most difficult setting in which to obtain a qualified interpreter. Yet, relatively little attention has been given to developing evidence-based resources and a standardized body of knowledge to educate healthcare interpreters. In Our Hands: Educating Healthcare Interpreters addresses these concerns by delineating the best practices for preparing interpreters to facilitate full access for deaf people in healthcare settings. The first section of this volume begins with developing domains and competencies toward a teaching methodology for medical and mental health interpreters. The next chapter describes a discourse approach that relies on analyzing actual transcripts and recordings to train healthcare interpreters. Other chapters feature a model mental health interpreter training program in Alabama; using a Demand-Control Schema for experiential learning; the risk of vicarious trauma to interpreters; online educational opportunities; and interpreting for deaf health care professionals. The second section offers four perspectives on education, including healthcare literacy of the clients; the education of Deaf interpreters; the development of standards for spoken-language healthcare interpreters; and the perspectives of healthcare interpreter educators in Europe. The range and depth of In Our Hands takes significant strides in presenting educational opportunities that can enhance the critical services provided by healthcare interpreters to deaf clients.
Signed Language Interpreting in the 21st Century by
This text provides interpreting students with a broad knowledge base that encompasses the latest research, addresses current trends and perspectives of the Deaf community, and promotes critical thinking and open dialogue about the working conditions, ethics, boundaries, and competencies needed by a highly qualified interpreter in various settings. This volume expands the resources available to aspiring interpreters, including Deaf interpreters, and incorporates the voices of renowned experts on topics relevant to today's practitioners. Each chapter provides students with objectives, keywords, and discussion questions. The chapters convey clear information about topics that include credentialing, disposition and aptitude for becoming an interpreter, interpreting for people who are DeafBlind, and working within specialty settings, such as legal and healthcare. A key resource for interpreter certification test preparation, this text follows the interpreter's ethical, practical, and professional development through a career of lifelong learning and service.
Sign language interpreting : deconstructing the myth of neutrality by
In her new, significant work, Melanie Metzger demonstrates clearly that the ideal of an interpreter as a neutral language conduit does not exist. Metzger offers evidence of this disparity by analyzing two videotaped ASL-English interpreted medical interviews, one an interpreter-trainee mock interview session, and the other an actual encounter between a deaf client and a medical professional. Sign Language Interpreting asks fundamental questions regarding interpreter neutrality. First, do interpreters influence discourse, and if so, how? Also, what kind of expectations do the participants bring to the event, and what do the interpreters bring to discussions? Finally, how do their remarks affect their alignment with participants in the interaction? This penetrating book discloses the ways in which interpreters affect exchanges, and it also addresses the potential implications of these findings regarding sign language interpretation in medical, educational, and all other general interactions. Interpreter trainers and their students will join certified interpreters and deaf studies scholars in applauding and benefitting from the fresh ground broken by this provocative study.
The doctor tells the Deaf person “You have rhinopharyngitis.” What is the first thing you do? When it comes to providing health care, accurate information is critical. In Healthcare Interpreting, you will be introduced to basic concepts of human anatomy and physiology, and learn the logistical processes of preparing and doing medical interpreting. By providing you with effective strategies, you will be able to manage the communication dynamics of the doctor and the patient. Through lectures, classroom activities and case analysis, you will gain an overall understanding of a healthcare interpreter’s daily practice and get to practice it yourself.
Coordinating Participation in Dialogue Interpreting by
Dialogue interpreting, which takes place in institutional settings such as legal proceedings, healthcare contexts, work meetings or media talk, has attracted increasing attention in translation, language and communication studies. Drawing on transcribed sequences of authentic talk, this volume raises questions about aspects of interpreting that have been taken for granted, challenging preconceived notions about differences between professional and non-professional interpreting and pointing in new directions for future research. Collecting contributions from major scholars in the field of dialogue interpreting and interaction studies, the volume offers new insights into the relationship between interpreting and mediating. It addresses a wide readership, including students and scholars in translation and interpreting studies, mediation and negotiation studies, linguistics, sociology, communication studies, conversation analysis, discourse analysis.
Handbook of Translation Studies by
As a meaningful manifestation of how institutionalized the discipline has become, the new Handbook of Translation Studies is most welcome. It joins the other signs of maturation such as Summer Schools, the development of academic curricula, historical surveys, journals, book series, textbooks, terminologies, bibliographies and encyclopedias. The HTS aims at disseminating knowledge about translation and interpreting and providing easy access to a large range of topics, traditions, and methods to a relatively broad audience: not only students who often adamantly prefer such user-friendliness, researchers and lecturers in Translation Studies, Translation & Interpreting professionals; but also scholars and experts from other disciplines (among which linguistics, sociology, history, psychology). In addition the HTS addresses any of those with a professional or personal interest in the problems of translation, interpreting, localization, editing, etc., such as communication specialists, journalists, literary critics, editors, public servants, business managers, (intercultural) organization specialists, media specialists, marketing professionals. The usability, accessibility and flexibility of the HTS depend on the commitment of people who agree that Translation Studies does matter. All users are therefore invited to share their feedback. Any questions, remarks and suggestions for improvement can be sent to the editorial team at hts@kuleuven.be. Next to the book edition (in printed and electronic, PDF, format), HTS is also available as an online resource, connected with the Translation Studies Bibliography. For access to the Handbook of Translation Studies Online, please visit http://www.benjamins.com/online/hts/
Healthcare Interpreting by
This volume - the first-ever collection of research on healthcare interpreting - centers on three interrelated themes: cross-cultural communication in healthcare settings, the interactional role of persons serving as interpreters and the discourse patterns of interpreter-mediated interaction. The individual chapters, by seven innovative researchers in the area of community-based interpreting, represent a pioneering attempt to look beyond stereotypical perceptions of interpreter-mediated interactions. First published as a Special Issue of Interpreting 7:2 (2005), this volume offers insights into the impact of the interpreter - whether s/he is a trained professional or a member of the patient's family - including ways in which s/he may either facilitate or impair reliable communication between patient and healthcare provider. The five articles cover a range of settings and specialties, from general medicine to pediatrics, psychiatry and speech therapy, using languages as diverse as Arabic, Dari, Farsi, Italian and Spanish in combination with Danish, Dutch, English and French.
Interpreting in Legal and Healthcare Settings by
The importance of quality interpreting in legal and healthcare settings can never be stressed enough, when any mistake - no matter how small - can compromise the delivery of justice or put someone's health at risk. This book addresses issues arising from interpreting in legal and healthcare settings by presenting cutting-edge research findings in interpreting and interpreter education in a number of countries around the world - including those which are relatively new to the field. It contains selected papers from a conference dedicated to such themes - the First International Conference on Legal and Healthcare Interpreting - as well as other invited papers related to the fields of legal and healthcare interpreting. This book is useful not only to scholars and educators, interpreters and translators working in legal or healthcare settings, but also to legal and healthcare professionals who work with interpreters in their day-to-day work, including judges, lawyers, police officers, doctors, midwives and nurses.
Investigations in Healthcare Interpreting by
In healthcare, the accuracy of interpretation is the most critical component of safe and effective communication between providers and patients in medical settings characterized by language and cultural barriers. Although medical education should prepare healthcare providers for common issues they will face in practice, their training often does not adequately teach the communication skills necessary to work with patients who use interpreters. This new volume in the Studies in Interpretation series addresses critical topics in communication in healthcare settings around the world. Investigations in Healthcare Interpreting consists of ten chapters contributed by a broad array of international scholars. They address topics as diverse as the co-construction of medical conversation between interlocutors, healthcare interpretation in Ireland, and how interpreters make requests for clarification in their work. Using a variety of methodological approaches including ethnography, questionnaires, observation, and diary accounts, these scholars report on trials of simultaneous video interpreting in Austrian hospitals; direct, interpreted, and translated healthcare information for Australian deaf people; the interpretation of medical interview questions from English into ASL; and specialized psychological/psychiatric diagnostic tests for deaf and hard of hearing clients. Researchers, practitioners, and students, as well as all healthcare professionals, will find this volume to be an invaluable resource.
TheInterpreter's Resource by
The Interpreter's Resource provides a comprehensive overview of interpreting at the start of the twenty first century. As well as explaining the different types of interpreting and their uses, it contains a number of Codes of Ethics, information on Community Interpreting around the world and detailed coverage of international organisations, which employ interpreters.
Translating and interpreting healthcare discourses by
Because of the increasing number of patients with limited language proficiency due to immigration in many countries, the need for healthcare interpreters and translators has grown swiftly in the last decade. This book gathers contributions by outstanding researchers, practitioners and trainers in translation and interpreting in healthcare situations. Biographische Informationen Dr. María-José Varela Salinas is Senior Lecturer at the University of Malaga (Spain) in the Department for Translation and Interpreting. Her main research topic is specialised translation. Dr. Bernd Meyer is a linguist by training, and a specialist for different aspects of multilingual communication in institutional settings. Since 2010, he is Professor for Intercultural Communication and Cultural Studies at the Johannes Gutenberg-Universität Mainz (Germany) in the Department for Translation, Linguistics, and Cultural Studies. Reihe TRANSÜD. Arbeiten zur Theorie und Praxis des Übersetzens und Dolmetschens - Band 79
“When we learn to speak, we learn to translate.” – Octavio Paz
The interpreting profession revolves around understanding the beauty and complexity of several languages. INTLING does just that as this course will enable you to understand the nature of the languages and clarify misconceptions you may have about it. By learning about linguistic forms and strategies, this course will help develop your inferential skills to better grasp the meaning and intent of the messages you will be working on. Involving yourself in this profession is akin to signing (pun intended) on for a lifetime commitment with languages. You will live and breathe them, and this course will help you make the necessary adjustment.
The Cambridge Handbook of Biolinguistics by
Biolinguistics involves the study of language from a broad perspective that embraces natural sciences, helping us better to understand the fundamentals of the faculty of language. This Handbook offers the most comprehensive state-of-the-field survey of the subject available. A team of prominent scholars working in a variety of disciplines is brought together to examine language development, language evolution and neuroscience, as well as providing overviews of the conceptual landscape of the field. The Handbook includes work at the forefront of contemporary research devoted to the evidence for a language instinct, the critical period hypothesis, grammatical maturation, bilingualism, the relation between mind and brain, and the role of natural selection in language evolution. It will be welcomed by graduate students and researchers in a wide range of disciplines, including linguistics, evolutionary biology and cognitive science.
The Cambridge Handbook of Language Policy by
Over the last fifty years, language policy has developed into a major discipline, drawing on research and practice in many nations and at many levels. This is the first Handbook to deal with language policy as a whole and is a complete 'state-of-the-field' survey, covering language practices, beliefs about language varieties, and methods and agencies for language management. It provides a historical background which traces the development of classical language planning, describes activities associated with indigenous and endangered languages, and contains chapters on imperialism, colonialism, effects of migration and globalization, and educational policy. It also evaluates language management agencies, analyzes language activism and looks at language cultivation (including reform of writing systems, orthography and modernized terminology). The definitive guide to the subject, it will be welcomed by students, researchers and language professionals in linguistics, education and politics.
The Cambridge Handbook of Linguistic Typology by
Linguistic typology identifies both how languages vary and what they all have in common. This Handbook provides a state-of-the art survey of the aims and methods of linguistic typology, and the conclusions we can draw from them. Part I covers phonological typology, morphological typology, sociolinguistic typology and the relationships between typology, historical linguistics and grammaticalization. It also addresses typological features of mixed languages, creole languages, sign languages and secret languages. Part II features contributions on the typology of morphological processes, noun categorization devices, negation, frustrative modality, logophoricity, switch reference and motion events. Finally, Part III focuses on typological profiles of the mainland South Asia area, Australia, Quechuan and Aymaran, Eskimo-Aleut, Iroquoian, the Kampa subgroup of Arawak, Omotic, Semitic, Dravidian, the Oceanic subgroup of Austronesian and the Awuyu-Ndumut family (in West Papua). Uniting the expertise of a stellar selection of scholars, this Handbook highlights linguistic typology as a major discipline within the field of linguistics.
A Concise Introduction to Linguistics by
Now in its fifth edition, A Concise Introduction to Linguistics provides students with a detailed introduction to the core concepts of language as it relates to culture. The textbook includes a focus on linguistic anthropology, unpacking the main contributions of linguistics to the study of human communication and culture. Aimed at the general education student, the textbook also provides anthropology, linguistics, and English majors with the resources needed to pursue advanced courses in this area. Written in an accessible manner that does not assume previous knowledge of linguistics, this new edition contains expanded discussions on linguistic anthropology, sociolinguistics (including a section on gender and language), and pragmatics. The textbook incorporates a robust set of pedagogical features including marginal definitions, a substantial glossary, chapter summaries, and learning exercises. Brand new to this edition are suggested reading lists at the end of every chapter, and recommended websites and apps to further aid students in their study.
Effective Curriculum for Teaching L2 Writing by
Effective Curriculum for Teaching L2 Writing sets out a clear big picture for curricular thinking about L2 writing pedagogy and offers a step-by-step guide to curriculum design with practical examples and illustrations. Its main purpose is to help pre-service and practicing teachers design courses for teaching academic writing and to do this as efficiently and effectively as possible. Bringing together the what and the how-to with research-based principles, what sets this book apart is its overarching focus on language pedagogy and language building. Part 1 examines curricular foundations in general and focuses on what is socially valued in L2 writing and pedagogy at school and at the college and university level. Part 2 is concerned with the nitty-gritty̶--the daily realities of curricular design and classroom instruction. Part 3 takes a close look at the key pedagogical ingredients of teaching academic L2 writing: vocabulary and collocations, grammar for academic writing, and down-to-earth techniques for helping L2 writers to organize discourse and ideas. The Appendix provides an extensive checklist for developing curricula for a course or several courses in language teaching.
The Grammar of Knowledge by
The Grammar of Knowledge offers both a linguistic and anthropological perspective on the expression of information sources, as well as inferences, assumptions, probability and possibility, and gradations of doubt and beliefs in a range of languages. The book investigates twelve differentlanguages, from families including Tibeto-Burman, Nakh-Dagestani, and Austronesian, all of which share the property of requiring the source of information to be specified in every sentence. In these languages, it may not be possible to say merely that "the man went fishing". Instead, the source ofevidence for the statement must also be specified, usually through the use of evidential markers. For example, it may be necessary to indicate whether the speaker saw the man go fishing; has simply assumed that the man went fishing; or was told that he went fishing by a third party.Some languages, such as Hinuq and Tatar, distinguish between first-hand and non first-hand information sources; others, such as Ersu, mark three distinct types of information - directly required, inferred or assumed, and reported. Some require an even greater level of specification: AsheninkaPerene, from South America, has a specific marker to express suspicions or misgivings. Like others in the series, the book illustrates and examines these aspects of language in different cultural and linguistic settings. It will interest linguists of all persuasions as well as linguistically-mindedanthropologists.
The Handbook of English for Specific Purposes by
Featuring a collection of newly commissioned essays, edited by two leading scholars, this Handbook surveys the key research findings in the field of English for Specific Purposes (ESP). * Provides a state-of-the-art overview of the origins and evolution, current research, and future directions in ESP * Features newly-commissioned contributions from a global team of leading scholars * Explores the history of ESP and current areas of research, including speaking, reading, writing, technology, and business, legal, and medical English * Considers perspectives on ESP research such as genre, intercultural rhetoric, multimodality, English as a lingua franca and ethnography
How languages work : an introduction to language and linguistics by
A new and exciting introduction to linguistics, this textbook presents language in all its amazing complexity, while guiding students gently through the basics. Students emerge with an appreciation of the diversity of the world's languages, as well as a deeper understanding of the structure of human language, the ways it is used, and its broader social and cultural context. Chapters introducing the nuts and bolts of language study (phonology, syntax, meaning) are combined with those on the 'functions' of language (discourse, prosody, pragmatics, and language contact), helping students gain a better grasp of how language works in the real world. A rich set of language 'profiles' help students explore the world's linguistic diversity, identify similarities and differences between languages, and encourages them to apply concepts from earlier chapter material. A range of carefully designed pedagogical features encourage student engagement, adopting a step-by-step approach and using study questions and case studies.
International sign : linguistic, usage, and status issues by
International Sign (IS) is widely used among deaf people and interpreters at international events, but what exactly is it, what are its linguistic features, where does its lexicon come from, and how is it used at interpreted events? This groundbreaking collection is the first volume to provide answers to these questions. Editors Rachel Rosenstock and Jemina Napier have assembled an international group of renowned linguists and interpreters to examine various aspects of International Sign. Their contributions are divided into three parts: International Sign as a Linguistic System; International Sign in Action--Interpreting, Translation, and Teaching; and International Sign Policy and Language Planning. The chapters cover a range of topics, including the morphosyntactic and discursive structures of interpreted IS, the interplay between conventional linguistic elements and nonconventional gestural elements in IS discourse, how deaf signers who use different signed languages establish communication, Deaf/hearing IS interpreting teams and how they sign depicting verbs, how best to teach foundation-level IS skills, strategies used by IS interpreters when interpreting from IS into English, and explorations of the best ways to prepare interpreters for international events. The work of the editors and contributors in this volume makes International Sign the most comprehensive, research-based analysis of a young but growing field in linguistics and interpretation.
An introduction to language. by
Assuming no prior knowledge of linguistics, this title is appropriate for a variety of fields - including education, languages, psychology, cognitive science, anthropology, English, and teaching English as a Second Language (TESL) - at both the undergraduate and graduate levels.
Language, Youth and Identity in the 21st Century by
The language of young people is central in sociolinguistic research, as it is seen to be innovative and a primary source of knowledge about linguistic change and the role of language. This volume brings together a team of leading scholars to explore and compare linguistic practices of young people in multilingual urban spaces, with analyses ranging from grammar to ideology. It includes fascinating examples from cities in Europe, Africa, Canada and the US to demonstrate how young people express their identities through language, for example in hip-hop lyrics and new social media. This is the first book to cover the topic from a globally diverse perspective, and it investigates how linguistic practices across different communities intersect with age, ethnicity, gender and class. In doing so it shows commonalities and differences in how young people experience, act and relate to the contemporary social, cultural and linguistic complexity of the twenty-first century.
Language : an introduction to the study of speech by
Among the most influential figures in the development of modern linguistics, the American scholar Edward Sapir (1884-1939) notably promoted the connection between anthropology and the study of language. His name is also associated with that of his student in the Sapir-Whorf principle of linguistic relativity, the hypothesis that the structure of a language affects how its speakers conceptualise the world. In this seminal work, first published in 1921, Sapir lucidly introduces his ideas about language and explores topics that remain fundamental to linguistics today, such as the relationship between language and culture, the elements of speech, grammatical processes and concepts, historical language development, and the question of how languages influence one another. Especially significant in the history of structural linguistics and ethnolinguistics, this clearly written text remains relevant and accessible to students and scholars across the social sciences.
The language myth : why language is not an instinct by
Language is central to our lives, the cultural tool that arguably sets us apart from other species. Some scientists have argued that language is innate, a type of unique human 'instinct' pre-programmed in us from birth. In this book, Vyvyan Evans argues that this received wisdom is, in fact, a myth. Debunking the notion of a language 'instinct', Evans demonstrates that language is related to other animal forms of communication; that languages exhibit staggering diversity; that we learn our mother tongue drawing on general properties and abilities of the human mind, rather than an inborn 'universal' grammar; that language is not autonomous but is closely related to other aspects of our mental lives; and that, ultimately, language and the mind reflect and draw upon the way we interact with others in the world. Compellingly written and drawing on cutting-edge research, The Language Myth sets out a forceful alternative to the received wisdom, showing how language and the mind really work.
Linguistics by
Language is the medium in which we humans compose our thoughts, explain our thinking, construct our arguments, and create works of literature. Without language, societies as complex as ours could not exist. Geoffrey Pullum offers a stimulating introduction to the many ways in which linguistics, as the scientific study of language, matters. With its close relationships to psychology, education, philosophy, and computer science, the subject has a compelling human story to tell about the ways in which different societies see and describe the world, and its far-reaching applications range from law to medicine and from developmental psychology to artificial intelligence. Introducing Polity's Why It Matters series: In these short and lively books, world-leading thinkers make the case for the importance of their subjects and aim to inspire a new generation of students.
Mapping Applied Linguistics by
Mapping Applied Linguistics: A guide for students and practitioners, second edition, provides a newly updated, wide-ranging introduction to the full scope of applied linguistics. This innovative book maps the diverse and constantly expanding range of theories, methods and issues faced by students and practitioners around the world, integrating both sociocultural and cognitive perspectives. Practically oriented and ideally suited to students new to the discipline, Mapping Applied Linguistics provides in-depth coverage of: multilingualism, language variation and Global Englishes literacy, language teaching and bilingual education discourse analysis language policy and planning lexicography and translation language pathology and forensic linguistics The new second edition features contemporary examples of global applied linguistics research and practice, and includes updated further reading and new fieldwork suggestions for each chapter. The companion website at cw.routledge.com/textbooks/hall provides a wealth of additional learning material, including activities, flashcards and links to the latest online resources. Mapping Applied Linguistics is essential reading for students studying applied linguistics, TESOL, general linguistics and language and literacy education at the advanced undergraduate or master's degree level. It also provides a gateway for practitioners and specialists seeking to better understand the wider scope of their work.
The Routledge Handbook of Language Awareness by
The Routledge Handbook of Language Awareness is a comprehensive and informative overview of the broad field of language awareness. It contains a collection of state-of-the-art reviews of both established themes and new directions, authored and edited by experts in the field. The handbook is divided into three sections and reflects the engaging diversity of language awareness perspectives on language teaching and teachers, language learning and learners, and extending to additional areas of importance that are less directly concerned with language instruction. In their introductory chapter, the editors provide valuable background to the language awareness field along with their summary of the chapters and issues covered. A helpful section giving further reading suggestions for each of the chapters is included at the end of the book. This volume is essential reading for graduate students and researchers working in the sphere of language awareness within applied linguistics, sociolinguistics and across the wider spectrum of language and communication.
Thought-based linguistics : how languages turn thoughts into sounds by
The extent to which language is inseparable from thought has long been a major subject of debate across linguistics, psychology, philosophy and other disciplines. In this study, Wallace Chafe presents a thought-based theory of language that goes beyond traditional views that semantics, syntax, and sounds are sufficient to account for language design. Language begins with thoughts in the mind of a speaker and ends by affecting thoughts in the mind of a listener. This obvious observation is seldom incorporated in descriptions of language design for two major reasons. First, the role of thought is usually usurped by semantics. But semantic structures are imposed on thought by languages and differ from one language to another. Second, thought does not lend itself to familiar methods of linguistic analysis. Chafe suggests ways of describing thoughts, traces the path languages follow from thoughts to sounds, and explores ways in which thoughts are oriented in time, memory, imagination, reality, and emotions.
“When we learn to speak, we learn to translate.” – Octavio Paz
The interpreting profession revolves around understanding the beauty and complexity of several languages. INTLING does just that as this course will enable you to understand the nature of the languages and clarify misconceptions you may have about it. By learning about linguistic forms and strategies, this course will help develop your inferential skills to better grasp the meaning and intent of the messages you will be working on. Involving yourself in this profession is akin to signing (pun intended) on for a lifetime commitment with languages. You will live and breathe them, and this course will help you make the necessary adjustment.
Applied Linguistics Perspectives on CLIL by
This book represents the first collection of studies on Content and Language Integrated Learning (CLIL) which brings together a range of perspectives through which CLIL has been investigated within Applied Linguistics. The book aims to show how the four perspectives of Second Language Acquisition (SLA), Systemic Functional Linguistics (SFL), Discourse Analysis, and Sociolinguistics highlight different important aspects of CLIL as a context for second language development. Each of the four sections in the book opens with an overview of one of the perspectives written by a leading scholar in the field, and is then followed by three empirical studies which focus on specific aspects of CLIL seen from this perspective. Topics covered include motivation, the use of tasks, pragmatic development, speech functions in spoken interaction, the use of evaluative language in expressing content knowledge in writing, multimodal interaction, assessment for learning, L1 use in the classroom, English-medium instruction in universities, and CLIL teachers' professional identities.
A cognitive linguistics account of wordplay by
Even though the ability to create witty puns seems to be an inherent skill of humankind, an apt explanation of their linguistic nature has evaded many academic descriptions. This monograph offers a novel conceptual perspective on the creation of meaning observable beneath the surface of wordplay. The rationale for such an approach lies in the fact that language, and hence wordplay, is a cognitive phenomenon which involves some underlying complex mental processes, such as thinking in terms of image schemas, conceptual metaphor and metonymy, or blending, to mention just a few.
Course in General Linguistics by
The Cours de linguistique generale, reconstructed from students' notes after Saussure's death in 1913, founded modern linguistic theory by breaking the study of language free from a merely historical and comparativist approach. Saussure's new method, now known as Structuralism, has since been applied to such diverse areas as art, architecture, folklore, literary criticism, and philosophy.
A Glossary of Applied Linguistics by
Applied Linguistics is still a growing field. Key texts and handbooks have appeared in recent years and international applied linguistics conferences and professional associations occur regularly. While Applied Linguistics continues to attract new entrants and to generate new strands of research, there is a need for a clear and concise map of the field. This is the purpose of the Glossary. The author, Alan Davies, is a well-established, well-published authority on applied linguistics. Not a typically dry dictionary, Dr. Davies infuses the alphabetical entries with a touch of humor and thought-provoking context creating an up-to-date, useful, and coherent view of applied linguistics. The Glossary compiles the most ubiquitously used terms in applied linguistics and teacher-training literature. It takes a wide-ranging view of the field, drawing not only on linguistics but including psychology, sociology, education, measurement theory, speech therapy, translation, and language planning. Other features include: *numerous cross-references to key terms; *an introduction, which discusses the difficulty of defining applied linguistics; and *a brief reading list of key text. The primary market is master's student in Applied Linguistics, Second Language Acquisition, and TESL/TEFL. Undergraduate students, particularly in language fields and in education will also find it helpful, as well as language teachers who have not themselves followed Applied Linguistics courses and who are interested in finding out about the field.
The Handbook of Applied Linguistics by
The Handbook of Applied Linguistics is a collection of newly commissioned articles that provide a comprehensive and up-to-date picture of the field of Applied Linguistics. Provides a comprehensive and current picture of the field of Applied Linguistics. Contains 32 newly commissioned articles that examine both the applications of linguistics to language data and the use of real world language to ameliorate social problems. Valuable resource for students and researchers in applied linguistics, language teaching, and second language acquisition. Presents applied linguistics as an independent discipline that unifies practical experience and theoretical understanding of language development and language in use.
The Handbook of Linguistics by
"The first edition of this Handbook is built on surveys by well-known figures from around the world and around the intellectual world, reflecting several different theoretical predilections, balancing coverage of enduring questions and important recent work. Those strengths are now enhanced by adding new chapters and thoroughly revising almost all other chapters, partly to reflect ways in which the field has changed in the intervening twenty years, in some places radically. The result is a magnificent volume that can be used for many purposes." David W. Lightfoot, Georgetown University "The Handbook of Linguistics, Second Edition is a stupendous achievement. Aronoff and Rees-Miller have provided overviews of 29 subfields of linguistics, each written by one of the leading researchers in that subfield and each impressively crafted in both style and content. I know of no finer resource for anyone who would wish to be better informed on recent developments in linguistics." Frederick J. Newmeyer, University of Washington, University of British Columbia and Simon Fraser University "Linguists, their students, colleagues, family, and friends: anyone interested in the latest findings from a wide array of linguistic subfields will welcome this second updated and expanded edition of The Handbook of Linguistics. Leading scholars provide highly accessible yet substantive introductions to their fields: it's an even more valuable resource than its predecessor." Sally McConnell-Ginet, Cornell University "No handbook or text offers a more comprehensive, contemporary overview of the field of linguistics in the twenty-first century. New and thoroughly updated chapters by prominent scholars on each topic and subfield make this a unique, landmark publication."Walt Wolfram, North Carolina State University This second edition of The Handbook of Linguistics provides an updated and timely overview of the field of linguistics. The editor's broad definition of the field ensures that the book may be read by those seeking a comprehensive introduction to the subject, but with little or no prior knowledge of the area. Building on the popular first edition, The Handbook of Linguistics, Second Edition features new and revised content reflecting advances within the discipline. New chapters expand the already broad coverage of the Handbook to address and take account of key changes within the field in the intervening years. It explores: psycholinguistics, linguistic anthropology and ethnolinguistics, sociolinguistic theory, language variation and second language pedagogy. With contributions from a global team of leading linguists, this comprehensive and accessible volume is the ideal resource for those engaged in study and work within the dynamic field of linguistics.
An introduction to applied linguistics : approaches and methods in language teaching by 
Introduction to English Linguistics by
The new and updated third edition of this highly successful textbook contains an additional chapter that presents modern empirical research methods in the form of exemplary small-scale studies. In these projects the authors invite the reader to develop and address research questions from phonetics/phonology, morphology and syntax. The pertinent experimental and corpus-linguistic techniques are introduced and students are familiarized with some basic statistical tools necessary for the analysis of the data. The major difference between this book and its potential competitors lies in its hands-on didactic orientation, with a strong focus on linguistic analysis and argumentation. Language and linguistic theory are approached from a strictly empirical perspective: given a certain set of data to be accounted for, theoretical and methodological problems must be solved in order to analyze and understand the data properly. The book is not written from the perspective of a particular theoretical framework and draws on insights from various research traditions. Introduction to English Linguistics concentrates on gaining expertise and analytical skills in the traditional core areas of linguistics, i.e. phonology, morphology, syntax, semantics and pragmatics. The chapter on "Extensions and applications" widens the perspective to other areas of linguistic research, such as historical, socio- and psycholinguistics. Each chapter is accompanied by exercises and suggestions for further reading. A glossary and an index facilitate access to terms and topics.
Introduction to Semitic Comparative Linguistics by
Although it is a discipline with a venerable heritage, comparative Semitic linguistics has long suffered from the difficulty of finding an introduction that does not already require a specialists' knowledge of the field. The primary languages Gray selected were Hebrew, the language most Semitic readers begin with, and Arabic, the most widely known Semitic language. The result is this user-friendly introduction.
Language : an introduction to the study of speech by
Among the most influential figures in the development of modern linguistics, the American scholar Edward Sapir (1884-1939) notably promoted the connection between anthropology and the study of language. His name is also associated with that of his student in the Sapir-Whorf principle of linguistic relativity, the hypothesis that the structure of a language affects how its speakers conceptualise the world. In this seminal work, first published in 1921, Sapir lucidly introduces his ideas about language and explores topics that remain fundamental to linguistics today, such as the relationship between language and culture, the elements of speech, grammatical processes and concepts, historical language development, and the question of how languages influence one another. Especially significant in the history of structural linguistics and ethnolinguistics, this clearly written text remains relevant and accessible to students and scholars across the social sciences.
The Linguistics of Sign Languages by
How different are sign languages across the world? Are individual signs and signed sentences constructed in the same way across these languages? What are the rules for having a conversation in a sign language? How do children and adults learn a sign language? How are sign languages processed in the brain? These questions and many more are addressed in this introductory book on sign linguistics using examples from more than thirty different sign languages. Comparisons are also made with spoken languages. This book can be used as a self-study book or as a text book for students of sign linguistics. Each chapter concludes with a summary, some test-yourself questions and assignments, as well as a list of recommended texts for further reading. The book is accompanied by a website containing assignments, video clips and links to web resources.
The Routledge Handbook of Applied Linguistics by
The Routledge Handbook of Applied Linguistics serves as an introduction and reference point to key areas in the field of applied linguistics. The five sections of the volume encompass a wide range of topics from a variety of perspectives: applied linguistics in action language learning, language education language, culture and identity perspectives on language in use descriptions of language for applied linguistics. Thenbsp;forty-seven chapters connect knowledge about language to decision-making in the real world. The volume as a whole highlights the role of applied linguistics, which is to make insights drawn from language study relevant to such decision-making. The chapters are written by specialists from around the world. Each one provides an overview of the history of the topic, the main current issues and possible future trajectory. Where appropriate, authors discuss the impact and use of new technology in the area. Suggestions for further reading are provided with every chapter. The Routledge Handbook of Applied Linguistics is an essential purchase for postgraduate students of applied linguistics. Editorial board: Ronald Carter, Guy Cook, Diane Larsen-Freeman and Amy Tsui. nbsp;
Sociolinguistic Styles by
Sociolinguistic Styles presents a new and in-depth, historically rooted overview of the phenomenon of style-shifting in sociolinguistic variation. Written by an internationally acclaimed expert in the field, the text explores why, where and when it occurs. Full examination of the complex phenomenon of style-shifting in sociolinguistics, focusing on its nature and social motivations, as well as on the mechanisms for its usage and its effects In-depth, up-to-date critical overview of the different theoretical approaches accounting for stylistic variation, exploring their historical roots not only in sociolinguistics and stylistics or semiotics but also in classical fields such as rhetoric and oratory Coverage of a wide range of related concepts and issues, from the oldest Greek ethos and pathos or Roman elocutio and pronuntiatio to the contemporary enregisterment, stylisation, stance, or crossing Written by an academic who has been instrumental in developing theory in this area of sociolinguistics
Theory and Data in Cognitive Linguistics by
Cognitive linguistics has an honourable tradition of paying respect to naturally occurring language data and there have been fruitful interactions between corpus data and aspects of linguistic structure and meaning. More recently, dialect data and sociolinguistic data collection methods/theoretical concepts have started to generate interest. There has also been an increase in several kinds of experimental work. However, not all linguistic data is simply naturally occurring or derived from experiments with statistically robust samples of speakers. Other traditions, especially the generative tradition, have fruitfully used introspection and questions about the grammaticality of different strings to uncover patterns which might otherwise have gone unnoticed. The divide between generative and cognitive approaches to language is intimately connected to the kinds of data drawn on, and the way in which generalisations are derived from these data. The papers in this volume explore these issues through the lens of synchronic linguistic analysis, the study of language change, typological investigation and experimental study. Originally published in Studies in Language Vol. 36:3 (2012).
Voices and practices in applied linguistics by
"Voices and Practices in Applied Linguistics comprises a selection of original applied linguistics-based research on the theme of the diversity of Applied Linguistics and in Applied Linguistics.It is a unique collection of reflections and cutting-edge research relating to academic, policy and professional fields of Applied Linguistics, featuring chapters written by founders of the field, established researchers, and rising stars. This accessible, eclectic and forward-looking volume is significant both for research and practice. It highlights current globalised perspectives on diversity in language use and communication, across a variety of contexts, and with a rich mix of frameworks, methodologies and participants.Compiled and edited by a team of academic experts in the field, this edited collection will be of interest to established and emerging researchers in Applied Linguistics globally. It will also be relevant to language professionals, practitioners, and policy makers.The volume draws together papers from the 2017 British Association for Applied Linguistics (BAAL) conference, marking the 50th anniversary of its inaugural meeting. Founded in the mid-1960s, this UK-based professional association provides a forum for Applied Linguistics and its annual meeting brings together researchers and language professionals from across this field."
Interpreting is both an art and a science. The expression into the target language lends to its aesthetic appeal, which most non-signers find fascinating. Little do they know the complexity that goes inside every interpreter’s mind, as they only see the final product of that process. In this course, you will be introduced to the theoretical and technical concepts of the communication process and the different models of interpreting. You will also learn techniques and approaches to interpreting. By understanding the foundations of the interpretation process, you will be able to effectively and efficiently carry out your tasks, and appreciate every single step leading to its execution.
101 activities for teaching ASL by
On the cover, the number 101 is represented by an illustration of its ASL equivalent.
"This activity book was developed to support instructors teaching American Sign Language (ASL) to students of all ages. Most of the activities have illustrated handouts and involve interacting with others.
The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies - an Introduction to Its Theories by
The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies is the first introductory course book that explores the theoretical foundations used in sign language interpreting studies. Authors Roy, Brunson, and Stone examine the disciplines whose theoretical frameworks and methodologies have influenced the academic study of interpreting. With this text, explanations for how interpreted events occur, how interpreted products are created, and how the interpreting process is studied can be framed within a variety of theoretical perspectives, forming a foundation for the emerging transdiscipline of Interpreting Studies. ​​ As sign language interpreting has emerged and evolved in the last 20 years as an academic field of study, the scope of learning has broadened to include fields beyond the language and culture of deaf people. This text surveys six disciplines that have informed the study of sign language interpreting: history, translation, linguistics, sociology, social psychology, and cognitive psychology, along with their major ideas, principal scholars, and ways of viewing human interaction. Each chapter includes clear learning goals, definitions, discussion questions, and images to aid understanding. The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies is required reading for upper-level undergraduate or first-year graduate students in interpreting, Deaf studies, and sign language programs.
Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters by
Picking up where Innovative Practices in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters left off, this new collection presents the best new interpreter teaching techniques proven in action by the eminent contributors assembled here. In the first chapter, Dennis Cokely discusses revising curricula in the new century based upon experiences at Northeastern University. Jeffrey E. Davis delineates how to teach observation techniques to interpreters, while Elizabeth Winston and Christine Monikowski suggest how discourse mapping can be considered the Global Positioning System of translation. In other chapters, Laurie Swabey proposes ways to handle the challenge of referring expressions for interpreting students, and Melanie Metzger describes how to learn and recognize what interpreters do in interaction. Jemina Napier contributes information on training interpreting students to identify omission potential. Robert G. Lee explains how to make the interpreting process come alive in the classroom. Mieke Van Herreweghe discusses turn-taking and turn-yielding in meetings with Deaf and hearing participants in her contribution. Anna-Lena Nilsson defines "false friends," or how contextually incorrect use of facial expressions with certain signs in Swedish Sign Language can be detrimental influences on interpreters. The final chapter by Kyra Pollitt and Claire Haddon recommends retraining interpreters in the art of telephone interpreting, completing Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters as the new authoritative volume in this vital communication profession.
Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and Translator Training by
Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and Translator Training is a systematically corrected, enhanced and updated avatar of a book (1995) which is widely used in T&I training programmes worldwide and widely quoted in the international Translation Studies community. It provides readers with the conceptual bases required to understand both the principles and recurrent issues and difficulties in professional translation and interpreting, guiding them along from an introduction to fundamental communication issues in translation to a discussion of the usefulness of research about Translation, through discussions of loyalty and fidelity issues, translation and interpreting strategies and tactics and underlying norms, ad hoc knowledge acquisition, sources of errors in translation, T&I cognition and language availability. It takes on board recent developments as reflected in the literature and spells out and discusses links between practices and concepts in T&I and concepts and theories from cognitive psychology and psycholinguistics.
Consecutive interpreting from ASL by Conversations with Interpreter Educators by
Sign language interpreter education is a relatively young field that is moving toward more theory-based and research-oriented approaches. The concept of sharing research, which is strongly encouraged in this academic community, inspired Christine Monikowski to develop a volume that collects and distills the best teaching practices of leading academics in the interpreting field. In Conversations with Interpreter Educators, Monikowski assembles a group of 17 professors in the field of sign language interpretation. Through individual interviews conducted via Skype, Monikowski engages them in informal conversations about their teaching experiences and the professional publications that have influenced their teaching philosophies. She guides each conversation by asking these experts to share a scholarly publication that they assign to their students. They discuss the merits of the text and its role in the classroom, which serves to highlight the varying goals each professor sets for students. The complexity of the interpreting task, self-reflection, critical thinking, linguistics, backchannel feedback, and cultural understanding are a sampling of topics explored in these exchanges. Engaging and accessible, Monikowski's conversations offer evidence-based practices that will inform and inspire her fellow educators.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
Deaf Interpreters at Work by
Now, for the first time, a collection featuring 17 widely respected scholars depicts the everyday practices of deaf interpreters in their respective nations. Deaf Interpreters at Work: International Insights presents the history of Deaf translators and interpreters and details the development of testing and accreditation to raise their professional profiles. Other chapters delineate the cognitive processes of Deaf interpreting; Deaf-Deaf interpreter teams; Deaf and hearing team preparation; the use of Tactile American Sign Language by those interpreting for the Deaf-Blind community; and conference interpreting and interpreting teams. Along with volume coeditors Robert Adam, Christopher Stone, and Steven D. Collins, contributors include Markus Aro, Karen Bontempo, Juan Carlos Druetta, Senan Dunne, Eileen Forestal, Della Goswell, Juli af Klintberg, Patricia Levitzke-Gray, Jemina Napier, Brenda Nicodemus, Debra Russell, Stephanie Sforza, Marty Taylor, and Linda Warby. The scope of their research spans the world, including many unique facets of interpreting by deaf people in Argentina, Australia, Canada, England, Finland, Ireland, Sweden, and the United States, establishing this work as the standard in this burgeoning discipline.
Deaf studies today! : beyond talk by
Beyond Talk: Deaf Studies Today! 2012 Conference Proceedings contains original submissions by presenters at the conference held on the campus of Utah Valley University. This volume is the fifth in the series of proceedings from the Deaf Studies Today! conference. It features papers by the following authors: Patti Durr Christine B Brown Andrew Byrne, Ph.D. Merrilee Gietz Heather Clark Hannah M. Dostal, Ph.D. and Lisa M. Bowers Brian Malzkuhn Joseph Hill, Ph.D. Lewis Kummer, Ed.D. and Cynthia Plue, Ed.D. J. Freeman King, Ed.D. Rebecca Furland Nigel Howard and Liz Scully David H. Smith, Ph.D. and Bryan Berrett, Ed.D Sheryl B. Cooper, Ph.D. and Jody H. Cripps, Ph.D. Tabitha Jacques Mark Zaurov Carol Sanderson-MacNicholl Noppawan Chainarong, Vee Yee Chong, and Jennifer Witteborg
Evolving Paradigms in Interpreter Education by
This volume brings together a cadre of world-renowned interpreting educators and researchers who conduct a rich exploration of paradigms, both old and new, in interpreter education. They review existing research, explicate past and current practices, and call for a fresh look at the roots of interpreter education in anticipation of the future. Expert commentary accompanies each chapter to provide a starting point for reflection on and discussion of the growing needs in this discipline. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp; Volume coeditor Christine Monikowski begins by considering how interpreter educators can balance their responsibilities of teaching, practice, and research. Her chapter is accompanied by commentary about the capacity to "academize" what has been thought of as a semi-profession. Helen Tebble shares research on medical interpreting from an applied linguistic perspective. Terry Janzen follows with the impact of linguistic theory on interpretation research methodology. Barbara Shaffer discusses how interpreting theory shapes the interpreter's role. Elizabeth A. Winston, also a volume coeditor, rounds out this innovative collection with her chapter on infusing evidence-based teaching practices into interpreting education. Noted interpreter educators and researchers also provide an international range of insights in this collection, including Rico Peterson, Beppie van den Bogaerde, Karen Bontempo, Ian Mason, Ester Leung, David Quinto-Pozos, Lorraine Leeson, Jemina Napier, Christopher Stone, Debra Russell, and Claudia Angelelli.
In our hands : educating healthcare interpreters by
Deaf Americans have identified healthcare as the most difficult setting in which to obtain a qualified interpreter. Yet, relatively little attention has been given to developing evidence-based resources and a standardized body of knowledge to educate healthcare interpreters. In Our Hands: Educating Healthcare Interpreters addresses these concerns by delineating the best practices for preparing interpreters to facilitate full access for deaf people in healthcare settings. The first section of this volume begins with developing domains and competencies toward a teaching methodology for medical and mental health interpreters. The next chapter describes a discourse approach that relies on analyzing actual transcripts and recordings to train healthcare interpreters. Other chapters feature a model mental health interpreter training program in Alabama; using a Demand-Control Schema for experiential learning; the risk of vicarious trauma to interpreters; online educational opportunities; and interpreting for deaf health care professionals. The second section offers four perspectives on education, including healthcare literacy of the clients; the education of Deaf interpreters; the development of standards for spoken-language healthcare interpreters; and the perspectives of healthcare interpreter educators in Europe. The range and depth of In Our Hands takes significant strides in presenting educational opportunities that can enhance the critical services provided by healthcare interpreters to deaf clients.
International sign : linguistic, usage, and status issues by
International Sign (IS) is widely used among deaf people and interpreters at international events, but what exactly is it, what are its linguistic features, where does its lexicon come from, and how is it used at interpreted events? This groundbreaking collection is the first volume to provide answers to these questions. Editors Rachel Rosenstock and Jemina Napier have assembled an international group of renowned linguists and interpreters to examine various aspects of International Sign. Their contributions are divided into three parts: International Sign as a Linguistic System; International Sign in Action--Interpreting, Translation, and Teaching; and International Sign Policy and Language Planning. The chapters cover a range of topics, including the morphosyntactic and discursive structures of interpreted IS, the interplay between conventional linguistic elements and nonconventional gestural elements in IS discourse, how deaf signers who use different signed languages establish communication, Deaf/hearing IS interpreting teams and how they sign depicting verbs, how best to teach foundation-level IS skills, strategies used by IS interpreters when interpreting from IS into English, and explorations of the best ways to prepare interpreters for international events. The work of the editors and contributors in this volume makes International Sign the most comprehensive, research-based analysis of a young but growing field in linguistics and interpretation.
Interpreter Education in the Digital Age by
This collection brings together innovative research and approaches for blended learning using digital technology in interpreter education for signed and spoken languages. Volume editors Suzanne Ehrlich and Jemina Napier call upon the expertise of 21 experts, including themselves, to report on the current technology used to provide digital enhancements to interpreter education in Australia, New Zealand, Brazil, Belgium, the United Kingdom, and the United States. Divided into three parts, Innovation, Change, and Community Engagement, this study focuses on the technology itself, rather than how technology enhances curriculum, delivery, or resources. Initiatives described in this collection range from the implementation of on-demand interpreting using iPad technology to create personalized, small-group, multidimensional models suited to digital media for 160 languages; introducing students to interpreting in a 3D world through an IVY virtual environment; applying gaming principles to interpreter education; assessing the amenability of the digital pen in the hybrid mode of interpreting; developing multimedia content for both open access and structured interpreter education environments; to preparing interpreting students for interactions in social media forums, and more. Interpreter Education in the Digital Age provides a context for the application of technologies in interpreter education from an international viewpoint across languages and modalities.
Interpreting Figurative Meaning by
Interpreting Figurative Meaning critically evaluates the recent empirical work from psycholinguistics and neuroscience examining the successes and difficulties associated with interpreting figurative language. There is now a huge, often contradictory literature on how people understand figures of speech. Gibbs and Colston argue that there may not be a single theory or model that adequately explains both the processes and products of figurative meaning experience. Experimental research may ultimately be unable to simply adjudicate between current models in psychology, linguistics and philosophy of how figurative meaning is interpreted. Alternatively, the authors advance a broad theoretical framework, motivated by ideas from 'dynamical systems theory', that describes the multiple, interacting influences which shape people's experiences of figurative meaning in discourse. This book details past research and theory, offers a critical assessment of this work and sets the stage for a new vision of figurative experience in human life.
The Next Generation of Research in Interpreter Education - Pursuing Evidence-Based Practices by
This collection contributes to an emerging body of research in sign language interpreter education, a field in which research on teaching practices has been rare. The Next Generation of Research in Interpreter Education investigates learning experiences and teaching practices that provide the evidence necessary to inform and advance instructional approaches. The five studies included in this volume examine role-play activities in the classroom, the experiences of Deaf students in interpreting programs, reducing anxiety in the interpreting process, mentoring, and self-assessment. The contributors are a nascent group of educators who represent a growing mastery of contemporary standards in interpreter education. Their chapters share a common theme: the experiences and learning environments of students as they progress toward entry into the interpreting profession.
Service Learning in Interpreter Education by
Institutions of higher learning around the nation have embraced the concept of student civic engagement as part of their curricula, a movement that has spurred administrators in various fields to initiate programs as part of their disciplines. In response, sign language interpreting educators are attempting to devise service-learning programs aimed at Deaf communities. Except for a smattering of journal articles, however, they have had no primary guide for fashioning these programs. Sherry Shaw remedies this in her new book Service Learning in Interpreter Education: Strategies for Extending Student Involvement in the Deaf Community. Shaw begins by outlining how to extend student involvement beyond the field experience of an internship or practicum and suggests how to overcome student resistance to a course that seems atypical. She introduces the educational strategy behind service-learning, explaining it as a tool for re-centering the Deaf community in interpreter education. She then provides the framework for a service-learning course syllabus, including establishing Deaf community partnerships and how to conduct student assessments. Service Learning in Interpreter Education concludes with first-person accounts from students and community members who recount their personal and professional experiences with service learning. With this thorough guide, interpreter education programs can develop stand-alone courses or modules within existing coursework.
Signed Language Interpreting in the 21st Century by
This text provides interpreting students with a broad knowledge base that encompasses the latest research, addresses current trends and perspectives of the Deaf community, and promotes critical thinking and open dialogue about the working conditions, ethics, boundaries, and competencies needed by a highly qualified interpreter in various settings. This volume expands the resources available to aspiring interpreters, including Deaf interpreters, and incorporates the voices of renowned experts on topics relevant to today's practitioners. Each chapter provides students with objectives, keywords, and discussion questions. The chapters convey clear information about topics that include credentialing, disposition and aptitude for becoming an interpreter, interpreting for people who are DeafBlind, and working within specialty settings, such as legal and healthcare. A key resource for interpreter certification test preparation, this text follows the interpreter's ethical, practical, and professional development through a career of lifelong learning and service.
Sign Language Interpreting by
Sign Language Interpreting: Exploring Its Art and Science is a comprehensive exploration of the practice and research relating to sign language interpreting. A pleasant conversational style of writing is used to present the problems, the issues, and the options in this field as they are known today. The reader is taken on a journey from the early days of interpreting, to the professionalization of interpreters, to an examination of past and present models of interpreting. The business and ethical aspects of interpreting are discussed while focusing on current practice.
Sign Language Interpreting in the Workplace by
The last forty years have seen a dramatic change in the nature of work, with deaf people increasingly moving into white collar or office-based professions. The rise of deaf professionals has led to employment opportunities for signed language interpreters across a variety of workplace settings, creating a unique set of challenges that require specialized strategies. Aspects such as social interaction between employees, the unwritten patterns and rules of workplace behavior, hierarchical structures, and the changing dynamics of deaf employee/interpreter relationships place constraints upon the interpreter's role and interpreting performance. Jules Dickinson's examination of interpreted workplace interactions is based on the only detailed, empirical study of this setting to date. Using practitioner responses and transcripts of real-life interpreted workplace interactions, Dickinson's findings demonstrate the complexity of the interpreter's role and responsibilities. The book concentrates on the ways in which signed language interpreters affect the interaction between deaf and hearing employees in team meetings by focusing on humor, small talk, and the collaborative floor. Signed Language Interpreting in the Workplace demonstrates that deaf employees require highly skilled professionals to enable them to integrate into the workplace on a level equal with their hearing peers. It also provides actionable insights for interpreters in workplace settings that will be a valuable resource for interpreting students, practitioners, interpreter trainers, and researchers.
This Means This, This Means That by
Semiotics is the theory of signs, and reading signs is a part of everyday life: from road signs that point to a destination, to smoke that warns of fire, to the symbols buried within art and literature. Semiotic theory can, however, seem mysterious and impenetrable. This introductory book decodes that mystery using visual examples instead of abstract theory. Read straight through or dipped into regularly, this book provides practical examples of how meaning is made in contemporary culture.
Interpreting is both an art and a science. The expression into the target language lends to its aesthetic appeal, which most non-signers find fascinating. Little do they know the complexity that goes inside every interpreter’s mind, as they only see the final product of that process. In this course, you will be introduced to the theoretical and technical concepts of the communication process and the different models of interpreting. You will also learn techniques and approaches to interpreting. By understanding the foundations of the interpretation process, you will be able to effectively and efficiently carry out your tasks, and appreciate every single step leading to its execution.
Aptitude for Interpreting by
First published as a Special Issue of Interpreting (issue 10:1, 2011) and complemented with two articles published in Interpreting issue 16:1, 2014, this volume provides a comprehensive view of the challenge of identifying and measuring aptitude for interpreting. Following a broad review of the existing literature, the array of eight empirical papers captures the multiple dimensions of aptitude, from personality traits and soft skills such as motivation, anxiety and learning styles to aspects of cognitive performance. The populations studied, with experimental as well as survey research designs, include students and professionals of sign language interpreting as well as spoken-language interpreting, and valuable synergies emerge. While pointing to the need for much further work, the papers brought together in this volume clearly represent the cutting edge of research into aptitude for interpreting, and should prove a milestone on the way toward supplying educators with reliable methods for testing applicants to interpreter training programs.
Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and Translator Training by
Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and Translator Training is a systematically corrected, enhanced and updated avatar of a book (1995) which is widely used in T&I training programmes worldwide and widely quoted in the international Translation Studies community. It provides readers with the conceptual bases required to understand both the principles and recurrent issues and difficulties in professional translation and interpreting, guiding them along from an introduction to fundamental communication issues in translation to a discussion of the usefulness of research about Translation, through discussions of loyalty and fidelity issues, translation and interpreting strategies and tactics and underlying norms, ad hoc knowledge acquisition, sources of errors in translation, T&I cognition and language availability. It takes on board recent developments as reflected in the literature and spells out and discusses links between practices and concepts in T&I and concepts and theories from cognitive psychology and psycholinguistics.
Deaf American Prose, 1980-2010 by
In Deaf life, the personal narrative holds sway because most Deaf individuals recall their formative years as solitary struggles to understand and to be understood. Few deaf people in the past related their stories in written form, relying instead on a different kind of "oral" tradition, that of American Sign Language. During the last several decades, however, a burgeoning bilingual deaf experience has ignited an explosion of Deaf writing that has pushed the potential of ASL-influenced English to extraordinary creative heights. Deaf American Prose: 1980-2010 presents a diverse cross-section of stories, essays, memoirs, and novel excerpts by a remarkable cadre of Deaf writers that mines this rich, bilingual environment. The works in Deaf American Prose frame the Deaf narrative in myriad forms: Tom Willard sends up hearing patronization in his wicked satire "What Exactly Am I Supposed to Overcome?" Terry Galloway injects humor in "Words," her take on the identity issues of being hard of hearing rather than deaf or hearing. Other contributors relate familiar stories about familiar trials, such as Tonya Stremlau's account of raising twins, and Joseph Santini's short story of the impact on Deaf and hearing in-laws of the death of a son. The conflicts are well-known and heartfelt, but with wrinkles directly derived from the Deaf perspective. Several of the contributors expand the Deaf affect through ASL glosses and visual/spatial elements. Sara Stallard emulates ASL on paper through its syntax and glosses, and by eliminating English elements, a technique used in dialogue by Kristen Ringman and others. Deaf American Prose features the work of other well-known contemporary Deaf writers, including co-editor Kristen Harmon, Christopher Jon Heuer, Raymond Luczak, and Willy Conley. The rising Deaf writers presented here further distinguish the first volume in this new series by thinking in terms of what they can bring to English, not what English can bring to them.
Deafening Modernism by
Deafening Modernism tells the story of modernism from the perspective of Deaf critical insight. Working to develop a critical Deaf theory independent of identity-based discourse, Rebecca Sanchez excavates the intersections between Deaf and modernist studies. She traces the ways that Deaf culture, history, linguistics, and literature provide a vital and largely untapped resource for understanding the history of American language politics and the impact that history has had on modernist aesthetic production. Discussing Deaf and disability studies in these unexpected contexts highlights the contributions the field can make to broader discussions of the intersections between images, bodies, and text. Drawing on a range of methodological approaches, including literary analysis and history, linguistics, ethics, and queer, cultural, and film studies, Sanchez sheds new light on texts by T.S. Eliot, Ezra Pound, Gertrude Stein, William Carlos Williams, Charlie Chaplin, and many others. By approaching modernism through the perspective of Deaf and disability studies, Deafening Modernism reconceptualizes deafness as a critical modality enabling us to freshly engage topics we thought we knew.
Discourse in signed languages by
In this volume, editor Cynthia B. Roy presents a stellar cast of cognitive linguists, sociolinguists, and discourse analysts to discover and demonstrate how sign language users make sense of what is going on within their social and cultural contexts in face-to-face interactions. In the first chapter, Paul Dudis presents an innovative perspective on depiction in discourse. Mary Thumann follows with her observations on constructed dialogue and constructed action. Jack Hoza delineates the discourse and politeness functions of hey and well in ASL as examples of discourse markers in the third chapter. Laurie Swabey investigates reference in ASL discourse in the fourth chapter. In Chapter 5, Christopher Stone offers insights on register related to genre in British Sign Language discourse, and Daniel Roush addresses in Chapter 6 the "conduit" metaphor in English and ASL. Jeffrey Davis completes this collection by mapping out the nature of discourse in Plains Indian Sign Language, a previously unstudied language. The major thread that ties together the work of these varying linguists is their common focus on the forms and functions of sign languages used by people in actual situations. They each provide new keys to answering how thoughts expressed in one setting with one term or one utterance may mean something totally different when expressed in a different setting with different participants and different purposes.
International sign : linguistic, usage, and status issues by
International Sign (IS) is widely used among deaf people and interpreters at international events, but what exactly is it, what are its linguistic features, where does its lexicon come from, and how is it used at interpreted events? This groundbreaking collection is the first volume to provide answers to these questions. Editors Rachel Rosenstock and Jemina Napier have assembled an international group of renowned linguists and interpreters to examine various aspects of International Sign. Their contributions are divided into three parts: International Sign as a Linguistic System; International Sign in Action--Interpreting, Translation, and Teaching; and International Sign Policy and Language Planning. The chapters cover a range of topics, including the morphosyntactic and discursive structures of interpreted IS, the interplay between conventional linguistic elements and nonconventional gestural elements in IS discourse, how deaf signers who use different signed languages establish communication, Deaf/hearing IS interpreting teams and how they sign depicting verbs, how best to teach foundation-level IS skills, strategies used by IS interpreters when interpreting from IS into English, and explorations of the best ways to prepare interpreters for international events. The work of the editors and contributors in this volume makes International Sign the most comprehensive, research-based analysis of a young but growing field in linguistics and interpretation.
Interpreting in multilingual, multicultural contexts by
The Seventh Volume in the Studies in Interpretation Series Nineteen international authorities contribute their research and findings to Interpreting in Multilingual, Multicultural Contexts, probing the complex nature of interpreted interaction involving Deaf and hearing people of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds. They also analyze the contextualized interpreting practices and considerations that transpire from this diversity. In three parts, this trenchant collection shows how Deaf and hearing people use language in fluctuating ways to connect with each other. The chapters in Part 1 -- Expanding Frontiers: ASL-English-Spanish Interpreting in the United States -- consider sign language interpreting at the border between Baja California and the state; trilingual video relay service (VRS) interpreting; and constructing a valid, reliable trilingual interpreting testing instrument. Part 2 -- Mediating Indigenous Voices -- explores how to construct roles in a Maori Deaf trilingual context; considerations for interpreting signed languages of American Indian Communities; and interpreting for indigenous Deaf clients in far north Queensland, Australia. In the final section, Part 3 -- Globalizing: Interpreting in International Contexts -- protocols for interpreting in multilingual international conferences are analyzed. The last chapter describes the arduousness of sign language interpreting in multilingual, international settings. It acts as a fitting conclusion to this examination of the challenges to the sociolinguistic repertoire of interpreters mediating across multiplex combinations of culture and language.
Interpreting in the zone by
Successful interpretation can feel seamless, an intuitive and efficient translation of meaning from one signed or spoken language to another. Yet the process of interpretation is actually quite complex and relies upon myriad components ranging from preparation to experience to honed judgment. Interpreting in the zone, instinctively and confidently, is an energizing, encompassing experience that results in great satisfaction and top performance--but what does it take to get there? Jack Hoza's newest research examines the components that enable interpreters to perform successfully, looking at literature in interpretation, cognitive science, education, psychology, and neuroscience, as well as reviewing the results of two qualitative studies he conducted. He seeks to uncover what it means to interpret in the zone by understanding exactly how the brain works in interpretation scenarios. He explores a range of dichotomies that influence interpretation outcomes, such as: Intuition vs. rational thought Left brain vs. right brain Explicit vs. implicit learning Novice vs. master Spoken vs. signed languages Emotion vs. reasoning Cognitive processes such as perception, short-term memory, and reflexivity are strong factors in driving successful interpretation and are explored along with habits, behaviors, and learned strategies that can help or hinder interpretation skills. Hoza also considers the importance of professional development and collaboration with other practitioners in order to continually hone expertise. Interpreting in the Zone shows that cognitive research can help us better understand the intricacies of the interpreting process and has implications for how to approach the interpreting task. This resource will be of value to both the interpreter-in-training as well as the seasoned practitioner.
Reading Victorian deafness by
Reading Victorian Deafness is the first book to address the crucial role that deaf people, and their unique language of signs, played in Victorian culture. Drawing on a range of works, from fiction by Charles Dickens and Wilkie Collins, to poetry by deaf poets and life writing by deaf memoirists Harriet Martineau and John Kitto, to scientific treatises by Alexander Graham Bell and Francis Galton, Reading Victorian Deafness argues that deaf people's language use was a public, influential, and contentious issue in Victorian Britain. The Victorians understood signed languages in multiple, and often contradictory, ways: they were objects of fascination and revulsion, were of scientific import and literary interest, and were considered both a unique mode of human communication and a vestige of a bestial heritage. Over the course of the nineteenth century, deaf people were increasingly stripped of their linguistic and cultural rights by a widespread pedagogical and cultural movement known as "oralism," comprising mainly hearing educators, physicians, and parents. Engaging with a group of human beings who used signs instead of speech challenged the Victorian understanding of humans as "the speaking animal" and the widespread understanding of "language" as a product of the voice. It is here that Reading Victorian Deafness offers substantial contributions to the fields of Victorian studies and disability studies. This book expands current scholarly conversations around orality, textuality, and sound while demonstrating how understandings of disability contributed to Victorian constructions of normalcy. Reading Victorian Deafness argues that deaf people were used as material test subjects for the Victorian process of understanding human language and, by extension, the definition of the human.
Reframing Disability in Manga by
Reframing Disability in Manga analyzes popular Japanese manga published from the 1990s to the present that portray the everyday lives of adults and children with disabilities in an ableist society. It focuses on five representative conditions currently classified as shōgai (disabilities) in Japan--deafness, blindness, paraplegia, autism, and gender identity disorder--and explores the complexities and sociocultural issues surrounding each. Author Yoshiko Okuyama begins by looking at preindustrial understandings of difference in Japanese myths and legends before moving on to an overview of contemporary representations of disability in popular culture, uncovering sociohistorical attitudes toward the physically, neurologically, or intellectually marked Other. She critiques how characters with disabilities have been represented in mass media, which has reinforced ableism in society and negatively influenced our understanding of human diversity in the past. Okuyama then presents fifteen case studies, each centered on a manga or manga series, that showcase how careful depictions of such characters as differently abled, rather than disabled or impaired, can influence cultural constructions of shōgai and promote social change. Informed by numerous interviews with manga authors and disability activists, Okuyama reveals positive messages of diversity embedded in manga and argues that greater awareness of disability in Japan in the last two decades is due in part to the popularity of these works, the accessibility of the medium, and the authentic stories they tell. Scholars and students in disability studies will find this book an invaluable resource as well as those with interests in Japanese cultural and media studies in general and manga and queer narrative and anti-normative discourse in Japan in particular.
Semantic Fields in Sign Languages by
Typological studies require a broad range of linguistic data from a variety of countries, especially developing nations whose languages are under-researched. This is especially challenging for investigations of sign languages, because there are no existing corpora for most of them, and some are completely undocumented. To examine three cross-linguistically fruitful semantic fields in sign languages from a typological perspective for the first time, a detailed questionnaire was generated and distributed worldwide through emails, mailing lists, websites and the newsletter of the World Federation of the Deaf (WFD). This resulted in robust data on kinship, colour and number in 32 sign languages across the globe, 10 of which are revealed in depth within this volume. These comprise languages from Europe, the Americas and the Asia-Pacific region, including Indonesian sign language varieties, which are rarely studied. Like other volumes in this series, this book will be illuminative for typologists, students of linguistics and deaf studies, lecturers, researchers, interpreters, and sign language users who travel internationally.
Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research by
This volume brings together the best research presented at the first International Symposium on Signed Language Interpreting and Translation Research. Editors Brenda Nicodemus and Keith Cagle have gathered an international group of contributors who are recognized leaders in signed language interpreter education and research. The ten papers in Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research cover a range of topics, including the need for Deaf perspectives in interpretation research, discourse strategies and techniques that are unique to video relay call settings, the benefits of using sociology as a lens for examining sign language interpreting work, translating university entrance exams from written Portuguese into Libras (Brazilian Sign Language), the linguistic choices interpreters make when interpreting ASL figurative language into English, the nature of designated interpreting, and grammatical ambiguity in trilingual VRS interpreting. The research findings and insights contained here will be invaluable to scholars, students, and practitioners.
The Sign Language Interpreting Studies Reader by
In Sign Language Interpreting (SLI) there is a great need for a volume devoted to classic and seminal articles and essays dedicated to this specific domain of language interpreting. Students, educators, and practitioners will benefit from having access to a collection of historical and influential articles that contributed to the progress of the global SLI profession. In SLI there is a long history of outstanding research and scholarship, much of which is now out of print, or was published in obscure journals, or featured in publications that are no longer in print. These readings are significant to the progression of SLI as an academic discipline and a profession. As the years have gone by, many of these readings have been lost to students, educators, and practitioners because they are difficult to locate or unavailable, or because this audience simply does not know they exist. This volume brings together the seminal texts in our field that document the philosophical, evidence-based and analytical progression of SLI work.
Sign Language Research, Uses and Practices by
The uses and practices of sign languages are strongly related to scientific research on sign languages and vice versa. Conversely, sign linguistics cannot be separated from Deaf community practices, including practices in education and interpretation. Therefore, the current volume brings together work on sign language interpreting, the use of spoken and sign language with deaf children with cochlear implants and early language development in children exposed to both a spoken and sign language, and reports on recent research on aspects of sign language structure. It also includes papers addressing methodological issues in sign language research. The book presents papers by "more seasoned" researchers and "new kids on the block", as well as papers in which the two collaborate. The contributions will be of interest to all those interested in linguistics, sociolinguistics, cultural studies, interpreting and education. It will have particular relevance to those interested in sign linguistics, sociolinguistics of deaf communities, Deaf studies, Deaf culture, sign language interpretation, sign language teaching, and (spoken/signed) bilingualism. Given the scarcity of literature on "Deaf studies", the book will also appeal widely beyond the traditional academic milieu. As a result, it has relevance for those teaching and learning sign languages, for professional and student interpreters and for teachers of the deaf.
Understanding international sign by
In Understanding International Sign, Lori A. Whynot examines International Sign (IS) to determine the extent to which signers from different countries comprehend it. She focuses exclusively on expository lecture IS used in conference settings and presents the first empirical research on its effectiveness for communicating rich information to diverse audience members. International Sign is regarded as a lingua franca that is employed by deaf people to communicate with other deaf people who do not share the same conventionalized local sign language. Contrary to widely-held belief, sign languages are not composed of a unified system of universal gestures--rather, they are distinctly different, and most are mutually unintelligible from one another. The phenomenon of IS has emerged through increased global interaction during recent decades, driven by a rise in the number of international conferences and events and by new technologies that allow for enhanced global communication. IS is gaining acceptance for providing communicative access to conference audience members who do not have knowledge of the designated conference languages, and it is being recruited for use due to the prohibitive expense of providing interpreting services in numerous different sign languages. However, it is not known how well audience members understand IS, and it may actually limit equal access to the interpreted information. Whynot compares IS to native sign languages and analyzes the distribution of linguistic elements in the IS lexicon and their combined effect on comprehension. Her findings indicate that audiences with diverse sign languages understand much less of IS presentations than has been previously assumed. Whynot's research has crucial implications for expository IS usage, training, and interpreting, and it sheds light on the strengths and weaknesses inherent in cross-linguistic, signed contact settings.
Legal Interpreting is designed to equip you with the knowledge and skills necessary to become a competent interpreter in the legal services industry and judicial system. Common legal jargons previously learned in FSL-106 shall be put into use, in order for you to provide accurate and efficient interpreting. Moreover, since most cases involving the deaf are those who are unschooled or out-of-school, you will be able to enhance your ability to assess and adapt to the client’s communication needs. Furthermore, you will develop a special skill in working with a deaf relay interpreter. By understanding the legal process, enforcement, settlement, and consultation, you will be able to ensure that the Deaf person’s rights are not compromised.
Deaf gain : raising the stakes for human diversity by
Deaf people are usually regarded by the hearing world as having a lack, as missing a sense. Yet a definition of deaf people based on hearing loss obscures a wealth of ways in which societies have benefited from the significant contributions of deaf people. In this bold intervention into ongoing debates about disability and what it means to be human, experts from a variety of disciplines--neuroscience, linguistics, bioethics, history, cultural studies, education, public policy, art, and architecture--advance the concept of Deaf Gain and challenge assumptions about what is normal. Through their in-depth articulation of Deaf Gain, the editors and authors of this pathbreaking volume approach deafness as a distinct way of being in the world, one which opens up perceptions, perspectives, and insights that are less common to the majority of hearing persons. For example, deaf individuals tend to have unique capabilities in spatial and facial recognition, peripheral processing, and the detection of images. And users of sign language, which neuroscientists have shown to be biologically equivalent to speech, contribute toward a robust range of creative expression and understanding. By framing deafness in terms of its intellectual, creative, and cultural benefits, Deaf Gain recognizes physical and cognitive difference as a vital aspect of human diversity. Contributors: David Armstrong; Benjamin Bahan, Gallaudet U; Hansel Bauman, Gallaudet U; John D. Bonvillian, U of Virginia; Alison Bryan; Teresa Blankmeyer Burke, Gallaudet U; Cindee Calton; Debra Cole; Matthew Dye, U of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign; Steve Emery; Ofelia García, CUNY; Peter C. Hauser, Rochester Institute of Technology; Geo Kartheiser; Caroline Kobek Pezzarossi; Christopher Krentz, U of Virginia; Annelies Kusters; Irene W. Leigh, Gallaudet U; Elizabeth M. Lockwood, U of Arizona; Summer Loeffler; Mara Lúcia Massuti, Instituto Federal de Santa Catarina, Brazil; Donna A. Morere, Gallaudet U; Kati Morton; Ronice Müller de Quadros, U Federal de Santa Catarina, Brazil; Donna Jo Napoli, Swarthmore College; Jennifer Nelson, Gallaudet U; Laura-Ann Petitto, Gallaudet U; Suvi Pylvänen, Kymenlaakso U of Applied Sciences; Antti Raike, Aalto U; Päivi Rainò, U of Applied Sciences Humak; Katherine D. Rogers; Clara Sherley-Appel; Kristin Snoddon, U of Alberta; Karin Strobel, U Federal de Santa Catarina, Brazil; Hilary Sutherland; Rachel Sutton-Spence, U of Bristol, England; James Tabery, U of Utah; Jennifer Grinder Witteborg; Mark Zaurov.
Interpreting in legal contexts : consecutive and simultaneous interpretation by
"This study emphasizes that interpreters must know how and when to use simultaneous and consecutive interpreting in the courtroom in order to fully include Deaf people in the judicial process. Interviews with lawyers, judges, expert witnesses and Deaf people themselves give an insight into the needs and misconceptions of all parties involved in the legal process. It points out how interpreter education programs and professional associations must evaluate their programs to insure that interpreters are receiving the appropriate training in the use of consecutive and simultaneous interpreting necessary for legal environments"--Amazon.
Language and the Law in Deaf Communities by
Three attorneys and three linguistics scholars contribute five essays focusing on the intersection of language and law in deaf communities. Coverage includes the language problems of minorities in legal settings, the interrogation of deaf people, interpretation issues for juries that include deaf pe
Legal rights : the guide for deaf and hard of hearing people by
The new, revised, fifth edition of Legal Rights offers in easy-to-understand language the latest state and federal statutes and administrative procedures that prohibit discrimination against deaf and hard of hearing people, and any others with physical challenges. It includes complete information on the Telecommunications Act of 1996, new laws for hearing-aid-compatible telephones, the new Rehabilitation Act regulations that ensure access to electronic and information technology, and how recent Supreme Court rulings will affect people with hearing aids. This outstanding resource also explains new requirements for federal buildings and other new structures to provide full access. Recent additions to the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act are described, as are the ways public schools can meet new acoustical standards for classrooms. Legal Rights also covers the new rules about interpreters in federal courts and the latest developments regarding relay services. It lists those states that are leaders in ensuring access and equal rights to people with disabilities, making it the most complete source of legal information for deaf and hard of hearing people now available. Founded in 1880, the National Association of the Deaf (NAD) is the oldest and largest organiza-tion representing people with disabilities in the United States.
Signed Language Interpreting in the 21st Century by
This text provides interpreting students with a broad knowledge base that encompasses the latest research, addresses current trends and perspectives of the Deaf community, and promotes critical thinking and open dialogue about the working conditions, ethics, boundaries, and competencies needed by a highly qualified interpreter in various settings. This volume expands the resources available to aspiring interpreters, including Deaf interpreters, and incorporates the voices of renowned experts on topics relevant to today's practitioners. Each chapter provides students with objectives, keywords, and discussion questions. The chapters convey clear information about topics that include credentialing, disposition and aptitude for becoming an interpreter, interpreting for people who are DeafBlind, and working within specialty settings, such as legal and healthcare. A key resource for interpreter certification test preparation, this text follows the interpreter's ethical, practical, and professional development through a career of lifelong learning and service.
Sign Language Interpreting by
Sign Language Interpreting: Exploring Its Art and Science is a comprehensive exploration of the practice and research relating to sign language interpreting. A pleasant conversational style of writing is used to present the problems, the issues, and the options in this field as they are known today. The reader is taken on a journey from the early days of interpreting, to the professionalization of interpreters, to an examination of past and present models of interpreting. The business and ethical aspects of interpreting are discussed while focusing on current practice.
Legal Interpreting is designed to equip you with the knowledge and skills necessary to become a competent interpreter in the legal services industry and judicial system. Common legal jargons previously learned in FSL-106 shall be put into use, in order for you to provide accurate and efficient interpreting. Moreover, since most cases involving the deaf are those who are unschooled or out-of-school, you will be able to enhance your ability to assess and adapt to the client’s communication needs. Furthermore, you will develop a special skill in working with a deaf relay interpreter. By understanding the legal process, enforcement, settlement, and consultation, you will be able to ensure that the Deaf person’s rights are not compromised.
Coordinating Participation in Dialogue Interpreting by
Dialogue interpreting, which takes place in institutional settings such as legal proceedings, healthcare contexts, work meetings or media talk, has attracted increasing attention in translation, language and communication studies. Drawing on transcribed sequences of authentic talk, this volume raises questions about aspects of interpreting that have been taken for granted, challenging preconceived notions about differences between professional and non-professional interpreting and pointing in new directions for future research. Collecting contributions from major scholars in the field of dialogue interpreting and interaction studies, the volume offers new insights into the relationship between interpreting and mediating. It addresses a wide readership, including students and scholars in translation and interpreting studies, mediation and negotiation studies, linguistics, sociology, communication studies, conversation analysis, discourse analysis.
The critical link 3 : interpreters in the community by
At long last community interpreters are coming into their own as professionals in various parts of the world. At the same time, the complexity of their practice has been thrown into sharp relief. In this thought-provoking volume of selected papers from the third Critical Link conference held in 2001 (Montreal), we see a profession that is carving out a place for itself amid political adversity, economic constraints and a host of historical and cultural conditions. Community interpreters are learning to work better with governments, courts, police, psychologists, doctors, patients, refugees, violent offenders, and human rights missions in war-torn countries. From First Peoples to minority language speakers to former refugees and members of the Deaf community, interpreters are seeking out the training, legal protection and credentials they need. They are standing up to be counted in surveys, reaping the fruits of specialization and contributing to salient academic discussions on language, communication and translation studies.
The critical link 4 : professionalisation of interpreting in the community by
This book is a collection of papers presented in Stockholm, at the fourth Critical Link conference. The book is a well-balanced mix of academic research and texts of a more practical, professional character.The introducing article explicitly addresses the issue of professionalism and how this has been dealt with in research on interpreting. The following two sections provide examples of recent research, applying various theoretical approaches. Section four reports on the development of current, more or less local standards. Section five raises issues of professional ideology. The final section tells about new training initiatives and programmes. All contributions were selected because of their relevance to the theme of professionalisation of interpreting in the community. The volume is the fourth in a series, documenting the advance of a whole new empirical and professional field. It is of central interest for all people involved in this development, interpreters, researchers, trainers and others.
The critical link 5 : quality in interpreting by
The current volume contains selected papers submitted after Critical Link 5 (Sydney 2007) and arises from its topic - quality interpreting being a communal responsibility of all the participants. It takes the much discussed theme of professionalisation of community interpreting to a new level by stating that achieving quality depends not only on the technical skills and ethics of interpreters, but equally upon all other parties that serve multilingual populations: speakers, employers and administrators, educational institutions, researchers, and interpreters. Major articles outline both innovative practices in legal and medical settings and prevailing deficiencies in community interpreting in different countries. While Part I, A shared responsibility: The policy dimension, addresses the macro environment of specific social policy contexts with constrains that affect interpreting, Part II, Investigations and innovations in quality interpreting, reveals a number of admirable cases of interpreters working together with their client institutions in a variety of social settings. Part III is dedicated to the questions of Pedagogy, ethics and responsibility in interpreting. The collection is an important reference book catering to the interpreting community: interpreting practitioners and interpreter users, researchers, educators, and students.
Disabling pedagogy : power, politics, and deaf education by
Traditionally, deaf education has been treated as the domain of special educators who strive to overcome the difficulties associated with hearing loss. Recently, the sociocultural view of deafness has prompted research and academic study of Deaf culture, sign language linguistics, and bilingual education. Linda Komesaroff exposes the power of the entrenched dominant groups and their influence on the politics of educational policy and practice in Disabling Pedagogy: Power, Politics, and Deaf Education. Komesaroff suggests a reconstruction of deaf education based on educational and social theory. First, she establishes a deep and situated account of deaf education in Australia through interviews with teachers, Deaf leaders, parents, and other stakeholders. Komesaroff then documents a shift to bilingual education by one school community as part of her ethnographic study of language practices in deaf education. She also reports on the experiences of deaf students in teacher education. Her study provides an analytical account of legal cases and discrimination suits brought by deaf parents for lack of access to native sign language in the classroom. Komesaroff confronts the issue of cochlear implantation, locating it within the broader context of gene technology and bioethics, and advocates linguistic rights and self-determination for deaf people on the international level. Disabling Pedagogy concludes with a realistic assessment of the political challenge and the potential of the "Deaf Resurgence" movement to enfranchise deaf people in the politics of their own education.
Interpreting in Legal and Healthcare Settings by
The importance of quality interpreting in legal and healthcare settings can never be stressed enough, when any mistake - no matter how small - can compromise the delivery of justice or put someone's health at risk. This book addresses issues arising from interpreting in legal and healthcare settings by presenting cutting-edge research findings in interpreting and interpreter education in a number of countries around the world - including those which are relatively new to the field. It contains selected papers from a conference dedicated to such themes - the First International Conference on Legal and Healthcare Interpreting - as well as other invited papers related to the fields of legal and healthcare interpreting. This book is useful not only to scholars and educators, interpreters and translators working in legal or healthcare settings, but also to legal and healthcare professionals who work with interpreters in their day-to-day work, including judges, lawyers, police officers, doctors, midwives and nurses.
Language and the Law in Deaf Communities by
The ninth volume in the Sociolinguistics in Deaf Communities series focuses on forensic linguistics, a field created by noted linguist Roger Shuy, who begins the collection with an introduction of the issue of language problems experienced by minorities in legal settings. Attorney and linguist Rob Hoopes follows by showing how deaf people who use American Sign Language (ASL) are at a distinct disadvantage in legal situations, such as police interrogations, where only the feeblest of efforts are made to ensure that deaf suspects understand their constitutional rights.Susan Mather, an associate professor of linguistics and interpretation, and Robert Mather, a federal disability rights attorney, examine the use of interpreters for deaf jurors during trials. They reveal the courts' gross misunderstandings of the important differences between ASL and Signed English. Sara S. Geer, an attorney at the National Association of the Deaf for 20 years, explains how the difficulty in understanding legal terminology in federal law is compounded for deaf people in every ordinary act, including applying for credit cards and filling out medical consent forms.Language and the Law in Deaf Communities concludes with a chapter by George Castelle, Chief Public Defender in Charleston, West Virginia. Although he has no special knowledge about the legal problems of deaf people, Castelle offers another perspective based upon his extensive experience in practicing and teaching law.Ceil Lucas is Professor of Linguistics in the Department of Linguistics and Interpretation at Gallaudet University.ISBN 1-56368-143-9, 6 x 9 casebound, 200 pages, tables, references, index
Learning Legal Rules by
Written by leading authors with extensive experience in both teaching and practice, this established and trusted title equips the student with all the techniques of legal research, analysis, and argument they will need for their law course and beyond. The 9th edition has been fully updated toinclude recent debates such as the future of the Human Rights Act in the UK; it also continues to provide dedicated coverage on complex areas such as the operation of precedent, effective statutory interpretation, and European legal method. Holland and Webb take an engaging and practical approachwith examples and exercises throughout which allow students to develop their knowledge and their reasoning skills making this an ideal text for first year students.Learning Legal Rules is accompanied by an Online Resource Centre, complete with a test bank of 200 multiple choice questions for use by lecturers, and self-test questions for students.
Multi-Sourced Equivalent Norms in International Law by
Recent decades have witnessed an impressive process of normative development in international law. Numerous new treaties have been concluded, at global and regional levels, establishing far-reaching international legal and regulatory regimes in important areas such as human rights, international trade, environmental protection, criminal law, intellectual property, and more. New political and judicial institutions have been established to develop, apply and adjudicate these rules. This trend has been accompanied by the growing consolidation of treaty norms into international custom, and increased references to international law in domestic settings. As a result of these developments, international relations have now reached an unprecedented level of normative density and intensity, but they have also given rise to the phenomenon of 'fragmentation'.The debate over the fragmentation of international law has largely focused on conflicts: conflicts of norms and conflicts of authority. However, the same developments that have given rise to greater conflict and contradiction in international law, have also produced a growing amount of normative equivalence between rules in different fields of international law. New treaty rules often echo existing international customary norms. Regional arrangements reinforce undertakings that already exist at the global level; and common concerns and solutions appear in many international legal fields. This book focuses on such instances of normative parallelism, developing the concept of 'multisourced equivalent norms' in international law, with contributions by leading international law experts exploring the legal and political implications of the concept in a variety of contexts that span the full spectrum of international legal norms and institutions. By concentrating on situations governed by a multitude of similar norms, the book emphasizes the importance of legal contexts and institutional settings to international law-interpretation and application.
Research Methods in Legal Translation and Interpreting by
The field of Legal translation and interpreting has strongly expanded over recent years. As it has developed into an independent branch of Translation Studies, this book advocates for a substantiated discussion of methods and methodology, as well as knowledge about the variety of approaches actually applied in the field. It is argued that, complex and multifaceted as it is, legal translation calls for research that might cross boundaries across research approaches and disciplines in order to shed light on the many facets of this social practice. The volume addresses the challenge of methodological consolidation, triangulation and refinement. The work presents examples of the variety of theoretical approaches which have been developed in the discipline and of the methodological sophistication which is currently being called for. In this regard, by combining different perspectives, they expand our understanding of the roles played by legal translators and interpreters, who emerge as linguistic and intercultural mediators dealing with a rich variety of legal texts; as knowledge communicators and as builders of specialised knowledge; as social agents performing a socially-situated activity; as decision-makers and agents subject to and redefining power relations, and as political actors shaping legal cultures and negotiating cultural identities, as well as their own professional identity. Chapter 2 of this book is freely available as a downloadable Open Access PDF under a Creative Commons Attribution-Non Commercial-No Derivatives 4.0 license. https://tandfbis.s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/rt-files/docs/Open+Access+Chapters/9781138492103_oachapter2.pdf
Sign Language Interpreters in Court: Understanding Best Practices by
Sign Language Interpreters in Court: Understanding Best Practices is the first comprehensive text examining the role and function of sign language interpreters working in the legal arena. Designed for interpreters seeking a principled basis to justify best and emerging practices, the book presents a critical analysis of the constitutional, statutory and ethical foundations underpinning the work of court interpreters. Sign Language Interpreters in Court: Understanding Best Practices offers the theoretical tools for understanding, applying and articulating the various roles and functions undertaken by sign language interpreters in court.
Sign Language Research, Uses and Practices by
The uses and practices of sign languages are strongly related to scientific research on sign languages and vice versa. Conversely, sign linguistics cannot be separated from Deaf community practices, including practices in education and interpretation. Therefore, the current volume brings together work on sign language interpreting, the use of spoken and sign language with deaf children with cochlear implants and early language development in children exposed to both a spoken and sign language, and reports on recent research on aspects of sign language structure. It also includes papers addressing methodological issues in sign language research. The book presents papers by "more seasoned" researchers and "new kids on the block", as well as papers in which the two collaborate. The contributions will be of interest to all those interested in linguistics, sociolinguistics, cultural studies, interpreting and education. It will have particular relevance to those interested in sign linguistics, sociolinguistics of deaf communities, Deaf studies, Deaf culture, sign language interpretation, sign language teaching, and (spoken/signed) bilingualism. Given the scarcity of literature on "Deaf studies", the book will also appeal widely beyond the traditional academic milieu. As a result, it has relevance for those teaching and learning sign languages, for professional and student interpreters and for teachers of the deaf.
Linguistics of Filipino Sign Language
Ever wondered how FSL signs are formed, and why these are signed a certain way that is distinct from other sign languages? In LINGFSL, you will have the opportunity look into the very nature of signed languages, with focus on Filipino Sign Language (FSL). Building on your previous knowledge of the linguistic structure of spoken languages in your INTLING class, this course will help you understand the linguistic features and characteristics of FSL, and be able to apply this knowledge in your professional practice as an interpreter.
The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies - an Introduction to Its Theories by
The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies is the first introductory course book that explores the theoretical foundations used in sign language interpreting studies. Authors Roy, Brunson, and Stone examine the disciplines whose theoretical frameworks and methodologies have influenced the academic study of interpreting. With this text, explanations for how interpreted events occur, how interpreted products are created, and how the interpreting process is studied can be framed within a variety of theoretical perspectives, forming a foundation for the emerging transdiscipline of Interpreting Studies. ​​ As sign language interpreting has emerged and evolved in the last 20 years as an academic field of study, the scope of learning has broadened to include fields beyond the language and culture of deaf people. This text surveys six disciplines that have informed the study of sign language interpreting: history, translation, linguistics, sociology, social psychology, and cognitive psychology, along with their major ideas, principal scholars, and ways of viewing human interaction. Each chapter includes clear learning goals, definitions, discussion questions, and images to aid understanding. The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies is required reading for upper-level undergraduate or first-year graduate students in interpreting, Deaf studies, and sign language programs.
Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters by
Picking up where Innovative Practices in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters left off, this new collection presents the best new interpreter teaching techniques proven in action by the eminent contributors assembled here. In the first chapter, Dennis Cokely discusses revising curricula in the new century based upon experiences at Northeastern University. Jeffrey E. Davis delineates how to teach observation techniques to interpreters, while Elizabeth Winston and Christine Monikowski suggest how discourse mapping can be considered the Global Positioning System of translation. In other chapters, Laurie Swabey proposes ways to handle the challenge of referring expressions for interpreting students, and Melanie Metzger describes how to learn and recognize what interpreters do in interaction. Jemina Napier contributes information on training interpreting students to identify omission potential. Robert G. Lee explains how to make the interpreting process come alive in the classroom. Mieke Van Herreweghe discusses turn-taking and turn-yielding in meetings with Deaf and hearing participants in her contribution. Anna-Lena Nilsson defines "false friends," or how contextually incorrect use of facial expressions with certain signs in Swedish Sign Language can be detrimental influences on interpreters. The final chapter by Kyra Pollitt and Claire Haddon recommends retraining interpreters in the art of telephone interpreting, completing Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters as the new authoritative volume in this vital communication profession.
Advances in the Sign Language Development of Deaf Children by
The use of sign language has a long history. Indeed, humans' first languages may have been expressed through sign. Sign languages have been found around the world, even in communities without access to formal education. In addition to serving as a primary means of communication for Deafcommunities, sign languages have become one of hearing students' most popular choices for second-language study. Sign languages are now accepted as complex and complete languages that are the linguistic equals of spoken languages. Sign-language research is a relatively young field, having begunfewer than 50 years ago. Since then, interest in the field has blossomed and research has become much more rigorous as demand for empirically verifiable results have increased. In the same way that cross-linguistic research has led to a better understanding of how language affects development,cross-modal research has led to a better understanding of how language is acquired. It has also provided valuable evidence on the cognitive and social development of both deaf and hearing children, excellent theoretical insights into how the human brain acquires and structures sign and spokenlanguages, and important information on how to promote the development of deaf children. This volume brings together the leading scholars on the acquisition and development of sign languages to present the latest theory and research on these topics. They address theoretical as well as appliedquestions and provide cogent summaries of what is known about early gestural development, interactive processes adapted to visual communication, linguisic structures, modality effects, and semantic, syntactic, and pragmatic development in sign.Along with its companion volume, Advances in the Spoken Language Development of Deaf and Hard-of Hearing Children, this book will provide a deep and broad picture about what is known about deaf children's language development in a variety of situations and contexts. From this base of information,progress in research and its application will accelerate, and barriers to deaf children's full participation in the world around them will continue to be overcome.
The Art of Sign Language by
Learning sign language is a rewarding experience, which can lead to greater communication skill. This basic introduction guide is for people without any prior knowledge of using sign language. The approach to "Signed English" is based upon the way a child would first be taught their first language. In 17 separate sections, The Art of Sign Language teaches different themed exercises.ranging from everyday communication with people to the body, home, school, and leisure, eating, drinking and general descriptions.
The Complete Idiot's Guide to Conversational Sign Language Illustrated by
How to say it in sign. With over 500 photos and an instructional DVD. Focusing on the less formal and more popular PSE (Pidgin Sign English), this is the perfect guide to the fundamentals of communicating through sign in a variety of everyday situations. Inside, readers will discover how to sign for small talk, emotions, directions, weather, family and friends, special occasions, recreation, travel, around the house, dining out, shopping, education, at the workplace, emergencies, and more. * Includes more than 500 photos * First and only book on sign language that contains a DVD * There are approximately two million deaf people in the United States * 90% of deaf children are born to hearing parents, and PSE is the form of signing most often learned and taught by parents
A Concise Introduction to Linguistics by
Now in its fifth edition, A Concise Introduction to Linguistics provides students with a detailed introduction to the core concepts of language as it relates to culture. The textbook includes a focus on linguistic anthropology, unpacking the main contributions of linguistics to the study of human communication and culture. Aimed at the general education student, the textbook also provides anthropology, linguistics, and English majors with the resources needed to pursue advanced courses in this area. Written in an accessible manner that does not assume previous knowledge of linguistics, this new edition contains expanded discussions on linguistic anthropology, sociolinguistics (including a section on gender and language), and pragmatics. The textbook incorporates a robust set of pedagogical features including marginal definitions, a substantial glossary, chapter summaries, and learning exercises. Brand new to this edition are suggested reading lists at the end of every chapter, and recommended websites and apps to further aid students in their study.
Deaf Interpreters at Work by
Now, for the first time, a collection featuring 17 widely respected scholars depicts the everyday practices of deaf interpreters in their respective nations. Deaf Interpreters at Work: International Insights presents the history of Deaf translators and interpreters and details the development of testing and accreditation to raise their professional profiles. Other chapters delineate the cognitive processes of Deaf interpreting; Deaf-Deaf interpreter teams; Deaf and hearing team preparation; the use of Tactile American Sign Language by those interpreting for the Deaf-Blind community; and conference interpreting and interpreting teams. Along with volume coeditors Robert Adam, Christopher Stone, and Steven D. Collins, contributors include Markus Aro, Karen Bontempo, Juan Carlos Druetta, Senan Dunne, Eileen Forestal, Della Goswell, Juli af Klintberg, Patricia Levitzke-Gray, Jemina Napier, Brenda Nicodemus, Debra Russell, Stephanie Sforza, Marty Taylor, and Linda Warby. The scope of their research spans the world, including many unique facets of interpreting by deaf people in Argentina, Australia, Canada, England, Finland, Ireland, Sweden, and the United States, establishing this work as the standard in this burgeoning discipline.
The Everything Sign Language Book by
Explains basic communication using American Sign Language, including proper handshapes, body language, signing etiquette, and communicating with the hearing impaired.
Filipino sign language : a compilation of signs from regions of the Philippines. by Interpretation skills : English to American sign language by An Introduction to Filipino Sign Language by The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies in Language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. The contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholarsand practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of effortsto identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself;and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and DeafEducation, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
Sign Language for Everyone by
"Sign Language for Everyone "is authored by Cathy Rice, who along with her late husband, Bill, founded the Bill Rice Ranch, the largest missionary enterprise dedicated to reaching the deaf for Christ. An extension of their ministry, this book covers lessons and rules to follow when learning to sign and interact with the deaf.
Sign Language Interpreting by
Sign Language Interpreting: Exploring Its Art and Science is a comprehensive exploration of the practice and research relating to sign language interpreting. A pleasant conversational style of writing is used to present the problems, the issues, and the options in this field as they are known today. The reader is taken on a journey from the early days of interpreting, to the professionalization of interpreters, to an examination of past and present models of interpreting. The business and ethical aspects of interpreting are discussed while focusing on current practice.
Sign Language Interpreting in the Workplace by
The last forty years have seen a dramatic change in the nature of work, with deaf people increasingly moving into white collar or office-based professions. The rise of deaf professionals has led to employment opportunities for signed language interpreters across a variety of workplace settings, creating a unique set of challenges that require specialized strategies. Aspects such as social interaction between employees, the unwritten patterns and rules of workplace behavior, hierarchical structures, and the changing dynamics of deaf employee/interpreter relationships place constraints upon the interpreter's role and interpreting performance. Jules Dickinson's examination of interpreted workplace interactions is based on the only detailed, empirical study of this setting to date. Using practitioner responses and transcripts of real-life interpreted workplace interactions, Dickinson's findings demonstrate the complexity of the interpreter's role and responsibilities. The book concentrates on the ways in which signed language interpreters affect the interaction between deaf and hearing employees in team meetings by focusing on humor, small talk, and the collaborative floor. Signed Language Interpreting in the Workplace demonstrates that deaf employees require highly skilled professionals to enable them to integrate into the workplace on a level equal with their hearing peers. It also provides actionable insights for interpreters in workplace settings that will be a valuable resource for interpreting students, practitioners, interpreter trainers, and researchers.
Sign Language Made Simple by
Sign Language Made Simple will include five Parts- Part One- an introduction, how to use this book, a brief history of signing and an explanation of how signing is different from other languages, including its use of non-manual markers (the use of brow, mouth, etc in signing.) Part Two- Fingerspelling- the signing alphabet illustrated, the relationship between signing alphabet and ASL signs Part Three- Dictionary of ASL signs- concrete nouns, abstractions, verbs, describers, other parts of speech-approx. 1,000 illustrations. Will also include instructions for non-manual markers, where appropriate. Part Four- Putting it all together- sentences and transitions, includes rudimentary sentences and lines from poems, bible verses, famous quotes-all illustrated. Also, grammatical aspects, word endings, tenses. Part Five- The Humor of Signing- puns, word plays and jokes. Sign Language Made Simple will have over 1,200 illustrations, be easy to use, fun to read and more competitively priced than the competition. It's a knockout addition to the Made Simple list.
The Study of Language by
This bestselling textbook provides an engaging and user-friendly introduction to the study of language. Assuming no prior knowledge of the subject, Yule presents information in bite-sized sections, clearly explaining the major concepts in linguistics through all the key elements of language. This sixth edition has been revised and updated throughout, with substantial changes made to the chapters on phonetics, grammar and syntax, and eighty new study questions. To increase student engagement and to foster problem-solving and critical thinking skills, the book also includes twenty new tasks. An expanded and revised online study guide provides students with further resources, including answers and tutorials for all tasks, while encouraging lively and proactive learning. This is the most fundamental and easy-to-use introduction to the study of language.
Talking hands : what sign language reveals about the mind by
"The house is a Babel tonight. There are snatches of English. There is Hebrew. There is a great deal of Arabic. But in the illuminated room, it is the other languages that catch the eye. They are signed languages, the languages of the deaf. As night engulfs the surrounding desert and the cameraman's lights throw up huge, signing shadows, it looks as though language itself has become animate, as conversations play out in grand silhouette on the whitewashed walls. "There are three signed languages going. There is American Sign Language, used by one of the visitors, a deaf linguist from California. There is Israeli Sign Language, the language of the deaf in that country. And there is a third language, the one the linguists have journeyed here to see: a signed language spoken in this village and nowhere else in the world." Book jacket.
Linguistics of Filipino Sign Language
Ever wondered how FSL signs are formed, and why these are signed a certain way that is distinct from other sign languages? In LINGFSL, you will have the opportunity look into the very nature of signed languages, with focus on Filipino Sign Language (FSL). Building on your previous knowledge of the linguistic structure of spoken languages in your INTLING class, this course will help you understand the linguistic features and characteristics of FSL, and be able to apply this knowledge in your professional practice as an interpreter.
Bilingualism and Deafness by
This book examines sociolinguistic, educational and psycholinguistic factors that shape the path to sign bilingualism in deaf individuals and contributes to a better understanding of the specific characteristics of a type of bilingualism that is neither territorial nor commonly the result of parent-to-child transmission. The evolution of sign bilingualism at the individual level is discussed from a developmental linguistics perspective on the basis of a longitudinal investigation of deaf learners' bilingual acquisition of German sign language (DGS) and German.　 The case studies included in this volume offer unique insights into bilingual deaf learners' sign language and written language productions, and the sophisticated nature of the bilingual competence they attain. Commonalities and differences between sign bilingual language development in deaf learners and language development in other language acquisition scenarios are identified on the basis of a dynamic model of change in the evolution of (learner) language, with a focus on the role of language contact in the organisation of multilingual knowledge and the scope of inter- and intra-individual variation in learner grammars. In many respects, as becomes apparent throughout the chapters of this work, sign bilingualism represents not only a challenge but also a resource. Given this cross-disciplinary perspective, the insights on bilingualism and deafness in this volume will be of interest to a wide range of researchers and professionals.
Emerging Sign Languages of the Americas by
This volume is the first to bring together researchers studying a range of different types of emerging sign languages in the Americas, and their relationship to the gestures produced in the surrounding communities of hearing individuals. Contents Acknowledgements Olivier Le Guen, Marie Coppola and Josefina Safar Introduction: How Emerging Sign Languages in the Americas contributes to the study of linguistics and (emerging) sign languages Part I: Emerging sign languages of the Americas. Descriptions and analysis John Haviland Signs, interaction, coordination, and gaze: interactive foundations of "Z"--an emerging (sign) language from Chiapas, Mexico Laura Horton Representational strategies in shared homesign systems from Nebaj, Guatemala Josefina Safar and Rodrigo Petatillo Chan Strategies of noun-verb distinction in Yucatec Maya Sign Languages Emmanuella Martinod, Brigitte Garcia and Ivani Fusellier A typological perspective on the meaningful handshapes in the emerging sign languages on Marajó Island (Brazil) Ben Braithwaite Emerging sign languages in the Caribbean Olivier Le Guen, Rebeca Petatillo and Rita (Rossy) Kinil Canché Yucatec Maya multimodal interaction as the basis for Yucatec Maya Sign Language Marie Coppola Gestures, homesign, sign language: Cultural and social factors driving lexical conventionalization Part II: Sociolinguistic sketches John B. Haviland Zinacantec family homesign (or "Z") Laura Horton A sociolinguistic sketch of deaf individuals and families from Nebaj, Guatemala Josefina Safar and Olivier Le Guen Yucatec Maya Sign Language(s): A sociolinguistic overview Emmanuella Martinod, Brigitte Garcia and Ivani Fusellier Sign Languages on Marajó Island (Brazil) Ben Braithwaite Sociolinguistic sketch of Providence Island Sign Language Kristian Ali and Ben Braithwaite Bay Islands Sign Language: A Sociolinguistic Sketch Marie Coppola Sociolinguistic sketch: Nicaraguan Sign Language and Homesign Systems in Nicaragua
Foreign Vocabulary in Sign Languages by
This book takes a close look at the ways that five sign languages borrow elements from the surrounding, dominant spoken language community where each is situated. It offers careful analyses of semantic, morphosyntactic, and phonological adaption of forms taken from a source language (in this case a spoken language) to a recipient signed language. In addition, the contributions contained in the volume examine the social attitudes and cultural values that play a role in this linguistic process. Since the cultural identity of Deaf communities is manifested most strongly in their sign languages, this topic is of interest for cultural and linguistic reasons. Linguists interested in phonology, morphology, word formation, bilingualism, and linguistic anthropology will find this an interesting set of cases of language contact. Interpreters and sign language teachers will also find a wealth of interesting facts about the sign languages of these diverse Deaf communities.
Grammar, Gesture, and Meaning in American Sign Language by
Explores similarities and differences between spoken and signed languages, challenging notions of what constituteslanguage'.
Learning to Be Deaf by
The Contributions to the Sociology of Language series features publications dealing with sociolinguistic theory, methods, findings and applications. It addresses the study of language in society in its broadest sense, as a truly international and interdisciplinary field in which various approaches - theoretical and empirical - supplement and complement each other. The series invites the attention of scholars interested in language in society from a broad range of disciplines - anthropology, education, history, linguistics, political science, and sociology. To discuss your book idea or submit a proposal, please contact Natalie Fecher.
The linguistics of American sign language by The Linguistics of Sign Languages by
How different are sign languages across the world? Are individual signs and signed sentences constructed in the same way across these languages? What are the rules for having a conversation in a sign language? How do children and adults learn a sign language? How are sign languages processed in the brain? These questions and many more are addressed in this introductory book on sign linguistics using examples from more than thirty different sign languages. Comparisons are also made with spoken languages. This book can be used as a self-study book or as a text book for students of sign linguistics. Each chapter concludes with a summary, some test-yourself questions and assignments, as well as a list of recommended texts for further reading. The book is accompanied by a website containing assignments, video clips and links to web resources.
Nonmanuals in Sign Language by
In addition to the hands, sign languages make extensive use of nonmanual articulators such as the body, head, and face to convey linguistic information. This collected volume focuses on the forms and functions of nonmanuals in sign languages. The articles discuss various aspects of specific nonmanual markers in different sign languages and enhance the fact that nonmanuals are an essential part of sign language grammar. Approaching the topic from empirical, theoretical, and computational perspectives, the book is of special interest to sign language researchers, typologists, and theoretical as well as computational linguists that are curious about language and modality. The articles investigate phenomena such as mouth gestures, agreement, negation, topicalization, and semantic operators, and discuss general topics such as language and modality, simultaneity, computer animation, and the interfaces between syntax, semantics, and prosody. Originally published in Sign Language & Linguistics 14:1 (2011).
The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies in Language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. The contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholarsand practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of effortsto identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself;and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and DeafEducation, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
Sign Language by
Sign language linguists show here that all questions relevant to the linguistic investigation of spoken languages can be asked about sign languages. Conversely, questions that sign language linguists consider - even if spoken language researchers have not asked them yet - should also be asked of spoken languages. The HSK handbook Sign Language aims to provide a concise and comprehensive overview of the state of the art in sign language linguistics. It includes 44 chapters, written by leading researchers in the field, that address issues in language typology, sign language grammar, psycholinguistics, neurolinguistics, sociolinguistics, and language documentation and transcription. Crucially, all topics are presented in a way that makes them accessible to linguists who are not familiar with sign language linguistics.
Sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities : envisioning the future for deaf students by
Increased interaction between sign language communities and the mainstream societies in which they function is creating the potential for greater equality of opportunity for people who are deaf and hard of hearing. In this volume, renowned scholars and policy makers from around the world present innovative and groundbreaking perspectives on the relationships among sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities. The contributors to this volume offer creative and open-minded explorations of the construct of sustainability that are informed by their work with deaf individuals, deaf communities, families of deaf children, and other stakeholders. Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities describes sustainability in relation to: · identity, resilience, and well-being · participatory citizenship · historical perspectives on sign language use in educational contexts · sign language learning and teaching · human rights and inclusive education · literate thought and literacy · the sign language factor and the development of sign language communities in sub-Saharan Africa · sign language legislation These changing communities' understanding of what is required to become sustainable--in areas such as full participation and citizenship in society, economic well-being, access to quality education, and cultural and linguistic identity--is also taking new forms. This work contributes to the paradigm shifts regarding deaf emancipation and deaf education taking place around the world.
Sign Multilingualism by
This volume has arisen from a three-part, five-year study on language contact among multilingual sign language users, which has three strands: cross-signing, sign-switching, and sign-speaking. These phenomena are only sparsely documented so far, and thus the volume is highly innovative and presents data and analyses not previously available.
Signs and Structures by
As sign language linguistics has become an important and prodigious field of research in the last few decades, it comes as no surprise that the repertoire of methodological approaches to the study of the communication of the Deaf has also expanded considerably. While earlier work on sign languages was often focused on providing arguments for them being full-fledged linguistic systems, current debates do no longer center on whether visual-spatial grammars are worth being researched, but on how this type of research should be conducted. This book contains a selection of papers that could be thought of as a good representative sample of current trends in formal approaches to the study of sign language syntax. It illustrates how generative research on the communication of the Deaf may contribute to our understanding of the syntax of natural languages in general and indicates to what extent it is possible to integrate advances in the analysis of visual-spatial grammar with current spoken language research. Originally published in Sign Language & Linguistics 16:2 (2013).
Are you ready to see in action those theories you learned in your classes, and start shadow interpreting with a seasoned interpreter? In this course, you will be required to complete the required number of hours of mentored interpreting in various settings, and learn the tricks of the trade from those who have trail-blazed the same path you are taking. You will also required to attend planned specialized seminars/workshops during this term, so make sure you take advantage of these while they last.
The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies by
The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies is the first introductory course book that explores the theoretical foundations used in sign language interpreting studies. Authors Roy, Brunson, and Stone examine the disciplines whose theoretical frameworks and methodologies have influenced the academic study of interpreting. With this text, explanations for how interpreted events occur, how interpreted products are created, and how the interpreting process is studied can be framed within a variety of theoretical perspectives, forming a foundation for the emerging transdiscipline of Interpreting Studies. ​​ As sign language interpreting has emerged and evolved in the last 20 years as an academic field of study, the scope of learning has broadened to include fields beyond the language and culture of deaf people. This text surveys six disciplines that have informed the study of sign language interpreting: history, translation, linguistics, sociology, social psychology, and cognitive psychology, along with their major ideas, principal scholars, and ways of viewing human interaction. Each chapter includes clear learning goals, definitions, discussion questions, and images to aid understanding. The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies is required reading for upper-level undergraduate or first-year graduate students in interpreting, Deaf studies, and sign language programs.
Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters by
Picking up where Innovative Practices in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters left off, this new collection presents the best new interpreter teaching techniques proven in action by the eminent contributors assembled here. In the first chapter, Dennis Cokely discusses revising curricula in the new century based upon experiences at Northeastern University. Jeffrey E. Davis delineates how to teach observation techniques to interpreters, while Elizabeth Winston and Christine Monikowski suggest how discourse mapping can be considered the Global Positioning System of translation. In other chapters, Laurie Swabey proposes ways to handle the challenge of referring expressions for interpreting students, and Melanie Metzger describes how to learn and recognize what interpreters do in interaction. Jemina Napier contributes information on training interpreting students to identify omission potential. Robert G. Lee explains how to make the interpreting process come alive in the classroom. Mieke Van Herreweghe discusses turn-taking and turn-yielding in meetings with Deaf and hearing participants in her contribution. Anna-Lena Nilsson defines "false friends," or how contextually incorrect use of facial expressions with certain signs in Swedish Sign Language can be detrimental influences on interpreters. The final chapter by Kyra Pollitt and Claire Haddon recommends retraining interpreters in the art of telephone interpreting, completing Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters as the new authoritative volume in this vital communication profession.
Best Practices in Educational Interpreting by
Noting that the services provided by interpreters for the deaf and hard-of-hearing in educational settings are often inferior to those offered in other domains, such as medical or judicial settings, Seal (communication sciences and disorders, James Madison U.) cautions that education interpreting pr
Best Practices in Educational Interpreting by
Designed for all who work with the heterogeneous population of students with hearing loss, Best Practices in Educational Interpreting, Second Edition, and offers state-of-the-art-and-science information for interpreters in primary through higher education settings. Issues and methods are presented from a practical orientation, with representative cases that illustrate the topics. Best Practices in Educational Interpreting, Second Edition, offers state-of-the-art-and-science information for interpreters in primary through higher education settings. KEY TOPICS: This text is a comprehensive, developmentally organized overview of the process of interpreting in educational settings. Readers learn about the changing needs of the hearing impaired as they move from primary school through college. MARKET: Designed for all who work with the heterogeneous population of students with hearing loss.
Conversations with Interpreter Educators by
Sign language interpreter education is a relatively young field that is moving toward more theory-based and research-oriented approaches. The concept of sharing research, which is strongly encouraged in this academic community, inspired Christine Monikowski to develop a volume that collects and distills the best teaching practices of leading academics in the interpreting field. In Conversations with Interpreter Educators, Monikowski assembles a group of 17 professors in the field of sign language interpretation. Through individual interviews conducted via Skype, Monikowski engages them in informal conversations about their teaching experiences and the professional publications that have influenced their teaching philosophies. She guides each conversation by asking these experts to share a scholarly publication that they assign to their students. They discuss the merits of the text and its role in the classroom, which serves to highlight the varying goals each professor sets for students. The complexity of the interpreting task, self-reflection, critical thinking, linguistics, backchannel feedback, and cultural understanding are a sampling of topics explored in these exchanges. Engaging and accessible, Monikowski's conversations offer evidence-based practices that will inform and inspire her fellow educators.
Educational Interpreting by
This incisive book explores the current state of educational interpreting and how it is failing deaf students. The contributors, all renowned experts in their field, include former educational interpreters, teachers of deaf students, interpreter trainers, and deaf recipients of interpreted educations. Educational Interpreting presents the salient issues in three distinct sections. Part 1 focuses on deaf students--their perspectives on having interpreters in the classroom, the language myths that surround them, the accessibility of language to them, and their cognition. Part 2 raises questions about the support and training that interpreters receive from the school systems, the qualifications that many interpreters bring to an interpreted education, and the accessibility of everyday classrooms for deaf students placed in such environments. Part 3 presents a few of the possible suggestions for addressing the concerns of interpreted educations, and focuses primarily on the interpreter. The contributors discuss the need to (1) define the core knowledge and skills interpreters must have and (2) develop standards of practice and assessment. They also stress that interpreters cannot effect the necessary changes alone; unless and until administrators, parents, teachers, and students recognize the inherent issues of access to education through mediation, little will change for deaf students.
Evolving Paradigms in Interpreter Education by
This volume brings together a cadre of world-renowned interpreting educators and researchers who conduct a rich exploration of paradigms, both old and new, in interpreter education. They review existing research, explicate past and current practices, and call for a fresh look at the roots of interpreter education in anticipation of the future. Expert commentary accompanies each chapter to provide a starting point for reflection on and discussion of the growing needs in this discipline. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp; Volume coeditor Christine Monikowski begins by considering how interpreter educators can balance their responsibilities of teaching, practice, and research. Her chapter is accompanied by commentary about the capacity to "academize" what has been thought of as a semi-profession. Helen Tebble shares research on medical interpreting from an applied linguistic perspective. Terry Janzen follows with the impact of linguistic theory on interpretation research methodology. Barbara Shaffer discusses how interpreting theory shapes the interpreter's role. Elizabeth A. Winston, also a volume coeditor, rounds out this innovative collection with her chapter on infusing evidence-based teaching practices into interpreting education. Noted interpreter educators and researchers also provide an international range of insights in this collection, including Rico Peterson, Beppie van den Bogaerde, Karen Bontempo, Ian Mason, Ester Leung, David Quinto-Pozos, Lorraine Leeson, Jemina Napier, Christopher Stone, Debra Russell, and Claudia Angelelli.
Interpreter Education in the Digital Age by
This collection brings together innovative research and approaches for blended learning using digital technology in interpreter education for signed and spoken languages. Volume editors Suzanne Ehrlich and Jemina Napier call upon the expertise of 21 experts, including themselves, to report on the current technology used to provide digital enhancements to interpreter education in Australia, New Zealand, Brazil, Belgium, the United Kingdom, and the United States. Divided into three parts, Innovation, Change, and Community Engagement, this study focuses on the technology itself, rather than how technology enhances curriculum, delivery, or resources. Initiatives described in this collection range from the implementation of on-demand interpreting using iPad technology to create personalized, small-group, multidimensional models suited to digital media for 160 languages; introducing students to interpreting in a 3D world through an IVY virtual environment; applying gaming principles to interpreter education; assessing the amenability of the digital pen in the hybrid mode of interpreting; developing multimedia content for both open access and structured interpreter education environments; to preparing interpreting students for interactions in social media forums, and more. Interpreter Education in the Digital Age provides a context for the application of technologies in interpreter education from an international viewpoint across languages and modalities.
New Approaches to Interpreter Education by
The Third Volume in the Interpreter Education Series The latest addition to the Interpreter Education series expands the tools available to instructors with six new, vital chapters on new curricula and creative teaching methods. Series editor Cynthia B. Roy leads the way by calling for the use of a discourse-oriented curriculum for educating interpreters. In the following chapter, Claudia Angelelli outlines the bottom-line principles for teaching effective health-care interpreting, postulating a model that depends upon the development of skills in six critical areas: cognitive-processing, interpersonal, linguistics, professional, setting-specific, and sociocultural. Risa Shaw, Steven D. Collins, and Melanie Metzger collaborate on describing the process for establishing a bachelor of arts program in interpreting at Gallaudet University distinct from the already existent masters program. In the fourth chapter, Doug Bowen-Bailey describes how to apply theories of discourse-based interpreter education in specific contexts by producing customized videos. Jemina Napier blends three techniques for instructing signed language interpreters in Australia: synthesizing sign and spoken language interpreting curricula; integrating various interpreting concepts into a theoretical framework; and combining online and face-to-face instruction. Finally, Helen Slatyer delineates the use of an action research methodology to establish a curriculum for teaching ad hoc interpreters of languages used by small population segments in Australia.
The Next Generation of Research in Interpreter Education by
This collection contributes to an emerging body of research in sign language interpreter education, a field in which research on teaching practices has been rare. The Next Generation of Research in Interpreter Education investigates learning experiences and teaching practices that provide the evidence necessary to inform and advance instructional approaches. The five studies included in this volume examine role-play activities in the classroom, the experiences of Deaf students in interpreting programs, reducing anxiety in the interpreting process, mentoring, and self-assessment. The contributors are a nascent group of educators who represent a growing mastery of contemporary standards in interpreter education. Their chapters share a common theme: the experiences and learning environments of students as they progress toward entry into the interpreting profession.
Are you ready to see in action those theories you learned in your classes, and start shadow interpreting with a seasoned interpreter? In this course, you will be required to complete the required number of hours of mentored interpreting in various settings, and learn the tricks of the trade from those who have trail-blazed the same path you are taking. You will also required to attend planned specialized seminars/workshops during this term, so make sure you take advantage of these while they last.
Best Practices in Educational Interpreting by
Designed for all who work with the heterogeneous population of students with hearing loss, Best Practices in Educational Interpreting, Second Edition, and offers state-of-the-art-and-science information for interpreters in primary through higher education settings. Issues and methods are presented from a practical orientation, with representative cases that illustrate the topics. Best Practices in Educational Interpreting, Second Edition, offers state-of-the-art-and-science information for interpreters in primary through higher education settings. KEY TOPICS: This text is a comprehensive, developmentally organized overview of the process of interpreting in educational settings. Readers learn about the changing needs of the hearing impaired as they move from primary school through college. MARKET: Designed for all who work with the heterogeneous population of students with hearing loss.
Integrated and Open Interpreter Education by
This Open Educational Resource (OER) on interpreting offers authors and readers free and open access to current, relevant, easy-to-access, and free materials. The editors have created a space where emerging scholars in the field of signed language interpreting make contributions with the ability to revise as the interpreting studies discipline and the scholars, themselves, develop and change. This OER provides faculty and students readings and practical application experiences that connect program specific coursework and concepts across the interpreter education curriculum emphasizing the holistic nature of the field of interpreting.
International Perspectives on Sign Language Interpreter Education by
The Fourth Volume in the Interpreter Education Series From the moment the World Association of Sign Language Interpreters (WASLI) was established in 2005, an overwhelming wave of requests from around the world arrived seeking information and resources for educating and training interpreters. This new collection provides those answers with an international overview on interpreter training from experts in Austria, Australia, Brazil, Canada, Fiji, Finland, Ireland, Japan, Kenya, Kosovo, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Scotland, Sweden, and the United States. Whether from income-rich or income-poor countries, the 31 contributors presented here provide insights on how sign language interpreter training has developed in each nation, and also how trainers have dealt with the difficulties that they encountered. Many of the contributors relate the movement away from ad hoc short courses sponsored by Deaf communities. They mark the transition from the early struggles of trainers against the stigmatization of sign languages to full-time degree programs in institutions of higher education funded by their governments. Others investigate how culture, religion, politics, and legislation affect the nurturing of professional sign language interpreters, and they address the challenges of extending training opportunities nationally through the use of new technology. Together, these diverse perspectives offer a deeper understanding and comparison of interpreter training issues that could benefit the programs in every nation.
New Approaches to Interpreter Education by
The Third Volume in the Interpreter Education Series The latest addition to the Interpreter Education series expands the tools available to instructors with six new, vital chapters on new curricula and creative teaching methods. Series editor Cynthia B. Roy leads the way by calling for the use of a discourse-oriented curriculum for educating interpreters. In the following chapter, Claudia Angelelli outlines the bottom-line principles for teaching effective health-care interpreting, postulating a model that depends upon the development of skills in six critical areas: cognitive-processing, interpersonal, linguistics, professional, setting-specific, and sociocultural. Risa Shaw, Steven D. Collins, and Melanie Metzger collaborate on describing the process for establishing a bachelor of arts program in interpreting at Gallaudet University distinct from the already existent masters program. In the fourth chapter, Doug Bowen-Bailey describes how to apply theories of discourse-based interpreter education in specific contexts by producing customized videos. Jemina Napier blends three techniques for instructing signed language interpreters in Australia: synthesizing sign and spoken language interpreting curricula; integrating various interpreting concepts into a theoretical framework; and combining online and face-to-face instruction. Finally, Helen Slatyer delineates the use of an action research methodology to establish a curriculum for teaching ad hoc interpreters of languages used by small population segments in Australia.
Sign Language Interpreting and Interpreter Education by
More the 1.46 million people in the United States have hearing losses in sufficient severity to be considered deaf; another 21 million people have other hearing impairments. For many deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals, sign language and voice interpreting is essential to their participationin educational programs and their access to public and private services. However, there is less than half the number of interpreters needed to meet the demand, interpreting quality is often variable, and there is a considerable lack of knowledge of factors that contribute to successfulinterpreting. Perhaps it is not surprising, then, that a study by the National Association of the Deaf (NAD) found that 70% of the deaf individuals are dissatisfied with interpreting quality. Because recent legislation in the United States and elsewhere has mandated access to educational,employment, and other contexts for deaf individuals and others with hearing disabilities, there is an increasing need for quality sign language interpreting. It is in education, however, that the need is most pressing, particularly because more than 75% of deaf students now attend regular schools(rather than schools for the deaf), where teachers and classmates are unable to sign for themselves. In the more than 100 interpreter training programs in the U.S. alone, there are a variety of educational models, but little empirical information on how to evaluate them or determine theirappropriateness in different interpreting and interpreter education-covering what we know, what we do not know, and what we should know. Several volumes have covered interpreting and interpreter education, there are even some published dissertations that have included a single research study, and afew books have attempted to offer methods for professional interpreters or interpreter educators with nods to existing research. This is the first volume that synthesizes existing work and provides a coherent picture of the field as a whole, including evaluation of the extent to which currentpractices are supported by validating research. It will be the first comprehensive source, suitable as both a reference book and a textbook for interpreter training programs and a variety of courses on bilingual education, psycholinguistics and translation, and cross-linguistic studies.
This course is a continuation of MENTOR1, where you will again be required to shadow interpret with a seasoned mentor and complete a certain number of logged hours. You will get to be exposed in other areas of interpreting, one that will test your knowledge and skills and make you apply these in an actual scenario --- with supervision, of course. Attendance to seminars/workshops planned by the School will again be required.
The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies by
The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies is the first introductory course book that explores the theoretical foundations used in sign language interpreting studies. Authors Roy, Brunson, and Stone examine the disciplines whose theoretical frameworks and methodologies have influenced the academic study of interpreting. With this text, explanations for how interpreted events occur, how interpreted products are created, and how the interpreting process is studied can be framed within a variety of theoretical perspectives, forming a foundation for the emerging transdiscipline of Interpreting Studies. ​​ As sign language interpreting has emerged and evolved in the last 20 years as an academic field of study, the scope of learning has broadened to include fields beyond the language and culture of deaf people. This text surveys six disciplines that have informed the study of sign language interpreting: history, translation, linguistics, sociology, social psychology, and cognitive psychology, along with their major ideas, principal scholars, and ways of viewing human interaction. Each chapter includes clear learning goals, definitions, discussion questions, and images to aid understanding. The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies is required reading for upper-level undergraduate or first-year graduate students in interpreting, Deaf studies, and sign language programs.
Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters by
Picking up where Innovative Practices in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters left off, this new collection presents the best new interpreter teaching techniques proven in action by the eminent contributors assembled here. In the first chapter, Dennis Cokely discusses revising curricula in the new century based upon experiences at Northeastern University. Jeffrey E. Davis delineates how to teach observation techniques to interpreters, while Elizabeth Winston and Christine Monikowski suggest how discourse mapping can be considered the Global Positioning System of translation. In other chapters, Laurie Swabey proposes ways to handle the challenge of referring expressions for interpreting students, and Melanie Metzger describes how to learn and recognize what interpreters do in interaction. Jemina Napier contributes information on training interpreting students to identify omission potential. Robert G. Lee explains how to make the interpreting process come alive in the classroom. Mieke Van Herreweghe discusses turn-taking and turn-yielding in meetings with Deaf and hearing participants in her contribution. Anna-Lena Nilsson defines "false friends," or how contextually incorrect use of facial expressions with certain signs in Swedish Sign Language can be detrimental influences on interpreters. The final chapter by Kyra Pollitt and Claire Haddon recommends retraining interpreters in the art of telephone interpreting, completing Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters as the new authoritative volume in this vital communication profession.
Best Practices in Educational Interpreting by
Noting that the services provided by interpreters for the deaf and hard-of-hearing in educational settings are often inferior to those offered in other domains, such as medical or judicial settings, Seal (communication sciences and disorders, James Madison U.) cautions that education interpreting pr
Best Practices in Educational Interpreting by
Designed for all who work with the heterogeneous population of students with hearing loss, Best Practices in Educational Interpreting, Second Edition, and offers state-of-the-art-and-science information for interpreters in primary through higher education settings. Issues and methods are presented from a practical orientation, with representative cases that illustrate the topics. Best Practices in Educational Interpreting, Second Edition, offers state-of-the-art-and-science information for interpreters in primary through higher education settings. KEY TOPICS: This text is a comprehensive, developmentally organized overview of the process of interpreting in educational settings. Readers learn about the changing needs of the hearing impaired as they move from primary school through college. MARKET: Designed for all who work with the heterogeneous population of students with hearing loss.
Conversations with Interpreter Educators by
Sign language interpreter education is a relatively young field that is moving toward more theory-based and research-oriented approaches. The concept of sharing research, which is strongly encouraged in this academic community, inspired Christine Monikowski to develop a volume that collects and distills the best teaching practices of leading academics in the interpreting field. In Conversations with Interpreter Educators, Monikowski assembles a group of 17 professors in the field of sign language interpretation. Through individual interviews conducted via Skype, Monikowski engages them in informal conversations about their teaching experiences and the professional publications that have influenced their teaching philosophies. She guides each conversation by asking these experts to share a scholarly publication that they assign to their students. They discuss the merits of the text and its role in the classroom, which serves to highlight the varying goals each professor sets for students. The complexity of the interpreting task, self-reflection, critical thinking, linguistics, backchannel feedback, and cultural understanding are a sampling of topics explored in these exchanges. Engaging and accessible, Monikowski's conversations offer evidence-based practices that will inform and inspire her fellow educators.
Educational Interpreting by
This incisive book explores the current state of educational interpreting and how it is failing deaf students. The contributors, all renowned experts in their field, include former educational interpreters, teachers of deaf students, interpreter trainers, and deaf recipients of interpreted educations. Educational Interpreting presents the salient issues in three distinct sections. Part 1 focuses on deaf students--their perspectives on having interpreters in the classroom, the language myths that surround them, the accessibility of language to them, and their cognition. Part 2 raises questions about the support and training that interpreters receive from the school systems, the qualifications that many interpreters bring to an interpreted education, and the accessibility of everyday classrooms for deaf students placed in such environments. Part 3 presents a few of the possible suggestions for addressing the concerns of interpreted educations, and focuses primarily on the interpreter. The contributors discuss the need to (1) define the core knowledge and skills interpreters must have and (2) develop standards of practice and assessment. They also stress that interpreters cannot effect the necessary changes alone; unless and until administrators, parents, teachers, and students recognize the inherent issues of access to education through mediation, little will change for deaf students.
Evolving Paradigms in Interpreter Education by
This volume brings together a cadre of world-renowned interpreting educators and researchers who conduct a rich exploration of paradigms, both old and new, in interpreter education. They review existing research, explicate past and current practices, and call for a fresh look at the roots of interpreter education in anticipation of the future. Expert commentary accompanies each chapter to provide a starting point for reflection on and discussion of the growing needs in this discipline. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp; Volume coeditor Christine Monikowski begins by considering how interpreter educators can balance their responsibilities of teaching, practice, and research. Her chapter is accompanied by commentary about the capacity to "academize" what has been thought of as a semi-profession. Helen Tebble shares research on medical interpreting from an applied linguistic perspective. Terry Janzen follows with the impact of linguistic theory on interpretation research methodology. Barbara Shaffer discusses how interpreting theory shapes the interpreter's role. Elizabeth A. Winston, also a volume coeditor, rounds out this innovative collection with her chapter on infusing evidence-based teaching practices into interpreting education. Noted interpreter educators and researchers also provide an international range of insights in this collection, including Rico Peterson, Beppie van den Bogaerde, Karen Bontempo, Ian Mason, Ester Leung, David Quinto-Pozos, Lorraine Leeson, Jemina Napier, Christopher Stone, Debra Russell, and Claudia Angelelli.
Interpreter Education in the Digital Age by
This collection brings together innovative research and approaches for blended learning using digital technology in interpreter education for signed and spoken languages. Volume editors Suzanne Ehrlich and Jemina Napier call upon the expertise of 21 experts, including themselves, to report on the current technology used to provide digital enhancements to interpreter education in Australia, New Zealand, Brazil, Belgium, the United Kingdom, and the United States. Divided into three parts, Innovation, Change, and Community Engagement, this study focuses on the technology itself, rather than how technology enhances curriculum, delivery, or resources. Initiatives described in this collection range from the implementation of on-demand interpreting using iPad technology to create personalized, small-group, multidimensional models suited to digital media for 160 languages; introducing students to interpreting in a 3D world through an IVY virtual environment; applying gaming principles to interpreter education; assessing the amenability of the digital pen in the hybrid mode of interpreting; developing multimedia content for both open access and structured interpreter education environments; to preparing interpreting students for interactions in social media forums, and more. Interpreter Education in the Digital Age provides a context for the application of technologies in interpreter education from an international viewpoint across languages and modalities.
New Approaches to Interpreter Education by
The Third Volume in the Interpreter Education Series The latest addition to the Interpreter Education series expands the tools available to instructors with six new, vital chapters on new curricula and creative teaching methods. Series editor Cynthia B. Roy leads the way by calling for the use of a discourse-oriented curriculum for educating interpreters. In the following chapter, Claudia Angelelli outlines the bottom-line principles for teaching effective health-care interpreting, postulating a model that depends upon the development of skills in six critical areas: cognitive-processing, interpersonal, linguistics, professional, setting-specific, and sociocultural. Risa Shaw, Steven D. Collins, and Melanie Metzger collaborate on describing the process for establishing a bachelor of arts program in interpreting at Gallaudet University distinct from the already existent masters program. In the fourth chapter, Doug Bowen-Bailey describes how to apply theories of discourse-based interpreter education in specific contexts by producing customized videos. Jemina Napier blends three techniques for instructing signed language interpreters in Australia: synthesizing sign and spoken language interpreting curricula; integrating various interpreting concepts into a theoretical framework; and combining online and face-to-face instruction. Finally, Helen Slatyer delineates the use of an action research methodology to establish a curriculum for teaching ad hoc interpreters of languages used by small population segments in Australia.
The Next Generation of Research in Interpreter Education by
This collection contributes to an emerging body of research in sign language interpreter education, a field in which research on teaching practices has been rare. The Next Generation of Research in Interpreter Education investigates learning experiences and teaching practices that provide the evidence necessary to inform and advance instructional approaches. The five studies included in this volume examine role-play activities in the classroom, the experiences of Deaf students in interpreting programs, reducing anxiety in the interpreting process, mentoring, and self-assessment. The contributors are a nascent group of educators who represent a growing mastery of contemporary standards in interpreter education. Their chapters share a common theme: the experiences and learning environments of students as they progress toward entry into the interpreting profession.
This course is a continuation of MENTOR1, where you will again be required to shadow interpret with a seasoned mentor and complete a certain number of logged hours. You will get to be exposed in other areas of interpreting, one that will test your knowledge and skills and make you apply these in an actual scenario --- with supervision, of course. Attendance to seminars/workshops planned by the School will again be required.
Best Practices in Educational Interpreting by
Designed for all who work with the heterogeneous population of students with hearing loss, Best Practices in Educational Interpreting, Second Edition, and offers state-of-the-art-and-science information for interpreters in primary through higher education settings. Issues and methods are presented from a practical orientation, with representative cases that illustrate the topics. Best Practices in Educational Interpreting, Second Edition, offers state-of-the-art-and-science information for interpreters in primary through higher education settings. KEY TOPICS: This text is a comprehensive, developmentally organized overview of the process of interpreting in educational settings. Readers learn about the changing needs of the hearing impaired as they move from primary school through college. MARKET: Designed for all who work with the heterogeneous population of students with hearing loss.
Integrated and Open Interpreter Education by
This Open Educational Resource (OER) on interpreting offers authors and readers free and open access to current, relevant, easy-to-access, and free materials. The editors have created a space where emerging scholars in the field of signed language interpreting make contributions with the ability to revise as the interpreting studies discipline and the scholars, themselves, develop and change. This OER provides faculty and students readings and practical application experiences that connect program specific coursework and concepts across the interpreter education curriculum emphasizing the holistic nature of the field of interpreting.
International Perspectives on Sign Language Interpreter Education by
The Fourth Volume in the Interpreter Education Series From the moment the World Association of Sign Language Interpreters (WASLI) was established in 2005, an overwhelming wave of requests from around the world arrived seeking information and resources for educating and training interpreters. This new collection provides those answers with an international overview on interpreter training from experts in Austria, Australia, Brazil, Canada, Fiji, Finland, Ireland, Japan, Kenya, Kosovo, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Scotland, Sweden, and the United States. Whether from income-rich or income-poor countries, the 31 contributors presented here provide insights on how sign language interpreter training has developed in each nation, and also how trainers have dealt with the difficulties that they encountered. Many of the contributors relate the movement away from ad hoc short courses sponsored by Deaf communities. They mark the transition from the early struggles of trainers against the stigmatization of sign languages to full-time degree programs in institutions of higher education funded by their governments. Others investigate how culture, religion, politics, and legislation affect the nurturing of professional sign language interpreters, and they address the challenges of extending training opportunities nationally through the use of new technology. Together, these diverse perspectives offer a deeper understanding and comparison of interpreter training issues that could benefit the programs in every nation.
New Approaches to Interpreter Education by
The Third Volume in the Interpreter Education Series The latest addition to the Interpreter Education series expands the tools available to instructors with six new, vital chapters on new curricula and creative teaching methods. Series editor Cynthia B. Roy leads the way by calling for the use of a discourse-oriented curriculum for educating interpreters. In the following chapter, Claudia Angelelli outlines the bottom-line principles for teaching effective health-care interpreting, postulating a model that depends upon the development of skills in six critical areas: cognitive-processing, interpersonal, linguistics, professional, setting-specific, and sociocultural. Risa Shaw, Steven D. Collins, and Melanie Metzger collaborate on describing the process for establishing a bachelor of arts program in interpreting at Gallaudet University distinct from the already existent masters program. In the fourth chapter, Doug Bowen-Bailey describes how to apply theories of discourse-based interpreter education in specific contexts by producing customized videos. Jemina Napier blends three techniques for instructing signed language interpreters in Australia: synthesizing sign and spoken language interpreting curricula; integrating various interpreting concepts into a theoretical framework; and combining online and face-to-face instruction. Finally, Helen Slatyer delineates the use of an action research methodology to establish a curriculum for teaching ad hoc interpreters of languages used by small population segments in Australia.
Sign Language Interpreting and Interpreter Education by
More the 1.46 million people in the United States have hearing losses in sufficient severity to be considered deaf; another 21 million people have other hearing impairments. For many deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals, sign language and voice interpreting is essential to their participationin educational programs and their access to public and private services. However, there is less than half the number of interpreters needed to meet the demand, interpreting quality is often variable, and there is a considerable lack of knowledge of factors that contribute to successfulinterpreting. Perhaps it is not surprising, then, that a study by the National Association of the Deaf (NAD) found that 70% of the deaf individuals are dissatisfied with interpreting quality. Because recent legislation in the United States and elsewhere has mandated access to educational,employment, and other contexts for deaf individuals and others with hearing disabilities, there is an increasing need for quality sign language interpreting. It is in education, however, that the need is most pressing, particularly because more than 75% of deaf students now attend regular schools(rather than schools for the deaf), where teachers and classmates are unable to sign for themselves. In the more than 100 interpreter training programs in the U.S. alone, there are a variety of educational models, but little empirical information on how to evaluate them or determine theirappropriateness in different interpreting and interpreter education-covering what we know, what we do not know, and what we should know. Several volumes have covered interpreting and interpreter education, there are even some published dissertations that have included a single research study, and afew books have attempted to offer methods for professional interpreters or interpreter educators with nods to existing research. This is the first volume that synthesizes existing work and provides a coherent picture of the field as a whole, including evaluation of the extent to which currentpractices are supported by validating research. It will be the first comprehensive source, suitable as both a reference book and a textbook for interpreter training programs and a variety of courses on bilingual education, psycholinguistics and translation, and cross-linguistic studies.
Mental health is one of the most talked about issues in the world today, but are Deaf people getting the access they need to address these? In Mental Health Interpreting, you will learn the use of proper techniques and the preparation needed to effectively facilitate communication between the healthcare provider and Deaf client, from diagnosis to treatment. As this is one of the most intense assignments an interpreter will experience, you will also be taught coping strategies to deal with the emotional stress associated with mental health interpreting.
Adapted Physical Education and Sport by
The field of adapted physical education and sport has undergone numerous changes in recent years. This new edition of Adapted Physical Education and Sport will help you stay on top of those changes and, in doing so, provide the highest-quality physical education and sport opportunities for students with disabilities. NEW MATERIAL The sixth edition of this well-loved text builds on its successful previous editions and is replete with changes that are current with today''s trends and practices in the field: * As the inclusion movement continues to expand, the authors have revised several chapters to detail relevant inclusion practices and applications in both physical education and sport, helping to integrate students with disabilities into regular class and sport settings with guidelines for modifying activities. * The chapter on adapted sport is further developed to communicate and reflect on progress in the field and includes a Sport Framework for Individuals with Disabilities model to help develop and implement sport programs. * The book gives attention to the revised Brockport Physical Fitness Test, and the accompanying web resource offers video clips that explain and demonstrate the criterion-referenced health-related tests that are applicable to many students with disabilities. * Advances and applications pertaining to behavior management and wheelchair sport performance are covered in various chapters. * The authors address the use of new technology as it relates to teaching and administration for adapted physical education and explore stand-alone apps that can be used in conjunction with the book that are useful in behavior management, fitness development, communication, social interaction, and physical education activities. * The authors give increased attention to the problem of obesity, particularly relevant to students with disabilities. * Many new authors and a coeditor have been brought on board, bringing fresh perspectives to the book and adding to the depth of experience provided by the returning authors and editor. These additions help Adapted Physical Education and Sport maintain its reputation as a comprehensive, user-friendly text that helps teachers provide top-quality services to people with unique physical education needs. Greatly influenced by the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, this book helps in identifying the unique needs of students and developing physical education programs, including individualized education programs (IEPs) for students with disabilities, that are consistent with current federal legislation. STRONG ANCILLARIES The text is augmented by its ancillaries, which include an instructor guide, test package, presentation package, and web resource with video. The instructor guide offers chapter objectives, additional resources, and learning and enrichment activities that will help students master the content and extend their knowledge. The test package helps in building custom tests using hundreds of test questions and answers. You will find hundreds of PowerPoint slides that reinforce the text''s key points in the presentation package, and the web resource includes 26 videos of the new Brockport Physical Fitness Test in action as well as several reproducibles from the book. DEEPENED UNDERSTANDING The authors, renowned authorities in their fields, use real-life scenarios to introduce chapter concepts and then show how to apply the concepts in solving issues. The text will help deepen understanding of the implications of disabilities for people through age 21 (though much of the book is relevant in the entire life span). It grounds readers in the foundational topics for adapted physical education and sport, explores the developmental considerations involved, and outlines activities for developing programs for people with unique physical education needs. The book offers a four-color design to draw attention to important elements and provides separate author and subject indexes as well as resources with each chapter and on the web resource for further exploration. Adapted Physical Education and Sport supplies all that is needed for enriching the lives of students with disabilities by providing them with the high-quality programs they deserve.
Deaf Mental Health Care by
This volume presents a state of the art account of the clinical specialty of mental health care of deaf people. Drawing upon some of the leading clinicians, teachers, administrators, and researchers in this field from the United States and Great Britain, it addresses critical issues from this specialty such as Deaf/hearing cross cultural dynamics as they impact treatment organizations Clinical and interpreting work with deaf persons with widely varying language abilities Adaptations of best practices in inpatient, residential, trauma, and substance abuse treatment for deaf persons Overcoming administrative barriers to establishing statewide continua of care University training of clinical specialists The interplay of clinical and forensic responses to deaf people who commit crimes An agenda of priorities for Deaf mental health research Each chapter contains numerous clinical case studies and places a heavy emphasis on providing practical intervention strategies in an interesting, easy to read style. All mental health professionals who work with deaf individuals will find this to be an invaluable resource for creating and maintaining culturally affirmative treatment with this population.
Deafness in mind : working psychologically with deaf people across the lifespan by
Deafness in Mind presents the varying theoretical approaches to the psychology of deafness: systemic, Cognitive behavioural, psychodynamic, wellness and cognitive neuropsychological models. Uniquely, clinical theory and practice are linked to provide a comprehensive understanding of the deaf mental health field. For the first time, the controversial subject of cochlear implants is discussed in the same book as the mental health of culturally Deaf people. Similarly, prevention is considered alongside prevalence, and the book appraises the various political views where other books have taken a single political view. Deafness in Mind has drawn contributing authors from those with the authority of years of clinical experience as well as those with new ideas. Current services and new directions in the field are brought together to provide a definitative text in the psychology of mental health and deafness.
Ethics in Mental Health and Deafness by
Mental health experts describe ethical decisions in working with deaf clients, particularly issues of communication. Addressing those who provide mental health services to deaf people, 10 chapters are presented by Gutman (psychology, Gallaudet U.) that explore a variety of issues of ethics in dealing with varied populations and settings. Discussions include examinations of the law and ethics, working with children and adolescents, working with minorities, training professionals for mental health services, genetic counseling and testing for deafness, and research involving deaf people.
In our hands : educating healthcare interpreters by
Deaf Americans have identified healthcare as the most difficult setting in which to obtain a qualified interpreter. Yet, relatively little attention has been given to developing evidence-based resources and a standardized body of knowledge to educate healthcare interpreters. In Our Hands: Educating Healthcare Interpreters addresses these concerns by delineating the best practices for preparing interpreters to facilitate full access for deaf people in healthcare settings. The first section of this volume begins with developing domains and competencies toward a teaching methodology for medical and mental health interpreters. The next chapter describes a discourse approach that relies on analyzing actual transcripts and recordings to train healthcare interpreters. Other chapters feature a model mental health interpreter training program in Alabama; using a Demand-Control Schema for experiential learning; the risk of vicarious trauma to interpreters; online educational opportunities; and interpreting for deaf health care professionals. The second section offers four perspectives on education, including healthcare literacy of the clients; the education of Deaf interpreters; the development of standards for spoken-language healthcare interpreters; and the perspectives of healthcare interpreter educators in Europe. The range and depth of In Our Hands takes significant strides in presenting educational opportunities that can enhance the critical services provided by healthcare interpreters to deaf clients.
Legal rights : the guide for deaf and hard of hearing people by
The new, revised, fifth edition of Legal Rights offers in easy-to-understand language the latest state and federal statutes and administrative procedures that prohibit discrimination against deaf and hard of hearing people, and any others with physical challenges. It includes complete information on the Telecommunications Act of 1996, new laws for hearing-aid-compatible telephones, the new Rehabilitation Act regulations that ensure access to electronic and information technology, and how recent Supreme Court rulings will affect people with hearing aids. This outstanding resource also explains new requirements for federal buildings and other new structures to provide full access. Recent additions to the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act are described, as are the ways public schools can meet new acoustical standards for classrooms. Legal Rights also covers the new rules about interpreters in federal courts and the latest developments regarding relay services. It lists those states that are leaders in ensuring access and equal rights to people with disabilities, making it the most complete source of legal information for deaf and hard of hearing people now available. Founded in 1880, the National Association of the Deaf (NAD) is the oldest and largest organiza-tion representing people with disabilities in the United States.
Sign Language and the Deaf Community by Mental health is one of the most talked about issues in the world today, but are Deaf people getting the access they need to address these? In Mental Health Interpreting, you will learn the use of proper techniques and the preparation needed to effectively facilitate communication between the healthcare provider and Deaf client, from diagnosis to treatment. As this is one of the most intense assignments an interpreter will experience, you will also be taught coping strategies to deal with the emotional stress associated with mental health interpreting.
Amazing gifts : stories of faith, disability, and inclusion by
Amazing Gifts: Stories of Faith, Disability, and Inclusion is a new publication by noted religion writer Mark I. Pinsky. Pinsky has gathered stories from churches, synagogues, mosques, and temples across the country, "stories of people with disabilities and the congregations where they have found welcome." He has taken special care to include the widest range of disabilities, including non-apparent disabilities like lupus, chronic pain, traumatic brain injury, depression, and mental illness. There were 54 million American with disabilities as of 2000, and that number is now being swelled by wounded warriors from the Afghan and Iraq wars and an aging population. he author emphasizes that his purpose is to not to write a resource manual on accessibility and inclusion. Rather, Pinsky seeks to share stories of how people with disabilities have experienced their faith in the context of their disability, and how congregations have gained when they value the gifts that people with disabilities bring along. "This book," notes the author, "is for congregational leaders and others who may have no expertise or personal experience with disability, but who make the congregational decisions about accessibility and inclusion."
Auditory communication for deaf children : a guide for teachers, parents and health professionals by
For hearing-impaired children, the development of listening skills is the basis for successful spoken language, communication, and conversation. This book presents a rationale and framework for auditory learning in childhood, and it describes a wide range of practical listening activities that can be applied during everyday interaction with a deaf child. Written for parents, teachers, and students, the book will serve as a guide to intervention and practice. Recurrent themes include adult-child interaction, careful observation of communication behavior, adaptation to the child's abilities, introduction of complex listening tasks to challenge the child, and application of effective communication strategies. The book contains not only basic activities for listening practice, but also proposes methods for adaptive auditory assessment, conversation-based therapy, telephone-communication training, self-help communication strategies for children, and use of a hearing-loss simulator to develop speech and language clarity in communication partners. It shows how adults can become better communicators and how they can help hearing-impaired children maximize their listening skills. Many of the teaching/therapeutic methods are based on evidence obtained from research studies. Other methods are based on practical experience obtained in pre-schools, classrooms, clinics, and parent-advisory centers. References to supporting literature are provided throughout the text. "Auditory Communication for Deaf Children is an excellent book from start to finish. All topics are presented in short, easy-to-understand segments. Charts, diagrams, and other graphic aids are ubiquitious, providing readers with "how-to's" at a glance. Highly recommended." Choice, September 2012, Vol. 50 No. 01
Deaf Mental Health Care by
This volume presents a state of the art account of the clinical specialty of mental health care of deaf people. Drawing upon some of the leading clinicians, teachers, administrators, and researchers in this field from the United States and Great Britain, it addresses critical issues from this specialty such as Deaf/hearing cross cultural dynamics as they impact treatment organizations Clinical and interpreting work with deaf persons with widely varying language abilities Adaptations of best practices in inpatient, residential, trauma, and substance abuse treatment for deaf persons Overcoming administrative barriers to establishing statewide continua of care University training of clinical specialists The interplay of clinical and forensic responses to deaf people who commit crimes An agenda of priorities for Deaf mental health research Each chapter contains numerous clinical case studies and places a heavy emphasis on providing practical intervention strategies in an interesting, easy to read style. All mental health professionals who work with deaf individuals will find this to be an invaluable resource for creating and maintaining culturally affirmative treatment with this population.
Ethics in Mental Health and Deafness by
Mental health experts describe ethical decisions in working with deaf clients, particularly issues of communication. Addressing those who provide mental health services to deaf people, 10 chapters are presented by Gutman (psychology, Gallaudet U.) that explore a variety of issues of ethics in dealing with varied populations and settings. Discussions include examinations of the law and ethics, working with children and adolescents, working with minorities, training professionals for mental health services, genetic counseling and testing for deafness, and research involving deaf people.
Legal rights : the guide for deaf and hard of hearing people by
The new, revised, fifth edition of Legal Rights offers in easy-to-understand language the latest state and federal statutes and administrative procedures that prohibit discrimination against deaf and hard of hearing people, and any others with physical challenges. It includes complete information on the Telecommunications Act of 1996, new laws for hearing-aid-compatible telephones, the new Rehabilitation Act regulations that ensure access to electronic and information technology, and how recent Supreme Court rulings will affect people who wear hearing aids.This outstanding resource also explains new requirements for federal buildings and other new structures to provide full access. Recent additions to the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act are described, as are the ways public schools can meet new acoustical standards for classrooms. Legal Rights covers the entire spectrum of communication issues for deaf and hard of hearing people, from the new rules about interpreters in federal courts to the latest developments regarding relay services. It also lists those states that are leaders in ensuring access and equal rights to people with disabilities, making it the most complete source of legal information for deaf and hard of hearing people now available.
Mental Health Services for Deaf People by
The World Congress on Mental Health and Deafness first met at Gallaudet University in October 1998, and it has convened five more times in the succeeding years. This volume collects the very best research presented at the Fifth World Congress, which took place in Monterrey, Mexico, in 2012. The eighteen international contributors represent the pioneers of mental health and deafness services in their respective countries. Volume editors Benito Estrada Aranda and Ines Sleeboom-van Raaij have divided the book into three parts--Mental Health Issues and Treatment, Deaf Populations, and Deaf Children and Their Families. In the first part, the contributors provide in-depth analysis of specific challenges and treatment modalities ranging from the provision of mental healthcare as a basic human right to psychopharmacological treatment, the challenges in developing mental health services for deaf and hard of hearing people in countries where none exist, and new treatment therapies. Part two looks at issues of self-esteem and cultural identity among deaf and hard of hearing adults in Greece and Cyprus, the services for deaf people at a public health clinic in Austria, and the quality of life among Latino Deaf bilinguals in the United States. In the last part, the contributors focus on mental health issues found in deaf children and adolescents and on the relationships between deaf teenagers and their hearing mothers. The volume concludes with a case study of a prelingually deaf child diagnosed as autistic. Taken all together, these cutting-edge articles explore the important issues within the specialized area of mental health and deafness.
Women with Visible and Invisible Disabilities by
This thoughtful collection addresses the issues faced by women with disabilities, examines the social construction of disability, and makes suggestions for the development and modification of culturally relevant therapy to meet the needs of disabled women. Written in an accessible style with a minimum of jargon, this book provides clinical material from the perspectives of psychotherapists, clients, personal assistants, and health administrators. Women with Visible and Invisible Disabilities also highlights the importance of considering age, ethnicity, and sexual orientation in its examination of feminist approaches to assessment, psychotherapy, disability management (coping), and discusses how the Americans with Disabilities Act impacts employment and education for women.
Working with Interpreters in Mental Health by
Why are interpreters an important part of modern healthcare provision? In today's society, there is an increasing need for mental health professionals to work with interpreters, yet coverage of this subject in the existing literature is scarce. Working with Interpreters in Mental Health gives an insight into the issues and problems of professionals working with interpreters in the mental health field. Informed by theoretical, research and practice considerations, Working with Interpreters in Mental Health helps practitioners to develop better ways of helping service users who need an interpreter. Combining contributions from a number of different disciplines, this book discusses: * interpreters in medical consultations * issues of language provision in health care services * the application of theoretical frameworks to the work with interpreters * the work of interpreters in a variety of practical settings. Whilst the focus the placed within a mental health context, many of the issues raised apply equally to other context where interpreters are needed. This book will be invaluable for practitioners of psychology, psychiatry, social work and other health professionals.
A world without words : the social construction of children born deaf and blind by
During the Rubella Syndrome epidemic of the 1960s, many children were born deaf, blind, and mentally disabled. David Goode has devoted his life and career to understanding such people's world, a world without words, but not, the author confirms, one without communication. This book is the result of his studies of two children with congenital deaf-blindness and mental retardation. Goode spent countless hours observing, teaching, and playing with Christina, who had been institutionalized since age six, and Bianca, who remained in the care of her parents. He also observed the girls' parents, school, and medical environments, exploring the unique communication practices--sometimes so subtle they are imperceptible to outsiders--that family and health care workers create to facilitate innumerable every day situations. A World Without Words presents moving and convincing evidence that human beings both with and without formal language can understand and communicate with each other in many ways. Through various experiments in such unconventional forms of communication as playing guitar, mimicking, and body movements like jumping, swinging, and rocking, Goode established an understanding of these children on their own terms. He discovered a spectrum of non-formal language through which these children create their own set of symbols within their own reality, and accommodate and maximize the sensory resources they do have. Ultimately, he suggests, it is impractical to attempt to interpret these children's behaviors using ideas about normal behavior of the hearing and seeing world.
The show must go on and when the spotlight is on you, you need to be able to perform. Platform Interpreting encompasses theater, music, television and other platform settings. In this course, you will develop necessary tools that will build your competence and confidence in this specialized interpreting though activities that include lyrical analysis, platform ethics, and negotiation of logistics. The acting bug has bitten and it is now time to take “ACTION”!
Dancing without music : deafness in America by
More than a decade ago, Beryl Lieff Benderly wrote in Dancing Without Music about two burning issues of the Deaf community: oralism versus American Sign Language, and the rights of Deaf people. Now, her masterful book is available again. With scientific precision, Dancing Without Music investigates being deaf and its ramifications in society as well as the relationship between thought processes and language, whether spoken or not. The sage perspective it offers will engender fresh insights about matters changed and unchanged for Deaf persons today.
Deaf side story : deaf Sharks, hearing Jets, and a classic American musical by
The 1957 classic American musical West Side Story has been staged by countless community and school theater groups, but none more ambitious than the 2000 production by MacMurray College, a small school in Jacksonville, Illinois. Diane Brewer, the new drama head at the college, determined to add an extra element to the usual demands of putting on a show by having deaf students perform half of the parts. Deaf Side Story presents a fascinating narrative of Brewer and the cast's efforts to mount this challenging play. Brewer turned to the Illinois School for the Deaf (ISD) to cast the Sharks, the Puerto Rican gang at odds with the Anglo Jets in this musical version of Romeo and Juliet set in the slums of New York. Hearing performers auditioned to be the Jets, and once Brewer had cast her hearing Tony and deaf Maria, then came the challenge of teaching them all to sing/sign and dance the riveting show numbers for which the musical is renowned. She also had to manage a series of sensitive issues, from ensuring the seamless incorporation of American Sign Language into the play to reassuring ISD administrators and students that the production would not be symbolic of any conflict between Deaf and hearing people. Author Mark Rigney portrays superbly the progress of the production, including the frustrations and triumphs of the leads, the labyrinthine campus and community politics, and the inevitable clashes between the deaf high school cast members and their hearing college counterparts. His representations of the many individuals involved are real and distinguished. The ultimate success of the MacMurray production reverberates in Deaf Side Story as a keen depiction of how several distinctindividuals from as many cultures could cooperate to perform a classic American art form brilliantly together.
Deaf world : a historical reader and primary sourcebook by
An essential anthology of Deaf perspectives To many who hear, the deaf world is as foreign as a country never visited. Deaf World thus concerns itself less with the perspectives of the hearing and more with what Deaf people themselves think and do. Editor Lois Bragg asserts that English is for many signing people a second, infrequently used language and that Deaf culture is the socially transmitted pattern of behavior, values, beliefs, and expression of those who use American Sign Language. She has assembled an astonishing array of historical sources, political writings, and personal memoirs, from classic 19th-century manifestos to contemporary policy papers, on everything from eugenics to speech and lipreading, the right to work and marry, and the never-ending controversy over separation vs. social integration. At the heart of many of the selections lies the belief that Deaf Americans have long constituted an internal colony of sorts in the United States. While not attempting to speak for Deaf people en masse, this ambitious platform anthology places the Deaf on center stage, offering them an opportunity to represent the world--theirs as well as the hearing world--from a Deaf perspective. For Deaf readers, the book will be welcomed as a gift, both a companion to be savored and, as often, an opponent to be engaged and debated. And for the hearing, it serves as an unprecedented guide to a world and a culture so often overlooked. Comprising a judicious mix of published pieces and original essays solicited specifically for this volume, Deaf World marks a major contribution.
Inside Deaf Culture by
In a study written from within the deaf community, the authors demonstrate how deaf people live historically, culturally, and linguistically complex lives, and how being or becoming deaf opens the door to an enormously rewarding life.
Sign the speech : an introduction to theatrical interpreting by The show must go on and when the spotlight is on you, you need to be able to perform. Platform Interpreting encompasses theater, music, television and other platform settings. In this course, you will develop necessary tools that will build your competence and confidence in this specialized interpreting though activities that include lyrical analysis, platform ethics, and negotiation of logistics. The acting bug has bitten and it is now time to take “ACTION”!
Deaf School : the Non-Stop Pop Art Punk Rock Party by
Liverpool's dynamic music scene gave the world The Beatles. What city could hope to follow that? But 12 years later, in 1974, lightning nearly struck twice. Deaf School were a band formed in John Lennon's old art college, rehearsing in the very same rooms. With their chaotic and wildly entertaining brand of rock cabaret, Deaf School were tipped for instant stardom and signed up by Warner Brothers in California. But suddenly, with the world at their feet, Deaf School were swept aside by Britain's punk rock revolution. "A great band," said the Sex Pistols' manager Malcolm McLaren. "But it's just as bad being too early as too late." Though their hopes were dashed the band has never surrendered. And 40 years on, Deaf School's influence is acknowledged by British bands from Madness to Dexy's Midnight Runners. Their reunion shows, still madly glamorous and eccentric, are tribal gatherings for a fanbase that never forgot them. The band's first full-length biography is written by British music writer Paul Du Noyer, a follower since Deaf School's early days in Liverpool. "Deaf School are such a delicious secret," he says. "It's almost a shame to reveal it."
Deaf side story : deaf Sharks, hearing Jets, and a classic American musical by
The 1957 classic American musical West Side Story has been staged by countless community and school theater groups, but none more ambitious than the 2000 production by MacMurray College, a small school in Jacksonville, Illinois. Diane Brewer, the new drama head at the college, determined to add an extra element to the usual demands of putting on a show by having deaf students perform half of the parts. Deaf Side Story presents a fascinating narrative of Brewer and the cast's efforts to mount this challenging play. Brewer turned to the Illinois School for the Deaf (ISD) to cast the Sharks, the Puerto Rican gang at odds with the Anglo Jets in this musical version of Romeo and Juliet set in the slums of New York. Hearing performers auditioned to be the Jets, and once Brewer had cast her hearing Tony and deaf Maria, then came the challenge of teaching them all to sing/sign and dance the riveting show numbers for which the musical is renowned. She also had to manage a series of sensitive issues, from ensuring the seamless incorporation of American Sign Language into the play to reassuring ISD administrators and students that the production would not be symbolic of any conflict between Deaf and hearing people. Author Mark Rigney portrays superbly the progress of the production, including the frustrations and triumphs of the leads, the labyrinthine campus and community politics, and the inevitable clashes between the deaf high school cast members and their hearing college counterparts. His representations of the many individuals involved are real and distinguished. The ultimate success of the MacMurray production reverberates in Deaf Side Story as a keen depiction of how several distinctindividuals from as many cultures could cooperate to perform a classic American art form brilliantly together.
Deaf world : a historical reader and primary sourcebook by
An essential anthology of Deaf perspectives To many who hear, the deaf world is as foreign as a country never visited. Deaf World thus concerns itself less with the perspectives of the hearing and more with what Deaf people themselves think and do. Editor Lois Bragg asserts that English is for many signing people a second, infrequently used language and that Deaf culture is the socially transmitted pattern of behavior, values, beliefs, and expression of those who use American Sign Language. She has assembled an astonishing array of historical sources, political writings, and personal memoirs, from classic 19th-century manifestos to contemporary policy papers, on everything from eugenics to speech and lipreading, the right to work and marry, and the never-ending controversy over separation vs. social integration. At the heart of many of the selections lies the belief that Deaf Americans have long constituted an internal colony of sorts in the United States. While not attempting to speak for Deaf people en masse, this ambitious platform anthology places the Deaf on center stage, offering them an opportunity to represent the world--theirs as well as the hearing world--from a Deaf perspective. For Deaf readers, the book will be welcomed as a gift, both a companion to be savored and, as often, an opponent to be engaged and debated. And for the hearing, it serves as an unprecedented guide to a world and a culture so often overlooked. Comprising a judicious mix of published pieces and original essays solicited specifically for this volume, Deaf World marks a major contribution.
Hearing Difference by
This engrossing studyinvestigates the connections between hearing and deafness in experimental, Deaf, and multicultural theater. Author Kanta Kochhar-Lindgren focuses on how to articulate a Deaf aesthetic and how to grasp the meaning of moments of "deafness" in theater works that do not simply reinscribe a hearing bias back into one's analysis. She employs a model using a device for cross-sensory listening across domains of sound, silence, and the moving body in performance that she calls the "third ear." Kochhar-Lindgren then charts a genealogy of the theater of the third ear from the mid-1800s to the 1960s in examples ranging from Denis Diderot, the Symbolists, the Dadaists, Antonin Artaud, and others. She also analyzes the work of playwright Robert Wilson, the National Theatre of the Deaf, and Asian American director Ping Chong. She shows how the model of the third ear can address not only deaf performance but also multicultural performance, by analyzing the Seattle dance troupe Ragamala's 2001 production of Transposed Heads, which melded classical South Indian use of mudras, or hand gestures, and ASL signing. The shift in attention limned in Hearing Difference leads to a different understanding of the body, intersubjectivity, communication, and cross-cultural relations, confirming it as a critically important contribution to contemporary Deaf studies.
Inside Deaf Culture by
In this absorbing story of the changing life of a community, the authors of Deaf in America reveal historical events and forces that have shaped the ways that Deaf people define themselves today. Inside Deaf Culture relates Deaf people's search for a voice of their own, and their proud self-discovery and self-description as a flourishing culture. Padden and Humphries show how the nineteenth-century schools for the deaf, with their denigration of sign language and their insistence on oralist teaching, shaped the lives of Deaf people for generations to come. They describe how Deaf culture and art thrived in mid-twentieth century Deaf clubs and Deaf theatre, and profile controversial contemporary technologies. Most triumphant is the story of the survival of the rich and complex language American Sign Language, long misunderstood but finally recently recognized by a hearing world that could not conceive of language in a form other than speech. In a moving conclusion, the authors describe their own very different pathways into the Deaf community, and reveal the confidence and anxiety of the people of this tenuous community as it faces the future. Inside Deaf Culture celebrates the experience of a minority culture--its common past, present debates, and promise for the future. From these pages emerge clear and bold voices, speaking out from inside this once silenced community.
Making Music with a Hearing Loss by
How can you make music with a hearing loss?Musicians with hearing loss from all over the world tell you how.In this engaging and informative book you'll find:* 23 in-depth musician profiles with personal stories and strategies* Advice for professional musicians as well as amateur music lovers* Information on hearing conservation and cochlear implant rehabilitation* Expert guidance by audiologists who love musicA must-have for all musicians with hearing loss, audiologists, and music educators.---
Music for Children with Hearing Loss by
Written by an expert in the field who is both a teacher and a teacher-educator, this book is an in-depth and practical resource for educators and parents who wish to introduce music to children with hearing loss.Author Lyn Schraer-Joiner makes a compelling case for offering music education to children with hearing loss before presenting a series of important and up-to-date teaching strategies meant to inform their educational experience, including preparations for the classroom, communication strategies for parents and teaching staff, and tips on more specific or technical matters such as conducting musical audiograms. These resources provide a solid background for hands-on instructional materials such as music lessons, supplemental activities, educational resources, discussion points, and journal samples for the classroom and home.Schraer-Joiner goes to great lengths to offer detailed, purposeful suggestions for specific classroom settings such as general music, choral ensemble, and instrumental ensemble as well as a set of recommended listening lessons that take this potential variety of settings into account. Furthermore, Schraer-Joiner provides suggestions for incorporating music into everyday activities and also presents an overview of recent research which reinforces the benefits of music upon social and emotional development as well as speech and language development. Each chapter concludes with a section entitled "For Your Consideration" which features review questions, ideas, and instructional activities that teachers and parents can accomplish with deaf and hard of hearing children. The book's "Kids Only" online component provides deaf and hard-of-hearing children with descriptions of the many opportunities available to them in the arts, inspirational case studies and stories, as well as important ideas and topics for deaf and hard-of-hearing children to consider discussing with the teachers, family members, and healthcareprofessionals that they work with.The message of this book is a powerful one particularly in this day and age. As hearing aid and cochlear implant technologies improve and become increasingly widespread, all teachers--especially music teachers--should expect to see more deaf and hard-of-hearing children in their classrooms. Awareness and preparation are not only vital in aiding these children in the classroom, but are in fact required of teachers by federal law.This book is a comprehensive resource for teachers and parents who wish to gain a better understanding of the emerging field of music education for students with hearing loss.
The Oxford handbook of music and disability studies by
The essays in this volume share a theoretical and methodological connection to Disability Studies, especially its central idea that disability is a social and cultural construction. Disability is shown to be a core feature of the musical identity of music makers (especially composers and performers), something that affects their lives and works and their public reception. Music represents disability in various ways and affirms the notion that disability is a performance, something you do rather than something you are. These essays make the case that disability is not something at the periphery of culture and music, but something central to our art and to our humanity. They also address an important lacuna within a Disability Studies that has mostly overlooked music as a medium through which disability can be constructed.
Pictures in the air : the story of the National Theatre of the Deaf by
Now available in paperback; ISBN 1-56368-140-4
Reading Contemporary Performance by
As the nature of contemporary performance continues to expand into new forms, genres and media, it requires an increasingly diverse vocabulary. Reading Contemporary Performance provides students, critics and creators with a rich understanding of the key terms and ideas that are central to any discussion of this evolving theatricality. Specially commissioned entries from a wealth of contributors map out the many and varied ways of discussing performance in all of its forms - from theatrical and site-specific performances to live and New Media art. The book is divided into two sections: Concepts - Key terms and ideas arranged according to the five characteristic elements of performance art: time; space; action; performer; audience. Methodologies and Turning Points - The seminal theories and ways of reading performance, such as postmodernism, epic theatre, feminisms, happenings and animal studies. Case Studies - entries in both sections are accompanied by short studies of specific performances and events, demonstrating creative examples of the ideas and issues in question. Three different introductory essays provide multiple entry points into the discussion of contemporary performance, and cross-references for each entry also allow the plotting of one's own pathway. Reading Contemporary Performance is an invaluable guide, providing not just a solid set of familiarities, but an exploration and contextualisation of this broad and vital field.
Speaking in tongues : language at play in the theatre by
Speaking in Tongues presents a unique account of how language has been employed in the theatre, not simply as a means of communication but also as a stylistic and formal device, and for a number of cultural and political operations. The use of multiple languages in the contemporary theatre is in part a reflection of a more globalized culture, but it also calls attention to how the mixing of language has always been an important part of the functioning of theatre. The book begins by investigating various "levels" of language-high and low style, prose and poetry-and the ways in which these have been used historically to mark social positions and relationships. It next considers some of the political and historical implications of dialogue theatre, as well as theatre that literally employs several languages, from classical Greek examples to the postmodern era. Carlson treats with special attention the theatre of the postcolonial world, and especially the triangulation of the local language, the national language, and the colonial language, drawing on examples of theatre in the Caribbean, Africa, Australia, and New Zealand. Finally, Carlson considers the layering of languages in the theatre, such as the use of supertitles or simultaneous signing. Speaking in Tongues draws important social and political conclusions about the role of language in cultural power, making a vital contribution to the fields of theatre and performance. Marvin Carlson is Sidney E. Cohn Professor of Theatre and Comparative Literature, CUNY Graduate Center. He is author of Performance: A Critical Introduction; Theories of the Theatre: A Historical and Critical Survey, from the Greeks to the Present; and The Haunted Stage: The Theatre as Memory Machine, among many other books.
As we transition from being helpers/volunteers to becoming professional allies, it is of significance that we know how to present ourselves to our clients (both Deaf and hearing), and how to conduct business with them. In PRFPRAC, you will learn the concept of interprenomics and the business aspect of sign language interpreting. You will also learn about the professional code of conduct, from the most trivial (e.g. dress code) to the most obvious (under/overcharging your client). You will also develop skills on working with and providing feedback with your team interpreter. This will ensure a harmonious relationship between yourself, your team interpreter and your clients.
The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies by
The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies is the first introductory course book that explores the theoretical foundations used in sign language interpreting studies. Authors Roy, Brunson, and Stone examine the disciplines whose theoretical frameworks and methodologies have influenced the academic study of interpreting. With this text, explanations for how interpreted events occur, how interpreted products are created, and how the interpreting process is studied can be framed within a variety of theoretical perspectives, forming a foundation for the emerging transdiscipline of Interpreting Studies. ​​ As sign language interpreting has emerged and evolved in the last 20 years as an academic field of study, the scope of learning has broadened to include fields beyond the language and culture of deaf people. This text surveys six disciplines that have informed the study of sign language interpreting: history, translation, linguistics, sociology, social psychology, and cognitive psychology, along with their major ideas, principal scholars, and ways of viewing human interaction. Each chapter includes clear learning goals, definitions, discussion questions, and images to aid understanding. The Academic Foundations of Interpreting Studies is required reading for upper-level undergraduate or first-year graduate students in interpreting, Deaf studies, and sign language programs.
Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters by
Picking up where Innovative Practices in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters left off, this new collection presents the best new interpreter teaching techniques proven in action by the eminent contributors assembled here. In the first chapter, Dennis Cokely discusses revising curricula in the new century based upon experiences at Northeastern University. Jeffrey E. Davis delineates how to teach observation techniques to interpreters, while Elizabeth Winston and Christine Monikowski suggest how discourse mapping can be considered the Global Positioning System of translation. In other chapters, Laurie Swabey proposes ways to handle the challenge of referring expressions for interpreting students, and Melanie Metzger describes how to learn and recognize what interpreters do in interaction. Jemina Napier contributes information on training interpreting students to identify omission potential. Robert G. Lee explains how to make the interpreting process come alive in the classroom. Mieke Van Herreweghe discusses turn-taking and turn-yielding in meetings with Deaf and hearing participants in her contribution. Anna-Lena Nilsson defines "false friends," or how contextually incorrect use of facial expressions with certain signs in Swedish Sign Language can be detrimental influences on interpreters. The final chapter by Kyra Pollitt and Claire Haddon recommends retraining interpreters in the art of telephone interpreting, completing Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters as the new authoritative volume in this vital communication profession.
The American Sign Language Phrase Book by
Open up a whole new world of communication through ASL You can easily learn ASL with help from The American Sign Language Phrase Book. With more than 500 phrases, this is the reference guide to everyday expressions in American Sign Language, providing a quick way for you to converse with deaf people. Clearly illustrated with hundreds of line drawings, this book focuses on areas such as health, family, school, sports, travel, religion, time, money, food and drink, and small talk. This edition's new chapter on technology boasts 50 phrases to help you communicate about the Internet, computing, video relay, and more. There is even a chapter that gives you phrases for communicating about signing: asking people to sign slower, indicating your fingerspelling ability, and requesting help with your fledgling skills. From asking simple questions (“How are you?”) to more complex phrases (“There's no sign for that, you have to fingerspell it.”), The American Sign Language Phrase Book gives you the power to communicate easily and comfortably in ASL.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
Deaf Interpreters at Work by
Now, for the first time, a collection featuring 17 widely respected scholars depicts the everyday practices of deaf interpreters in their respective nations. Deaf Interpreters at Work: International Insights presents the history of Deaf translators and interpreters and details the development of testing and accreditation to raise their professional profiles. Other chapters delineate the cognitive processes of Deaf interpreting; Deaf-Deaf interpreter teams; Deaf and hearing team preparation; the use of Tactile American Sign Language by those interpreting for the Deaf-Blind community; and conference interpreting and interpreting teams. Along with volume coeditors Robert Adam, Christopher Stone, and Steven D. Collins, contributors include Markus Aro, Karen Bontempo, Juan Carlos Druetta, Senan Dunne, Eileen Forestal, Della Goswell, Juli af Klintberg, Patricia Levitzke-Gray, Jemina Napier, Brenda Nicodemus, Debra Russell, Stephanie Sforza, Marty Taylor, and Linda Warby. The scope of their research spans the world, including many unique facets of interpreting by deaf people in Argentina, Australia, Canada, England, Finland, Ireland, Sweden, and the United States, establishing this work as the standard in this burgeoning discipline.
E-Z American Sign Language by
This heavily illustrated, self-teaching guide to ASL--American Sign Language--is useful both for the deaf and for those men and women who teach or work among deaf people. E-Z American Sign Language presents ASL's 10 key grammatical rules and emphasizes the use of "facial grammar" as an important supplement to manual signing. Most of the book's content takes the form of a presentation of more than 800 captioned line drawings that illustrate signs for their equivalent words and then show how to combine signs in order to communicate detailed statements. Barron's E-Z Series books are updated, and re-formatted editions of Barron's older and perennially popular Easy Way books. Titles in the new E-Z Series feature extensive two-color treatment, a fresh, modern typeface, and more graphic material than ever. All are self-teaching manuals that cover a wide variety of practical and academic subjects, written on levels that range from senior high school to college-101 standards.
Innovative Practices for Teaching Sign Language Interpreters by
Researchers now understand interpreting as an active process between two languages and cultures, with social interaction, sociolinguistics, and discourse analysis as more appropriate theoretical frameworks. Roy's penetrating new book acts upon these new insights by presenting six dynamic teaching practices to help interpreters achieve the highest level of skill. Elizabeth Winston and Christine Monikowski begin by explaining discourse mapping to enable students to develop a mental picture of a message's meaning and the relationships of context, form, and content. Kyra Pollitt discusses critical discourse analysis, to reveal some of the cultural influences that shape a speaker's language use. Melanie Metzger describes preparing role-plays so that students learn to effectively switch back and forth between languages, manage features such as overlap, and make relevant contributions to interaction, such as indicating the source of an utterance. Jeffrey Davis illustrates the translation skills that form the basis,for teaching consecutive and simultaneous interpreting to help students understand the intended meaning of the source message, and also the manner in which listeners understand it. Rico Peterson demonstrates the use of recall protocols, which can be used to teach metacognitive skills and to assess the student's sign language comprehension. Finally, Janice Humphrey details the use of graduation portfolios, a valuable assessment tool used by the faculty to determine a student's level of competency. These imaginative techniques in Innovative Practices promise gains in sign language interpreting that will benefit teachers, students, and clients alike.
International Sign by
International Sign (IS) is widely used among deaf people and interpreters at international events, but what exactly is it, what are its linguistic features, where does its lexicon come from, and how is it used at interpreted events? This groundbreaking collection is the first volume to provide answers to these questions. Editors Rachel Rosenstock and Jemina Napier have assembled an international group of renowned linguists and interpreters to examine various aspects of International Sign. Their contributions are divided into three parts: International Sign as a Linguistic System; International Sign in Action--Interpreting, Translation, and Teaching; and International Sign Policy and Language Planning. The chapters cover a range of topics, including the morphosyntactic and discursive structures of interpreted IS, the interplay between conventional linguistic elements and nonconventional gestural elements in IS discourse, how deaf signers who use different signed languages establish communication, Deaf/hearing IS interpreting teams and how they sign depicting verbs, how best to teach foundation-level IS skills, strategies used by IS interpreters when interpreting from IS into English, and explorations of the best ways to prepare interpreters for international events. The work of the editors and contributors in this volume makes International Sign the most comprehensive, research-based analysis of a young but growing field in linguistics and interpretation.
The interpreter's guide to life : 365 tips for interpreters ('don't wear black to a wedding' and other words of advice) by Interpreter Education in the Digital Age by
This collection brings together innovative research and approaches for blended learning using digital technology in interpreter education for signed and spoken languages. Volume editors Suzanne Ehrlich and Jemina Napier call upon the expertise of 21 experts, including themselves, to report on the current technology used to provide digital enhancements to interpreter education in Australia, New Zealand, Brazil, Belgium, the United Kingdom, and the United States. Divided into three parts, Innovation, Change, and Community Engagement, this study focuses on the technology itself, rather than how technology enhances curriculum, delivery, or resources. Initiatives described in this collection range from the implementation of on-demand interpreting using iPad technology to create personalized, small-group, multidimensional models suited to digital media for 160 languages; introducing students to interpreting in a 3D world through an IVY virtual environment; applying gaming principles to interpreter education; assessing the amenability of the digital pen in the hybrid mode of interpreting; developing multimedia content for both open access and structured interpreter education environments; to preparing interpreting students for interactions in social media forums, and more. Interpreter Education in the Digital Age provides a context for the application of technologies in interpreter education from an international viewpoint across languages and modalities.
Learning to see : teaching American sign language as a second language by
As more and more secondary schools and colleges accept American Sign Language (ASL) as a legitimate choice for second language study, Learning to See has become even more vital in guiding instructors on the best ways to teach ASL as a second language. And now this groundbreaking book has been updated and revised to reflect the significant gains in recognition that deaf people and their native language, ASL, have achieved in recent years. Learning to See lays solid groundwork for teaching and studying ASL by outlining the structure of this unique visual language. Myths and misconceptions about ASL are laid to rest at the same time that the fascinating, multifaceted elements of Deaf culture are described. Students will be able to study ASL and gain a thorough understanding of the cultural background, which will help them to grasp the language more easily. An explanation of the linguistic basis of ASL follows, leading into the specific, and above all, useful information on teaching techniques. This practical manual systematically presents the steps necessary to design a curriculum for teaching ASL, including the special features necessary for training interpreters. The new Learning to See again takes its place at the forefront of texts on teaching ASL as a second language, and it will prove to be indispensable to educators and administrators in this special discipline.
Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies, Language, and Education by
In Plato's cratylus, which dates to 360 B.C., Socrates alludes to the use of signs by deaf people. In his Natural History, completed in 79 A.D., Pliny the Elder alludes to Quintus Pedius, the deaf son of a Roman consul, who had to seek permission from Caesar Augustus to pursue his training asan artist. During the Renaissance, scores of deaf people achieved fame throughout Europe, and by the middle of the 17th century the talents and communication systems of deaf people were being studied by a variety of noted scientists and philosophers. However, the role of deaf people in society hasalways been hotly debated: could they be educated? Should they be educated? If so, how? How does Deaf culture exist within larger communities? What do advances in the technology and the genetics of hearing loss portend for Deaf communities?In this landmark volume, a wide range of international experts present a comprehensive and accessible overview of the diverse field of deaf studies, language, and education. Pairing practical information with detailed analyses of what works, why, and for whom, and banishing the paternalism onceintrinsic to the field, the handbook consists of specially commissioned essays on topics such as language and language development, hearing and speech perception, education, literacy, cognition, and the complex cultural, social, and psychological issues associated with individuals who are deaf orhard of hearing. Through careful planning, collaboration, and editing, the various topics are interwoven in a manner that allows the reader to understand the current status of research in the field and recognize the opportunities and challenges that lie ahead, providing the most comprehensivereference resource on deaf issues.Written to be accessible to students and practitioners as well as researchers, The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies, Language, and Education is a uniquely ambitious work that will alter both theoretical and applied landscapes. It surveys a field that has grown dramatically over the past 40 years,since sign languages were first recognized by scientists to be true languages. From work on the linguistics of sign language and parent-child interactions to analyses of school placement and the mapping of brain function in deaf individuals, research across a wide range of disciplines has greatlyexpanded not just our knowledge of deafness and the deaf, but of the very origins of language, social interaction, and thinking. Bringing together historical information, research, and strategies for teaching and service provision, Marc Marschark and Patricia Elizabeth Spencer have given us what iscertain to become the benchmark reference in the field.
The professional sign language interpreter's handbook : the complete, practical manual for the interpreting profession by The professional sign language interpreter's handbook : the complete, practical manual for the interpreting profession by Reading Between the Signs by
Provides a new perspective on American Deaf culture, a unique culture that is not widely understood. With collaboration of three distinguished Deaf consultants, Mindess explores the implications of cultural differences at the intersection of the Deaf and hearing worlds. Used in interpreter training programs worldwide.
Rethinking the Education of Deaf Students by
Here is a compelling and controversial text which asserts that Deaf students should be treated no differently than non Deaf students. The author, a veteran and practicing teacher, rejects the predominant view of Deaf students as special learners in need of language remediation and repair. Instead, she maintains that for Deaf students as well as their hearing counterparts, the primary educational goal is the making and sharing of understandings in various subjects. Furthermore, she views this as a process that occurs naturally, concomitantly, and reciprocally with the acquisition of language--regardless of one's hearing ability. Livingston's assertion clashes with conventional Deaf education, which presumes that the wider learning begins afterstudents master a sign system that codifies and reconstructs English. With a cumbersome, orderly, piecemeal, and unnatural approach, this traditional view frequently forces teachers to water down curriculums in an attempt to make English more readily acquired. As a result, Deaf students are deprived of rich and challenging content. Rethinking the Education of Deaf Students offers an alternative and demonstrates how American Sign Language (ASL) and English can coexist in the same classroom, embedded in the content of what is being taught. Through clear theoretical explanations, field-tested teaching strategies, authentic examples of students' work, lesson plans, and sections on assessment, Livingston suggests ways to help students become educated language users. Her ideas hold enormous implications for those who teach Deaf students, develop school budgets, design programs, and train future teachers. More important, they may hold the key that unlocks the potential of Deaf students of all ages to become voracious readers and accomplished writers.
Signed Language Interpreting in the 21st Century by
This text provides interpreting students with a broad knowledge base that encompasses the latest research, addresses current trends and perspectives of the Deaf community, and promotes critical thinking and open dialogue about the working conditions, ethics, boundaries, and competencies needed by a highly qualified interpreter in various settings. This volume expands the resources available to aspiring interpreters, including Deaf interpreters, and incorporates the voices of renowned experts on topics relevant to today's practitioners. Each chapter provides students with objectives, keywords, and discussion questions. The chapters convey clear information about topics that include credentialing, disposition and aptitude for becoming an interpreter, interpreting for people who are DeafBlind, and working within specialty settings, such as legal and healthcare. A key resource for interpreter certification test preparation, this text follows the interpreter's ethical, practical, and professional development through a career of lifelong learning and service.
Sign Language for Everyone by
"Sign Language for Everyone "is authored by Cathy Rice, who along with her late husband, Bill, founded the Bill Rice Ranch, the largest missionary enterprise dedicated to reaching the deaf for Christ. An extension of their ministry, this book covers lessons and rules to follow when learning to sign and interact with the deaf.
Sign Language Interpreting by
Examines past and present models of sign language interpretation, and presents two new models that address both the cognitive factors involved in the process of interpreting and the interaction of participants and environmental factors. Offers a realistic view of interpreting from the perspective of
Sign Language Interpreting by
Sign Language Interpreting: Exploring Its Art and Science is a comprehensive exploration of the practice and research relating to sign language interpreting. A pleasant conversational style of writing is used to present the problems, the issues, and the options in this field as they are known today. The reader is taken on a journey from the early days of interpreting, to the professionalization of interpreters, to an examination of past and present models of interpreting. The business and ethical aspects of interpreting are discussed while focusing on current practice.
Sign Language Interpreting and Interpreter Education by
More the 1.46 million people in the United States have hearing losses in sufficient severity to be considered deaf; another 21 million people have other hearing impairments. For many deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals, sign language and voice interpreting is essential to their participationin educational programs and their access to public and private services. However, there is less than half the number of interpreters needed to meet the demand, interpreting quality is often variable, and there is a considerable lack of knowledge of factors that contribute to successfulinterpreting. Perhaps it is not surprising, then, that a study by the National Association of the Deaf (NAD) found that 70% of the deaf individuals are dissatisfied with interpreting quality. Because recent legislation in the United States and elsewhere has mandated access to educational,employment, and other contexts for deaf individuals and others with hearing disabilities, there is an increasing need for quality sign language interpreting. It is in education, however, that the need is most pressing, particularly because more than 75% of deaf students now attend regular schools(rather than schools for the deaf), where teachers and classmates are unable to sign for themselves. In the more than 100 interpreter training programs in the U.S. alone, there are a variety of educational models, but little empirical information on how to evaluate them or determine theirappropriateness in different interpreting and interpreter education-covering what we know, what we do not know, and what we should know. Several volumes have covered interpreting and interpreter education, there are even some published dissertations that have included a single research study, and afew books have attempted to offer methods for professional interpreters or interpreter educators with nods to existing research. This is the first volume that synthesizes existing work and provides a coherent picture of the field as a whole, including evaluation of the extent to which currentpractices are supported by validating research. It will be the first comprehensive source, suitable as both a reference book and a textbook for interpreter training programs and a variety of courses on bilingual education, psycholinguistics and translation, and cross-linguistic studies.
Sign Language Interpreting in the Workplace by
The last forty years have seen a dramatic change in the nature of work, with deaf people increasingly moving into white collar or office-based professions. The rise of deaf professionals has led to employment opportunities for signed language interpreters across a variety of workplace settings, creating a unique set of challenges that require specialized strategies. Aspects such as social interaction between employees, the unwritten patterns and rules of workplace behavior, hierarchical structures, and the changing dynamics of deaf employee/interpreter relationships place constraints upon the interpreter's role and interpreting performance. Jules Dickinson's examination of interpreted workplace interactions is based on the only detailed, empirical study of this setting to date. Using practitioner responses and transcripts of real-life interpreted workplace interactions, Dickinson's findings demonstrate the complexity of the interpreter's role and responsibilities. The book concentrates on the ways in which signed language interpreters affect the interaction between deaf and hearing employees in team meetings by focusing on humor, small talk, and the collaborative floor. Signed Language Interpreting in the Workplace demonstrates that deaf employees require highly skilled professionals to enable them to integrate into the workplace on a level equal with their hearing peers. It also provides actionable insights for interpreters in workplace settings that will be a valuable resource for interpreting students, practitioners, interpreter trainers, and researchers.
So You Want to Be an Interpreter? by
For beginners to advanced interpreters, this book provides a comprehensive overview of the work of sign language interpreters. It is geared toward individuals seeking information about this field of work, students studying to become interpreters and individuals who want to better understand the role and work of sign language interpreters. Introductory chapters include an overview of communication and message construction, the influence of culture on communication, the challenge of working in multicultural communities including the deaf community, deaf-hearing cultural differences and the power inherent in the role of an interpreter. Further topics include an introduction to terminology specific to the field of sign language interpretation, philosophical approaches to the work of sign language interpreters, the mental process of interpreting between two languages, as well as the h history and professionalization of both spoken language and sign language interpreters. Other chapters detail the specific linguistic challenges of mediating communication between American Sign language (ASL) and English, ethical guidelines for professional practioners, an overview of various settings where interpreters work, and a review of basic business practices. Supplemental resources can be found in a guided study on a 5-CD set (So You Want To Be An Interpreter: Study Guide - ISBN: 0-9640-367-9-7. To order, contact distributor 1-800-767-4461 or www.signenhancers.com.
Toward Competent Practice by
This monograph describes a study that provides helpful historical context for understanding the roots of interpreter education. It exposes readers to the thoughts of several distinguished thinkers in the field who articulate their recommendations for the ideal interpreter preparation program. The recommendations emphasize the need for research-based curricula a baccalaureate degree as the minimum requirement for entry into the field and the need for applicants to demonstrate linguistic competency in American Sign Language and English prior to entering a preparation program.This book will serve as a valuable resource for working interpreters interpreter educators student interpreters and consumers of interpreting in shaping a future that is desired and supported by the field. It invites readers to reflect on the critical issues impacting the field of interpreting and to work from a problem-solving interest cycle and a research interest cycle.
As we transition from being helpers/volunteers to becoming professional allies, it is of significance that we know how to present ourselves to our clients (both Deaf and hearing), and how to conduct business with them. In PRFPRAC, you will learn the concept of interprenomics and the business aspect of sign language interpreting. You will also learn about the professional code of conduct, from the most trivial (e.g. dress code) to the most obvious (under/overcharging your client). You will also develop skills on working with and providing feedback with your team interpreter. This will ensure a harmonious relationship between yourself, your team interpreter and your clients.
Event Structure Metaphors Through the Body by
How do the experiences of people who have different bodies (deaf versus hearing) shape their thoughts and metaphors? Do different linguistic modes of expression (signed versus spoken) have a shaping force as well? This book investigates the metaphorical production of culturally-Deaf translators who work from English to American Sign Language (ASL). It describes how Event Structure Metaphors are handled across languages of two different modalities. Through the use of corpus-based evidence, several specific questions are addressed: are the main branches of Event Structure Metaphors - the Location and Object branches - exhibited in ASL? Are these two branches adequate to explain the event-related linguistic metaphors identified in the translation corpus? To what extent do translators maintain, shift, add, and omit expressions of these metaphors? While answering these specific questions, this book makes a significant elaboration to the two-branch theory of Event Structure Metaphors. It raises larger questions of how bilinguals handle competing conceptualizations of events and contributes to emerging interest in how body specificity, linguistic modes, and cultural context affect metaphoric variability.
Interdisciplinarity in Translation and Interpreting Process Research by
First published as a special issue of Target (issue 25:1, 2013), this volume explores interdisciplinarity in translation and interpreting process research, fields that have enjoyed a boom in the last decade. For this reason, the time was ripe for a reflection on the broad range of methodologies that have been applied in our endeavours to understand both translation and interpreting processes better. The ten chapters provide a snapshot of how translation and interpreting process researchers have availed themselves of concepts and theories developed in other disciplines, such as psychology, the cognitive sciences, journalism, and literary studies, to examine and illuminate their object of study. This collection demonstrates that translation and interpreting process research borrow heavily from other disciplines and call for a consideration of how translation research can become truly interdisciplinary through increased collaboration, synergy, and mutual advancement.
Interpreting in the zone : how the conscious and unconscious function in interpretation by
Successful interpretation can feel seamless, an intuitive and efficient translation of meaning from one signed or spoken language to another. Yet the process of interpretation is actually quite complex and relies upon myriad components ranging from preparation to experience to honed judgment. Interpreting in the zone, instinctively and confidently, is an energizing, encompassing experience that results in great satisfaction and top performance--but what does it take to get there? Jack Hoza's newest research examines the components that enable interpreters to perform successfully, looking at literature in interpretation, cognitive science, education, psychology, and neuroscience, as well as reviewing the results of two qualitative studies he conducted. He seeks to uncover what it means to interpret in the zone by understanding exactly how the brain works in interpretation scenarios. He explores a range of dichotomies that influence interpretation outcomes, such as: Intuition vs. rational thought Left brain vs. right brain Explicit vs. implicit learning Novice vs. master Spoken vs. signed languages Emotion vs. reasoning Cognitive processes such as perception, short-term memory, and reflexivity are strong factors in driving successful interpretation and are explored along with habits, behaviors, and learned strategies that can help or hinder interpretation skills. Hoza also considers the importance of professional development and collaboration with other practitioners in order to continually hone expertise. Interpreting in the Zone shows that cognitive research can help us better understand the intricacies of the interpreting process and has implications for how to approach the interpreting task. This resource will be of value to both the interpreter-in-training as well as the seasoned practitioner.
Introduction to Translation and Interpreting Studies by
A unique and balanced combination of translation and interpreting studies, edited and written by leading voices in the fields In Introduction to Translation and Interpreting Studies, accomplished scholars Aline Ferreira and John W. Schwieter have brought together a detailed and comprehensive introductory-level textbook covering the essential aspects of translation and interpreting studies. Through chapters authored by leading voices in the field, this book covers topics of theoretical and conceptual relevance--such as the history of the development of the field and methods for understanding gender, society, and culture as aspects of the role of the interpreter--as well as critical topics in the application of theory to real world practice. Beginning with an authoritative treatment of the theoretical developments that have defined the field since the early 1970s, this textbook first describes the influential work of such figures as Jakobson, Holmes, and Toury, thus ensuring students develop a thorough understanding of the history and theoretical underpinnings of the fields of translation and interpreting studies. The text then begins to introduce grounded discussions of interpreting in specialized fields such as legal and healthcare interpreting and sign language translation. Learning is reinforced throughout the text through pedagogical features including reflection questions, highlighted key words, further readings, and chapter objectives. Instructors will also have access to companion website with PowerPoint slides and multiple-choice questions to support classroom application. Truly a unique work in translation and interpreting studies, this essential new textbook offers: A thorough introduction to the fields of translation and interpreting with discussion of applications to interdisciplinary topics Explorations of translation machines and technology, including their history and recent trends Practical discussions of culture, gender, and society in the context of translation and interpreting studies, as well as training and pedagogical issues in translation and interpreting A concise examination of translation process research and methods, including the mental processes and actions that people take while translating Complementary web materials including PowerPoint slides and practice questions Ideal for advanced undergraduate and graduate students in programs in such as linguistics, language studies, and communications, or for those who plan to work in translation and/or interpreting, Introduction to Translation and Interpreting Studies will earn a place in the libraries of anyone interested in a reader-friendly translation and interpreting resource.
The professional sign language interpreter's handbook : the complete, practical manual for the interpreting profession by Semantic Fields in Sign Languages by
Typological studies require a broad range of linguistic data from a variety of countries, especially developing nations whose languages are under-researched. This is especially challenging for investigations of sign languages, because there are no existing corpora for most of them, and some are completely undocumented. To examine three cross-linguistically fruitful semantic fields in sign languages from a typological perspective for the first time, a detailed questionnaire was generated and distributed worldwide through emails, mailing lists, websites and the newsletter of the World Federation of the Deaf (WFD). This resulted in robust data on kinship, colour and number in 32 sign languages across the globe, 10 of which are revealed in depth within this volume. These comprise languages from Europe, the Americas and the Asia-Pacific region, including Indonesian sign language varieties, which are rarely studied. Like other volumes in this series, this book will be illuminative for typologists, students of linguistics and deaf studies, lecturers, researchers, interpreters, and sign language users who travel internationally.
Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research by
This volume brings together the best research presented at the first International Symposium on Signed Language Interpreting and Translation Research. Editors Brenda Nicodemus and Keith Cagle have gathered an international group of contributors who are recognized leaders in signed language interpreter education and research. The ten papers in Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research cover a range of topics, including the need for Deaf perspectives in interpretation research, discourse strategies and techniques that are unique to video relay call settings, the benefits of using sociology as a lens for examining sign language interpreting work, translating university entrance exams from written Portuguese into Libras (Brazilian Sign Language), the linguistic choices interpreters make when interpreting ASL figurative language into English, the nature of designated interpreting, and grammatical ambiguity in trilingual VRS interpreting. The research findings and insights contained here will be invaluable to scholars, students, and practitioners.
Sign Language in Action by
This book defines the notion of applied sign linguistics by drawing on data from projects that have explored sign language in action in various domains. The book gives professionals working with sign languages, signed language teachers and students, research students and their supervisors, authoritative access to current ideas and practice.
The Sign Language Interpreting Studies Reader by
In Sign Language Interpreting (SLI) there is a great need for a volume devoted to classic and seminal articles and essays dedicated to this specific domain of language interpreting. Students, educators, and practitioners will benefit from having access to a collection of historical and influential articles that contributed to the progress of the global SLI profession. In SLI there is a long history of outstanding research and scholarship, much of which is now out of print, or was published in obscure journals, or featured in publications that are no longer in print. These readings are significant to the progression of SLI as an academic discipline and a profession. As the years have gone by, many of these readings have been lost to students, educators, and practitioners because they are difficult to locate or unavailable, or because this audience simply does not know they exist. This volume brings together the seminal texts in our field that document the philosophical, evidence-based and analytical progression of SLI work.
So You Want to Be an Interpreter? by
For beginners to advanced interpreters, this book provides a comprehensive overview of the work of sign language interpreters. It is geared toward individuals seeking information about this field of work, students studying to become interpreters and individuals who want to better understand the role and work of sign language interpreters. Introductory chapters include an overview of communication and message construction, the influence of culture on communication, the challenge of working in multicultural communities including the deaf community, deaf-hearing cultural differences and the power inherent in the role of an interpreter. Further topics include an introduction to terminology specific to the field of sign language interpretation, philosophical approaches to the work of sign language interpreters, the mental process of interpreting between two languages, as well as the h history and professionalization of both spoken language and sign language interpreters. Other chapters detail the specific linguistic challenges of mediating communication between American Sign language (ASL) and English, ethical guidelines for professional practioners, an overview of various settings where interpreters work, and a review of basic business practices. Supplemental resources can be found in a guided study on a 5-CD set (So You Want To Be An Interpreter: Study Guide - ISBN: 0-9640-367-9-7. To order, contact distributor 1-800-767-4461 or www.signenhancers.com.
Do you wish to share your talent to enhance and elevate the worship experience of the Deaf? This course will give you an overview of the challenges and rewards of interpreting in religious settings.
In this course you will learn techniques and strategies on how to prepare and interpreti for religious settings: from analyzing texts specific to a particular religion (e.g. Koran, Torah, Bible); sourcing materials that they use (e.g. sermon notes, homilies, songs); to understanding their particular belief systems, doctrines, creeds and ceremonial prayers. You will learn skills on how to do religious interpreting in settings such as worship services, religious education, workshops, conferences, retreats, confession, scripture study, youth activities, spiritual counseling, pilgrimages, weddings, funerals and other special ceremonies.
The American Sign Language Phrase Book by
Open up a whole new world of communication through ASL You can easily learn ASL with help from The American Sign Language Phrase Book. With more than 500 phrases, this is the reference guide to everyday expressions in American Sign Language, providing a quick way for you to converse with deaf people. Clearly illustrated with hundreds of line drawings, this book focuses on areas such as health, family, school, sports, travel, religion, time, money, food and drink, and small talk. This edition's new chapter on technology boasts 50 phrases to help you communicate about the Internet, computing, video relay, and more. There is even a chapter that gives you phrases for communicating about signing: asking people to sign slower, indicating your fingerspelling ability, and requesting help with your fledgling skills. From asking simple questions (“How are you?”) to more complex phrases (“There's no sign for that, you have to fingerspell it.”), The American Sign Language Phrase Book gives you the power to communicate easily and comfortably in ASL.
The American Sign Language Puzzle Book by
An essential accompaniment to the bestselling The American Sign Language Phrase Book, The American Sign Language Puzzle Book is an entertaining way for anyone learning to sign to test and build his or her knowledge. Featuring topics such as Everyday Expressions, Health, Clothing, Numbers, Time, and Money, The American Sign Language Puzzle Book incorporates an engaging variety of puzzle types, including scramble puzzles, word searches, matching puzzles, and crosswords, which are all complemented by exceptionally clear and helpful illustrations.
The Cambridge Handbook of Language Policy by
Over the last fifty years, language policy has developed into a major discipline, drawing on research and practice in many nations and at many levels. This is the first Handbook to deal with language policy as a whole and is a complete 'state-of-the-field' survey, covering language practices, beliefs about language varieties, and methods and agencies for language management. It provides a historical background which traces the development of classical language planning, describes activities associated with indigenous and endangered languages, and contains chapters on imperialism, colonialism, effects of migration and globalization, and educational policy. It also evaluates language management agencies, analyzes language activism and looks at language cultivation (including reform of writing systems, orthography and modernized terminology). The definitive guide to the subject, it will be welcomed by students, researchers and language professionals in linguistics, education and politics.
The Holy Bible : English version for the deaf by
The translator carefully avoids relative pronouns, idioms, figurative language, and faulty syntax that can confuse those who communicate primarily through sign language 1,344 pp.
Religious signing : a comprehensive guide for all faiths by
Since the fourth century, when Spanish monks first started signing to communicate during their vows of silence, sign language has been used in religious communities of all faiths. Present-day American Sign Language (ASL) carries on that tradition. Like any living language, it continues to grow and change to meet the communication needs of an ever more diverse religious population. This comprehensive guide, newly revised, updated, and expanded, gives you all the vocabulary you need to communicate effectively in any religious setting. From Alleluia to Zizith, more than 750 signs and their specific meanings Large, clear, upper-torso illustrations that show the corresponding movements of hands, body, and face Easy-to-follow instructions to help you master the art of expressing signs A complete index for quick access to any sign With an essential section of religious “name signs,” the addition of signs for the Muslim faith, and an expanded selection of favorite verses, prayers, and blessings, this book is an indispensable resource for signers of all denominations. Written with expertise by an educator and author associated with the field of deafness for more than thirty years, it makes communicating by ASL in a religious setting simple and easy, no matter your level of experience.
Silence and Sign Language in Medieval Monasticism by
Silence and Sign Language in Medieval Monasticism explores the rationales for religious silence in early medieval abbeys and the use of nonverbal forms of communication among monks when rules of silence forbade them from speaking. After examining the spiritual benefits of personal silence as a form of protection against the perils of sinful discourse in early monastic thought, this work shows how the monks of the Abbey of Cluny (founded in 910 in Burgundy) were the first to employ a silent language of meaning-specific hand signs that allowed them to convey precise information without recourse to spoken words. Scott Bruce discusses the linguistic character of the Cluniac sign language, its central role in the training of novices, the precautions taken to prevent its abuse, and the widespread adoption of this custom in other abbeys throughout Europe, which resulted in the creation of regionally specific idioms of this silent language.
Do you wish to share your talent to enhance and elevate the worship experience of the Deaf? This course will give you an overview of the challenges and rewards of interpreting in religious settings.
In this course you will learn techniques and strategies on how to prepare and interpreti for religious settings: from analyzing texts specific to a particular religion (e.g. Koran, Torah, Bible); sourcing materials that they use (e.g. sermon notes, homilies, songs); to understanding their particular belief systems, doctrines, creeds and ceremonial prayers. You will learn skills on how to do religious interpreting in settings such as worship services, religious education, workshops, conferences, retreats, confession, scripture study, youth activities, spiritual counseling, pilgrimages, weddings, funerals and other special ceremonies.
Deaf Liberation Theology by
Deconstructing the theology and practice of the Church, Hannah Lewis shows how the Church unconsciously oppresses Deaf people through its view of them as people who can't hear. Lewis reclaims Deaf perspectives on Church history, examines how an essentially visual Deaf culture can relate to the written text of the bible and asks 'can Jesus sign?' This book pulls together all these strands to consider how worship can be truly liberating, truly a place for Deaf people to celebrate who they are before God.
Disability and Religious Diversity : Cross-Cultural and Interreligious Perspectives by
This collection of essays examines how diverse religions of the world represent, understand, theologize, theorize and respond to disability and chronic illness. Contributors employ a variety of methodological approaches including ethnography, historical, cultural, or textual analysis, personal narrative, and theological/philosophical investigation.
Encyclopedia of Christian Education by
Christianity regards teaching as one of the most foundational and critically sustaining ministries of the Church. As a result, Christian education remains one of the largest and oldest continuously functioning educational systems in the world, comprising both formal day schools and higher education institutions as well as informal church study groups and parachurch ministries in more than 140 countries. In The Encyclopedia of Christian Education, contributors explore the many facets of Christian education in terms of its impact on curriculum, literacy, teacher training, outcomes, and professional standards. This encyclopedia is the first reference work devoted exclusively to chronicling the unique history of Christian education across the globe, illustrating how Christian educators pioneered such educational institutions and reforms as universal literacy, home schooling, Sunday schools, women's education, graded schools, compulsory education of the deaf and blind, and kindergarten. With an editorial advisory board of more than 30 distinguished scholars and five consulting editors, TheEncyclopedia of Christian Education contains more than 1,200 entries by 400 contributors from 75 countries. These volumes covers a vast range of topics from Christian education: History spanning from the church's founding through the Middle Ages to the modern day Denominational and institutional profiles Intellectual traditions in Christian educationBiblical and theological frameworks, curricula, missions, adolescent and higher education, theological training, and Christian pedagogy Biographies of distinguished Christian educators This work is ideal for scholars of both the history of Christianity and education, as well as researchers and students of contemporary Christianity and modern religious education.
He Speaks in the Silence by
He Speaks in the Silence is about Diane Comer's search for the kind of intimacy with God every woman longs for. It is a story of trying to be a good girl, of following the rules, of longing for a satisfaction that eludes us. Disappointed with all Diane had been told was supposed to fulfill her, she begged God in desperation to give her more. And He did. But first He took her through a trial so debilitating it almost destroyed what little faith she had. He let her go deaf. Using vivid parallels between her deafness and every woman's struggle to hear God, this book shows women not only how Diane, as a deaf woman, hears in everyday life, but also how she can learn to listen to God in the midst of her own loud life, finding intimacy with God and the deep soul satisfaction she longs for.
The message of Isaiah 40-55 : a literary-theological commentary by
The Message of Isaiah 40-55 traces the argument of Isaiah 40-55 to show how the chapters bring a message of encouragement and challenge about God's intention to restore the Judean community, some of whose members are in exile in Babylon, others living in the city of Jerusalem that has lain devastated since it fell to the Babylonians in 587. The chapters hold before this community's eyes a vision of the nature of its God as the powerful creator and the loving restorer. In the course of following the argument, the reader becomes aware that the chapters have to deal with their audience's mysterious resistance to their message. It cannot give God the kind of response the message needs and deserves, nor can it fulfil the role as God's servant that is designed for it. God nevertheless remains committed to it. The prophet eventually becomes aware of a distinctive personal calling to embody that response, until the people are ready to do so. It is the prophet's willingness to do this (notwithstanding the suffering it brings) that embodies the kind of ministry that needs to be exercised to them so that they may be brought back to God and find a restoration of spirit, as well as a physical restoration.
Religious Leadership by
This 2-volume set within The SAGE Reference Series on Leadership tackles issues relevant to leadership in the realm of religion. It explores such themes as the contexts in which religious leaders move, leadership in communities of faith, leadership as taught in theological education and training, religious leadership impacting social change and social justice, and more. Topics are examined from multiple perspectives, traditions, and faiths.Features & Benefits: By focusing on key topics with 100 brief chapters, we provide students with more depth than typically found in encyclopedia entries but with less jargon or density than the typical journal article or research handbook chapter. Signed chapters are written in language and style that is broadly accessible. Each chapter is followed by a brief bibliography and further readings to guide students to sources for more in-depth exploration in their research journeys. A detailed index, cross-references between chapters, and an online version enhance accessibility for today′s student audience.
Signs and wonders : religious rhetoric and the preservation of sign language by
Current academic discourse frequently understates the role of religion in the development of the American Deaf community. In her new study, Tracy Ann Morse effects a sharp course correction by delineating the frequent use over time of religious rhetoric by members of the Deaf community to preserve and support sign language. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp; nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp; In Chapter One, Morse analyzes Thomas Hopkins Gallaudet’s use of religious references in his 1817 maiden address at the first American school for deaf students. She examines his and other speeches as examples of the intersection of education for deaf Americans and Protestant missionary efforts to convert them. In the second chapter, she presents the different religious perspectives of the two deaf education camps: Manualists argued that sign language was a gift from God, while Oralists viewed hand gestures as animal-like, indicative of lower evolutionary development. nbsp; nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Chapter Three explores the religious rhetoric in churches, sanctuaries where sign language flourished and deaf members formed relationships. In the fourth chapter, Morse shows how Deaf activist George Veditz signed using religious themes in his political films. She also comments on the impact of the bilingual staging of Big River: The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, which began to change the hearing world’s opinion about the Deaf community. Morse concludes with speculation on the shifting terrain for deaf people due to technological innovations that might supplant religious rhetoric as a tool to support the Deaf community.
Now that you have a general idea of the interpreting profession, you are all set to go deeper into various techniques of sign language interpreting SIMTERP provides the opportunity to learn and apply simultaneous interpretation strategies to a variety of topics and settings, like speeches, consultations, among others. In this course, you will develop a better understanding of the whys and hows of simultaneous interpreting, which will allow you to decide when to use this technique and how to effectively do it.
Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters by
Picking up where Innovative Practices in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters left off, this new collection presents the best new interpreter teaching techniques proven in action by the eminent contributors assembled here. In the first chapter, Dennis Cokely discusses revising curricula in the new century based upon experiences at Northeastern University. Jeffrey E. Davis delineates how to teach observation techniques to interpreters, while Elizabeth Winston and Christine Monikowski suggest how discourse mapping can be considered the Global Positioning System of translation. In other chapters, Laurie Swabey proposes ways to handle the challenge of referring expressions for interpreting students, and Melanie Metzger describes how to learn and recognize what interpreters do in interaction. Jemina Napier contributes information on training interpreting students to identify omission potential. Robert G. Lee explains how to make the interpreting process come alive in the classroom. Mieke Van Herreweghe discusses turn-taking and turn-yielding in meetings with Deaf and hearing participants in her contribution. Anna-Lena Nilsson defines "false friends," or how contextually incorrect use of facial expressions with certain signs in Swedish Sign Language can be detrimental influences on interpreters. The final chapter by Kyra Pollitt and Claire Haddon recommends retraining interpreters in the art of telephone interpreting, completing Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters as the new authoritative volume in this vital communication profession.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
Deaf Interpreters at Work by
Now, for the first time, a collection featuring 17 widely respected scholars depicts the everyday practices of deaf interpreters in their respective nations. Deaf Interpreters at Work: International Insights presents the history of Deaf translators and interpreters and details the development of testing and accreditation to raise their professional profiles. Other chapters delineate the cognitive processes of Deaf interpreting; Deaf-Deaf interpreter teams; Deaf and hearing team preparation; the use of Tactile American Sign Language by those interpreting for the Deaf-Blind community; and conference interpreting and interpreting teams. Along with volume coeditors Robert Adam, Christopher Stone, and Steven D. Collins, contributors include Markus Aro, Karen Bontempo, Juan Carlos Druetta, Senan Dunne, Eileen Forestal, Della Goswell, Juli af Klintberg, Patricia Levitzke-Gray, Jemina Napier, Brenda Nicodemus, Debra Russell, Stephanie Sforza, Marty Taylor, and Linda Warby. The scope of their research spans the world, including many unique facets of interpreting by deaf people in Argentina, Australia, Canada, England, Finland, Ireland, Sweden, and the United States, establishing this work as the standard in this burgeoning discipline.
Interpreting in legal contexts : consecutive and simultaneous interpretation by
"This study emphasizes that interpreters must know how and when to use simultaneous and consecutive interpreting in the courtroom in order to fully include Deaf people in the judicial process. Interviews with lawyers, judges, expert witnesses and Deaf people themselves give an insight into the needs and misconceptions of all parties involved in the legal process. It points out how interpreter education programs and professional associations must evaluate their programs to insure that interpreters are receiving the appropriate training in the use of consecutive and simultaneous interpreting necessary for legal environments"--Amazon.
The professional sign language interpreter's handbook : the complete, practical manual for the interpreting profession by Reading between the signs : intercultural communication for sign language interpreters by
Provides a new perspective on American Deaf culture, a unique culture that is not widely understood. With collaboration of three distinguished Deaf consultants, Mindess explores the implications of cultural differences at the intersection of the Deaf and hearing worlds. Used in interpreter training programs worldwide.
Signed Language Interpreting in the 21st Century by
This text provides interpreting students with a broad knowledge base that encompasses the latest research, addresses current trends and perspectives of the Deaf community, and promotes critical thinking and open dialogue about the working conditions, ethics, boundaries, and competencies needed by a highly qualified interpreter in various settings. This volume expands the resources available to aspiring interpreters, including Deaf interpreters, and incorporates the voices of renowned experts on topics relevant to today's practitioners. Each chapter provides students with objectives, keywords, and discussion questions. The chapters convey clear information about topics that include credentialing, disposition and aptitude for becoming an interpreter, interpreting for people who are DeafBlind, and working within specialty settings, such as legal and healthcare. A key resource for interpreter certification test preparation, this text follows the interpreter's ethical, practical, and professional development through a career of lifelong learning and service.
Sign Language Interpreting by
Sign Language Interpreting: Exploring Its Art and Science is a comprehensive exploration of the practice and research relating to sign language interpreting. A pleasant conversational style of writing is used to present the problems, the issues, and the options in this field as they are known today. The reader is taken on a journey from the early days of interpreting, to the professionalization of interpreters, to an examination of past and present models of interpreting. The business and ethical aspects of interpreting are discussed while focusing on current practice.
Sign Language Interpreting and Interpreter Education by
More the 1.46 million people in the United States have hearing losses in sufficient severity to be considered deaf; another 21 million people have other hearing impairments. For many deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals, sign language and voice interpreting is essential to their participationin educational programs and their access to public and private services. However, there is less than half the number of interpreters needed to meet the demand, interpreting quality is often variable, and there is a considerable lack of knowledge of factors that contribute to successfulinterpreting. Perhaps it is not surprising, then, that a study by the National Association of the Deaf (NAD) found that 70% of the deaf individuals are dissatisfied with interpreting quality. Because recent legislation in the United States and elsewhere has mandated access to educational,employment, and other contexts for deaf individuals and others with hearing disabilities, there is an increasing need for quality sign language interpreting. It is in education, however, that the need is most pressing, particularly because more than 75% of deaf students now attend regular schools(rather than schools for the deaf), where teachers and classmates are unable to sign for themselves. In the more than 100 interpreter training programs in the U.S. alone, there are a variety of educational models, but little empirical information on how to evaluate them or determine theirappropriateness in different interpreting and interpreter education-covering what we know, what we do not know, and what we should know. Several volumes have covered interpreting and interpreter education, there are even some published dissertations that have included a single research study, and afew books have attempted to offer methods for professional interpreters or interpreter educators with nods to existing research. This is the first volume that synthesizes existing work and provides a coherent picture of the field as a whole, including evaluation of the extent to which currentpractices are supported by validating research. It will be the first comprehensive source, suitable as both a reference book and a textbook for interpreter training programs and a variety of courses on bilingual education, psycholinguistics and translation, and cross-linguistic studies.
Sign Language Interpreting in the Workplace by
The last forty years have seen a dramatic change in the nature of work, with deaf people increasingly moving into white collar or office-based professions. The rise of deaf professionals has led to employment opportunities for signed language interpreters across a variety of workplace settings, creating a unique set of challenges that require specialized strategies. Aspects such as social interaction between employees, the unwritten patterns and rules of workplace behavior, hierarchical structures, and the changing dynamics of deaf employee/interpreter relationships place constraints upon the interpreter's role and interpreting performance. Jules Dickinson's examination of interpreted workplace interactions is based on the only detailed, empirical study of this setting to date. Using practitioner responses and transcripts of real-life interpreted workplace interactions, Dickinson's findings demonstrate the complexity of the interpreter's role and responsibilities. The book concentrates on the ways in which signed language interpreters affect the interaction between deaf and hearing employees in team meetings by focusing on humor, small talk, and the collaborative floor. Signed Language Interpreting in the Workplace demonstrates that deaf employees require highly skilled professionals to enable them to integrate into the workplace on a level equal with their hearing peers. It also provides actionable insights for interpreters in workplace settings that will be a valuable resource for interpreting students, practitioners, interpreter trainers, and researchers.
Simultaneous interpreting from English by Now that you have a general idea of the interpreting profession, you are all set to go deeper into various techniques of sign language interpreting SIMTERP provides the opportunity to learn and apply simultaneous interpretation strategies to a variety of topics and settings, like speeches, consultations, among others. In this course, you will develop a better understanding of the whys and hows of simultaneous interpreting, which will allow you to decide when to use this technique and how to effectively do it.
Aptitude for Interpreting by
First published as a Special Issue of Interpreting (issue 10:1, 2011) and complemented with two articles published in Interpreting issue 16:1, 2014, this volume provides a comprehensive view of the challenge of identifying and measuring aptitude for interpreting. Following a broad review of the existing literature, the array of eight empirical papers captures the multiple dimensions of aptitude, from personality traits and soft skills such as motivation, anxiety and learning styles to aspects of cognitive performance. The populations studied, with experimental as well as survey research designs, include students and professionals of sign language interpreting as well as spoken-language interpreting, and valuable synergies emerge. While pointing to the need for much further work, the papers brought together in this volume clearly represent the cutting edge of research into aptitude for interpreting, and should prove a milestone on the way toward supplying educators with reliable methods for testing applicants to interpreter training programs.
Bridging the gap : empirical research in simultaneous interpretation by
Interpreting has been a neglected area since the late 1970s. Sylvie Lambert and Barbara Moser-Mercer have attempted to give a new impulse to academic research in print with this collection of 30 articles discussing various aspects of interpreting grouped in 3 sections: I. Pedagogical issues, II. Simultaneous interpretation, III. Neuropsychological research.Being a professional interpreter may not be sufficient to explain what interpretation is all about and how it should be practised and taught. The purpose of this collection of reports on non-arbitrary, empirical research of simultaneous and sign-language interpretation, designed to bridge the gap between vocational and scientific aspects of an interpreter's skills, is to show that the study of conference interpretation, by way of scientific experimental methods, as tedious and speculative as they may often appear, is bound to contribute significantly to general knowledge in this field and have tangible and practical repercussions. The contributors are specialists from all over the world. Introduction by Barbara Moser-Mercer.
Language Processing and Simultaneous Interpreting by
This volume brings together papers from the areas of psychology, general linguistics, psycholinguistics, as well as from simultaneous interpreting. Their common focus is how theories and methodologies from various disciplines can be applied to the study of simultaneous interpreting, and also to suggest ways in which the study of simultaneous interpreting in its turn might contribute to knowledge in other areas. General topics dealt with include memory, language processing, bilingual processing, and second language acquisition. The articles more specifically focused on simultaneous interpreting discuss implications of the general topics and report on empirical studies on expertise in interpreting and on phonological interference in spoken language interpreting. Requirements for further interdisciplinary research in the context of simultaneous interpreting are considered. There is also a discussion of transcription conventions for simultaneous interpreting.
Self-Preservation in Simultaneous Interpreting by
The image of the tightrope walker illustrates the interpreter's balancing act. Compelled to move forward at a pace set by someone else, interpreters compensate for pressures and surges that might push them into the void. The author starts from the observation that conference interpreters tend to see survival as being their primary objective. It is interpreters' awareness of the essentially face-threatening nature of the profession that naturally induces them to seek what the author calls "dynamic equilibrium", a constantly evolving state in which problems are resolved in the interests of maintaining the integrity of the system as a whole. By taking as a starting point the more visible interventions interpreters make (comments on speed of delivery, on exchanges between the chair and the floor), the author is able to explore the interpreter's instinct for self-preservation in an inherently unstable environment. This volume is an insightful and refreshing account of interpreters' behavior from the other side of the glass-fronted booth.
The Sign Language Interpreting Studies Reader by
In Sign Language Interpreting (SLI) there is a great need for a volume devoted to classic and seminal articles and essays dedicated to this specific domain of language interpreting. Students, educators, and practitioners will benefit from having access to a collection of historical and influential articles that contributed to the progress of the global SLI profession. In SLI there is a long history of outstanding research and scholarship, much of which is now out of print, or was published in obscure journals, or featured in publications that are no longer in print. These readings are significant to the progression of SLI as an academic discipline and a profession. As the years have gone by, many of these readings have been lost to students, educators, and practitioners because they are difficult to locate or unavailable, or because this audience simply does not know they exist. This volume brings together the seminal texts in our field that document the philosophical, evidence-based and analytical progression of SLI work.
Simultaneous Interpretation by
Simultaneous interpretation is among the most complex of human cognitive/linguistic activities. This study, which will interest practitioners and trainers as well as linguists, draws more on linguistics-based theories of cognition in communication (cognitive semantics and pragmatics) than on the traditional information-processing approaches of cognitive psychology, and shows SI to be a valuable source of data on language and cognition.Starting from semantic representations of input and output in samples of professional SI from Chinese and German into English, the analysis explains the classic phenomena - anticipation, restoration of the implicit-explicit balance, and communicative re-packaging ('re-ostension') of the discourse - in terms of an intermediate cognitive model in working memory, allowing a more unitary view of resource management in the SI task. Relevance-theoretic analysis of the input discourse reveals rich pragmatic information guiding the construction of the appropriate contexts and the speaker's underlying intentionalities. The course of meaning assembly is reconstructed in annotated synchronised transcripts.
Public Speaking Skills for Interpreters
Have you always feared delivering a speech in front of an audience? You are not alone: according to studies, 70% of the population have this fear. Thankfully, you have SPEACOM, a course specifically designed to combat your fear of and develop your confidence in public speaking. In this course, you will get to learn and practice the 5P’s of speaking: projection, pace, pause, pitch, and pronunciation. By having this necessary skill, you will be able to confidently carry out your voice interpreting assignments any time of the day.
100 Things Every Presenter Needs to Know about People by
Every day around the world millions of presentations are given, with millions of decisions hanging in the balance as a result. Do you know the science behind giving a powerful and persuasive presentation? This book reveals what you need to know about how people listen, how people decide, and how people react so that you can learn to create more engaging presentations. No matter what your current skill level, whether beginner or polished, this book will guide you to the next level, teaching you how to improve your delivery, stance, eye contact, voice, materials, media, message, and call to action. Learn to increase the effectiveness of your own presentations by finding the answers to questions like these: What grabs and holds attention during a presentation? How do you choose the best media to use? What makes the content of a presentation stick? How do people react to your voice, posture, and gestures? How do people respond to the flow of your message? How do you motivate people to take action? These are just a few of the questions that the book answers in its deep-dive exploration of what you need to know about people to create a compelling presentation.
The Art of Public Speaking by
The Art of Public Speaking personalizes learning for every student no matter who they are or where they are, ensuring that they come to your public speaking class confident, prepared with the principle foundations, and ready to participate in your teaching and coaching. Connect is the only integrated learning system that empowers students by continuously adapting to deliver precisely what they need, when they need it, and how they need it, so that your class time is more engaging and effective.
The Art of public speaking for life and work by 
The Challenge of Effective Speaking in a Digital Age by
A favorite with students, THE CHALLENGE OF EFFECTIVE SPEAKING IN A DIGITAL AGE, 17th Edition, equips you with the skills you need to maximize your course success and become a confident public speaker. Its signature six key Speech Plan Action Steps guide you step by step through topic selection, audience analysis and adaptation, effective research, organization (with an emphasis on outlining), a wide variety of presentational aids (and how to avoid succumbing to "death by PowerPoint"), and language and delivery. Online tools include videos of student speeches accompanied by Interactive Video Activities that help you develop and strengthen your public speaking skills as well as the robust MindTap Speech digital learning solution. Grounded in the latest research, this new edition is an exceptional resource for creating and delivering speeches.
Communication in everyday life : the basic course edition with public speaking by
Communication in Everyday Life provides students with the skills and knowledge to enhance their daily lives though a deeper understanding of the inseparable connection between relationships and communication. This new alternate version of the text is designed for the hybrid course. The Basic Course Edition with Public Speaking includes four public speaking chapters with comprehensive coverage on preparing and delivering effective informative, persuasive, and special occasion presentations, in addition to practical instruction on communicating interpersonally, in groups, and with technology. The authors encourage students to think critically, to link communication theory to their own experiences, and to improve their communication skills in the process.
Essentials of public speaking by
Packed with sample speeches illustrating what to do as well as plenty of examples detailing what not to do, this value-priced public speaking text equips students with the essential skills and theories needed to become an effective public speaker. ESSENTIALS OF PUBLIC SPEAKING emphasizes critical thinking as it delivers abundant practical advice, intriguing discussions on the role of ethics in public speaking, and up-to-date coverage on effectively using technology in speech development and delivery. The sixth edition features a new streamlined organization, a revised initial chapter that gets students speaking right away with 11 types of introductory speeches, and two new chapters (one on ethics and technology in public speaking and another on team presentations). You also have the option of enhancing your students' learning experience with a wealth of technology resources such as CourseMate, which includes access to videos of sample speeches, text-specific study tools, the MindTap Reader® interactive eBook, SpeechBuilder Express(tm) 3.0 speech-outlining program, the InfoTrac® College Edition online library, and more.
Give Your Speech, Change the World by
Do you remember the topic of the last speech you heard? If not, you're not alone. In fact, studies show that audiences remember only 10% to 30% of speech or presentation content. Given those bleak statistics, why do we give speeches at all? We give them, says communications expert Nick Morgan, because they remain the most powerful way of connecting with audiences since ancient Greek times. But as we've evolved to a more conversational mode of public speaking, thanks to television, we have forgotten much of what the Greeks taught us about the nonverbal aspects of speech-giving: the physical connection with audiences that can create an almost palpable emotional bond. Morgan says this "kinesthetic connection" comes from truly listening to your audience--not just with your brain but with your body. In this book, he draws from more than 20 years as a speech coach and consultant, combining the best of ancient Greek oratory with modern communications research to offer a new, audience-centered approach to public speaking. Through entertaining and insightful examples, Morgan illustrates a 3 part process--focusing on content development, rehearsal, and delivery--that will enable readers of all experience levels to give more effective, passion-filled speeches that move audiences to action.
How to present to absolutely anyone : confident public speaking and presenting in every situation by
Master the art of public speaking with a mind- and content-based approach to success How to Present to Absolutely Anyone is the ultimate guide to successful public speaking. Presentations, talks, and speeches are unavoidable in school, work, and even social occasions (have you ever had to deliver a wedding toast?)--but fear of public speaking is statistically more common than fear of death. Author Mark Rhodes once pretended he had crashed his car to avoid doing a presentation! Permanent avoidance will eventually hold you back, but mastering the art of the successful presentation can take you to new heights! This book shows you how Mark eventually learned to love public speaking: by setting himself up for a self-sustaining cycle of presentation success. It takes more than stage presence to make a great presentation--you need great content. Without it, you won't get the result you're after, and you will dread the next talk. But if your presentation stands on its own two feet and you manage to banish the stage fright, you get a taste of success that ignites your passion and gets you excited to present every time! Packed with practical advice for both mental anguish and content creation, this book approaches public speaking holistically to arm you with real skills for success: Build confidence, reduce fear, and develop the right mindset for public speaking Engage your audience from the start, and reduce first-minute jitters Develop great content that you look forward to presenting each time Go beyond simple body language to reach your audience in a more authentic, organic way Don't mumble your way through a PowerPoint or try to put flash over substance. Craft an engaging, informative presentation that people want to see and that you want to present! This book covers performance anxiety, speaking skills, ideas/content, practice, preparation, and audience interaction. How to Present to Absolutely Anyone guides you from fear, to excitement, to success!
Invitation to Public Speaking by
INVITATION TO PUBLIC SPEAKING was designed to provide you with solid public speaking skills that will serve you well. This text shows you the power and importance of public speaking in your life as well as in the community. This special National Geographic Learning edition includes dynamic and exciting stories and tips from young people who are committed to sharing their passion for conservation and learning, accompanied by spectacular National Geographic photographs. Speech-building help and examples of student speeches in every chapter help you understand the basic concepts so that you learn how to give successful speeches.
Public Speaking by
PUBLIC SPEAKING: THE EVOLVING ART is the first book and integrated technology package to meet the expectations of today's students while both preserving and offering innovative variations on the well-respected traditions of public speaking instruction. Throughout the text, in short video segments, four peer mentors expertly guide readers through the concepts and strategies presented in the text. PUBLIC SPEAKING: THE EVOLVING ART is now available with MindTap Speech. MindTap Speech represents a new approach to a customizable, online, user-focused learning platform. MindTap combines all of a user's learning tools-readings, multimedia, activities and assessments-into a singular Learning Path that guides the user through the curriculum. This unique resource empowers instructors with new assessment capabilities applicable to traditional, online, and hybrid courses.
Public Speaking by
Packed with the latest research, best practices and plenty of hands-on applications, Keith/Lundberg's PUBLIC SPEAKING: CHOICES AND RESPONSIBILITY, 3rd Edition, equips you with everything you need to become an excellent public speaker. Based on rhetorical theory, the text focuses on the role of choices and civic engagement/responsibility--emphasizing the importance of civility in public discourse. It describes the audience as a "public" to which the speaker belongs, rather than as a separate entity defined only by demographics. Completely up to date, the 3rd Edition includes new coverage of "fake news" and "lightning talks" as well as an entire chapter devoted to special kinds of speeches like TED Talks, PechaKucha, poetry slams and more.
Public speaking by
A practical and up-to-date public speaking text based on rhetorical theory, with the theme of the role of choices and civic engagement/responsibility integrated throughout in narrative, features, and examples; features a description of the audience as a "public" to which the speaker belongs, rather than as a separate entity defined only by demographics.
Public Speaking : Concepts and Skills for a Diverse Society by
PUBLIC SPEAKING: CONCEPTS AND SKILLS FOR A DIVERSE SOCIETY, 8e equips you with the training and tools to be an effective public speaker and listener in a world of constant cultural, political, and technological changes. The book combines 2,500-year-old principles with up-to-date research into concepts, skills, theories, applications, and critical-thinking proficiencies essential for successful listening and speaking. Giving you a heightened awareness of and sensitivity to your audience, discussions of classic public speaking topics are grounded in an awareness of the impact of cultural nuances-ranging from gender differences to co-cultures within the United States to the traditions of other nations. Ethics are also emphasized throughout. Coverage includes the latest information on listening competencies, legacy journalism, native digital news outlets, MAPit, powerful language forms, and more. In addition, numerous samples speeches and hands-on exercises help you develop and sharpen your speechmaking skills.
Purposeful communication in a digital age : speaking for success by
In recent years, the process and outlet for public speaking has grown with digital progressions such as TED talks and Facebook Live. Purposeful Communication in a Digital Age, 2nd Edition, provides a practical, step-by-step approach to developing and delivering effective speeches. Offering supplementary articles, case studies, and interviews with key leaders within the text and online, this is an all-in-one resource for the traditional, online, or hybrid classroom. The new edition devotes focus to presenting in the digital world, addressing both traditional and contemporary forms of presentation, and specifically directs students on seeking out credible sources when conducting research. Its eResource features video speech examples, classroom exercises, an instructor manual, and a quiz bank.
The Speaker's Compact Handbook by
CENGAGE ADVANTAGE BOOKS: THE SPEAKER'S COMPACT HANDBOOK, Fourth Edition, equips you with the essential information, tips, and tools you need to be an effective public speaker. Its spiral-bound, quick-reference format makes the handbook easy to use. And because each of its succinct chapters can stand alone, you can jump exactly to the topic you need to help you create a great speech. Four simple features--Key Points, Quick Tips, Checklists, and Critical Thinking Questions--help you stay on track throughout the speech-building process. In addition to the material within the handbook, online interactive tools like Speech Builder Express(tm) 3.0 and InfoTrac® College Edition help further develop your public speaking skills.
Speaker, Leader, Champion: Succeed at Work Through the Power of Public Speaking, Featuring the Prize-Winning Speeches of Toastmasters World Champions by
Public speaking skills guaranteed to wow any audience-based on the best of the best of ToastmastersDistinguished Toastmaster Jeremey Donovan and World Champion of Public Speaking Ryan Avery reveal the secrets behind the organization's World Champions' winning speeches to help anyone become an exceptional public speaker From the author of the # Amazon bestseller in public speaking How to Deliver a TED Talk and the youngest World Champion in Public Speaking comes Speaker, Leader, Champion. Donovan and Avery dissect winning speeches to provide tips and techniques that will help business professionals improve their speaking, presentation, and communication skills. Readers learn the same skills used by Toastmasters champions, including David Brooks, Darren LaCroix, and Craig Valentine. The book also includes a section of highly specialized tips and advice for those who aspire to become serious public speaking competitors. Jeremey Donovan is a Distinguished Toastmaster and TEDx organizer and serves as Group Vice President of Marketing at Gartner, Inc., an information technology research and advisory firm with $1.6 billion in annual revenue.Ryan Avery is the 2012 World Champion of Public Speaking, and at 25, the youngest in history. An Emmy Award-winning journalist, he delivers keynotes and workshops designed to help aspiring speakers craft and deliver their message.
Speaking Up by
If you are in middle management, to get anything done you must present your ideas to decision makers, and those presentations can be brutal. The stakes are high-one presentation can make or break a career-but the rules are utterly unclear. Tactics and techniques that work well with peers, subordinates, and immediate supervisors can actually work against you when presenting up the chain. Speaking Up is an indispensable resource for anyone who needs to know how to present to those at the highest levels. Psychologist and coach Frederick Gilbert offers revelatory insights into the minds of the men and women at the top-information that is crucial to understanding what they're looking for from presenters. Based on ten years of research and hundreds of interviews, Speaking Up features extensive comments from executives explaining exactly what they want and don't want in a presentation and includes nine chapters containing QR codes for free videos on the chapter topics. This is a must-read book for surviving high-stakes meetings.
Talk like TED : the 9 public speaking secrets of the world's top minds by
Ideas are the currency of the twenty-first century. In order to succeed, you need to be able to sell your ideas persuasively. This ability is the single greatest skill that will help you accomplish your dreams. TED Talks have redefined the elements of a successful presentation and become the gold standard for public speaking. TED--which stands for technology, entertainment, and design--brings together the world's leading thinkers. These are the presentations that set the world on fire, and the techniques that top TED speakers use will make any presentation more dynamic, fire up any team, and give anyone the confidence to overcome their fear of public speaking. Public speaking coach and bestselling author Carmine Gallo has broken down hundreds of TED talks and interviewed the most popular TED presenters, as well as the top researchers in the fields of psychology, communications, and neuroscience to reveal the nine secrets of all successful TED presentations. Gallo's step-by-step method makes it possible for anyone to deliver a presentation that is engaging, persuasive, and memorable. Many people have a fear of public speaking or are insecure about their ability to give a TED-worthy presentation. Carmine Gallo's top 10 Wall Street Journal Bestseller Talk Like TED will give them the tools to communicate the ideas that matter most to them, the skill to win over hearts and minds, and the confidence to deliver the talk of their lives.
TED talks : the official TED guide to public speaking by
New York Times Bestseller "Catnip for all the TED fans out there." --Publishers Weekly "The most insightful book ever written on public speaking . . . a must-read." --Adam Grant, Wharton professor and New York Times best-selling author of Give and Take and Originals Since taking over TED in 2001, Chris Anderson has shown how carefully crafted talks can be the key to unlocking empathy, spreading knowledge, and promoting a shared dream. Done right, a talk can electrify a room and transform an audience's worldview; it can be more powerful than anything in written form. This "invaluable guide" (Publishers Weekly) explains how the miracle of powerful public speaking is achieved, and equips you to give it your best shot. There is no set formula, but there are tools that can empower any speaker. Chris Anderson has worked with all the TED speakers who have inspired us the most, and here he shares insights from such favorites as Sir Ken Robinson, Salman Khan, Monica Lewinsky and more -- everything from how to craft your talk's content to how you can be most effective on stage. This is a must-read for anyone who is ready to create impact with their ideas.
THINK Public Speaking by
Debuting in its first edition, THINK Public Speaking uses the popular magazine-style format of Pearson's THINK series and blends the how and why of effective public speaking into a highly visual, reader-friendly overview. THINK Public Speaking is a lively, accessible treatment of the core concepts of public speaking, filled with practical advice and examples and grounded in theory and research. THINK Public Speaking provides students with all the essentials for speaking successfully in the classroom and beyond--and at less than half the cost of a traditional text.
Public Speaking Skills for Interpreters
Have you always feared delivering a speech in front of an audience? You are not alone: according to studies, 70% of the population have this fear. Thankfully, you have SPEACOM, a course specifically designed to combat your fear of and develop your confidence in public speaking. In this course, you will get to learn and practice the 5P’s of speaking: projection, pace, pause, pitch, and pronunciation. By having this necessary skill, you will be able to confidently carry out your voice interpreting assignments any time of the day.
ABSc of speaking : your building blocks to speaking success by
An A-Z primer for all levels of public speaking, from securing engagements to delivering unforgettable speeches to making money as a speaker. Can you make it as a professional speaker? Knowing how to deliver a great presentation is obviously important, but truly understanding how the speaking industry really works is probably even more important. What do you need to know to deal with event promoters? What can you do to take control of the room and not let the unexpected derail your presentation? Should you pursue the fee or free speaking model? What about technology? What do they mean by 'buying units.' Industry insiders Adryenn Ashley, Bret Ridgway, and Caterina Rando share their combined decades of experience from both the platform and the promoter perspectives. They pull back the curtains and give you a sneak peek into how the speaking world really works. You'll learn how to build a profitable speaking business that allows you to more effectively build your platform and share your powerful message with the world. Even if you already consider yourself a professional speaker, you're guaranteed to pick up a few nuggets that can help you take things to the next level with your speaking. Get more gigs, make more money and impact more lives today!
How to Become a Public Speaker by
There is a widespread opinion that all study of the mode of oratory is unmanly, and leads to the substitution of artifice and adornment for simplicity and power. "Let a man have something important to say," it is argued, "and he need not waste his time in trying to find how to say it." So general is this sentiment, that a ministerial acquaintance of the writer's was recently very careful to conceal from his congregation the fact that he was taking a series of lessons in elocution, lest his influence should be diminished.We may admit that the popular prejudice against the study of eloquence is not without a mixture of reason. It is possible to foster a spurious kind of oratory, which shall be far inferior to the rudest genuine speech. But, on the other hand, it is safe to maintain that every rational power man possesses can be strengthened by judicious cultivation, without in the least impairing its quality. There is no trick in true oratory--no secret magic by which a weak-minded man can become the leader of others stronger and wiser than himself. The great prizes of eloquence cannot be placed in the hands of the ignorant or slothful. But so surely as a raw apprentice can be transformed into a skillful workman, any person possessed of ordinary faculties, who will pay the price in labor, can be made master of the art of ready and forcible public utterance.
How to Present to Absolutely Anyone by
Master the art of public speaking with a mind- and content-based approach to success How to Present to Absolutely Anyone is the ultimate guide to successful public speaking. Presentations, talks, and speeches are unavoidable in school, work, and even social occasions (have you ever had to deliver a wedding toast?)--but fear of public speaking is statistically more common than fear of death. Author Mark Rhodes once pretended he had crashed his car to avoid doing a presentation! Permanent avoidance will eventually hold you back, but mastering the art of the successful presentation can take you to new heights! This book shows you how Mark eventually learned to love public speaking: by setting himself up for a self-sustaining cycle of presentation success. It takes more than stage presence to make a great presentation--you need great content. Without it, you won't get the result you're after, and you will dread the next talk. But if your presentation stands on its own two feet and you manage to banish the stage fright, you get a taste of success that ignites your passion and gets you excited to present every time! Packed with practical advice for both mental anguish and content creation, this book approaches public speaking holistically to arm you with real skills for success: Build confidence, reduce fear, and develop the right mindset for public speaking Engage your audience from the start, and reduce first-minute jitters Develop great content that you look forward to presenting each time Go beyond simple body language to reach your audience in a more authentic, organic way Don't mumble your way through a PowerPoint or try to put flash over substance. Craft an engaging, informative presentation that people want to see and that you want to present! This book covers performance anxiety, speaking skills, ideas/content, practice, preparation, and audience interaction. How to Present to Absolutely Anyone guides you from fear, to excitement, to success!
Made to stick : why some ideas survive and others die by
Mark Twain once observed, A lie can get halfway around the world before the truth can even get its boots on. His observation rings true: Urban legends, conspiracy theories, and bogus public-health scares circulate effortlessly. Meanwhile, people with important ideas--business people, teachers, politicians, journalists, and others--struggle to make their ideas stick. Why do some ideas thrive while others die? And how do we improve the chances of worthy ideas? In Made to Stick, accomplished educators and idea collectors Chip and Dan Heath tackle head-on these vexing questions. Inside, the brothers Heath reveal the anatomy of ideas that stick and explain ways to make ideas stickier, such as applying the human scale principle, using the Velcro Theory of Memory, and creating curiosity gaps. In this indispensable guide, we discover that sticky messages of all kinds-from the infamous kidney theft ring hoax to a coach's lessons on sportsmanship to a vision for a new product at Sony--draw their power from the same six traits. Made to Stick is a book that will transform the way you communicate ideas. It's a fast-paced tour of success stories (and failures)--the Nobel Prize-winning scientist who drank a glass of bacteria to prove a point about stomach ulcers; the charities who make use of the Mother Teresa Effect; the elementary-school teacher whose simulation actually prevented racial prejudice. Provocative, eye-opening, and often surprisingly funny, Made to Stick shows us the vital principles of winning ideas-and tells us how we can apply these rules to making our own messages stick. From the Hardcover edition.
Mastering the Art of Oral Presentations by
Proven techniques to win over any audience and make any sale Mastering the Art of Oral Presentations is your expert guide to delivering memorable and effective speeches and presentations. Whether selling a product, offering a service, or bidding for a contract, your oral presentation skills can often determine success or failure. This invaluable resource delivers real-world advice and proven strategies to elevate your game and close the deal. Comprehensive coverage of preparation procedures, delivery techniques, and presentation strategies provide you with the tools and knowledge to motivate and persuade your audience. Emphasizing real-world versatility, this unique book delivers methods equally effective to both individual and team presentations. Drawing from decades of experience, authors John Parker Stewart and Don Fulop offer keen insight into the process of winning over an audience. From topics ranging from rhetorical devices and visual cues to body language and stage presence, this expert guide will help convey a take-home message that resonates and endures long after your presentation has concluded. A must-have resource for government contractors, sales and marketing professionals, and anyone seeking to raise the level of their oral presentation skills, this book will help you: Develop winning approaches to oral presentations regardless of experience or skill level Build the confidence to present your ideas to individuals, teams, and large audiences Incorporate your personal and professional lives into your communication strategies Create and deliver messages that will win the hearts and minds of any audience Mastering the Art of Oral Presentations: Winning Orals, Speeches, and Stand-Up Presentations is an indispensable tool for those who speak to influence, to promote, and to sell--aiding you in making positive and lasting impressions on potential customers, team members, and decision makers.
Public Speaking by
From the organization of a speech to knowing your audience, your vocals, and the delivery, this essential guide covers an entire course on public speaking yet is handy enough to reference throughout your speech preparation. With more preparation comes more confidence and with added inspiration throughout this guide you will stand to deliver.
Public Speaking and Presentations Demystified by
Take the mystery out of effective, fear-free public speaking This latest book in the Demystified series takes the confusion out of preparing for and delivering speeches and presentations. Public Speaking and Presentations Demystified walks you step-by-step through the fundamentals of the subject and provides you with techniques for effective speaking, avoiding common errors, and overcoming stage fright. With these skills, you will feel confident in business and social situations when you find yourself in the spotlight.
Tips for Public Speaking by
The ability to speak in front of an audience is a crucial skill in school, career, and life. Both the content of a good speech and the ways to conquer stage fright are examined in this guide to public speaking. Helpful tips in fact boxes, bulleted lists, and a colorful design will appeal to readers. Whether brushing up on a skill or getting ready for a first oral report, this book contains the tools everyone needs to be an effective and engaging speaker.
The young adult's guide to public speaking by
A perfectly delivered speech is something that takes time, practice, and knowledge. This guide is teeming with resources, whether you are looking to get over your fear of speaking to a group of people or are running for student assembly and need an edge on your competition. You will discover how to overcome stage fright by being prepared, rehearsed, and ready for a number of unforeseen circumstances. You will learn how to write a memorable speech and how to impact and persuade your audience. You’ll learn how to gauge your audience’s reaction and tailor the remainder of your presentation to have maximum appeal to the group you are speaking to.
Are you ready to set out into the real world of interpreting? Your mentors have enabled your wings already, and you are ready to take flight on your own. In TERPOJT, you will get to be assigned in actual interpreting scenarios, whether on or off campus, in order to complete your required OJT hours. It is time to show the world what you’re made of, bearing the Benildean interpreter seal of excellence!
Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters by
Picking up where Innovative Practices in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters left off, this new collection presents the best new interpreter teaching techniques proven in action by the eminent contributors assembled here. In the first chapter, Dennis Cokely discusses revising curricula in the new century based upon experiences at Northeastern University. Jeffrey E. Davis delineates how to teach observation techniques to interpreters, while Elizabeth Winston and Christine Monikowski suggest how discourse mapping can be considered the Global Positioning System of translation. In other chapters, Laurie Swabey proposes ways to handle the challenge of referring expressions for interpreting students, and Melanie Metzger describes how to learn and recognize what interpreters do in interaction. Jemina Napier contributes information on training interpreting students to identify omission potential. Robert G. Lee explains how to make the interpreting process come alive in the classroom. Mieke Van Herreweghe discusses turn-taking and turn-yielding in meetings with Deaf and hearing participants in her contribution. Anna-Lena Nilsson defines "false friends," or how contextually incorrect use of facial expressions with certain signs in Swedish Sign Language can be detrimental influences on interpreters. The final chapter by Kyra Pollitt and Claire Haddon recommends retraining interpreters in the art of telephone interpreting, completing Advances in Teaching Sign Language Interpreters as the new authoritative volume in this vital communication profession.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
Deaf Interpreters at Work by
Now, for the first time, a collection featuring 17 widely respected scholars depicts the everyday practices of deaf interpreters in their respective nations. Deaf Interpreters at Work: International Insights presents the history of Deaf translators and interpreters and details the development of testing and accreditation to raise their professional profiles. Other chapters delineate the cognitive processes of Deaf interpreting; Deaf-Deaf interpreter teams; Deaf and hearing team preparation; the use of Tactile American Sign Language by those interpreting for the Deaf-Blind community; and conference interpreting and interpreting teams. Along with volume coeditors Robert Adam, Christopher Stone, and Steven D. Collins, contributors include Markus Aro, Karen Bontempo, Juan Carlos Druetta, Senan Dunne, Eileen Forestal, Della Goswell, Juli af Klintberg, Patricia Levitzke-Gray, Jemina Napier, Brenda Nicodemus, Debra Russell, Stephanie Sforza, Marty Taylor, and Linda Warby. The scope of their research spans the world, including many unique facets of interpreting by deaf people in Argentina, Australia, Canada, England, Finland, Ireland, Sweden, and the United States, establishing this work as the standard in this burgeoning discipline.
Deaf World by
An essential anthology of Deaf perspectives To many who hear, the deaf world is as foreign as a country never visited. Deaf World thus concerns itself less with the perspectives of the hearing and more with what Deaf people themselves think and do. Editor Lois Bragg asserts that English is for many signing people a second, infrequently used language and that Deaf culture is the socially transmitted pattern of behavior, values, beliefs, and expression of those who use American Sign Language. She has assembled an astonishing array of historical sources, political writings, and personal memoirs, from classic 19th-century manifestos to contemporary policy papers, on everything from eugenics to speech and lipreading, the right to work and marry, and the never-ending controversy over separation vs. social integration. At the heart of many of the selections lies the belief that Deaf Americans have long constituted an internal colony of sorts in the United States. While not attempting to speak for Deaf people en masse, this ambitious platform anthology places the Deaf on center stage, offering them an opportunity to represent the world--theirs as well as the hearing world--from a Deaf perspective. For Deaf readers, the book will be welcomed as a gift, both a companion to be savored and, as often, an opponent to be engaged and debated. And for the hearing, it serves as an unprecedented guide to a world and a culture so often overlooked. Comprising a judicious mix of published pieces and original essays solicited specifically for this volume, Deaf World marks a major contribution.
Innovative Practices for Teaching Sign Language Interpreters by
Researchers now understand interpreting as an active process between two languages and cultures, with social interaction, sociolinguistics, and discourse analysis as more appropriate theoretical frameworks. Roy's penetrating new book acts upon these new insights by presenting six dynamic teaching practices to help interpreters achieve the highest level of skill. Elizabeth Winston and Christine Monikowski begin by explaining discourse mapping to enable students to develop a mental picture of a message's meaning and the relationships of context, form, and content. Kyra Pollitt discusses critical discourse analysis, to reveal some of the cultural influences that shape a speaker's language use. Melanie Metzger describes preparing role-plays so that students learn to effectively switch back and forth between languages, manage features such as overlap, and make relevant contributions to interaction, such as indicating the source of an utterance. Jeffrey Davis illustrates the translation skills that form the basis,for teaching consecutive and simultaneous interpreting to help students understand the intended meaning of the source message, and also the manner in which listeners understand it. Rico Peterson demonstrates the use of recall protocols, which can be used to teach metacognitive skills and to assess the student's sign language comprehension. Finally, Janice Humphrey details the use of graduation portfolios, a valuable assessment tool used by the faculty to determine a student's level of competency. These imaginative techniques in Innovative Practices promise gains in sign language interpreting that will benefit teachers, students, and clients alike.
In Our Hands by
Deaf Americans have identified healthcare as the most difficult setting in which to obtain a qualified interpreter. Yet, relatively little attention has been given to developing evidence-based resources and a standardized body of knowledge to educate healthcare interpreters. In Our Hands: Educating Healthcare Interpreters addresses these concerns by delineating the best practices for preparing interpreters to facilitate full access for deaf people in healthcare settings. The first section of this volume begins with developing domains and competencies toward a teaching methodology for medical and mental health interpreters. The next chapter describes a discourse approach that relies on analyzing actual transcripts and recordings to train healthcare interpreters. Other chapters feature a model mental health interpreter training program in Alabama; using a Demand-Control Schema for experiential learning; the risk of vicarious trauma to interpreters; online educational opportunities; and interpreting for deaf health care professionals. The second section offers four perspectives on education, including healthcare literacy of the clients; the education of Deaf interpreters; the development of standards for spoken-language healthcare interpreters; and the perspectives of healthcare interpreter educators in Europe. The range and depth of In Our Hands takes significant strides in presenting educational opportunities that can enhance the critical services provided by healthcare interpreters to deaf clients.
Language and the Law in Deaf Communities by
Three attorneys and three linguistics scholars contribute five essays focusing on the intersection of language and law in deaf communities. Coverage includes the language problems of minorities in legal settings, the interrogation of deaf people, interpretation issues for juries that include deaf pe
The professional sign language interpreter's handbook : the complete, practical manual for the interpreting profession by Sign Language Interpreting by
Examines past and present models of sign language interpretation, and presents two new models that address both the cognitive factors involved in the process of interpreting and the interaction of participants and environmental factors. Offers a realistic view of interpreting from the perspective of
Sign Language Interpreting by
In her new, significant work, Melanie Metzger demonstrates clearly that the ideal of an interpreter as a neutral language conduit does not exist. Metzger offers evidence of this disparity by analyzing two videotaped ASL-English interpreted medical interviews, one an interpreter-trainee mock interview session, and the other an actual encounter between a deaf client and a medical professional. Sign Language Interpreting asks fundamental questions regarding interpreter neutrality. First, do interpreters influence discourse, and if so, how? Also, what kind of expectations do the participants bring to the event, and what do the interpreters bring to discussions? Finally, how do their remarks affect their alignment with participants in the interaction? This penetrating book discloses the ways in which interpreters affect exchanges, and it also addresses the potential implications of these findings regarding sign language interpretation in medical, educational, and all other general interactions. Interpreter trainers and their students will join certified interpreters and deaf studies scholars in applauding and benefitting from the fresh ground broken by this provocative study.
Sign Language Interpreting by
Sign Language Interpreting: Exploring Its Art and Science is a comprehensive exploration of the practice and research relating to sign language interpreting. A pleasant conversational style of writing is used to present the problems, the issues, and the options in this field as they are known today. The reader is taken on a journey from the early days of interpreting, to the professionalization of interpreters, to an examination of past and present models of interpreting. The business and ethical aspects of interpreting are discussed while focusing on current practice.
Sign Language Interpreting and Interpreter Education by
More the 1.46 million people in the United States have hearing losses in sufficient severity to be considered deaf; another 21 million people have other hearing impairments. For many deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals, sign language and voice interpreting is essential to their participationin educational programs and their access to public and private services. However, there is less than half the number of interpreters needed to meet the demand, interpreting quality is often variable, and there is a considerable lack of knowledge of factors that contribute to successfulinterpreting. Perhaps it is not surprising, then, that a study by the National Association of the Deaf (NAD) found that 70% of the deaf individuals are dissatisfied with interpreting quality. Because recent legislation in the United States and elsewhere has mandated access to educational,employment, and other contexts for deaf individuals and others with hearing disabilities, there is an increasing need for quality sign language interpreting. It is in education, however, that the need is most pressing, particularly because more than 75% of deaf students now attend regular schools(rather than schools for the deaf), where teachers and classmates are unable to sign for themselves. In the more than 100 interpreter training programs in the U.S. alone, there are a variety of educational models, but little empirical information on how to evaluate them or determine theirappropriateness in different interpreting and interpreter education-covering what we know, what we do not know, and what we should know. Several volumes have covered interpreting and interpreter education, there are even some published dissertations that have included a single research study, and afew books have attempted to offer methods for professional interpreters or interpreter educators with nods to existing research. This is the first volume that synthesizes existing work and provides a coherent picture of the field as a whole, including evaluation of the extent to which currentpractices are supported by validating research. It will be the first comprehensive source, suitable as both a reference book and a textbook for interpreter training programs and a variety of courses on bilingual education, psycholinguistics and translation, and cross-linguistic studies.
So You Want to Be an Interpreter? by
For beginners to advanced interpreters, this book provides a comprehensive overview of the work of sign language interpreters. It is geared toward individuals seeking information about this field of work, students studying to become interpreters and individuals who want to better understand the role and work of sign language interpreters. Introductory chapters include an overview of communication and message construction, the influence of culture on communication, the challenge of working in multicultural communities including the deaf community, deaf-hearing cultural differences and the power inherent in the role of an interpreter. Further topics include an introduction to terminology specific to the field of sign language interpretation, philosophical approaches to the work of sign language interpreters, the mental process of interpreting between two languages, as well as the h history and professionalization of both spoken language and sign language interpreters. Other chapters detail the specific linguistic challenges of mediating communication between American Sign language (ASL) and English, ethical guidelines for professional practioners, an overview of various settings where interpreters work, and a review of basic business practices. Supplemental resources can be found in a guided study on a 5-CD set (So You Want To Be An Interpreter: Study Guide - ISBN: 0-9640-367-9-7. To order, contact distributor 1-800-767-4461 or www.signenhancers.com.
Are you ready to set out into the real world of interpreting? Your mentors have enabled your wings already, and you are ready to take flight on your own. In TERPOJT, you will get to be assigned in actual interpreting scenarios, whether on or off campus, in order to complete your required OJT hours. It is time to show the world what you’re made of, bearing the Benildean interpreter seal of excellence!
Cultural and Language Diversity and the Deaf Experience by
The perspective that deaf people should be primarily regarded as a cultural and language minority group rather than as individuals with an audiological disability in gathering support among educators, linguists, and researchers involved in the education of deaf people. Minority empowerment movements across America - and American society's increased awareness of its own diversity - have brought a supportive context to the efforts of deaf people to have American Sign Language recognized in planning educational policies and curricula. This book considers in depth the notion that deaf people are members of a bilingual-bicultural minority group, whose experiences often overlap with the experiences of hearing minority group members but at other times are unique.
Deaf World by
An essential anthology of Deaf perspectives To many who hear, the deaf world is as foreign as a country never visited. Deaf World thus concerns itself less with the perspectives of the hearing and more with what Deaf people themselves think and do. Editor Lois Bragg asserts that English is for many signing people a second, infrequently used language and that Deaf culture is the socially transmitted pattern of behavior, values, beliefs, and expression of those who use American Sign Language. She has assembled an astonishing array of historical sources, political writings, and personal memoirs, from classic 19th-century manifestos to contemporary policy papers, on everything from eugenics to speech and lipreading, the right to work and marry, and the never-ending controversy over separation vs. social integration. At the heart of many of the selections lies the belief that Deaf Americans have long constituted an internal colony of sorts in the United States. While not attempting to speak for Deaf people en masse, this ambitious platform anthology places the Deaf on center stage, offering them an opportunity to represent the world--theirs as well as the hearing world--from a Deaf perspective. For Deaf readers, the book will be welcomed as a gift, both a companion to be savored and, as often, an opponent to be engaged and debated. And for the hearing, it serves as an unprecedented guide to a world and a culture so often overlooked. Comprising a judicious mix of published pieces and original essays solicited specifically for this volume, Deaf World marks a major contribution.
International Perspectives on Sign Language Interpreter Education by
The Fourth Volume in the Interpreter Education Series From the moment the World Association of Sign Language Interpreters (WASLI) was established in 2005, an overwhelming wave of requests from around the world arrived seeking information and resources for educating and training interpreters. This new collection provides those answers with an international overview on interpreter training from experts in Austria, Australia, Brazil, Canada, Fiji, Finland, Ireland, Japan, Kenya, Kosovo, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Scotland, Sweden, and the United States. Whether from income-rich or income-poor countries, the 31 contributors presented here provide insights on how sign language interpreter training has developed in each nation, and also how trainers have dealt with the difficulties that they encountered. Many of the contributors relate the movement away from ad hoc short courses sponsored by Deaf communities. They mark the transition from the early struggles of trainers against the stigmatization of sign languages to full-time degree programs in institutions of higher education funded by their governments. Others investigate how culture, religion, politics, and legislation affect the nurturing of professional sign language interpreters, and they address the challenges of extending training opportunities nationally through the use of new technology. Together, these diverse perspectives offer a deeper understanding and comparison of interpreter training issues that could benefit the programs in every nation.
The professional sign language interpreter's handbook : the complete, practical manual for the interpreting profession by Sign Language Interpreting and Interpreter Education by
More the 1.46 million people in the United States have hearing losses in sufficient severity to be considered deaf; another 21 million people have other hearing impairments. For many deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals, sign language and voice interpreting is essential to their participationin educational programs and their access to public and private services. However, there is less than half the number of interpreters needed to meet the demand, interpreting quality is often variable, and there is a considerable lack of knowledge of factors that contribute to successfulinterpreting. Perhaps it is not surprising, then, that a study by the National Association of the Deaf (NAD) found that 70% of the deaf individuals are dissatisfied with interpreting quality. Because recent legislation in the United States and elsewhere has mandated access to educational,employment, and other contexts for deaf individuals and others with hearing disabilities, there is an increasing need for quality sign language interpreting. It is in education, however, that the need is most pressing, particularly because more than 75% of deaf students now attend regular schools(rather than schools for the deaf), where teachers and classmates are unable to sign for themselves. In the more than 100 interpreter training programs in the U.S. alone, there are a variety of educational models, but little empirical information on how to evaluate them or determine theirappropriateness in different interpreting and interpreter education-covering what we know, what we do not know, and what we should know. Several volumes have covered interpreting and interpreter education, there are even some published dissertations that have included a single research study, and afew books have attempted to offer methods for professional interpreters or interpreter educators with nods to existing research. This is the first volume that synthesizes existing work and provides a coherent picture of the field as a whole, including evaluation of the extent to which currentpractices are supported by validating research. It will be the first comprehensive source, suitable as both a reference book and a textbook for interpreter training programs and a variety of courses on bilingual education, psycholinguistics and translation, and cross-linguistic studies.
Sign Language Research, Uses and Practices by
The uses and practices of sign languages are strongly related to scientific research on sign languages and vice versa. Conversely, sign linguistics cannot be separated from Deaf community practices, including practices in education and interpretation. Therefore, the current volume brings together work on sign language interpreting, the use of spoken and sign language with deaf children with cochlear implants and early language development in children exposed to both a spoken and sign language, and reports on recent research on aspects of sign language structure. It also includes papers addressing methodological issues in sign language research. The book presents papers by "more seasoned" researchers and "new kids on the block", as well as papers in which the two collaborate. The contributions will be of interest to all those interested in linguistics, sociolinguistics, cultural studies, interpreting and education. It will have particular relevance to those interested in sign linguistics, sociolinguistics of deaf communities, Deaf studies, Deaf culture, sign language interpretation, sign language teaching, and (spoken/signed) bilingualism. Given the scarcity of literature on "Deaf studies", the book will also appeal widely beyond the traditional academic milieu. As a result, it has relevance for those teaching and learning sign languages, for professional and student interpreters and for teachers of the deaf.
So You Want to Be an Interpreter? by
For beginners to advanced interpreters, this book provides a comprehensive overview of the work of sign language interpreters. It is geared toward individuals seeking information about this field of work, students studying to become interpreters and individuals who want to better understand the role and work of sign language interpreters. Introductory chapters include an overview of communication and message construction, the influence of culture on communication, the challenge of working in multicultural communities including the deaf community, deaf-hearing cultural differences and the power inherent in the role of an interpreter. Further topics include an introduction to terminology specific to the field of sign language interpretation, philosophical approaches to the work of sign language interpreters, the mental process of interpreting between two languages, as well as the h history and professionalization of both spoken language and sign language interpreters. Other chapters detail the specific linguistic challenges of mediating communication between American Sign language (ASL) and English, ethical guidelines for professional practioners, an overview of various settings where interpreters work, and a review of basic business practices. Supplemental resources can be found in a guided study on a 5-CD set (So You Want To Be An Interpreter: Study Guide - ISBN: 0-9640-367-9-7. To order, contact distributor 1-800-767-4461 or www.signenhancers.com.
Interpreting Ethics (Code of Conduct)
Every action made, no matter how seemingly insignificant, has consequences. TRPETHC explores the factors that connect these consequences to one’s actions through deep reflection and meaningful analysis. Decision-making processes are not clearly black and white, but mostly dependent on your personal and professional values. Armed with your knowledge of the interpreting code of ethics, you will be able to navigate any challenging decisions in your practice, where “it depends” will be your new mantra. In this course, you will learn to think critically, act responsibly and accept accountability.
Choices : making right decisions in a complex world by
In these guidelines for making solid decisions based on a consistent pattern of moral values, the author of Forgive and Forget shows us how to live with a clear conscience and identifies core values that allow us to grow and become the best people we can be.
Ethical argument : critical thinking in ethics by
Designed to immediately engage students and other readers in philosophical reflection, the new edition of Ethical Argument: Critical Thinking in Ethics bridges the gap between ethical theory and practice. This brief introduction combines a discussion of ethical theory with fundamental elementsof critical thinking--including informal fallacies and the basics of logic--and uses case studies and practical applications to illustrate concepts. Author Hugh Mercer Curtler presents a carefully formulated critique of ethical relativism, encouraging students to reason along with him and toquestion his argument at every point. This approach enables students to think systematically about ethical issues and to acquire basic skills in argumentation at the same time. They will learn how to bring principles to bear on ethical conflict, how to weigh pros and cons, how to recognize goodethical reasons, and how to distinguish sound argumentation from rationalization.The second edition of Ethical Argument: Critical Thinking in Ethics includes new exercises and examples, summary boxes, cartoons, and sample dialogues that demonstrate how to effectively debate ethical positions. It features more than forty case studies on ethical issues that are interestingand relevant to students. An ideal core text for courses in introductory ethics, this concise volume can be used along with additional primary sources, case studies, or newspaper articles and novels. It is also a helpful supplementary text for courses in applied ethics--including professional,business, and medical ethics--and in critical thinking.
The Ethical Decision-Making Manual for Helping Professionals by
This practical workbook provides current and future helping professionals with step-by-step guidelines for examining and resolving professional ethical dilemmas. It's the authors' belief that most serious ethical problems can be avoided by practitioners who have a strong sense of ethical self-awareness and an ability to stay out of "ethical traps" that result from their own experiences and preconceptions. Forty-nine "ethical dilemmas" are included for classroom discussion and resolution, along with the authors' suggestions for resolving them based on a process of analysis unique to this book.
Ethical Decision Making in Fund Raising by
"Fund raisers, given their flaws and fineness, working in flawedand fine institutions with flawed and fine clients, need to carryout their everyday tasks of decency and joy here and now. . . .This book is about thinking with care and grace about everydaygrit." In her brilliant and provocative new book, Ethical Decision Makingin Fund Raising, author and philosophy professor Marilyn Fischerprovides conceptual tools with which a nonprofit can thoroughlyexamine the ethics of how and from whom it seeks donations. Usingthe book's Ethical Decision-Making Model, the author explains howfund raisers can use their basic value commitments toorganizational mission, professional relationships, and personalintegrity as day-to-day touchstones for making balanced, ethical,fund-raising decisions. For ethically troubling situations that have no clear-cutsolutions, the book shows how to frame these dilemmas as ongoingdramatic narratives. Using conceptual tools of sympatheticunderstanding, attention to social and temporal context, andclusters of philanthropic virtues, the Ethical Decision-MakingModel guides us in thinking our way to ethically sound resolutions.Through this process, we can sustain and enrich the circle ofgiving of the philanthropic gift economy. The book also examines day-to-day issues of fund raising: privacyand confidentiality; conflicts of interest such as finder's feesand commission-based pay; corporate philanthropy, includingsponsorships and cause-related marketing; and fostering culturaldiversity. Each chapter concludes with discussion questions andadditional case studies for readers' reflection and analysis. Ethical Decision Making in Fund Raising is a fascinating look atthe history of philanthropy in its many social forms and historicalcontexts, as well as an exuberant manifesto for nonprofits onmaking clear ethical thinking an effective corporate tool.
Ethical Leadership and Decision Making in Education by
This text--developed in response to an increasing interest in ethics and a growing number of courses on this topic that are now being offered in educational leadership programs--is designed to fill a gap in instructional materials for teaching the ethics component of the knowledge base that has been established for the profession. Ethical Leadership and Decision Making in Education: Applying Theoretical Perspectives to Complex Dilemmas, Second Edition: *demonstrates the application of different ethical paradigms (the ethics of justice, care, critique, and the profession) through discussion and analysis of real-life moral dilemmas that educational leaders face in their schools and communities; *addresses some of the practical, pedagogical, and curricular issues related to the teaching of ethics for educational leaders; *emphasizes the importance of ethics instruction from a variety of theoretical approaches; and *provides a process that instructors might follow to develop their own ethics unit or course. Part I provides an overview of why ethics is so important, especially for today's educational leaders, and presents a multiparadigm approach essential to practitioners as they grapple with ethical dilemmas. Part II deals with the dilemmas themselves. It includes a brief introduction to how the cases were constructed, an illustration of how the multiparadigm approach may be applied to a real dilemma, and ethical dilemmas written by graduate students that represent the kinds of dilemmas faced by practicing administrators in urban, suburban, and rural settings in an era full of complexities and contradictions. Part III focuses on pedagogy and provides teaching notes for the instructor. The authors discuss the importance of self-reflection on the part of both instructors and students, and model how they thought through their own personal and professional ethical codes as well as reflected upon the critical incidents in their lives that shape their teaching and frequently determine what they privileged in class. New in the Second Edition: *A completely new chapter emphasizing religious differences and presenting the contradictions between religion and culture; *A completely new chapter on testing, juxtaposing the paradox of accountability with responsibility; *Several new dilemmas focusing on higher education, recognizing that many educational leadership training programs include students with this focus; and *Changes throughout to update the text, including a discussion of recent scholarship in the field of ethical leadership. Ethical Leadership and Decision Making in Education: Applying Theoretical Perspectives to Complex Dilemmas, Second Editionis easily adaptable for a variety of uses with a wide range of audiences. It is equally valuable as a text for university courses related to the preparation of educational leaders and as a professional reference for aspiring and practicing administrators, teacher leaders, office personnel, and educational policy makers.
Ethical Leadership and the Community College : Paradigms, DecisionMaking, and Praxis by 
The ethical process : an approach to disagreements and controversial issues by
This hands-on workbook helps learners develop conceptual tools and argumentative strategies to move beyond merely having opinions to discovering and evaluating the information, values, and assumptions that underlie different positions on controversial issues and cases. It shows readers how to move from contentious debates to productive dialogues, and how to increase a group's resources so they can make better decisions. KEY TOPICS: Chapter topics cover an introduction to the ethical process, the resources for the ethical process, understanding alternative points of view, evaluating arguments from different ethical approaches, and the ethical process as an argumentative dialogue. MARKET: For individuals who want to 1) understand and master the skills needed to engage in ethical reflection and analysis, and 2)experience ethics as a practice to be used when faced with disagreements.
Ethics for the real world : creating a personal code to guide decisions in work and life by
We often make small ethical compromises for "good" reasons: We lie to a customer because our boss asked us to. We exaggerate our accomplishments on our résumé to get an interview. Temptation blindsides us. And we make snap decisions we regret. Minor ethical lapses can seem harmless, but they instill in us a hard-to-break habit of distorted thinking. Rationalizations drown out our inner voice, and we make up the rules as we go. We lose control of our decisions, fall victim to the temptations and pressures of our situations, taint our characters, and sour business and personal relationships. In Ethics for the Real World, Ronald Howard and Clinton Korver explain how to master the art of ethical decision making by: Identifying potential compromises in your own life Applying distinctions to clarify your ethical thinking Committing in advance to ethical principles Generating creative alternatives to resolve dilemmas Packed with real-life examples, this book gives you practical advice to respond skillfully to life's inevitable ethical challenges. Not only can you make right decisions, you can acquire new habits that will realize the best in yourself and transform your relationships.
Evaluation in translation : critical points of translator decision-making by
In this book, Jeremy Munday presents advances towards a general theory of evaluation in translator decision-making that will benbsp;of high importancenbsp;to translator and interpreter training and to descriptive translation analysis. By 'evaluation' the author refers to how a translator's subjective stance manifests itself linguistically in a text. In a world where translation and interpreting function as a prism through which opposing personal and political views enter a target culture, it is crucial to investigate how such views are processed and sometimes subjectively altered by the translator. To this end, the book focuses on the translation process (rather than the product) and strives to identify more precisely those points where the translator is most likely to express judgment or evaluation. The translations studied cover a range of languages (Arabic, Chinese, Dutch, French, German, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Russian, Spanish and American Sign Language) accompanied by English glosses to facilitate comprehension by readers. This is key reading for researchers and postgraduates studying translation theory within Translation and Interpreting Studies.
Judgment and Decision Making by
Researchers in a growing number of fields - public policy, law, business, medicine, psychology, engineering, and others - are working to understand and improve human judgment and decision making. This book, which presupposes no formal training, brings together a selection of key articles in the area, with careful organization, introduction and commentaries. Issues involving medical diagnosis, weather forecasting, labor negotiations, risk, public policy, business strategy, eyewitnesses, jury decisions issues, and more are treated in this largely expanded volume, indicating the variety of problems - and scope in judgment and decision making. This is a revision of Arkes and Hammond's 1986 collection of papers on judgment and decision making. Updated and extended, the focus of this volume is interdisciplinary and applied. The papers selected are scientific in nature, but chosen specifically to appeal to the scholar, student and layperson alike.
Obstacles to Ethical Decision-Making by
In commerce, many moral failures are due to narrow mindsets that preclude taking into account the moral dimensions of a decision or action. In turn, sometimes these mindsets are caused by failing to question managerial decisions from a moral point of view, because of a perceived authority of management. In the 1960s, Stanley Milgram conducted controversial experiments to investigate just how far obedience to an authority figure could subvert his subjects' moral beliefs. In this thought-provoking work, the authors examine the prevalence of narrow mental models and the phenomenon of obedience to an authority to analyse and understand the challenges which business professionals encounter in making ethical decisions. Obstacles to Ethical Decision-Making proposes processes - including collaborative input and critique - by which individuals may reduce or overcome these challenges. It provides decision-makers at all levels in an organisation with the means to place ethical considerations at the heart of managerial decision-making.
Practicing communication ethics : development, discernment, and decision making by
Practicing Communication Ethics: Development, Discernment, and Decision Making presents a theoretical framework for developing a personal standard of ethics that can be applied in everyday communication situations. This second edition focuses on how the reader's communication matters ethically in cocreating their relationships, family, workgroups, and communities. Through an examination of ethical values including truth, justice, freedom, care, integrity, and honor, the reader can determine which values they are ethically committed to upholding. Blending communication theory, ethics as practical philosophy, and moral psychology, the text presents the practice of communication ethics as part of the lifelong process of personal development and fosters the ability in its readers to approach communication decision making through an ethical lens.
Signed Language Interpreting in the 21st Century by
This text provides interpreting students with a broad knowledge base that encompasses the latest research, addresses current trends and perspectives of the Deaf community, and promotes critical thinking and open dialogue about the working conditions, ethics, boundaries, and competencies needed by a highly qualified interpreter in various settings. This volume expands the resources available to aspiring interpreters, including Deaf interpreters, and incorporates the voices of renowned experts on topics relevant to today's practitioners. Each chapter provides students with objectives, keywords, and discussion questions. The chapters convey clear information about topics that include credentialing, disposition and aptitude for becoming an interpreter, interpreting for people who are DeafBlind, and working within specialty settings, such as legal and healthcare. A key resource for interpreter certification test preparation, this text follows the interpreter's ethical, practical, and professional development through a career of lifelong learning and service.
Values and ethics in counseling : real-life ethical decision making by
Many counselors learn about ethics in graduate school by applying formal, step-by-step ethical decision-making models that require counselors to be aware of their values and refrain from imposing personal values that might harm clients. However, in the real world, counselors often make split-second ethical decisions based upon personal values. Values and Ethics in Counseling illustrates the ways in which ethical decisions are values--but more than that, it guides counselors through the process of examining their own values and analyzing how these values impact ethical decision making. Each chapter presents ethical decision making as what it is: a very personal, values-laden process, one that is most effectively illustrated through the real-life stories of counselors at various stages of professional development--from interns to seasoned clinicians--who made value-based decisions. Each story is followed by commentary from the author as well as analysis from the editors to contextualize the material and encourage reflection.
Interpreting Ethics (Code of Conduct)
Every action made, no matter how seemingly insignificant, has consequences. TRPETHC explores the factors that connect these consequences to one’s actions through deep reflection and meaningful analysis. Decision-making processes are not clearly black and white, but mostly dependent on your personal and professional values. Armed with your knowledge of the interpreting code of ethics, you will be able to navigate any challenging decisions in your practice, where “it depends” will be your new mantra. In this course, you will learn to think critically, act responsibly and accept accountability.
Choices : making right decisions in a complex world by
In these guidelines for making solid decisions based on a consistent pattern of moral values, the author of Forgive and Forget shows us how to live with a clear conscience and identifies core values that allow us to grow and become the best people we can be.
Encounters with reality : 1,001 interpreter scenarios by Ethical leadership and the community college : paradigms, decision-making, and praxis by
This book is designed to aid community college leaders in becoming ethical leaders. This aim is essential, as ethical leadership is needed to address the continual ethical quandaries and persistent leadership dilemmas (e.g., funding, governance, accountability, shifting student demographics) facing public postsecondary education in the current era. When leaders are fully committed to the ideals that underscore public education (e.g., public good, access, social mobility, civic engagement) and accept the notion that their role as leaders is to be a servant to others, ethical leadership serves as a roadmap to guide their decisions, actions, and advocacy.This volume serves as a comprehensive resource in articulating the foundational, conceptual, interpersonal, and practical dispositions of the critical need to develop leaders with high moral aptitudes.
Ethics and Politics of Translating by
What if meaning were the last thing that mattered in language? In this essay, Henri Meschonnic explains what it means to translate the sense of language and how to do it. In a radical stand against a hermeneutical approach based on the dualistic view of the linguistic sign and against its separation into a meaningful signified and a meaningless signifier, Henri Meschonnic argues for a poetics of translating. Because texts generate meaning through their power of expression, to translate ethically involves listening to the various rhythms that characterize them: prosodic, consonantal or vocalic patterns, syntactical structures, sentence length and punctuation, among other discursive means. However, as the book illustrates, such an endeavour goes against the grain and, more precisely, against a 2500-year-old tradition in the case of biblical translation. The inability of translators to give ear to rhythm in language results from a culturally transmitted deafness. Henri Meschonnic decries the generalized unwillingness to remedy this cultural condition and discusses the political implications for the subject of discourse.
Evaluation in translation : critical points of translator decision-making by
In this book, Jeremy Munday presents advances towards a general theory of evaluation in translator decision-making that will benbsp;of high importancenbsp;to translator and interpreter training and to descriptive translation analysis. By 'evaluation' the author refers to how a translator's subjective stance manifests itself linguistically in a text. In a world where translation and interpreting function as a prism through which opposing personal and political views enter a target culture, it is crucial to investigate how such views are processed and sometimes subjectively altered by the translator. To this end, the book focuses on the translation process (rather than the product) and strives to identify more precisely those points where the translator is most likely to express judgment or evaluation. The translations studied cover a range of languages (Arabic, Chinese, Dutch, French, German, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Russian, Spanish and American Sign Language) accompanied by English glosses to facilitate comprehension by readers. This is key reading for researchers and postgraduates studying translation theory within Translation and Interpreting Studies.
Obstacles to Ethical Decision-Making by
In commerce, many moral failures are due to narrow mindsets that preclude taking into account the moral dimensions of a decision or action. In turn, sometimes these mindsets are caused by failing to question managerial decisions from a moral point of view, because of a perceived authority of management. In the 1960s, Stanley Milgram conducted controversial experiments to investigate just how far obedience to an authority figure could subvert his subjects' moral beliefs. In this thought-provoking work, the authors examine the prevalence of narrow mental models and the phenomenon of obedience to an authority to analyse and understand the challenges which business professionals encounter in making ethical decisions. Obstacles to Ethical Decision-Making proposes processes - including collaborative input and critique - by which individuals may reduce or overcome these challenges. It provides decision-makers at all levels in an organisation with the means to place ethical considerations at the heart of managerial decision-making.
“Research is formalized curiosity. It is poking and prying with a purpose.” - Zora Neale Hurston
In the advent of the internet comes millions of information and data at your fingertips every single day. But information is not considered as knowledge, knowledge lies in the application of curiosity, inquiry, planning and action, a process known as research design. This course will help you formalize your curiosity through the development of questions, the organization of knowledge, the selection of method, the management and analysis of data, and drawing conclusions to conduct a meaningful inquiry.
You will gain an overview of research design as it complements to the learning you have acquired throughout your program thereby putting knowledge into practice. This course will also be a venue for learning the different types of quantitative and qualitative researches and other research constructs. By the end of the course, you are expected to come up with a research proposal on sign language interpreting.
Action research : teachers as researchers in the classroom by
Action Research, Second Edition introduces practicing teachers to the process of conducting classroom-based action research. The book′s practicality stems from its focus on research methods and procedures that teachers can use with their everyday instructional practices and classroom activities. Detailed, practical information is included for teachers as they design and conduct applied classroom-based research projects. Features and Benefits:Action Research Portraits (3 portraits in each chapter)These portraits show how teachers and other educators can actually conduct action research in order to address their own specific local-level problems.Lists of online resources (updated)The comprehensive lists are comprised of Web sites that readers can pursue for additional related information.Discussion of rigor in action research (new)This discussion communicates to the reader how to maintain the high level of rigor and validity in action researchWriting Up Action ResearchSpecial sections, titled Writing Up Action Research, are included in Chapters 3 through 8. These sections provide annotated excerpts from published or otherwise disseminated action research reports, highlighting specific concepts presented in each particular chapter.
Blended Learning in Practice by
A guide to both theory and practice of blended learning offering rigorous research, case studies, and methods for the assessment of educational effectiveness.Blended learning combines traditional in-person learning with technology-enabled education. Its pedagogical aim is to merge the scale, asynchrony, and flexibility of online learning with the benefits of the traditional classroom-content-rich instruction and the development of learning relationships. This book offers a guide to both theory and practice of blended learning, offering rigorous research, case studies, and methods for the assessment of educational effectiveness. The contributors to this volume adopt a range of approaches to blended learning and different models of implementation and offer guidelines for both researchers and instructors, considering such issues as research design and data collection. In these courses, instructors addressed problems they had noted in traditional classrooms, attempting to enhance student engagement, include more active learning strategies, approximate real-world problem solving, and reach non-majors. The volume offers a cross-section of approaches from one institution, Georgia Tech, to provide both depth and breadth. It examines the methodologies of implementation in a variety of courses, ranging from a first-year composition class that incorporated the video game Assassin's Creed II to a research methods class for psychology and computer science students. Blended Learning will be an essential resource for educators, researchers, administrators, and policy makers. Contributors Joe Bankoff, Paula Braun, Mark Braunstein, Marion L. Brittain, Timothy G. Buchman, Rebecca E. Burnett, Aldo A. Ferri, Bonnie Ferri, Andy Frazee, Mohammed M. Ghassemi, Ashok K. Goel, Alyson B. Goodman, Joyelle Harris, Cheryl Hiddleson, David Joyner, Robert S. Kadel, Kenneth J. Knoespel, Joe Le Doux, Amanda G. Madden, Lauren Margulieux, Olga Menagarishvili, Shamim Nemati, Vjollca Sadiraj, Donald Webster
Experimental Methods in Survey Research by
A thorough and comprehensive guide to the theoretical, practical, and methodological approaches used in survey experiments across disciplines such as political science, health sciences, sociology, economics, psychology, and marketing This book explores and explains the broad range of experimental designs embedded in surveys that use both probability and non-probability samples. It approaches the usage of survey-based experiments with a Total Survey Error (TSE) perspective, which provides insight on the strengths and weaknesses of the techniques used. Experimental Methods in Survey Research: Techniques that Combine Random Sampling with Random Assignment addresses experiments on within-unit coverage, reducing nonresponse, question and questionnaire design, minimizing interview measurement bias, using adaptive design, trend data, vignettes, the analysis of data from survey experiments, and other topics, across social, behavioral, and marketing science domains. Each chapter begins with a description of the experimental method or application and its importance, followed by reference to relevant literature. At least one detailed original experimental case study then follows to illustrate the experimental method's deployment, implementation, and analysis from a TSE perspective. The chapters conclude with theoretical and practical implications on the usage of the experimental method addressed. In summary, this book: Fills a gap in the current literature by successfully combining the subjects of survey methodology and experimental methodology in an effort to maximize both internal validity and external validity Offers a wide range of types of experimentation in survey research with in-depth attention to their various methodologies and applications Is edited by internationally recognized experts in the field of survey research/methodology and in the usage of survey-based experimentation --featuring contributions from across a variety of disciplines in the social and behavioral sciences Presents advances in the field of survey experiments, as well as relevant references in each chapter for further study Includes more than 20 types of original experiments carried out within probability sample surveys Addresses myriad practical and operational aspects for designing, implementing, and analyzing survey-based experiments by using a Total Survey Error perspective to address the strengths and weaknesses of each experimental technique and method Experimental Methods in Survey Research: Techniques that Combine Random Sampling with Random Assignment is an ideal reference for survey researchers and practitioners in areas such political science, health sciences, sociology, economics, psychology, public policy, data collection, data science, and marketing. It is also a very useful textbook for graduate-level courses on survey experiments and survey methodology.
Handbook of Quantitative Research Methods in Entrepreneurship by
This Handbook of Quantitative Research Methods in Entrepreneurshipprovides an overarching perspective on the methods and approaches critical to quantitative analysis of research on entrepreneurship. Representing the research efforts of 31 internationally scholars in entrepreneurship, this Handbook offers guidance for quantitative analysts at a time of increasing availability of economic, financial and business data. Contributions focus on a range of important empirical issues, including business survival, job creation, internationalisation, bank financing and specific types of entrepreneurial activity such as social enterprise and family business. The combined chapters synthesise and experiment with useful methods to navigate and unpack crucial entrepreneurial data. Informative and accessible, this Handbook is crucial reading for undergraduate and postgraduate students looking for a broad overview of the field. It will also be useful to established academics and researchers who require state of the art research, and policymakers and practitioners, who may use this book as an indispensable guide for reflecting on public interventions in the entrepreneurial arena. Contributors include:F. Buscha, J.-L. Capelleras, M. Cowling, M. Dejardin, P. Ferreira, M. Freel, D.S. Hain, L. Han, C. Hand, R. Jurowetzki, F.W. Kellermanns, Y. Lai, M. Medaugh, B. Mi, L. Pennacchio, A. Rialp, J. Rialp, C. Robinson, S. Roper, A. Rostamkalaei, A. Sapio, G. Saridakis, J. Siepel, L. Stanley, L. Tian, P. Urwin, W. Yue, T.M. Zellweger
The Next Generation of Research in Interpreter Education by
This collection contributes to an emerging body of research in sign language interpreter education, a field in which research on teaching practices has been rare. The Next Generation of Research in Interpreter Education investigates learning experiences and teaching practices that provide the evidence necessary to inform and advance instructional approaches. The five studies included in this volume examine role-play activities in the classroom, the experiences of Deaf students in interpreting programs, reducing anxiety in the interpreting process, mentoring, and self-assessment. The contributors are a nascent group of educators who represent a growing mastery of contemporary standards in interpreter education. Their chapters share a common theme: the experiences and learning environments of students as they progress toward entry into the interpreting profession.
Practical Research Methods in Education by
Practical Research Methods in Educationis a hands-on guide which critically explores and scrutinizes research methods used in educational enquiry. Drawing on the research, practical experience and reflections of active researchers, each chapter offers explanations, examples, tasks for students to undertake and suggestions for further reading, all of which are designed to strengthen understanding of practical methods of data collection in educational and social-science research. This insightful book offers: Detailed illustration of a range of data-collection methods and approaches used in educational research Chapters written by active researchers, experienced in addressing challenges of carrying out practical research in education Examples, study tasks and suggestions for further reading in each chapter An exploration of critical reflection and decision-making in relation to research methodology in education Close attention to research ethics Exploring practical methods of data-collection for educational and social-science research, Practical Research Methods in Education is a unique and valuable resource for any students interested and engaged in the planning and completion of their own investigations.
Qualitative Dissertation Methodology by
Designing and writing a qualitative dissertation methodology chapter can be done! Qualitative Dissertation Methodology: A Guide for Research Design and Methods functions as a dissertation advisor to help students construct and write a qualitative methodological framework for their research. Drawing from the challenges author Nathan Durdella has experienced while supervising students, the book breaks down producing the dissertation chapter into smaller pieces and goes through each portion of the methodology process step by step. With a warm and supportive tone, he walks students through the process from the very start, from choosing chairs and developing qualitative support networks to outlining the qualitative chapter and delving into the writing. By the end of the book, students will have completed the most challenging chapter of a qualitative dissertation and laid a strong foundation for the rest of their dissertation work. Corresponding videos featuring the author help concepts come alive for your students.
Qualitative Inquiry and Research Design by
In this Third Edition of his bestselling text John W. Creswell explores the philosophical underpinnings, history, and key elements of each of five qualitative inquiry traditions: narrative research, phenomenology, grounded theory, ethnography, and case study. In his signature accessible writing style, the author relates research designs to each of the traditions of inquiry. He compares theoretical frameworks, ways to employ standards of quality, and strategies for writing introductions to studies, collecting data, analyzing data, writing a narrative, and verifying results.
Qualitative Research Methods by
QUALITATIVE RESEARCH METHODS THE DEFINITIVE STEP-BY-STEP RESOURCE FOR QUALITATIVE AND ETHNOGRAPHIC RESEARCH Qualitative Research Methods: Collecting Evidence, Crafting Analysis, Communicating Impact is a comprehensive guide on both the theoretical foundations and practical application of qualitative methodology. Adopting a phronetic-iterative approach, this foundational book leads readers through the chronological progression of a qualitative research project, from designing a study and collecting and analyzing data to developing theories and effectively communicating the results-allowing readers to employ qualitative methods in their projects as they follow each chapter. Coverage of topics such as qualitative theories, ethics, sampling, interview techniques, qualitative quality, and advice on practical fieldwork provides clear and concise guidance on how to design and conduct sound research projects. Easy-to-follow instructions on iterative qualitative data analysis explain how to organize, code, interpret, make claims, and build theory. Throughout, the author offers her own backstage stories about fieldwork, analysis, drafting, writing, and publishing, revealing the emotional and humorous aspects of practicing qualitative methods. Now in its second edition, this thorough and informative text includes new and expanded material covering post-qualitative research, phenomenology, textual analysis and cultural studies, gaining access to elite and difficult to access populations, persuasive writing, novel interviewing approaches, and more. Numerous examples, case studies, activities, and discussion questions have been updated to reflect current research and ensure contemporary relevance. Written in an engaging and accessible narrative style by an acclaimed scholar and researcher Offers new and updated examples of coding and qualitative analysis, full-color photos and illustrations, and a companion instructor website Synthesizes the most up-to-date multidisciplinary literature on qualitative research methods including seven main approaches to qualitative inquiry: grounded theory, case study, ethnography and ethnography of communication, phenomenology, narrative inquiry and autoethnography, participatory action research, and creative, performative, and arts-based research Presents innovative qualitative data collection methods and modern representation strategies, such as virtual ethnography, photovoice, and mobile interviewing Qualitative Research Methods: Collecting Evidence, Crafting Analysis, Communicating Impact is an ideal resource for undergraduate and graduate students, instructors, and faculty across multiple disciplines including the social sciences, healthcare, education, management, and the humanities, and for practitioners seeking expert guidance on practical qualitative methods.
Research design : qualitative, quantitative, and mixed methods approaches by
This best-selling text pioneered the comparison of qualitative, quantitative, and mixed methods research design. For all three approaches, John W. Creswell and new co-author J. David Creswell include a preliminary consideration of philosophical assumptions, key elements of the research process, a review of the literature, an assessment of the use of theory in research applications, and reflections about the importance of writing and ethics in scholarly inquiry. The Fifth Edition includes more coverage of: epistemological and ontological positioning in relation to the research question and chosen methodology; case study, PAR, visual and online methods in qualitative research; qualitative and quantitative data analysis software; and in quantitative methods more on power analysis to determine sample size, and more coverage of experimental and survey designs; and updated with the latest thinking and research in mixed methods. SHARE this Comparison of Research Approaches poster with your students to help them navigate the distinction between the three approaches to research.
Research Methods by
Research Methods: Information, Systems, and Contexts, Second Edition, presents up-to-date guidance on how to teach research methods to graduate students and professionals working in information management, information science, librarianship, archives, and records and information systems. It provides a coherent and precise account of current research themes and structures, giving students guidance, appreciation of the scope of research paradigms, and the consequences of specific courses of action. Each of these valuable sections will help users determine the relevance of particular approaches to their own questions. The book presents academics who teach research and information professionals who carry out research with new resources and guidance on lesser-known research paradigms.
Research Methods by
From an expert team in the research methods field, RESEARCH METHODS: THE ESSENTIAL KNOWLEDGE BASE, 2nd Edition, is written specifically for users who are new to research methods. The book streamlines and clarifies explanations of fundamental, yet difficult, concepts in a familiar, engaging style. Readers learn about the relationship between theory and practice, which helps them become better researchers and better consumers of research.
Research Methods, Statistics, and Applications by
One of the greatest strengths of this text is the consistent integration of research methods and statistics so that students can better understand how the research process requires the combination of these elements. The end goal is to spark students′ interest in conducting research and to increase their ability to critically analyze it.In the new second edition of the text, Katherine Adams and Eva Lawrence have integrated additional information on online data collection and research methods, additional coverage of regression and ANOVA, and new examples to engage students.
Research methods : a practical guide for students and researchers by
For many students, doing research is often a joyless struggle. This book provides practical advice on how to do research in a concise way. It uses classic examples to show how experts conduct their research in different fields, allowing this book to be used in different disciplines. Research Methods: A Practical Guide for Students and Researchers provides a practical guide to students and researchers on how to do their research systematically and professionally. The book begins by distinguishing between causal and interpretive sciences. It then guides the reader on how to formulate the research question, review the literature, develop the hypothesis or theoretical framework, select a suitable research methodology, and analyze both quantitative and qualitative data. The book emphasizes integration. It does not merely provide a smorgasbord of research designs, data collection methods, and ways to analyze data. Instead, it shows how one can integrate these elements into a coherent research strategy.
Research Methods: the Basics by
Research Methods: The Basics is an accessible, user-friendly introduction to the different aspects of research theory, methods and practice. This second edition provides an expanded resource suitable for students and practitioners in a wide range of disciplines including the natural sciences, social sciences and humanities. Structured in two parts - the first covering the nature of knowledge and the reasons for research, the second the specific methods used to carry out effective research and how to propose, plan, carry out and write up a research project - this book covers: * Reasons for doing a research project * Structuring and planning a research project * The ethical issues involved in research * Different types of data and how they are measured * Collecting and analysing qualitative and quantitative data in order to draw sound conclusions * Mixed methods and interdisciplinary research * Devising a research proposal and writing up the research * Motivation and quality of work. Complete with a glossary of key terms and guides to further reading, this book is an essential text for anyone coming to research for the first time.
Research Methods and Methodologies in Education by
The #1 resource for carrying out educational research In order to carry out high-quality educational research, every aspect of the process needs careful consideration. This all-encompassing textbook gives a considered overview of principles that underpin research, key qualitative and quantitative methods for research design, data collection and analysis. New to the Second Edition: Includes new chapter on Ethics Enhanced coverage of qualitative research Thorough reworking′s of chapters makes the new edition truly comprehensive
Research Methods in Education by
This thoroughly updated and extended eighth edition of the long-running bestseller Research Methods in Education covers the whole range of methods employed by educational research at all stages. Its five main parts cover: the context of educational research; research design; methodologies for educational research; methods of data collection; and data analysis and reporting. It continues to be the go-to text for students, academics and researchers who are undertaking, understanding and using educational research, and has been translated into several languages. It offers plentiful and rich practical advice, underpinned by clear theoretical foundations, research evidence and up-to-date references, and it raises key issues and questions for researchers planning, conducting, reporting and evaluating research. This edition contains new chapters on: Mixed methods research The role of theory in educational research Ethics in Internet research Research questions and hypotheses Internet surveys Virtual worlds, social network software and netography in educational research Using secondary data in educational research Statistical significance, effect size and statistical power Beyond mixed methods: using Qualitative Comparative Analysis (QCA) to integrate cross-case and within-case analyses. Research Methods in Education is essential reading for both the professional researcher and anyone involved in educational and social research. The book is supported by a wealth of online materials, including PowerPoint slides, useful weblinks, practice data sets, downloadable tables and figures from the book, and a virtual, interactive, self-paced training programme in research methods. These resources can be found at: www.routledge.com/cw/cohen.
Research Methods in Sign Language Studies by
Research Methods in Sign Language Studies is a landmark work on sign language research, which spans the fields of linguistics, experimental and developmental psychology, brain research, and language assessment. Examines a broad range of topics, including ethical and political issues, key methodologies, and the collection of linguistic, cognitive, neuroscientific, and neuropsychological data Provides tips and recommendations to improve research quality at all levels and encourages readers to approach the field from the perspective of diversity rather than disability Incorporates research on sign languages from Europe, Asia, North and South America, and Africa Brings together top researchers on the subject from around the world, including many who are themselves deaf
The SAGE Handbook of Social Media Research Methods by
The SAGE Handbook of Social Media Research Methods offers a step-by-step guide to overcoming the challenges inherent in research projects that deal with 'big and broad data', from the formulation of research questions through to the interpretation of findings. The handbook includes chapters on specific social media platforms such as Twitter, Sina Weibo and Instagram, as well as a series of critical chapters. The holistic approach is organised into the following sections: Conceptualising & Designing Social Media Research Collection & Storage Qualitative Approaches to Social Media Data Quantitative Approaches to Social Media Data Diverse Approaches to Social Media Data Analytical Tools Social Media Platforms This handbook is the single most comprehensive resource for any scholar or graduate student embarking on a social media project.
Social Research Methods by Example by
Social Research Methods by Example shows students how researchers carry out work on the cutting edge of social science. The authors illustrate every point through engaging, thought-provoking examples from real research. The language is jargon-free, making research methods less intimidating and more relatable. The text is divided into three major sections, the first of which introduces students to the principles of research through examples from various fields. The second section walks students through the major types of social science research, with each chapter focusing on a different technique. The third section shows students how to carry out basic quantitative data analysis in SPSS. The final chapter shows how technological advances have changed the way researchers are working, and looks at the direction of social science research in the future. Social Research Methods by Example not only introduces students to the principles of social science research, but gives them a toolbox to carry out their own. By the time they are finished with the book, students will be conversant with many of the most important studies in the history of social science. They will understand not only how to conduct research, but also how the field has evolved over time.
“Research is formalized curiosity. It is poking and prying with a purpose.” - Zora Neale Hurston
In the advent of the internet comes millions of information and data at your fingertips every single day. But information is not considered as knowledge, knowledge lies in the application of curiosity, inquiry, planning and action, a process known as research design. This course will help you formalize your curiosity through the development of questions, the organization of knowledge, the selection of method, the management and analysis of data, and drawing conclusions to conduct a meaningful inquiry.
You will gain an overview of research design as it complements to the learning you have acquired throughout your program thereby putting knowledge into practice. This course will also be a venue for learning the different types of quantitative and qualitative researches and other research constructs. By the end of the course, you are expected to come up with a research proposal on sign language interpreting.
Action research : teachers as researchers in the classroom by
Action Research, Second Edition introduces practicing teachers to the process of conducting classroom-based action research. The book′s practicality stems from its focus on research methods and procedures that teachers can use with their everyday instructional practices and classroom activities. Detailed, practical information is included for teachers as they design and conduct applied classroom-based research projects. Features and Benefits:Action Research Portraits (3 portraits in each chapter)These portraits show how teachers and other educators can actually conduct action research in order to address their own specific local-level problems.Lists of online resources (updated)The comprehensive lists are comprised of Web sites that readers can pursue for additional related information.Discussion of rigor in action research (new)This discussion communicates to the reader how to maintain the high level of rigor and validity in action researchWriting Up Action ResearchSpecial sections, titled Writing Up Action Research, are included in Chapters 3 through 8. These sections provide annotated excerpts from published or otherwise disseminated action research reports, highlighting specific concepts presented in each particular chapter.
Advances in Interpreting Research by
With the growing emphasis on scholarship in interpreting, this collection tackles issues critical to the inquiry process -- from theoretical orientations in Interpreting Studies to practical considerations for conducting a research study. As a landmark volume, it charts new territory by addressing a range of topics germane to spoken and signed language interpreting research. Both provocative and pragmatic, this volume captures the thinking of an international slate of interpreting scholars including Daniel Gile, Franz Pöchhacker, Debra Russell, Barbara Moser-Mercer, Melanie Metzger, Cynthia Roy, Minhua Liu, Jemina Napier, Lorraine Leeson, Jens Hessmann, Graham Turner, Eeva Salmi, Svenja Wurm, Rico Peterson, Robert Adam, Christopher Stone, Laurie Swabey and Brenda Nicodemus. Experienced academics will find ideas to stimulate their passion and commitment for research, while students will gain valuable insights within its pages. This new volume is essential reading for anyone involved in interpreting research.
Embodied Research Methods by
Disembodied research erects false dichotomies between flesh and reason, and between the corporeal and the social. By contrast, Torkild Thanem and David Knights engage with approaches and practices that exploit the body's capacity to generate knowledge, craft lively accounts, and create fleshy concepts. These approaches enrich our understanding of how people live, work, and interact with their bodies within the social world. Thanem and Knights discuss methods, practices, and personal experiences which involve bodies in the research process - in generating and analysing empirical material, reflecting on the work they do as researchers, and turning research into written text.Embodied Research Methods is an important and practical resource for undergraduate and postgraduate students across the social sciences, and a thought-provoking read for researchers in these areas.
Ethics and Integrity in Visual Research Methods by
Ethics and Integrity in Visual Research Methodsaims to unpack the multiple considerations for ethics and integrity that accompany research methods involving visual data generation and analysis. This volume focuses on the media of photography and film. Contributing authors cover a variety of topics, including: consent and dignity when working with vulnerable and marginalized populations; the limitations of participatory methods within a context of inequity and postcolonialism; the challenges of anonymising visual data; and the risks of sharing visual data online. The authors share their experiences of working with visual methods across a range of contexts, making recommendations for best practice. This volume is intended to be practical, and the key messages aim to be concrete and applicable for anyone embarking on visual methods research.
Functions of Head and Body Movements in Austrian Sign Language by
Research on nonmanual elements - or 'nonmanuals' - in sign languages has focused on both the possible functions and the occurrence (frequency and form) of these elements in recent years. As a matter of fact, research on nonmanuals is still a quite uncharted territory in Austrian Sign Language (ÖGS) today, which has also initiated the study given. In order to identify head and body movements in ÖGS, these nonmanuals were determined and analyzed functionally via a new user-oriented methodology. Getting feedback of multiple native signers was a main part of this method. Accordingly, you will find the findings of this study in this volume: various functions such as negation, assertion, interrogativity, conditionality, and many more can be expressed nonmanually. Brand new insights into sign language research are given, as well as astonishing results: even (epistemic) modality can be expressed by particular head and body movements.
Getting Started in Interpreting Research by
What sets this collection apart in the literature is its direct, personal style. Experienced supervisors as well as younger scholars speak to beginning researchers in interpreting, and more generally in Translation Studies. The contributors, who are very familiar with the difficulties beginners experience, focus on their needs and anticipate their questions. They reflect, analyze and advise, with illustrations from their own experience. Issues discussed include topic selection, project planning, time management, 'doctoral stress', the use of the literature, critical reading and book reviews, supervisor-supervisee relations, institutional frameworks for research training, issues in empirical research, theoretical analysis, and the role of small projects. Readers will thus find answers to many personal, institutional and methodological questions, which are common to beginners in many disciplines and in many paradigms.
Interdisciplinarity in Translation and Interpreting Process Research by
First published as a special issue of Target (issue 25:1, 2013), this volume explores interdisciplinarity in translation and interpreting process research, fields that have enjoyed a boom in the last decade. For this reason, the time was ripe for a reflection on the broad range of methodologies that have been applied in our endeavours to understand both translation and interpreting processes better. The ten chapters provide a snapshot of how translation and interpreting process researchers have availed themselves of concepts and theories developed in other disciplines, such as psychology, the cognitive sciences, journalism, and literary studies, to examine and illuminate their object of study. This collection demonstrates that translation and interpreting process research borrow heavily from other disciplines and call for a consideration of how translation research can become truly interdisciplinary through increased collaboration, synergy, and mutual advancement.
Metropolitan Research by
Metropolitan research requires interdisciplinary collaboration in order to do justice to the complexities of metropolitan regions. This volume provides a scholarly and accessible overview of key methods and approaches in metropolitan research from a uniquely broad range of disciplines including architectural history, art history, heritage conservation, literary and cultural studies, spatial planning and planning theory, geoinformatics, urban sociology, economic geography, operations research, technology studies, transport planning, aquatic ecosystems research and urban epidemiology. It is this transdisciplinary perspective that allows metropolitain research to address recent social challenges of urban life, such as mobility, accessibility, or sustainability.
Qualitative Inquiry and Research Design by
In this Third Edition of his bestselling text John W. Creswell explores the philosophical underpinnings, history, and key elements of each of five qualitative inquiry traditions: narrative research, phenomenology, grounded theory, ethnography, and case study. In his signature accessible writing style, the author relates research designs to each of the traditions of inquiry. He compares theoretical frameworks, ways to employ standards of quality, and strategies for writing introductions to studies, collecting data, analyzing data, writing a narrative, and verifying results.
Research methods for social work : a problem-based approach by
Research Methods for Social Work: A Problem-Based Approach is a comprehensive introduction to methods instruction that engages students innovatively and interactively. Using a case study and problem-based learning (PBL) approach, authors Antoinette Y. Farmer and G. Lawrence Farmer utilize case examples to achieve a level of application which builds readers' confidence in methodology and reinforces their understanding of research across all levels of social work practice. These real case examples, along with critical thinking questions, research tips, and step-by-step problem-solving methods, will improve student mastery and help them see why research is relevant. With the guidance of this new and noteworthy textbook, readers will transform into both knowledgeable consumers of research and skilled practitioners who can effectively address the needs of their clients through research.
Research Methods in Sign Language Studies by
Research Methods in Sign Language Studies is a landmark work on sign language research, which spans the fields of linguistics, experimental and developmental psychology, brain research, and language assessment. Examines a broad range of topics, including ethical and political issues, key methodologies, and the collection of linguistic, cognitive, neuroscientific, and neuropsychological data Provides tips and recommendations to improve research quality at all levels and encourages readers to approach the field from the perspective of diversity rather than disability Incorporates research on sign languages from Europe, Asia, North and South America, and Africa Brings together top researchers on the subject from around the world, including many who are themselves deaf
Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research by
This volume brings together the best research presented at the first International Symposium on Signed Language Interpreting and Translation Research. Editors Brenda Nicodemus and Keith Cagle have gathered an international group of contributors who are recognized leaders in signed language interpreter education and research. The ten papers in Signed Language Interpretation and Translation Research cover a range of topics, including the need for Deaf perspectives in interpretation research, discourse strategies and techniques that are unique to video relay call settings, the benefits of using sociology as a lens for examining sign language interpreting work, translating university entrance exams from written Portuguese into Libras (Brazilian Sign Language), the linguistic choices interpreters make when interpreting ASL figurative language into English, the nature of designated interpreting, and grammatical ambiguity in trilingual VRS interpreting. The research findings and insights contained here will be invaluable to scholars, students, and practitioners.
Social Work Research Methods : Learning by Doing by
Social Work Research Methods: Learning by Doing instills in students an appreciation for science-informed practice as a means of evaluating client outcomes. The book includes a step-by-step journey through the process of conducting research.
Research 102 (Action Research)
“No research without action, no action without research.” - Kurt Lewin
“Action research occurs when individuals seek to influence the community they are a part of, and therefore have a vested interest in.” - Kurt Lewin
In our everyday life there are questions that demand a reflective answer, such as “how will my grades become better?” After some thought and careful deliberation, you come up with a conclusion of doing this or that. And you acted on it. Then you share it to those who would want to listen. Action research is somewhat the same, it is a documentation of your inquiry/problem, your plan, and your action targeting an area of concern to improve your professional practice and create an impact on the community you are integrated in.
A continuation of TRPRES1, in this course you will learn necessary knowledge and skills to conduct an actual action research as it relates to the interpreting profession. This course will be an avenue for learning varied frameworks for professional development, for exploring challenges and significant issues, for planning interventions and solutions, all in the hopes of increasing our literature on sign language interpreting in the country.
Action Research for New Teachers by
Action research is a popular part of many teacher training courses, but understanding how to do it well isn't always straightforward. Action Research for New Teachers breaks the process down into small steps giving you concise, jargon-free guidance on all the issues and key considerations that you will need to tackle. It focuses on being evidence-based, encouraging you to produce evidence-rich research projects that are methodologically sound and stand up to scrutiny. This book takes you through the initial stages of planning and research design, engages with the complexities of data collection, and gives you advice on analyzing your data and writing up your research project.
The Action Research Guidebook by
This book is organized around Richard Sagor′s four-stage process developed from his many years of experience training hundreds of educators. The four stages are: }} clarifying visions/targets }} articulating theory }} implementing action and collecting data }} reflecting on data and planning informed action The book includes numerous tables, charts, handouts, forms, and worksheets to demystify and simplify the action research process. Short examples drawn from the author′s experience working on-one-on with teachers on their action research projects are also included, from raising reading proficiency to increasing the problem solving capacity of faculty members. The author shows how teacher teams can work collaboratively to identify and research problems related to the school′s goals. Appropriate for use by individual teachers and teacher teams, as well as by pre-service teachers in teacher education courses. Headteachers, counsellors, and other educators will also find the action research process useful for school improvement
Conducting Action Research for Business and Management Students by
In Conducting Action Research, Coghlan and Shani explain how action research differs from more detached research methods and provides expert guidance on how to engage effectively with it, helping the reader to complete both a successful research project and produce findings that are useful in an organizational context. Ideal for Business and Management students reading for a Master's degree, each book in the series may also serve as reference books for doctoral students and faculty members interested in the method. Part of SAGE′s Mastering Business Research Methods, conceived and edited by Bill Lee, Mark N. K. Saunders and Vadake K. Narayanan and designed to support researchers by providing in-depth and practical guidance on using a chosen method of data collection or analysis.
Doing Research in the Real World by
Pragmatic and inspiring, this applied book will help you to complete your research quickly and well. David Gray's advice is both positive and sensible as he walks you through each step of the research process from start to finish. Weaving quantitative, qualitative, and mixed methods together, he encourages you to consider flexible options and to choose the most appropriate methods for your projects. Setting out the realities of conducting research in real-world settings, David will help you to find the practical tools - and the confidence - you need to make good research choices as well as providing coverage of a wide range of assessment techniques and employability skills. The book also introduces an incredible range of digital resources: · Award-winning video to bring concepts to life · Video top tips from David · Case studies from experts · Journal articles to showcase real research · Interactive glossary flashcards · Multiple choice questions to test yourself with · Multidisciplinary data sets · Downloadable checklists to guide you. Brimming with energy and grounded in reality, this book is still your definitive companion to research - from theory to design, data collection to data analysis and writing up to dissemination this book has everything you need to excel. *Interactivity only available through Vitalsource eBook included as part of paperback product (ISBN 9781526418524). Access not guaranteed on second-hand copies (as access code may have previously been redeemed).
Doing Youth Participatory Action Research by
Doing Youth Participatory Action Research offers an unprecedented, in-depth exploration of the pragmatics and possibilities of youth-driven research. Drawing upon multiple years of experience engaging youth in rigorous, critical inquiry about the conditions impacting their lives, the authors examine how YPAR encourages the educational community to re-imagine the capabilities of young people and the purposes of teaching, learning, and research itself. Much more than a "how-to" guide for those interested in creating their own YPAR projects, this book draws upon the voices of students and educators, as well as the multiple historical traditions of critical research, to describe how youth inquiry transforms each step of the traditional research process. From identifying research questions to collecting data and disseminating findings, each chapter details how YPAR revolutionizes traditional conceptions of who produces knowledge, how it is produced, and for what purposes. The book weaves together research, policy, and practice to offer YPAR as a practice with the power to challenge entrenched social and educational inequalities, empower critically aware youth, and revolutionize pedagogy in classrooms and communities. For researchers, educators, community members, and youth who want to connect, question, and transform the world collectively, Doing Youth Participatory Action Research is a rich source of both pragmatic methodological guidance and inspiration.
Educational research : quantitative, qualitative, and mixed approaches by
Assuming no prior knowledge, Educational Research offers a comprehensive, easily digestible introductory research methods textbook for undergraduate and graduate students. Readers will develop an understanding of the multiple research methods and strategies used in education and related fields; how to read and critically evaluate published research; and the ability to write a proposal, construct a questionnaire, and conduct an empirical research study on their own. Students rave about the clarity of this best seller and its usefulness for their studies, enabling them to become critical consumers and users of research. Key Features Attention-grabbing, current event chapter opening vignettes and examples throughout the book engage student interest. While many texts only offer one method, this book gives a balanced coverage of quantitative, qualitative, and mixed methods research as well as their strengths and appropriateness, showing each has merit when employed properly. A conversational and accessible writing style makes the book fun and easy to read. Review question checkpoints are strategically placed to bolster student comprehension of key topics.Separate practical chapters are included on, "How to Construct a Questionnaire", "How to Write a Research Proposal," and "How to Write an APA Style Report."
Gendered lives : communication, gender, and culture by
Packed with the latest research and emerging issues from the field, GENDERED LIVES: COMMUNICATION, GENDER, & CULTURE, 13th Edition, equips you with the knowledge and tools to think critically about gender and society. Written by leading gender communication scholars, the text offers a balanced perspective of masculinity and femininity as it demonstrates the multiple and often interactive ways your views of gender are shaped within contemporary culture. The 13th Edition offers expansive coverage of men's issues, an integrated emphasis on social media and a stronger focus on gender in the public sphere. Its current coverage and conversational, first-person writing styles make it an engaging introduction to the field!
Introduction to Research in Education by
Become a more competent consumer and producer of research with INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH IN EDUCATION, 10th Edition. Known for its exceptionally clear writing style and comprehensive coverage, this research methods text helps you master the basic competencies necessary to understand and evaluate the research of others -- as well as plan and carry out your own research. The authors familiarize you with common research problems in a step-by-step manner through examples that clarify concepts, supported by end-of-chapter exercises that allow you to practice your new skills. The text covers both quantitative and qualitative approaches to research and is a must-read for anyone planning to conduct research or interpret the research of others.
Practical Action Research by
You will find a comprehensive and candid view of the pros and cons of practical action research in Practical Action Research: A Collection of Articles. In his uniquely presented style, Richard Schmuck first covers such topics as defining, understanding, implementing, and studying action research. Then, he offers readings from educational professionals from around the world who share their personal hands-on experiences to help educate others.
A Practical Guide to Action Research and Teacher Inquiry by
This accessible guide will be an invaluable resource for early years practitioners looking to make a positive difference in their settings by using action research or teacher enquiry. Guiding readers through the practical steps, issues, and potentials of conducting research in a variety of early childhood settings, the book will increase practitioners' confidence, enabling them to bridge the gap between recognising room for improvements and instigating necessary changes. Divided into easy-to-follow sections, A Practical Guide to Action Research and Teacher Enquiry: Making a Difference in the Early Years offers clear definitions and explanations of action research along with explanations of how it can be applied in early years settings to effectively and efficiently improve outcomes for children. Chapters outline a clear rationale for engaging in action research, highlight purposes and potentials of various approaches, and provide a helpful step-by-step discussion of the different stages of enquiry. Ten examples of practice are used to clearly illustrate the action research cycle in a variety of settings, and in relation to a range of topics and ages, thereby providing readers with a wealth of tried-and-tested ideas for application in their own settings and projects. These are supported by a range of downloadable resources which can be used as tools to support the planning, reflecting, and evaluation of practitioners' research activities. Informative, inspiring, and highly relevant to practice, A Practical Guide to Action Research and Teacher Enquirywill support and scaffold the research activities of early years practitioners, managers, and students.
Qualitative Research in Practice by
A practical introduction to qualitative research across fields and disciplines Qualitative Research in Practice offers a hands-on introduction to qualitative research design, methods, data, and analysis. Designed as a companion text for any course involving qualitative research, this book explores the different types of qualitative studies with relevant examples and analysis by the researchers themselves. The workbook format makes it easy to use in the classroom or the field, and the depth of information makes it a valuable resource for students of social work, psychology, counseling, management, education, health care, or any field in which qualitative research is conducted. While quantitative research is primarily concerned with numerical data, qualitative research methods are more flexible, responsive, and open to contextual information. To a qualitative researcher, a situation is defined by the participants' perspectives, making it the primary method of inquiry for understanding social phenomena through the lens of experience. This book introduces the essentials of qualitative research, bolstered by expert analysis and discussion that provides deeper insight than a traditional textbook format would allow. Understand the fundamental nature of qualitative research Learn how to accurately assess and evaluate qualitative research Explore qualitative research's many forms and applications Gain insight on qualitative research in a variety of fields and disciplines How does one codify an experience? Is it possible to measure emotion in units? Qualitative research fills the void where numbers cannot reach. It is the best tool we have for studying the unquantifiable aspects of the human experience, and it is an essential tool in a wide variety of fields. Qualitative Research in Practice provides translatable skills in a practical format to quicken your transition from "learning" to "using."
Qualitative Research Methods by
QUALITATIVE RESEARCH METHODS THE DEFINITIVE STEP-BY-STEP RESOURCE FOR QUALITATIVE AND ETHNOGRAPHIC RESEARCH Qualitative Research Methods: Collecting Evidence, Crafting Analysis, Communicating Impact is a comprehensive guide on both the theoretical foundations and practical application of qualitative methodology. Adopting a phronetic-iterative approach, this foundational book leads readers through the chronological progression of a qualitative research project, from designing a study and collecting and analyzing data to developing theories and effectively communicating the results-allowing readers to employ qualitative methods in their projects as they follow each chapter. Coverage of topics such as qualitative theories, ethics, sampling, interview techniques, qualitative quality, and advice on practical fieldwork provides clear and concise guidance on how to design and conduct sound research projects. Easy-to-follow instructions on iterative qualitative data analysis explain how to organize, code, interpret, make claims, and build theory. Throughout, the author offers her own backstage stories about fieldwork, analysis, drafting, writing, and publishing, revealing the emotional and humorous aspects of practicing qualitative methods. Now in its second edition, this thorough and informative text includes new and expanded material covering post-qualitative research, phenomenology, textual analysis and cultural studies, gaining access to elite and difficult to access populations, persuasive writing, novel interviewing approaches, and more. Numerous examples, case studies, activities, and discussion questions have been updated to reflect current research and ensure contemporary relevance. Written in an engaging and accessible narrative style by an acclaimed scholar and researcher Offers new and updated examples of coding and qualitative analysis, full-color photos and illustrations, and a companion instructor website Synthesizes the most up-to-date multidisciplinary literature on qualitative research methods including seven main approaches to qualitative inquiry: grounded theory, case study, ethnography and ethnography of communication, phenomenology, narrative inquiry and autoethnography, participatory action research, and creative, performative, and arts-based research Presents innovative qualitative data collection methods and modern representation strategies, such as virtual ethnography, photovoice, and mobile interviewing Qualitative Research Methods: Collecting Evidence, Crafting Analysis, Communicating Impact is an ideal resource for undergraduate and graduate students, instructors, and faculty across multiple disciplines including the social sciences, healthcare, education, management, and the humanities, and for practitioners seeking expert guidance on practical qualitative methods.
Research Methods and Methodologies in Education by
The #1 resource for carrying out educational research In order to carry out high-quality educational research, every aspect of the process needs careful consideration. This all-encompassing textbook gives a considered overview of principles that underpin research, key qualitative and quantitative methods for research design, data collection and analysis. New to the Second Edition: Includes new chapter on Ethics Enhanced coverage of qualitative research Thorough reworking′s of chapters makes the new edition truly comprehensive
Research Methods in Sign Language Studies by
Research Methods in Sign Language Studies is a landmark work on sign language research, which spans the fields of linguistics, experimental and developmental psychology, brain research, and language assessment. Examines a broad range of topics, including ethical and political issues, key methodologies, and the collection of linguistic, cognitive, neuroscientific, and neuropsychological data Provides tips and recommendations to improve research quality at all levels and encourages readers to approach the field from the perspective of diversity rather than disability Incorporates research on sign languages from Europe, Asia, North and South America, and Africa Brings together top researchers on the subject from around the world, including many who are themselves deaf
The SAGE Handbook of Educational Action Research by
This handbook presents and critiques predominant and emergent traditions of Educational Action Research internationally. Now a prominent methodology, Educational Action Research is well suited to exploring, developing and sustaining change processes both in classrooms and whole organisations such as schools, Departments of Education, and many segments of universities. The handbook contains theoretical and practical based chapters by highly respected scholars whose work has been seminal in building knowledge and expertise in the field. It also contains chapters exemplifying the work of prominent practitioner and community groups working outside universities. The Editors provide an introduction and conclusion, as well as an opening chapter which charts the historical development of action research and provides an analysis of its underlying theories. The handbook is organized into four sections, each beginning with a short introduction: - Action research methodology: diversity of rationales and practices - Professional: Knowledge production, staff development, and the status of educators - Personal: Self-awareness, development and identity - Political: Popular knowledge, difference, and frameworks for change This is a key resource for scholars and graduate students at doctors and masters levels, as well as school leaders and administrators. Susan Noffke is Associate Professor of Curriculum & Instruction at the University of Illinois - Urbana/Champaign and co-editor with R.B. Stevenson of Educational Action Research (Teachers College Press, 1995). She taught at the primary school level for a decade, and has led masters and doctoral level courses in action research for the past 20 years. She continues to work with many collaborative projects with schools and school districts. Bridget Somekh is Professor of Educational Research at Manchester Metropolitan University, UK. She is a founder editor of the Educational Action Research journal and has been a co-ordinator of the Collaborative Action Research Network (CARN) for many years. She is co-editor of Research Methods in the Social Sciences (SAGE: 2005) and author of Action Research: a Methodology for Change and Development (Open University Press: 2006).
The SAGE Handbook of Qualitative Research by
The substantially updated and revised Fifth Edition of this landmark handbook presents the state-of-the-art theory and practice of qualitative inquiry. Representing top scholars from around the world, the editors and contributors continue the tradition of synthesizing existing literature, defining the present, and shaping the future of qualitative research. The Fifth Edition contains 19 new chapters, with 16 revised--making it virtually a new volume--while retaining six classic chapters from previous editions. New contributors to this edition include Jamel K. Donnor and Gloria Ladson-Billings; Margaret Kovach; Paula Saukko; Bryant Keith Alexander; Thomas A. Schwandt and Emily F. Gates; Johnny Saldaña; Uwe Flick; Mirka Koro-Ljungberg, Maggie MacLure, and Jasmine Ulmer; Maria Elena Torre, Brett G. Stoudt, Einat Manoff, and Michelle Fine; Jack Bratich; Svend Brinkmann; Eric Margolis and Renu Zunjarwad; Annette N. Markham; Alecia Y. Jackson and Lisa A. Mazzei; Jonathan Wyatt, Ken Gale, Susanne Gannon, and Bronwyn Davies; Janice Morse; Peter Dahler-Larsen; Marc Spooner; and David A. Westbrook.
Single Subject Research by
This practical, user-friendly textbook provides background knowledge, basic concepts, and understanding of relevant issues related to applied behavior analysis and specifically to single subject research designs.
The Wiley Handbook of Action Research in Education by
Comprehensive overview of the theoretical, conceptual, and applied/practical presentations of action research as it is found and conducted solely in educational settings The Wiley Handbook of Action Research in Education is the first book to offer theoretical, conceptual, and applied/practical presentations of action research as it is found and conducted solely in educational settings. Covering primarily PK-12 educational settings, the book utilizes a cross-section of international authors and presentations to provide global perspectives on action research in education. Part I of The Wiley Handbook of Action Research in Education focuses on various foundational aspects and issues related to action research. Part II is centered on chapters that present theories and principles that help to guide the use of action research in educational contexts. Part III focuses on specific applications of educational action research in practice. Part IV provides an outlet for seven educational practitioners to share their experiences in conducting action research. Each of these authors also discusses the importance and value that action research has had on him or her, both professionally and personally. Discuss action research in PK-12, as well as in higher education settings The first book to focus on the importance and application of action research exclusively in educational settings Offers world perspectives on action research in education Written by a team of international scholars The Wiley Handbook of Action Research in Education is an excellent book for advanced undergraduate students, graduate students, and scholars studying and/or researching educational action research.
Research 102 (Action Research)
“No research without action, no action without research.” - Kurt Lewin
“Action research occurs when individuals seek to influence the community they are a part of, and therefore have a vested interest in.” - Kurt Lewin
In our everyday life there are questions that demand a reflective answer, such as “how will my grades become better?” After some thought and careful deliberation, you come up with a conclusion of doing this or that. And you acted on it. Then you share it to those who would want to listen. Action research is somewhat the same, it is a documentation of your inquiry/problem, your plan, and your action targeting an area of concern to improve your professional practice and create an impact on the community you are integrated in.
A continuation of TRPRES1, in this course you will learn necessary knowledge and skills to conduct an actual action research as it relates to the interpreting profession. This course will be an avenue for learning varied frameworks for professional development, for exploring challenges and significant issues, for planning interventions and solutions, all in the hopes of increasing our literature on sign language interpreting in the country.
100 Questions (and Answers) about Action Research by
100 Questions (and Answers) About Action Research identifies and answers the essential questions on the process of systematically approaching your practice from an inquiry-oriented perspective, with a focus on improving that practice. This unique text offers progressive instructors an alternative to the research status quo and serves as a reference for readers to improve their practice as advocates for those they serve. The Question and Answer format makes this an ideal supplementary text for traditional research methods courses, and also a helpful guide for practitioners in education, social work, criminal justice, health, business, and other applied disciplines.
Action Learning and Action Research by
Action Research (AR) is an ideal methodology to enable practical and emancipatory outcomes, as well as to generate relevant and authentic theory. Consequently, it has gained popularity worldwide. However, this emerging paradigm of AR in the Social Sciences has been widely misunderstood and misused by researchers, educators and practitioners. The integration of Action Learning with Action Research deepens understanding and contributes to new knowledge about the theory, practice and processes of Action Learning (AL) and Action Research (AR). It clarifies what constitutes AL/AR in its many forms and what it is not. AL and AR enable participants to effectively approach increasingly complex global challenges confronting humankind in this twenty-first century, collectively achieve practical, emancipatory and sustainable outcomes and generate relevant, authentic theory. This book, written by internationally renowned experts, is the first to provide a comprehensive overview of the main genres and approaches of AL/AR. They explain the genre of their expertise, reflect on their rich experiences with it, and consider both the common features shared across the AL/AR paradigm and what is distinctive about the particular genre they overview. This book discusses the what, why and how of their particular approach and will prove invaluable for researchers and practitioners alike.
The Action Research Guidebook by
This book is organized around Richard Sagor′s four-stage process developed from his many years of experience training hundreds of educators. The four stages are: }} clarifying visions/targets }} articulating theory }} implementing action and collecting data }} reflecting on data and planning informed action The book includes numerous tables, charts, handouts, forms, and worksheets to demystify and simplify the action research process. Short examples drawn from the author′s experience working on-one-on with teachers on their action research projects are also included, from raising reading proficiency to increasing the problem solving capacity of faculty members. The author shows how teacher teams can work collaboratively to identify and research problems related to the school′s goals. Appropriate for use by individual teachers and teacher teams, as well as by pre-service teachers in teacher education courses. Headteachers, counsellors, and other educators will also find the action research process useful for school improvement
Action Research in Organizations by
Who decides to initiate change processes in organizations? Who sets the goals? What does it mean for employees to participate in change processes? The book examines organizational change processes based on collaboration between employers, employees and action researchers in Europe and the U.S. in the later part of the 20th century. The authors offer important insights into participation and change in organizations for researchers and practitioners by identifying dilemmas and paradoxes, conflicting interests and exercising of power.
Action Research in South African Education : A Critical Praxis by
In an increasingly complex and challenging profession, the need for teachers, administrators and school systems to become involved in professional development activities is ever present. Action Research in South African Education: A Critical Praxis is a culmination of varying reflective accounts Professor Makoelle made as a teacher, an academic and a devoted action researcher. The book delves into his beliefs, attitudes and conceptions about the evolving discourse of Action Research in education and how it could be operationalised in varying educative contexts. The conversation fosters openness toward new ideas and learning new innovations, as well as giving teachers ownership of effective practices. It ultimately provides teachers with the necessary skills, knowledge, and focus to engage in meaningful inquiry about their professional practice.
Action Research in the Classroom by
Action Research in the Classroom: Helping Teachers Assess and Improve their Work guides teacher-researchers through the process of using action research in their practice to improve students' learning and teachers' teaching. The book uses actual classroom examples to assist aspiring, new, and veteran teachers and those who support them (administrators, department chairpersons, and mentors) in using a six-step process L.E.A.D.E.R. to successfully accomplish and share research conducted by actual classroom teachers. Each step in the L.E.A.D.E.R. process -- (1) L=Look at the Problem, (2) E=Examine what we know; (3) A=Acquire knowledge of school problem-solving; (4) D=Devise a plan for improvement; (5) E=Execute the plan; and, (6) R=Repeat steps and processes as needed -- can guide teachers, administrators, and even parents - and students - in solving their own problems and improving their learning and teaching.
Advances in Interpreting Research by
With the growing emphasis on scholarship in interpreting, this collection tackles issues critical to the inquiry process -- from theoretical orientations in Interpreting Studies to practical considerations for conducting a research study. As a landmark volume, it charts new territory by addressing a range of topics germane to spoken and signed language interpreting research. Both provocative and pragmatic, this volume captures the thinking of an international slate of interpreting scholars including Daniel Gile, Franz Pöchhacker, Debra Russell, Barbara Moser-Mercer, Melanie Metzger, Cynthia Roy, Minhua Liu, Jemina Napier, Lorraine Leeson, Jens Hessmann, Graham Turner, Eeva Salmi, Svenja Wurm, Rico Peterson, Robert Adam, Christopher Stone, Laurie Swabey and Brenda Nicodemus. Experienced academics will find ideas to stimulate their passion and commitment for research, while students will gain valuable insights within its pages. This new volume is essential reading for anyone involved in interpreting research.
Collocations and Action Research by
Collocations and Action Research is a thorough investigation of both the theory and practice behind improving second language learners' vocabulary and fluency through the teaching of multi-word units of language. Taking these collocations as its focus, this book provides a clear and in-depth description of the cognitive processing language learners go through when producing speech in relation to them. Using the findings of a two-year action research study into improving learners' spoken fluency, Joshua Brook Antle also explores the practical sides of collocations, explaining how the research study was constructed and conducted. Orientating the findings within the larger field of second language acquisition, especially within the L2 classroom, the practical applications of the findings are then presented through a series of pedagogical tasks all focusing on collocations and productive fluency.Providing a template for how to conduct an action research study using both qualitative and quantitative research techniques, Collocations and Action Research will appeal to researchers interested in vocabulary and spoken fluency, as well as language instructors wanting to better understand the nature of vocabulary and spoken discourse.
Conducting Action Research for Business and Management Students by
In Conducting Action Research, Coghlan and Shani explain how action research differs from more detached research methods and provides expert guidance on how to engage effectively with it, helping the reader to complete both a successful research project and produce findings that are useful in an organizational context. Ideal for Business and Management students reading for a Master's degree, each book in the series may also serve as reference books for doctoral students and faculty members interested in the method. Part of SAGE′s Mastering Business Research Methods, conceived and edited by Bill Lee, Mark N. K. Saunders and Vadake K. Narayanan and designed to support researchers by providing in-depth and practical guidance on using a chosen method of data collection or analysis.
Educational research : quantitative, qualitative, and mixed approaches by
Assuming no prior knowledge,Educational Researchby R. Burke Johnson and Larry Christensen offers a comprehensive, easily digestible introductory research methods text for undergraduate and graduate students. Readers will develop an understanding of the multiple research methods and strategies used in education and related fields; how to read and critically evaluate published research; and the ability to write a proposal, construct a questionnaire, and conduct an empirical research study on their own. Students rave about the clarity of this best seller and its usefulness for their studies, enabling them to become critical consumers and users of research.
Getting Started in Interpreting Research by
What sets this collection apart in the literature is its direct, personal style. Experienced supervisors as well as younger scholars speak to beginning researchers in interpreting, and more generally in Translation Studies. The contributors, who are very familiar with the difficulties beginners experience, focus on their needs and anticipate their questions. They reflect, analyze and advise, with illustrations from their own experience. Issues discussed include topic selection, project planning, time management, 'doctoral stress', the use of the literature, critical reading and book reviews, supervisor-supervisee relations, institutional frameworks for research training, issues in empirical research, theoretical analysis, and the role of small projects. Readers will thus find answers to many personal, institutional and methodological questions, which are common to beginners in many disciplines and in many paradigms.
Learning Communities in Educational Partnerships by
Learning Communities in Educational Partnerships shows how theory and practice come into lived interplay in social spaces where theory informs practice and practice turns into theory. Drawing on their own experiences of becoming a learning community, the authors introduce the ideas underpinning self-study action research. Through a series of first-hand practitioner accounts, the chapters describe and explain how to engage in processes of inquiry and establish learning communities, how to make space for professional conversations and how to develop living theories from within daily practice. The book shows how meaningful change can take place, both in educational improvements and also in more transformative professional learning, when educators are encouraged to draw on their own personal educational values and share their idea
Practical Action Research by
"Schoolwide renewal and improvement occurs only when a group of dedicated professionals decide to study and reflect on what they are doing and how it affects the students in their school and classrooms. Schmuck provides multiple examples of how school professionals use action research in their quest for improving the school experience for children."-Shaneen Bell, President and CEOExchange Pointe InternationalCreate alternative ways for enhancing classroom practices and boosting student achievement!Action research can make a critical difference in helping educators collect objective data on their own practices and transform challenges into solutions. This new edition of a landmark collection reflects the editor's extensive educational experience, recent developments in action research, and the voices of some of the best and brightest in the field. This updated volume helps educators navigate the action research process by offering:Articles by experts-including seven new contributions-that help educators define, understand, implement, and study action researchCase studies that demonstrate how the multiple forms of action research are used in real-world situations Discussions of the main models of action research, including proactive, responsive, and cooperative approachesAn exploration of methods needed for gathering reliable objective dataWell suited for individual reflection, group study, or staff development, the second edition of Practical Action Research is a valuable and much-needed contribution to the ongoing quest to strengthen educational outcomes for all schools.
Research Methods in Sign Language Studies by
Research Methods in Sign Language Studies is a landmark work on sign language research, which spans the fields of linguistics, experimental and developmental psychology, brain research, and language assessment. Examines a broad range of topics, including ethical and political issues, key methodologies, and the collection of linguistic, cognitive, neuroscientific, and neuropsychological data Provides tips and recommendations to improve research quality at all levels and encourages readers to approach the field from the perspective of diversity rather than disability Incorporates research on sign languages from Europe, Asia, North and South America, and Africa Brings together top researchers on the subject from around the world, including many who are themselves deaf
Research Methods in Social Relations by
Research Methods in Social Relations, 8th Edition, features a series of updates and revisions in its comprehensive introduction to current research methods in the social and behavioural sciences. Offers comprehensive coverage of a wide variety of traditional and topical research methods Addresses many newer research approaches such as propensity score matching, mixed methods designs, and confirmatory factor analysis Written to be accessible to a range of social and behavioural science disciplines, including public health, political science, sociology, and psychology Includes new chapters that engage readers in critical thinking about the processes involved in building sustainable partnerships in field and community settings The Companion website includes an array of resources for Instructors, including Test Banks, Power Point lecture slides, discussion questions and exercises This new edition is the much-anticipated follow-up to 2001's seventh edition by Hoyle, Harris and Judd
The SAGE Handbook of Educational Action Research by
This handbook presents and critiques predominant and emergent traditions of Educational Action Research internationally. Now a prominent methodology, Educational Action Research is well suited to exploring, developing and sustaining change processes both in classrooms and whole organisations such as schools, Departments of Education, and many segments of universities. The handbook contains theoretical and practical based chapters by highly respected scholars whose work has been seminal in building knowledge and expertise in the field. It also contains chapters exemplifying the work of prominent practitioner and community groups working outside universities. The Editors provide an introduction and conclusion, as well as an opening chapter which charts the historical development of action research and provides an analysis of its underlying theories. The handbook is organized into four sections, each beginning with a short introduction: - Action research methodology: diversity of rationales and practices - Professional: Knowledge production, staff development, and the status of educators - Personal: Self-awareness, development and identity - Political: Popular knowledge, difference, and frameworks for change This is a key resource for scholars and graduate students at doctors and masters levels, as well as school leaders and administrators. Susan Noffke is Associate Professor of Curriculum & Instruction at the University of Illinois - Urbana/Champaign and co-editor with R.B. Stevenson of Educational Action Research (Teachers College Press, 1995). She taught at the primary school level for a decade, and has led masters and doctoral level courses in action research for the past 20 years. She continues to work with many collaborative projects with schools and school districts. Bridget Somekh is Professor of Educational Research at Manchester Metropolitan University, UK. She is a founder editor of the Educational Action Research journal and has been a co-ordinator of the Collaborative Action Research Network (CARN) for many years. She is co-editor of Research Methods in the Social Sciences (SAGE: 2005) and author of Action Research: a Methodology for Change and Development (Open University Press: 2006).
The Wiley Handbook of Action Research in Education by
Comprehensive overview of the theoretical, conceptual, and applied/practical presentations of action research as it is found and conducted solely in educational settings The Wiley Handbook of Action Research in Education is the first book to offer theoretical, conceptual, and applied/practical presentations of action research as it is found and conducted solely in educational settings. Covering primarily PK-12 educational settings, the book utilizes a cross-section of international authors and presentations to provide global perspectives on action research in education. Part I of The Wiley Handbook of Action Research in Education focuses on various foundational aspects and issues related to action research. Part II is centered on chapters that present theories and principles that help to guide the use of action research in educational contexts. Part III focuses on specific applications of educational action research in practice. Part IV provides an outlet for seven educational practitioners to share their experiences in conducting action research. Each of these authors also discusses the importance and value that action research has had on him or her, both professionally and personally. Discuss action research in PK-12, as well as in higher education settings The first book to focus on the importance and application of action research exclusively in educational settings Offers world perspectives on action research in education Written by a team of international scholars The Wiley Handbook of Action Research in Education is an excellent book for advanced undergraduate students, graduate students, and scholars studying and/or researching educational action research.
Have you ever felt stressed about school, relationships, or life in general? You can breathe a sigh of relief because Wellness for Interpreters will arm you with coping mechanisms to better approach the various domains of your life. This course will allow you to understand the “self” by identifying your strengths and weaknesses, your capacities and limitations. This course is about finding harmony within. Welcome to your personal journey to become a healthier and better version of yourself.
The 7 secrets to change : for your total health and wellness by 
Complete wellness by
Neal's Yard Remedies Complete Wellness delivers a head to toe guide to healing for every part of your body. Targeted instructions allow you to tap into the restorative powers of herbs and plants and their therapeutic essential oils and use tried and tested, centuries' old herbal remedies to treat a raft of common ailments. As well as healing remedies, the book explores the key building blocks for optimizing health and wellbeing in each part of the body, pointing you to the top herbs, nutrients, and essential oils each area needs not only to stay well, but to reach the very peak of wellness whether to boost circulation, enjoy glowing skin, balance gut flora, or maximize energy levels. Guidance is given on incorporating ingredients into everyday regimes, helping you to stay in tip-top health. Guided by the experts at Neal's Yard Remedies, follow step-by-step demonstrations on how to blend your own teas and tinctures; concoct all-natural-ingredient creams; create therapeutic aromatherapy oil blends; discover delicious recipes for sustainable wellness; and master a range of other practical techniques and tips for lifelong well-being. Make the most of nature's resources with Neal's Yard Remedies Complete Wellness.
Concepts of Fitness and Wellness: a Comprehensive Lifestyle Approach, Loose Leaf Edition by
Concepts of Fitness & Wellness provides readers with the self-management skills necessary to adopt a healthy lifestyle. A pioneering text in the field, Concepts of Fitness & Wellness is designed to deliver a comprehensive text and digital program that continues to be at the cutting edge of physical activity and health promotion, empowering students to make positive steps towards developing a lifelong commitment to being active. The fully updated eleventh edition is supported by Connect, the only integrated digital learning environment that empowers students by continuously adapting to deliver precisely what they need, when they need it, so that your class time is more engaging and effective. Connect is the only integrated learning system that empowers students by continuously adapting to deliver precisely what they need, when they need it, and how they need it, so that your class time is more engaging and effective.
Corporate Wellness Programs by
Employee well-being and organizational success are closely linked. In light of this connection, corporate wellness programs have emerged in recent decades as a way to achieve organizational health and success.Corporate Wellness Programs offers contributions from international experts, examining the planning, implementation and evaluation of wellness initiatives in organizations, and offering guidance on how to introduce these programs in to the workplace. Previous research evidence surrounding corporate wellness programs is reviewed, to illustrate reduced health care costs, higher levels of employee well-being, greater work engagement, higher levels of performance, and financial gains on investment costs. Organizational case studies in various countries are explored, highlighting best practice and lessons to be learned from them. This book offers a unique addition to employee and organizational health research, emphasizing both theoretical and empirical examples of best-practice corporate wellness programs.Researchers and academics interested in individual and organizational health will find this book a valuable resource and reference point. Managers and consultants working with organizational health will benefit from the best practice recommendations presented in the book.
Creating Healthy Workplaces by
The contributions in Creating Healthy Workplaces include a number of interventions that relate the efforts undertaken by researchers and organizations together, to reduce stress and improve the mental and physical health of employees through positive change initiatives. Those working in the field of occupational stress have received criticism that too much emphasis has been placed on negative issues and that positive initiatives have been largely ignored. With the growing influence of the positive movement, this book explores the implications of using a positive approach as opposed to a stress management one and compares the types of interventions they each require. From a positive perspective, there is a need to understand the characteristics of healthy, thriving, and flourishing people and organizations. This book explores the implications of using a positive approach as opposed to a stress management one. Some of the interventions described in Creating Healthy Workplaces target individuals and their attitudes and behaviours, others target workplace relationships, work units and the wider organization. Outcomes such as reduced occurrences of smoking, obesity, depression, elevated blood pressure, accidents and workplace injuries, presenteeism, absence and staff turnover are reported. The factors associated with the success of these interventions are identified and advice is given as to how interested individuals and organizations might proceed to develop worksite interventions on their own.
Deafness in mind : working psychologically with deaf people across the lifespan by
Deafness in Mind presents the varying theoretical approaches to thepsychology of deafness: systemic, Cognitive behavioural,psychodynamic, wellness and cognitive neuropsychological models.Uniquely, clinical theory and practice are linked to provide acomprehensive understanding of the deaf mental health field. Forthe first time, the controversial subject of cochlear implants isdiscussed in the same book as the mental health of culturally Deafpeople. Similarly, prevention is considered alongside prevalence,and the book appraises the various political views where otherbooks have taken a single political view. Deafness in Mind has drawn contributing authors from those withthe authority of years of clinical experience as well as those withnew ideas. Current services and new directions in the field arebrought together to provide a definitative text in the psychologyof mental health and deafness.
Fitness and Wellness by
Create your own personal fitness and wellness success stories with Hoeger and Hoeger's FITNESS AND WELLNESS. This text helps you take control of your personal fitness and wellness by providing current, practical information and tips that you can incorporate to start living a healthier life. This succinct nine-chapter text offers balanced coverage on health-related physical fitness components with valuable information on wellness. The authors emphasize motivation and behavior modification to help you make a constant and deliberate effort to stay fit and realize your highest potential for good health. Use the interactive study tools online to extend your learning beyond the text. FITNESS AND WELLNESS offers you the most current coverage and practical guidelines to take charge of your health.
An invitation to health : your life, your future by
From physical and mental to social and sexual, Dianne Hales' AN INVITATION TO HEALTH: YOUR LIFE, YOUR FUTURE helps students achieve a healthier lifestyle now and in the future. The 18th Edition covers new research on such topics as happiness and health, current statistics on life expectancy and death rates, mindfulness for college students, 2015-2020 USDA Dietary Guidelines for Americans, immunization, sleep habits, stress levels, safe sex practices, healthier fast-food choices, substance abuse, dubious diets, fitness monitors and e-cigarettes. It also addresses healthy living on a budget, preventive measures and practical strategies that turn small changes into big benefits.
Lifestyle Wellness Coaching by
Lifestyles have changed dramatically over the past quarter century. Along with these changes come exciting opportunities, including new career paths in the professional domain of health and wellness coaching. Centered on an evidence-based process for guiding change, Lifestyle Wellness Coaching, Third Edition With Web Resource, offers a systematic approach to helping clients achieve enduring changes in their personal health and wellness behaviors through a supportive and forward-moving coaching relationship. Lifestyle Wellness Coaching has been thoroughly revised and updated to keep pace with the rapidly evolving field of wellness coaching. It is complemented by discussions, case studies, reflective opportunities, and practical aids and engages readers through multiple approaches to learning: * The reader is encouraged to gauge comprehension and application of the content by reflecting on personal experiences within the context of coaching. * Sample dialogues offer real-world examples of coaching situations and strategies. * The International Coach Federation's 11 core competencies are thoroughly examined to prepare readers for certification in the profession of coaching. * A new web resource houses easy-to-use forms, plans, and assessments that professionals can use immediately with clients. Lifestyle Wellness Coaching examines real coaching conversations to assess key considerations, such as the types of questions to ask, how to provide feedback effectively, and how to facilitate action planning. The text presents communication strategies to motivate, guide, inform, and support clients' processes toward personal change with a holistic approach. It addresses boundaries of care and advice appropriate to coaching relationships. Other issues explored include developing a trusting relationship, creating goals that are aligned with coaching processes, unblocking clients' energy and discovering resources for change, and generating forward movement through the skillful use of the International Coach Federation's 11 core competencies. Lifestyle Wellness Coaching introduces readers to models that clearly identify clients' progress through the stages of change. First, the text explores the popular transtheoretical model (TTM) of health-related behavior change and its delineation of six stages of clients' readiness to change. The discussion of TTM includes strategies appropriate to clients in various stages of readiness to change. The text also presents the learning-through-change model (LCM), revealing the deep layers beneath each phase of client movement toward change. Readers are offered a map for coaching clients toward goal achievement. The authors' unique flow model of coaching illustrates how professional coaches can help clients navigate the sometimes turbulent events of a person's life in order to change habitual patterns of behavior. The companion web resource offers a complete kit of assessment tools to help establish a strong framework for successful coaching. A welcome packet, coaching readiness index, introductory session form, and between-sessions questionnaire benefit both the professional and client in laying the groundwork. Other supplemental resources, such as a social and emotional intelligence assessment and a goal setting form, support the journey. Lifestyle Wellness Coaching, Third Edition, is the definitive resource for those seeking to embrace wellness coaching and propel clients to healthy, effective change.
Lifetime Physical Fitness and Wellness by
LIFETIME PHYSICAL FITNESS AND WELLNESS, 13th Edition, provides students with current information, tools, and guidelines to implement and adhere to a lifetime physical fitness and wellness program. Throughout the text, Werner W. K. Hoeger and Sharon A. Hoeger encourage students to take a critical look at their current behaviors in order to help them identify and abandon negative habits and adopt and maintain healthy behaviors. The authors' emphasis throughout the book is on teaching students how to take control of their personal lifestyles and make changes to promote overall health and wellness.In order to achieve this goal, the authors personalize the information to show students how content relates to their individual lives and provide easy steps to help students begin the process of behavior change. The unique design of this text integrates activities throughout each chapter, which allows students to learn core concepts and immediately apply their knowledge through self-review and application activities. In addition, LIFETIME PHYSICAL FITNESS AND WELLNESS is part of an integrated textbook program that extends beyond the text to online resources that further students' understanding through personalized learning plans, online labs, and tracking their behavior change progress.
Personal Wellness Guide for Hales' an Invitation to Health: Choosing to Change, Brief Edition, 8th by
This powerful workbook includes a brief discussion of the current theories behind making positive lifestyle changes, along with exercises to help you make those changes in life.
Principles and Labs for Fitness and Wellness by
Exercise, eat right, and thrive! PRINCIPLES AND LABS FOR FITNESS AND WELLNESS, 13th Edition challenges you to meet your personal fitness and wellness goals, and perhaps teach others to do the same. Fully updated by fitness experts Hoeger and Hoeger, this text emphasizes behavior modification through sensible approaches and provides a strong focus on the practical ways you can incorporate changes into in your daily life. Student friendly chapters include supporting features such as "My Profile," "Behavior Modification Planning," and "FAQs," all designed to highlight important practices. PRINCIPLES AND LABS FOR FITNESS AND WELLNESS, 13th Edition also offers interactive learning tools such as exercise videos, online labs, and self-assessments that bring topics to life and help you maintain your new healthy lifestyle. Available with InfoTrac® Student Collections at http://gocengage.com/infotrac.
Reading Between the Signs by
Provides a new perspective on American Deaf culture, a unique culture that is not widely understood. With collaboration of three distinguished Deaf consultants, Mindess explores the implications of cultural differences at the intersection of the Deaf and hearing worlds. Used in interpreter training programs worldwide.
Wellness issues for higher education : a guide for student affairs and higher education professionals by
Wellness Issues for Higher Education is an essential resource that addresses a range of student wellness issues confronting professionals in college and university settings. Organized around five dimensions of Wellness--Emotional, Social, Intellectual, Physical, and Spiritual--this book comprehensively covers key topics that contribute to students' success in college. Each topical chapter includes proactive wellness advice, and is designed to prepare the reader to better understand the facts, issues, and strategies appropriate for addressing the issue. Each Chapter Features: Background information, theory, and research Historical and emerging issues Common questions, controversies, challenging situations, and misconceptions Practical applications for the campus This practical guide prepares practitioners to understand and deal with the wellness and health promotion issues contributing to their students' overall success and well-being. Armed with this valuable resource, higher education and student affairs professionals can work to improve academic performance, retention, satisfaction, and quality of life. This thorough resource will guide those working at any level in residence life, student activities, orientation, health education, student leadership, advising, instruction, and other areas of student development.
Workplace Wellness That Works by
A smarter framework for designing more effective workplacewellness programs Workplace Wellness That Works provides a freshperspective on how to promote employee well-being in the workplace.In addressing the interconnectivity between wellness andorganizational culture, this book shows you how to integratewellness into your existing employee development strategy in morecreative, humane, and effective ways. Based on the latest researchand backed by real-world examples and case studies, this guideprovides employers with the tools they need to start making adifference in their employees' health and happiness, and promotingan overall culture of well-being throughout the organization.You'll find concrete, actionable advice for tackling the massiveobstacle of behavioral change, and learn how to design andimplement an approach that can most benefit your organization. Promoting wellness is a good idea. Giving employees theinspiration and tools they need to make changes in their lifestylesis a great idea. But the billion-dollar question is: what dothey want, what do they need, and how do we implement programs tohelp them without causing more harm than good? WorkplaceWellness That Works shows you how to assess your organization'sneeds and craft a plan that actually benefits employees. Build an effective platform for well-being Empower employees to make better choices Design and deliver the strategy that your organizationneeds Drive quantifiable change through more creativeimplementation Today's worksite wellness industry represents a miasma ofcompeting trends, making it nearly impossible to come away withtangible solutions for real-world implementation. Harnessing abroader learning and development framework, Workplace WellnessThat Works skips the fads and shows you how to design a smarterstrategy that truly makes a difference in employees'lives?and your company's bottom line.
Have you ever felt stressed about school, relationships, or life in general? You can breathe a sigh of relief because Wellness for Interpreters will arm you with coping mechanisms to better approach the various domains of your life. This course will allow you to understand the “self” by identifying your strengths and weaknesses, your capacities and limitations. This course is about finding harmony within. Welcome to your personal journey to become a healthier and better version of yourself.
Breaking Free from Depression by
When it comes to treating depression, one size definitely doesn't fit all. How do you find the science-based treatment that will work for you? What can you do to restore the fighting spirit and motivation that are so essential for overcoming this illness? Leading psychiatrist-researcher Jesse Wright and his daughter, Laura McCray, a family physician, have helped many thousands of depressed patients discover effective pathways to wellness. Here they describe powerful treatment tools and present a flexible menu of self-help strategies you can try today or turn to in the future. Dozens of reproducible worksheets and forms are included for you to complete in the book or download and print for repeated use. Learn proven ways to break the cycle of negative thinking, restore energy and a sense of well-being, strengthen your relationships, and make informed decisions about medications. You can beat depression and keep your life headed in a positive direction. This book shows how.
Creating Healthy Workplaces by
The contributions in Creating Healthy Workplaces include a number of interventions that relate the efforts undertaken by researchers and organizations together, to reduce stress and improve the mental and physical health of employees through positive change initiatives. Those working in the field of occupational stress have received criticism that too much emphasis has been placed on negative issues and that positive initiatives have been largely ignored. With the growing influence of the positive movement, this book explores the implications of using a positive approach as opposed to a stress management one and compares the types of interventions they each require. From a positive perspective, there is a need to understand the characteristics of healthy, thriving, and flourishing people and organizations. This book explores the implications of using a positive approach as opposed to a stress management one. Some of the interventions described in Creating Healthy Workplaces target individuals and their attitudes and behaviours, others target workplace relationships, work units and the wider organization. Outcomes such as reduced occurrences of smoking, obesity, depression, elevated blood pressure, accidents and workplace injuries, presenteeism, absence and staff turnover are reported. The factors associated with the success of these interventions are identified and advice is given as to how interested individuals and organizations might proceed to develop worksite interventions on their own.
Health and wellness by
This book guides readers in making healthy choices about hygiene, diet, exercise, and medical care. They present easy-to-understand information about health-care coverage options and offer overviews of the types of available medical care, from general practitioners to alternative medicine and mental health providers.
Health and Wellness Concerns for Racial, Ethnic, and Sexual Minorities by
Minority status in the United States often accompanies diminished access to education, employment, and subsequently health care. This volume explores factors that have contributed to health disparities among racial, ethnic, and sexual minorities. Focused on developing strategies for understanding these disparities and promoting wellness in minority communities, the authors highlight social forces such as racism, ethnocentrism, sexism, and homophobia, which continue to influence not only access to and quality of care but also perception and trust of health care professionals. The authors identify several common themes, including the importance of communication, intentional and unintentional discriminatory structures, and perhaps most significantly, the role of culturally relevant learning sites. This is the 142nd volume of the Jossey Bass series New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education. Noted for its depth of coverage, it explores issues of common interest to instructors, administrators, counselors, and policymakers in a broad range of education settings, such as colleges and universities, extension programs, businesses, libraries, and museums.
Promoting Health and Wellness in Underserved Communities by
Starting from the premise that our health status, vulnerability to accidents and disease, and life spans - as individuals and communities - are determined by the organization, delivery, and financing (or lack thereof) of health care, this book explores how educators and community caretakers teach the complex web of inter-connection between the micro level of individual health and well-being and the macro level of larger social structures. Through the lenses of courses in anthropology, ESL, gerontology, management information systems, nursing, nutrition, psychology, public health, and sociology, the contributors offer examples of intergenerational and interdisciplinary practice, and share cutting-edge academic creativity to model how to employ community service learning to promote social change.
Self-Care for Clinicians in Training by
Self-care for Clinicians in Training: A Guide to Psychological Wellness for Graduate Students in Psychology assists readers in recognizing the challenges and stressors common to being a graduate student and instructs them in maintaining a career-long lifestyle of self-care. Successfully navigating graduate school requires much more than completing coursework and clinical experiences; graduate students in psychology make countless sacrifices and dedicate what may feel like a never-ending amount of time and energy in the pursuit of professional training. As such, many students put their own needs and well-being on hold or overlook them entirely. This can negatively impact coursework, clinical work, as well as one's relationships and health. This book teaches how to recognize risk factors that contribute to problems with psychological and emotional functioning and highlights preventative and reparative strategies that foster a lifestyle of self-care. The authors also encourage readers to consider self-care and psychological wellness beyond themselves, expanding to monitoring the well-being of peers and establishing cultures of self-care within their training programs. This book will be an essential resource to students in psychology graduate programs as well as those across the mental health professions
Wellness Beyond Words by
The delivery of health care can present a minefield of communication problems, particularly in cross-cultural settings where patients and health practitioners come from dissimilar cultures and speak different languages. Responding to the need for in-depth ethnographic studies in cultural and communicative competence, this anthropological account of Maya language use in health care in highland Guatemala explores some of the cultural and linguistic factors that can complicate communication in the practice of medicine. Bringing together the analytical tools of linguistic and medical anthropology, T. S. Harvey offers a rare comparative glimpse into Maya intra-cultural therapeutic (Maya healer/Maya wellness-seeker) and cross-cultural biomedical (Ladino practitioner/Maya patient) interactions. In Maya medical encounters, the number of participants, the plurality of their voices, and the cooperative linguistic strategies that they employ to compose illness narratives challenge conventional analytical techniques and call into question some basic assumptions about doctor-patient interactions. Harvey's innovative approach, combining the "ethnography of polyphony" and its complementary technique, the "polyphonic score," reveals the complex interplay of speaking and silence during medical encounters, sociolinguistic patterns that help us avoid clinical complications connected to medical miscommunication.
Wellness Counseling by
This innovative text presents a comprehensive review of the theoretical and empirical support for a wellness approach to counseling with current techniques for client assessment, case conceptualization, treatment planning, and intervention. The authors provide holistic strategies for wellness promotion with children, adolescents, and young, midlife, and older adults, as well as in counseling with groups, couples, and families. Each chapter includes reflection questions, learning activities, and resources to deepen readers' understanding of the content and application to practice. Wellness boosters offer quick methods for clients and counselors to increase their domain-specific and overall well-being. In addition, experienced counselors share their personal experiences implementing wellness interventions in "Practitioner Spotlight" vignettes. A chapter on counselor self-care completes the book. Requests for digital versions from ACA can be found on www.wiley.com. To purchase print copies, please visit the ACA website Reproduction requests for material from boks published by ACA should be directed to permissions@counseling.org
Women's health and wellness across the lifespan by
Women's Health and Wellness Across the Lifespan offers the innovative approach to care that today's patients often demand, combining traditional medicine and alternative approaches. It covers women's wellness care and specific issues during puberty through young adulthood, midlife, and old age. In addition, it provides information essential to enabling your patients to achieve their full health potential, covering wellness for special populations, physical activity and nutrition, oral health, herbal medicine and pharmacologic approaches, methods to promote healing, healthy sleep, and peaceful dying.
Written Communication Skills for Interpreters
“Don’t underestimate the value of a good, well-rounded education.” - Jack Hoza, The Interpreter’s Guide to Life.
Interpreters are expected to perform varied language services and functions both by the Deaf and hearing communities, therefore requiring these professionals to have a varied set of language skills. The ability to analyze meaning and knowledge of terminology rely on these language domains; i.e. speaking/signing, reading, listening and writing. In this course focus will be on developing your fluency and registry of written English as an expression of your thought process, which are necessary to enhance your message analysis within the interpreting process.
100 Things Every Presenter Needs to Know about People by
Every day around the world millions of presentations are given, with millions of decisions hanging in the balance as a result. Do you know the science behind giving a powerful and persuasive presentation? This book reveals what you need to know about how people listen, how people decide, and how people react so that you can learn to create more engaging presentations. No matter what your current skill level, whether beginner or polished, this book will guide you to the next level, teaching you how to improve your delivery, stance, eye contact, voice, materials, media, message, and call to action. Learn to increase the effectiveness of your own presentations by finding the answers to questions like these: What grabs and holds attention during a presentation? How do you choose the best media to use? What makes the content of a presentation stick? How do people react to your voice, posture, and gestures? How do people respond to the flow of your message? How do you motivate people to take action? These are just a few of the questions that the book answers in its deep-dive exploration of what you need to know about people to create a compelling presentation.
Applying Communication Theory for Professional Life by
Updated Edition of Bestseller! Applying Communication Theory for Professional Life is the first communication theory textbook to provide practical material for career-oriented students. Featuring new case studies, updated examples, and the latest research, the Fourth Edition of this bestseller introduces communication theory in a way that helps students understand its importance to careers in communication and business. Real-world case studies within each chapter are designed to illustrate the application of theory in a variety of professional settings. Give your students the SAGE edge! SAGE edge offers a robust online environment featuring an impressive array of free tools and resources for review, study, and further exploration, keeping both instructors and students on the cutting edge of teaching and learning. Learn more at edge.sagepub.com/dainton4e. Available with Perusall--an eBook that makes it easier to prepare for class! Perusall is an award-winning eBook platform featuring social annotation tools that allow students and instructors to collaboratively mark up and discuss their SAGE textbook. Backed by research and supported by technological innovations developed at Harvard University, this process of learning through collaborative annotation keeps your students engaged and makes teaching easier and more effective. Learn more.
The College Writer : a Guide to Thinking, Writing, and Researching (with 2019 APA Updates) by
Combining streamlined instruction in the writing process with an accessible style, THE COLLEGE WRITER is your all-in-one writing resource. Throughout the text, samples of student and professional writing in different disciplines and from different career paths highlight important features of effective writing and help you craft papers for all of your courses. A research guide, including the most current MLA and APA documentation guidelines, helps you meet all the expectations of your academic projects. Learning Outcomes in each chapter show you the key concepts you'll be expected to know.
Communication in Our Lives by
COMMUNICATION IN OUR LIVES, 8th Edition, provides everything you need to become a more confident and effective communicator -- in both your personal and professional life. Award-winning teacher Julia T. Wood combines the latest research, theory, and best practices with hands-on skills development. Extremely student friendly, the text features an engaging, personal tone, while frequent Student Voice sections highlight how past students have experienced key communication concepts. In addition to its signature emphasis on social and cultural diversity, the eighth edition includes expanded coverage of digital media, a new focus on health communication, and an early introduction to public speaking -- with plenty of sample speeches. The text also illustrates the importance of effective communication to today's careers. Interactive, online study tools help you put what you learn into practice as you strengthen your interpersonal, group, public speaking, and media skills.
Communication skills handbook : how to succeed in written and oral communication by
This handbook has been designed to assist university students to prepare and present written and verbal material.
COMPACT Literature: Reading, Reacting, Writing, 2016 MLA Update by
Learn how to write about literature the convenient, affordable way! COMPACT LITERATURE: READING, REACTING, WRITING,9E helps you succeed in class and make literature a part of your life. Combining a broad selection of literature with time-proven writing instruction, this reader-friendly text walks you step-by-step through the entire research and writing process, helping you learn to craft literary analyses and arguments. Demonstrating that writing about literature is a process of discovery, examination, and debate, the text includes a comprehensive guide to writing about literature with full coverage of critical thinking and argument. Sampler chapters on fiction, poetry, and drama involve you in the variety and diversity of literature through brief, accessible works that showcase representative selections from four popular contemporary literary subgenres. This edition has been updated to reflect guidelines from the 2016 MLA HANDBOOK, Eighth Edition.
The composition of everyday life : a guide to writing by
Encouraging you to be an inventive thinker and writer, THE COMPOSITION OF EVERYDAY LIFE, Concise, connects the act of writing to your daily life. It helps you to uncover meaning, rethink the world around you and invent ideas. With 36 reading selections by both professional and student writers, this book is designed to help you develop focused and distinctive academic essays. It gives you great preparation for the reading and writing activities you'll encounter throughout your college experience and beyond.
The creative critic : writing as/about practice by
As practitioner-researchers, how do we discuss and analyse our work without losing the creative drive that inspired us in the first place? Built around a diverse selection of writings from leading researcher-practitioners and emerging artists in a variety of fields, The Creative Critic: Writing as/about Practice celebrates the extraordinary range of possibilities available when writing about one¿s own work and the work one is inspired by. It re-thinks the conventions of the scholarly output to propose that critical writing be understood as an integral part of the artistic process, and even as artwork in its own right. Finding ways to make the intangible nature of much of our work ¿count¿ under assessment has become increasingly important in the Academy and beyond. The Creative Critic offers an inspiring and useful sourcebook for students and practitioner-researchers navigating this area. Please see the companion site to the book, http://www.creativecritic.co.uk, where some of the chapters have become unfixed from the page.
Critical Approaches to Creative Writing by
What is creative writing? In Critical Approaches to Creative Writing, Graeme Harper draws on both creative and critical knowledge to look at what creative writing is, and how it can be better understood. Harper explores how to critically consider creative writing in progress, while also tutoring the reader on how to improve their own final results. Throughout the book, Harper explains the nature of 'creative exposition', where creative writing is closely and directly examined in practice as well as through its final results. This book aims to empower you to develop your own critical approaches so that you can consider any creative writing situations you face, develop creative exposition that can be applied to writing problems, provide you with more creative choices and assist you in building your creative writing strengths.
Discipline-Specific Writing by
Discipline-Specific Writing provides an introduction and guide to the teaching of this topic for students and trainee teachers. This book highlights the importance of discipline-specific writing as a critical area of competence for students, and covers both the theory and practice of teaching this crucial topic. With chapters from practitioners and researchers working across a wide range of contexts around the world, Discipline-Specific Writing: Explores teaching strategies in a variety of specific areas including science and technology, social science and business; Discusses curriculum development, course design and assessment, providing a framework for the reader; Analyses the teaching of language features including grammar and vocabulary for academic writing; Demonstrates the use of genre analysis, annotated bibliographies and corpora as tools for teaching; Provides practical suggestions for use in the classroom, questions for discussion and additional activities with each chapter. Discipline-Specific Writing is key reading for students taking courses in English for Specific Purposes, Applied Linguistics, TESOL, TEFL and CELTA.
English skills development by 
Evergreen : a Guide to Writing with Readings by
EVERGREEN, which has brought success to thousands of students across the country, takes you through the writing process step by step. The book provides you with clear instructions, numerous models of student writing, helpful diagrams and visuals, and plenty of practice exercises. This edition includes a new focus on improving your papers through writing better thesis statements. Photographs accompany and enhance the readings and encourage thoughtful consideration of advertisements, websites, and illustrations. Twenty readings at the end of the book, by authors who represent many different backgrounds and ethnic groups, discuss topics as diverse as multitasking, creating apps, preparing for the zombie apocalypse, and more.
Fusion : Integrated Reading and Writing by
Building reading and writing skills doesn't have to be an intimidating experience. Let this book be your guide. FUSION: INTEGRATED READING AND WRITING, Book 1 connects the reading and writing processes so that they reinforce one another. By reading interesting professional and student writing models, you'll learn the vital reading skills to comprehend college-level content. You'll also learn how these skills can help you produce the kinds of thoughtful writing assignments expected of you in your future courses.
How to Write Anything by
A practical guide to everything you'll ever need towrite--at work, at school, and in your personal life. With more than two hundred how-to entries and easy-to-use models organized into three comprehensive sections on work, school, and personal life, How to Write Anything covers a wide range of topics that make it an essential guide for the whole family. You want your boss to fund a special project. How can you write a persuasive email that will win his approval? It's time to apply to college. How can you write an essay that will stand out? The mother of one of your co-workers has died. What's the best way to express your condolences? Grounded in a common-sense approach, friendly and supportive, How to Write Anything is Internet-savvy, with advice throughout about choosing the most appropriate medium for your message: e-mail or pen and paper. At once a how-to, a reference book, and a pioneering guide for writing in a changing world, this is the only writing resource you'll ever need.
Improve Your Global Business English by
In a business world that spans several continents, it is no longer common for everyone to speak English as a first language. Whether you speak English as a first, second or even third language, intercultural business communication means that getting it right first time has never been more important for you and your organization. English can never be standardized in the global and digital marketplace; instead, we can learn how to customize business English according to our own values and culture and communicate successfully across borders. Improve Your Global Business English creates an awareness in the reader of what to avoid and how to ensure that communications are correctly understood. Very readable and hugely instructive, Improve Your Global Business English provides practical self-study with quizzes, activities and worksheets, helping you to fine-tune your written communication. By mastering the basics, defining your readers and tailoring your message to them, understanding the conventions of different media and understanding cultures, you can enhance your reputation as a truly global, modern player in today's marketplace. If you want your messages to be perceived as you intended, to retain customers or to win new ones, Improve Your Global Business English gives you the background you need. Online supporting resources for this book include supplementary video, self-test questions and answers, templates and a case study on going global
Innovative Practices for Teaching Sign Language Interpreters by
Researchers now understand interpreting as an active process between two languages and cultures, with social interaction, sociolinguistics, and discourse analysis as more appropriate theoretical frameworks. Roy's penetrating new book acts upon these new insights by presenting six dynamic teaching practices to help interpreters achieve the highest level of skill. Elizabeth Winston and Christine Monikowski begin by explaining discourse mapping to enable students to develop a mental picture of a message's meaning and the relationships of context, form, and content. Kyra Pollitt discusses critical discourse analysis, to reveal some of the cultural influences that shape a speaker's language use. Melanie Metzger describes preparing role-plays so that students learn to effectively switch back and forth between languages, manage features such as overlap, and make relevant contributions to interaction, such as indicating the source of an utterance. Jeffrey Davis illustrates the translation skills that form the basis,for teaching consecutive and simultaneous interpreting to help students understand the intended meaning of the source message, and also the manner in which listeners understand it. Rico Peterson demonstrates the use of recall protocols, which can be used to teach metacognitive skills and to assess the student's sign language comprehension. Finally, Janice Humphrey details the use of graduation portfolios, a valuable assessment tool used by the faculty to determine a student's level of competency. These imaginative techniques in Innovative Practices promise gains in sign language interpreting that will benefit teachers, students, and clients alike.
Learning from the Learners by
This book turns the traditional approach to student success on its head by examining the learning habits of successful students based on what they have told us about their learning strategies, on what they do to succeed in college, and on the teaching practices they think best foster their learning. This approach is in stark contrast to most recent studies of learning at the college level which focus on what students need to do to succeed, but are written from the point of view of "experts" who provide advice to struggling students. Learning from the Learners: Successful College Students Share Their Effective Learning Habits is based on what "expert" students tell us about what they - as learners - do to succeed. It is grounded in a 10-year study that rests on a rich qualitative data set that includes open-ended survey responses gathered on a term-by term basis and in depth interviews during the freshman and junior years with over 700 students of diverse backgrounds. Additionally, since many students interviewed were the first in their family to attend college and from backgrounds traditionally underserved by higher education, the book's insights will be of particular interest to educators elsewhere who are increasingly expected to help similar students succeed. Themes include student success, academic challenges, diversity, pedagogy, and technology in the classroom. No other book on the widely discussed subject of student success relies on such a wealth of quantitative and qualitative data about what works from the point of view of students themselves.
The Least You Should Know about English : Writing Skills by
Master the basics of writing with THE LEAST YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT ENGLISH: WRITING SKILLS. The book's simple approach (embraced by students for decades) gives you the power to strengthen your writing with clear explanations, real-world samples, and practice from over 200 exercises with full answers that provide instant feedback in all areas of writing. First, you'll learn the basics of word use, sentence structure, and punctuation. You'll also find brief, easy-to-follow guidance for writing all types of paragraphs and essays and for strengthening basic skills (from writing summaries to including quotations) that you will use in college and beyond. Exercises on a variety of topics broaden your knowledge of science, art, history, film, literature, social studies, business, and the media while you improve your English skills. When the course ends, the book becomes a valuable "go-to" reference resource for all your future writing needs.
The Mcgraw-Hill Guide: Writing for College, Writing for Life by
The McGraw-Hill Guide helps students set writing goals, use effective composing strategies to achieve those goals, and assess the effectiveness of their results.
Pathways 2 : reading, writing, and critical thinking by Practicing communication ethics : development, discernment, and decision making by
Practicing Communication Ethics: Development, Discernment, and Decision Making presents a theoretical framework for developing a personal standard of ethics that can be applied in everyday communication situations. This second edition focuses on how the reader's communication matters ethically in cocreating their relationships, family, workgroups, and communities. Through an examination of ethical values including truth, justice, freedom, care, integrity, and honor, the reader can determine which values they are ethically committed to upholding. Blending communication theory, ethics as practical philosophy, and moral psychology, the text presents the practice of communication ethics as part of the lifelong process of personal development and fosters the ability in its readers to approach communication decision making through an ethical lens.
Steps to Writing Well by
Writing well is just a step away! Join the thousands of students who have learned to write well with Jean Wyrick's clear, thoughtful advice. STEPS TO WRITING WELL, Thirteenth Edition, is the ultimate step-by-step guide to writing effective academic essays. Wyrick offers friendly, practical guidelines for composing different types of essays, with discussion of everything from choosing a topic to developing an essay to polishing your prose. New "Visualizing the Process" flowcharts provide at-a-glance summaries of the steps for completing each of the major assignments in the text; many new professional readings and sample essays offer useful models for academic writing and also touch on engaging topics intended to spark ideas for your own writing. A wealth of exercises, group activities, and longer assignments provide additional essay topic ideas and opportunities to apply and review what you are learning. This edition has been updated to reflect guidelines from the 2016 MLA HANDBOOK, Eighth Edition.
Successful Academic Writing by
Using rich examples and engaging pedagogical tools, this book equips students to master the challenges of academic writing in graduate school and beyond. The authors delve into nitty-gritty aspects of structure, style, and language, and offer a window onto the thought processes and strategies that strong writers rely on. Essential topics include how to: identify the audience for a particular piece of writing; craft a voice appropriate for a discipline-specific community of practice; compose the sections of a qualitative, quantitative, or mixed-methods research artic≤ select the right peer-reviewed journal for submitting an artic≤ and navigate the publication process. Readers are also guided to build vital self-coaching skills in order to stay motivated and complete projects successfully. User-Friendly Features *Exercises (with answers) analyzing a variety of texts. *Annotated excerpts from peer-reviewed journal articles. *Practice opportunities that help readers apply the ideas to their own writing projects. *Personal reflections and advice on common writing hurdles. *End-of-chapter Awareness and Action Reminders with clear steps to take.
Successful Writing at Work by
SUCCESSFUL WRITING AT WORK, 11th Edition, is a comprehensive introduction to workplace writing with real-world examples and problems; an easy-to-read style; and thorough guidelines for planning, drafting, revising, editing, formatting, and producing professional documents in the global workplace. After a discussion of the writing process and collaboration, the author explores basic business communications (including e-communications and social media), letters, resumes, and other job search materials; proceeds to how to conduct research and document sources; and ends with guidance on more advanced tasks such as preparing visuals, websites, instructions, procedures, proposals, short and long reports, and presentations. You will learn how to be an effective problem solver at work, understand and write for a global audience, write clear and effective sentences, paragraphs, and documents, and select the best communication technologies to accomplish your goals.
Talk about Writing by
Talk about Writing: The Tutoring Strategies of Experienced Writing Center Tutors offers a book-length empirical study of the discourse between experienced tutors and student writers in satisfactory conferences. It analyzes writing center talk, focusing on tutors' verbal strategies, at the macro- and microlevels. The study details tutors' use of three categories of tutoring strategies--instruction, cognitive scaffolding, and motivational scaffolding--with each chapter of the analysis ending in practical advice about tutor training. The second edition adds to the discussion of research provided in the first edition, maintaining the two previous goals: to provide a theory-based coding scheme for analyzing tutoring strategies according to their potential for instructing and scaffolding student writers' learning, and to demonstrate that analysis on 10 satisfactory conferences conducted by experienced writing center tutors. New to this edition, the authors expand the previous discussion of the coding scheme with additional details about its development. Along with the expanded Chapter 3 about research methods, this edition features new examples from the corpus of conferences and updates the literature review.
Teaching racial literacy : reflective practices for critical writing by
Racial literacy, a collection of discursive and decoding skills that allow individuals to interrogate race and racism as well as representation and personal identity, is vital in a contemporary society that professes meritocracy and post-racialism yet where racism and racialism continue to give rise to fear, violence, and inequity. Because racial literacy requires individuals to develop a cache of discursive tools with which to critically read and respond to particular situations and broader societal practices as well as to investigate the rhetorical practices and power of racial ideology, there is no venue better fitted to the development of racial literacy than the college composition classroom. From the planning stages through the end of the semester, this book provides practical strategies for designing and implementing racial literacy curricula in the composition classroom and across the curriculum. Drawing upon an award-winning three-year ethnographic teacher research project, the author offers curricular suggestions and teacher resources instructors can use to increase student engagement, improve student writing, and help students harness the tools of racial literacy, including awareness of structural inequity and discursive modes with which to respond to social injustice.
Technical Communication by
Join the thousands of students who have used Anderson's TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION: A READER-CENTERED APPROACH to develop the communication skills that employers consistently rank at the very top of the qualifications they seek in college graduates. You will learn to meet the special demands and expectations of the workplace by adapting and building on what you already know about writing and speaking effectively. Chapters guide you through the writing process and teach you how to communicate successfully at work, whether in print, orally, online, or through social media. Throughout, you'll find easy-to-learn guidelines and thoroughly annotated examples of effective communications.
A Troubleshooting Guide for Writers: Strategies and Process by
A Troubleshooting Guide for Writers is a compendium of strategies for handling all aspects of writing, from prewriting through editing. Designed for use independently by students as a resource book or as an in-class text, A Troubleshooting Guide for Writers helps students discover specific strategies for improving their writing processes and for solving specific writing problems. Known for its concise, effective coverage and student-friendly style, A Troubleshooting Guide for Writers offers an exceptional variety of writing strategies for students.
Writing : Ten Core Concepts by
WRITING: TEN CORE CONCEPTS is designed to help you acquire the fundamental understanding that you need to become an effective writer, and to give you practice in applying ten core concepts across different writing tasks. Handy ten-step writing guides use the core concepts to help you effectively manage various types of writing that you will encounter in college and beyond.
Writing Analytically by
Learning to write well requires learning to use writing as a tool to think well--and this book shows you how. WRITING ANALYTICALLY leads you through the process of analysis and synthesis and helps you to generate original, well-developed ideas. Whether you're already a confident writer or someone who feels stranded amidst your notes and sources--waiting for the light bulb of inspiration to rescue you--this book will help you improve your skills. It's built on a series of tools for thinking that proceed step-by-step. Applying the tools will enable you to see more and arrive at better ideas about whatever you're analyzing. You'll learn to determine which details are important in your subject, how to go about figuring out why they are important, and most important, how to talk and write about what they mean.
Writing and Reading Across the Curriculum by
Remaining one of the best-selling interdisciplinary composition texts for over twenty-five years, Writing and Reading Across the Curriculum helps readers learn to write effectively for college.
Written Communication Skills for Interpreters
“Don’t underestimate the value of a good, well-rounded education.” - Jack Hoza, The Interpreter’s Guide to Life.
Interpreters are expected to perform varied language services and functions both by the Deaf and hearing communities, therefore requiring these professionals to have a varied set of language skills. The ability to analyze meaning and knowledge of terminology rely on these language domains; i.e. speaking/signing, reading, listening and writing. In this course focus will be on developing your fluency and registry of written English as an expression of your thought process, which are necessary to enhance your message analysis within the interpreting process.
(Re)designing argumentation writing units by
Writing plays a crucial part in all education disciplines, helping students to communicate their ideas to different audiences and extend their content knowledge. Developed fhttp://player.listenlive.co/35601/enor teachers, curriculum designers, and literacy coaches, this user-friendly guide offers practical recommendations, strategies, and tips for establishing argumentation units of instruction that empower students to artfully and logically present and convince others of their position. Benefits Examine the characteristic elements of an argument and the benefits of teaching students to work through how to structure an argument. Examine an argumentation unit map, its learning goals and guiding questions, and then develop cohesive units based in argumentation writing. Complete exercises throughout the book that will help to create consistent, engaging units that will prepare students to take on any writing challenge that asks them to exercise their persuasive-writing skills. Design a full lesson on argumentation, from establishing author's purpose, to supporting a thesis with evidence, to presenting counter-arguments. Download templates, checklists, rubrics, and student activities useful for designing an argumentation unit and guiding lessons. Contents Introduction Chapter 1: Preparing for Argumentation Chapter 2: Building an Argumentation Unit Map Chapter 3: Formulating a Pre- and Culminating Assessment and Establishing Criteria for Success Chapter 4: Writing Engaging Introductions Using Gradual Release of Responsibility Chapter 5: Designing Lessons Epilogue Appendix A: List of Figures and Tables Appendix B: Professional and Student Resources References and Resources Index
Assessing the Teaching of Writing by
Although fraught with politics and other perils, teacher evaluation can contribute in important, positive ways to faculty development at both the individual and the departmental levels. Yet the logistics of creating a valid assessment are complicated. Inconsistent methods, rater bias, and overreliance on student evaluation forms have proven problematic. The essays in Assessing the Teaching of Writing demonstrate constructive ways of evaluating teacher performance, taking into consideration the immense number of variables involved. Contributors to the volume examine a range of fundamental issues, including the political context of declining state funds in education; growing public critique of the professoriate and demands for accountability resulting from federal policy initiatives like No Child Left Behind; the increasing sophistication of assessment methods and technologies; and the continuing interest in the scholarship of teaching. The first section addresses concerns and advances in assessment methodologies, and the second takes a closer look at unique individual sites and models of assessment. Chapters collectively argue for viewing teacher assessment as a rhetorical practice. Fostering new ways of thinking about teacher evaluation, Assessing the Teaching of Writing will be of great interest not only to writing program administrators but also to those concerned with faculty development and teacher assessment outside the writing program.
Communication in Our Lives by
COMMUNICATION IN OUR LIVES, 8th Edition, provides everything you need to become a more confident and effective communicator -- in both your personal and professional life. Award-winning teacher Julia T. Wood combines the latest research, theory, and best practices with hands-on skills development. Extremely student friendly, the text features an engaging, personal tone, while frequent Student Voice sections highlight how past students have experienced key communication concepts. In addition to its signature emphasis on social and cultural diversity, the eighth edition includes expanded coverage of digital media, a new focus on health communication, and an early introduction to public speaking -- with plenty of sample speeches. The text also illustrates the importance of effective communication to today's careers. Interactive, online study tools help you put what you learn into practice as you strengthen your interpersonal, group, public speaking, and media skills.
Communications Writing and Design by
Communications Writing and Design is an integrated, project-based introduction to effective writing and design across the persuasive domains of communication. Build a strong foundation of core writing and design skills using professionally-designed examples that illustrate and reinforce key principles Readers learn and analyze techniques by creating 15 projects in marketing, advertising, PR, and social media with the help of strategy suggestions, practical tips, and professional production techniques Written by an experienced professional and teacher, with a focus on the cross-disciplinary nature of contemporary communication work Learning is reinforced through a variety of pedagogical features: learning objectives, helpful mnemonics, real-life projects and applications, chapter references for further study, and end-of-chapter summaries and exercises A companion website with multimedia slides, exam questions, learning videos, and design guides provides additional learning tools for students and instructors
Creative Writing and Education by
This book explores creative writing and its various relationships to education through a number of short, evocative chapters written by key players in the field. At times controversial, the book presents issues, ideas and pedagogic practices related to creative writing in and around education, with a focus on higher education.
Creative Writing Pedagogies for the Twenty-First Century by
The creative writing workshop: beloved by some, dreaded by others, and ubiquitous in writing programs across the nation. For decades, the workshop has been entrenched as the primary pedagogy of creative writing. While the field of creative writing studies has sometimes myopically focused on this single method, the related discipline of composition studies has made use of numerous pedagogical models. In Creative Writing Pedagogies for the Twenty-First Century, editors Alexandria Peary and Tom C. Hunley gather experts from both creative writing and composition studies to offer innovative alternatives to the traditional creative writing workshop. Drawing primarily from the field of composition studies--a discipline rich with a wide range of established pedagogies--the contributors in this volume build on previous models to present fresh and inventive methods for the teaching of creative writing. Each chapter offers both a theoretical and a historical background for its respective pedagogical ideas, as well as practical applications for use in the classroom. This myriad of methods can be used either as a supplement to the customary workshop model or as stand-alone roadmaps to engage and reinvigorate the creative process for both students and teachers alike. A fresh and inspiring collection of teaching methods, Creative Writing Pedagogies for the Twenty-First Century combines both conventional and cutting-edge techniques to expand the pedagogical possibilities in creative writing studies.
Discovering Creative Writing by
This is a book about discovering how you do creative writing. How you begin, how you structure, how your writing process works, how a work embodies movement and change, what influences you, and, ultimately, how you end. Discovering Creative Writing points you toward clues that can assist you in understanding your own creative writing as well as the creative writing of others. This book is both a practical guide and a critical examination that empowers the reader to find things out and use that information to develop and support their own creative writing. This book will enable students of creative writing at both undergraduate and postgraduate level to deepen their understanding of their practice, and will be a valuable guide and inspiration for anyone wishing to begin, continue, or improve their writing.
Enhancing writing skills by
Enhancing Writing Skills includes conference presentation papers from the Carnegie Writers, Inc. 1st Annual Conference. The anthology provides published and aspiring writers resources for sustaining, enhancing and evaluating their writing skills. The chapter themes focus on genrebased writing, creativity in writing, mechanics of writing, academic writing, and writing as a business. Enhancing writing skills is beneficial to diverse writers as it impacts the community, working, and educational environments.ANTHOLOGY GOALS AND OBJECTIVES: Enable writers to learn from other writers for the development of networking relationships and professional development. Assist writers with techniques on sustaining their writing talents in their chosen genre or various genres. Provide meaningful publishing resources related to nontraditional and traditional publication venues. Enhance writers understanding for marketing strategies in the 21st century.
Informative Writing, Teacher Guide by
Paths to College and Career Jossey-Bass and PCG Education are proud to bring the Paths to College and Career English Language Arts (ELA) curriculum and professional development resources for grades 6-12 to educators across the country. Originally developed for EngageNY and written with a focus on the shifts in instructional practice and student experiences the standards require, Paths to College and Career includes daily lesson plans, guiding questions, recommended texts, scaffolding strategies and other classroom resources. The Paths Writing Units, Argument Writing, Informative Writing, and Narrative Writing, complement the full instructional program and can also be used independently, providing in-depth writing instruction to support all students in grades 9-12 in meeting grade level standards. To emphasize the relationship between reading and writing, each Writing Unit includes accessible model texts that exemplify key elements of each text type, and source texts that provide a topic for the unit writing assignment. Individual lessons guide students through the writing process, providing instruction on grammar and conventions and highlighting collaboration and reflection as key elements of effective writing. Students' final essays are assessed using a checklist developed by the class over the course of the unit. The organization and distinctive content of the model and source texts in each unit afford teachers the flexibility to implement each unit independently of the others, and at any point during the curriculum. For example, a unit may be implemented to assess students' writing prior to implementation of the standard curriculum, to scaffold writing instruction leading into a writing assessment, or to support struggling writers by addressing gaps in skills as demonstrated in previous assessments. The Paths Writing Units provide teachers with invaluable opportunities to engage students as active participants in their own learning at every stage of the writing process, and to customize instruction to meet the varying needs of all students.
Inspiring writing in primary schools by
The second edition of this popular book includes a new ′charting your progress′ feature for more focused coverage of assessment and more examples of writing for a digital audience. This practical text provides trainee teachers exemplar lessons that encourage purposeful writing across the curriculum alongside a detailed exploration of what makes them good, and the theory behind them. It encourages trainees to consider the teaching of writing critically and to envisage how they can shape lessons for their own teaching. In starting with teaching then exploring theory, the text mirrors how many trainees will learn.
L2 Writing Beyond English by
Most of what we know about writing in a second or foreign language (L2) is based on conclusions drawn from research on L2 writing in English. However, a significant quantity of L2 writing and writing instruction takes place in languages other than English and so there is a need for studies that look beyond English. The chapters in this book focus on languages other than English and investigate curricular issues, multiple languages in contact/conflict in L2 writing instruction and student attitudes toward pedagogical practices. The collection as a whole makes a valuable contribution to the study of L2 writing, and it will also prove an essential resource for instructors of second and foreign language writing.
Learning and teaching writing online by
This volume explores the challenges facing practitioners in higher education who use online environments and explores strategies for enhancing the experience of learners. The book focuses on online feedback, collaboration, and course design.
The Power of Writing by
At the 1966 Dartmouth Seminar, scholars gathered to debate the direction of English Studies in the academy. This debate had far-reaching effects and arguably forever changed writing instruction in the United States. To commemorate the 45th anniversary of this gathering, Dartmouth College hosted an event both celebrating the past and looking toward the future. Then as now, there is this simple truth: writing well matters, and it matters in institutions of higher education across disciplines. Yet what it means to be a good writer in the academy and in the public sphere remains a site of controversy and discussion. The Power of Writing: Dartmouth '66 in the Twenty-First Century argues that any discussion of why writing well matters should extend beyond composition and rhetoric scholars to capture the knowledge that outstanding teachers and writers themselves put to work every day. The editors have brought together scholars and public intellectuals (including New York Times best-selling authors David McCullough and Steve Strogatz) from the sciences, social sciences, humanities, and interdisciplinary fields to engage in a dialogue about some of the controversial questions related to writing today. Readers will engage with questions about what it means to write well and how different answers affect the teaching and learning of writing in higher education. Each anchor article--representing disciplines as varied as musicology, African studies, mathematics, and history--receives responses from Dartmouth faculty and nationally renowned faculty members in writing studies programs. This timely and wide-ranging collection will have appeal far beyond writing instructors and is specifically designed for readers across disciplines.
The quick fix guide to academic writing by
Whether you’re writing a paper, essay, assignment, or dissertation, this short and punchy book helps you improve your writing skills through minimal effort. Providing you with a quick set of writing rules to follow, this tried and tested guide uses a unique and easy to follow grid-based system. Packed with advice on understanding (big and little) common errors made in academic writing, it helps you identify patterns in your own writing and demonstrates how to reshape or re-evaluate them - and raise your writing game in any academic context. How-to tutorials include: • Synthesizing and critiquing literature – and using your coding sheet to develop critical arguments • Shaping abstracts, introductions, discussions, and conclusions – to improve the logic and structure of your writing • ...
Reading, Research, and Writing by
The research paper has become so ingrained in higher education that its benefits are assumed to be self-evident, but the connection between student writing and learning is not always clear. Educators frequently discuss the lack of critical thinking demonstrated in undergraduate research papers, but it may not be that students will not invest in writing assignments—it’s possible that many cannot with the educational support currently provided.Through theory and examples, and with ACRL’s Framework for Information Literacy for Higher Education integrated throughout, Reading, Research, and Writing: Teaching Information Literacy with Process-Based Research Assignments shows just how difficult research assignments can be for novice learners, and offers concrete plans and approaches for building assignments that enhance student learning. In six chapters—including a final chapter on turning theory into practice—Reading, Research, and Writing is an in-depth, interdisciplinary look at the literature in rhetoric and composition studies, reading comprehension, cognitive psychology, education theory, and library and information science that captures what academic librarians and their teaching faculty collaborators should know about reading and writing to improve undergraduate writing-from-sources assignments. The implications for such an understanding include improving students’ motivation to research, analyze, and synthesize information at a deeper level; improving librarians’ ability to influence effective assignment design among teaching faculty; and opening new avenues of meaningful formative assessment in library instruction.Information literacy and writing-from-sources are important skills for college graduates who leave formal education to be professionals and, hopefully, lifelong learners. Librarians must examine the broader picture that their piece fits within and work across disciplines to produce truly literate—and therefore information-literate—college graduates.
Second Language Creative Writers by
This book elicits L2 creative writers' own perspectives of their life histories through the form of interviews and think-aloud story writing sessions, and investigates the writers' emerging writing processes. It integrates socioculturalist L2 identity studies with the typically cognitivist process-oriented L2 writing research.
Teaching Information Literacy and Writing Studies by
This volume, edited by Grace Veach, explores leading approaches to teaching information literacy and writing studies in upper-level and graduate courses. Contributors describe cross-disciplinary and collaborative efforts underway across higher education, during a time when "fact" or "truth" is less important than fitting a predetermined message. Topics include: working with varied student populations, teaching information literacy and writing in upper-level general education and disciplinary courses, specialized approaches for graduate courses, and preparing graduate assistants to teach information literacy.
Transitions in writing by
Transitions in Writing explores the writer's experience of managing new demands in a range of settings and contexts, from both macro- and micro perspectives.
A Troubleshooting Guide for Writers: Strategies and Process by
A Troubleshooting Guide for Writers is a compendium of strategies for handling all aspects of writing, from prewriting through editing. Designed for use independently by students as a resource book or as an in-class text, A Troubleshooting Guide for Writers helps students discover specific strategies for improving their writing processes and for solving specific writing problems. Known for its concise, effective coverage and student-friendly style, A Troubleshooting Guide for Writers offers an exceptional variety of writing strategies for students.
Writing and Reading Across the Curriculum by
Remaining one of the best-selling interdisciplinary composition texts for over twenty-five years, Writing and Reading Across the Curriculum helps readers learn to write effectively for college.
Writing development in struggling learners : understanding the needs of writers across the lifecourse by
This volume highlights writing development and its relation to other cognitive domains, such as language and reading, for individuals who struggle to acquire writing proficiency, including those with specific learning disorders (SLD; e.g., dyslexia, dysgraphia, and specific language impairment) which affect writing skills (e.g., handwriting, composition). Writing and writing development are presented from a transnational perspective with an integrated focus on conceptualizing writing as a developmental process.
